Audio

137: How To Get Free Traffic And Sales To An Ecommerce Store With Neil Patel

137: How To Get Free Traffic And Sales To An Ecommerce Store With Neil Patel

Today, I’m excited to have the Neil Patel on the show. I’ve actually been following Neil for quite some time. In fact, I remember when I first discovered him back in 2008, I dropped him a comment on his main blog which was QuickSprout at the time.

In fact, just for fun I actually went back through my archives to check. I emailed him on September 19, 2008 about his post on 10 timeless business tips. And he replied in like 10 seconds, checked out my blog and actually gave me some tips.

Anyway, Neil is the founder of many multi million dollar companies like Crazy Egg, Hello Bar and Kissmetrics. He’s helped tons of companies like Amazon, NBC, HP etc.. Grow their revenue. He’s been doing this since he was 16 years old and he’s one of the foremost experts in online marketing.

What You’ll Learn

  • The traffic sources Neil would start with for an ecommerce store
  • How to run a successful ecommerce store blog
  • The keys to content marketing
  • The optimal posting schedule
  • Neil’s strategy for ranking a store in search.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

ReferralCandy.com – If you’re already getting steady orders every month, adding a refer-a-friend program to your store can give you a new sales channel. And ReferralCandy is the best in the business. Click here and get a FREE $50 credit towards your account.
referral candy

Transcript

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast, the place where I bring on successful bootstrapped business owners and delve deeply into what strategies are working and what strategies are not with their businesses. Now I’m Steve Chou, and today we are talking with Neil Patel the founder of Crazy Egg, Hello Bar, and Kissmetrics. Now in this episode you’ll learn the keys to running a successful ecommerce blog, and how to generate free traffic to your online businesses.

Now before we begin I want to give a shout out to sitelock.com for being a sponsor of the show, and as an ecommerce business owner your website is your business. But very few people protect their websites, and on average it takes 197 days for retailers to detect a data breach. Yes, that’s 197 days before you realize that your customer’s data has been stolen. Now you can prevent data breaches with SiteLock website security.

Now SiteLock offers a comprehensive suite of cloud based website security solutions for ecommerce businesses of all sizes and budgets. From malware scanning and removal to industry leading web application firewalls, SiteLock has you and your customers covered. So visit sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob for more information, and get your first three months free. Once again that’s sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob.

And if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email. Now onto the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m excited to have Neil Patel on the show. Now I have actually been following Neil for quite some time, and in fact I remember when I first discovered him back in 2008. I dropped him a comment on his main blog which was Quick Sprout at the time.

And just for fun actually I went back through my email archives to check, I mailed him on September 19th 2008 about his post on 10 timers business tips. And he actually replied in less than a minute, checked on my blog at the time and actually replied with some tips. Anyways Neil is the founder of many multimillion dollar companies like Crazy Egg, Hello Bar, and Kissmetrics.

He’s helped a ton of companies like Amazon, NBC, HP etcetera grow their revenue, and he’s been doing this since he was 16 years old. And he is one of the four most experts in online marketing. And with that welcome to the show Neil, how are you doing today man?

Neil: I’m doing good, how are you?

Steve: I am doing good. You know Neil you are really well known online, but before we kind of begin with the gist of the interview, I was just curious what your story was and how you got started with online marketing in the first place.

Neil: Sure, so think of it this way, back in the day I started a website. It was a job I would call Advice Monkey. And I thought when you pop up a website it naturally gets traffic; little did I know I was wrong, I learned that really quickly. I learned what SEO was, I paid a few companies, I got ripped off, got no results.

Through my frustration and from being broke I did not rest but to learn how to do marketing. And funny enough I got better at the marketing part than actually creating online business.

Steve: But you started Crazy Egg, right? Did Quick Sprout come first or did Crazy Egg?

Neil: Neither, Crazy Egg came before Quick Sprout I believe, but before that it was Advice Monkey then which doesn’t exist anymore. Then ACS which was ad agency that we owned, Crazy Egg came out of the ad agency.

Steve: Okay, I think that was the email address that you emailed me from actually, ACS something online or whatever?

Neil: ACSSEO.com.

Steve: Yeah, that’s the one, that’s the one, crazy, this is back in 2008, right?

Neil: Yeah, and the ad agency is no more ad agency, right.

Steve: So where do you focus your time now?

Neil: Honestly just emails, meetings, phone calls, blogging. My life is very boring, it’s just meetings and emails.

Steve: So no more — are you involved in those other companies anymore that you started?

Neil: I am, we have an awesome team that helps out. I do work for all of them, but you have to keep in mind like I’m answering emails for those companies, right? Like it’s really weird when someone would be like, hey we want to partner up? I’m like okay let’s jump on a call or it could be a sales [inaudible 00:04:38] like a big corporation might say, hey we have XYZ customers, we want to see if we can work out a deal with you or maybe, but it’s just my life revolves around my email inbox.

Steve: So it’s less dated A stuff more like strategic and then partnerships and deals, that sort of thing?

Neil: That’s correct yes.

Steve: Okay, and what were kind of some of the first set of experiences that set you off on this journey. Like why did you even start the advice site?

Neil: The Advice Monkey site?

Steve: Mm-hmm.

Neil: I was trying to find a job and I couldn’t find one. So I went, I created a job board because when I was browsing monster.com I realized they are publicly trading company making hundreds of millions of dollars. I’m like if I make 1% of what they make, I’ll be rich.

Steve: Okay, and then that kind of evolved into Crazy Egg, and then after you started Crazy Egg you decided that you wanted to teach others?

Neil: Well so we had — Advice Monkey failed miserably, got to marketing, started ad agency or internet marketing agency whatever you want to call it, started blogging at that point. I was using blogging because I didn’t have enough money to pay advertising like let me see I can generate customers through blogging. First blog was for an advertising, it was technically 100 top blog, did well, I got tired of blogging and marketing, created Quick Sprout which was on personal branding at the time.

And then I started writing again on marketing on Quick Sprout and I realized that I loved marketing, so it was like a full circle, I don’t why I gave up on product advertising. When I gave that blog away I literally just gave it away, it was getting over a hundred thousand unique visitors a month.

Steve: Crazy, so what is the goal with neilpatel.com then?

Neil: So Quick Sprout we are building a software that helps people with their online marketing initiatives and it tries automating everything. Not marketing automation like you are thinking like a Hubspot or Marketo, but more marketing automation like, oh we noticed these SEO errors boom, we just automatically fix them. Now the software won’t do all those kind of things at the beginning, but eventually we want to get there. And it will do that for all types of different marketing campaigns, social media, SEO, content marketing etcetera.

And the problem when you create companies from a blog, and it’s not attached to your name, eventually but sells or something happens I hope not, but if it does I won’t have a blog anymore, right? That’s mine. So creating neilpatel.com, and I should have used neilpatel.com first, but I didn’t own the domain name.

Steve: Really?

Neil: And eventually I was able to get the domain name. Now I’m trying to get patel.com, but the guy who wants to sell it, I offered 150 grand and…

Steve: That’s crazy.

Neil: He won’t sell it, and he does nothing with it.

Steve: So obviously neilpatel.com is not a site that you are ever going to sell, right?

Neil: Exactly, and that’s why I started the blog there. But with Neil Patel I do a lot more experiments. My latest experiment is international expansion to see how well it does and so far so good. I would say within the next two months I’ll get more traffic in Brazil than I will in United States.

Steve: So talk about with international expansion what do you mean? Specifically targeting other countries as opposed to the US?

Neil: Yeah, so I write content in English which is regarding the people who are online. I know people like oh more people speak mandarin etcetera, but you know why if you look at most of content published on the web it is in English.

Steve: That’s correct.

Neil: And when you think about the overall numbers, majority of the population doesn’t speak English as a primary language. So we started expanding into different languages. Right now we have Portuguese; we are going heavy into Spanish, heavy into German. We are slowly studying Italian, we are going into Arabic within the next 30 days, and we are also going to French in the next 30 days.

Steve: I assume this is not just like with Google translate; you are actually really translating it with humans, right?

Neil: I have a team of translators; I think we are like 55.

Steve: Crazy, okay.

Neil: We are cracking out roughly 250,000, 300,000 words per week.

Steve: That is nuts, okay. So Neil a lot of my listeners are in ecommerce, they sell physical products online. So I thought it would be interesting today to kind of get your perspective on how to get traffic and sales to an ecommerce store. And just to make this a little bit more difficult, let’s talk about this from the perspective of let’s say me starting an online store selling something very difficult like jewelry or t-shirt or something like that. What traffic sources would you personally experiment with at first, and what would be your main focus assuming that you have very limited resources?

Neil: Yeah, if it was me the first traffic source that I would go with is social media. So if I was selling like t-shirts, I would go and just try to get free shirts to people on Instagram, have them wear and post a picture and talk about my site. It’s branding, it does extremely well. If it was MVNT watches, movement watches, those guys I believe they are doing over $10 million in our Shopify store. They generate a ton of sales by getting people to just talk about it.

Steve: So watches, do they give those away as well? Like how would you — let’s say they are too expensive to give away.

Neil: But watches are affordable, their watches don’t cost a lot of money to make.

Steve: Okay.

Neil: But in general most ecommerce products if you look at unless you are selling TVs they are pretty affordable to give away, right? It’s like 5, 10 bucks; it’s cheaper than paying for ads. If someone has 500,000 followers, they post about it, that’s a pretty good deal. If you get that in quantity, it really adds up after all.

Steve: So you would go and you would reach out to bloggers and instagramers?

Neil: I have already yes.

Steve: And how does one do that on Instagram for example?

Neil: You direct message people.

Steve: Okay and how would you frame that reach out email or letter?

Neil: I would just say, hey I’m so and so with X, Y and Z Company; I love your Instagram profile and what you are doing. I want to see if we can send you a free t-shirt if you like, and feel free to post a picture of you in it.

Steve: Okay and with no obligation they — you give them the option of posting or not, right?

Neil: Yeah you talk to them like, oh I’d be interested what kind of t-shirt? If they just say okay what’s the address? I would say like hey this is what it is, do you think you’ll like it, would you be interested in posting about it. And I try to like dive into that deeper, because if they don’t ask any questions, they are just going take the free t-shirt and they won’t care to post about it.

Steve: I see, and what is the typical hit rate when you do something like this?

Neil: Typical hit rate…

Steve: Like what would be a good hit rate?

Neil: If you message out a hundred people you get 10 people you’re doing very well. Five on the low end, 15 on the high end.

Steve: Okay and let’s say some of these people do take these shirts and then they post on Instagram, you get a short burst, right? But eventually that dies down, right? Does that imply then you have to constantly be doing this or?
Neil: Well if you do it for six months straight you actually build up a big brand and then it becomes a trend.

Steve: Okay. So let’s say you don’t have the budget to be giving a whole bunch of these away, what would be your next thing that you might think about trying?

Neil: Sure I would look at SEO, SEO works. It’s long-term for ecommerce, but the strategy I would do is go and go find and use Atrust.com, see who links up to my competition and beg him for links.

Steve: So that implies that you are starting some sort of blog then for your ecommerce store?

Neil: that’s correct.

Steve: Okay because in a traditional ecommerce store it’s just products and categories and there is not a whole lot of content on there, right?

Neil: That’s correct.

Steve: Okay so every ecommerce store in your opinion should have some sort of blog even if it’s just physical products?

Neil: It makes it much more easy, but again you can get people to link back to you even if you don’t have like content, right? You can get people to link back to the actual stocks. You go to Atrust you’ll see everyone who links to your competition. And most of them don’t have products. I mean most don’t have content, because ecommerce sites very few people actually have blogs, so modeling the bigger guys do, smaller guys not so much.

Steve: Yeah so how do some of those guys get those back links, like what are some your strategies to build back links?

Neil: Yeah, let’s say you had a blog and you are linking out two, three ecommerce sites an article. I would be, hey Steve I notice you linked out to X, Y and Z ecommerce site, have you also checked our ABNC site? It covers this, this and the other that those other sites don’t cover. You should check it out, and I think you’ll just love it. If you like it yourself, you are free to link to it, cheers Neil.

It’s that simple. If you could get five out of every 100 emails that you send out to link back to you, you are doing a good job. With cold emails it’s not like Instagram where you can get a much higher ratio.

Steve: Interesting so you go through Atrust, find out which people are linking to the competitors, reach out to those guys and then post and ask them if they’ll update the post with your store?

Neil: That’s correct.

Steve: Interesting, and the hit rate you said like a good hit rate would be like 5% based on what you just said?

Neil: Yup, sheer numbers game.

Steve: Okay, so basically all these tactics are based on like good old leg work is what it sounds like.

Neil: That’s correct.

Steve: Okay, do you contract this stuff out when you do your outreach?

Neil: I used to, but I don’t even do the outreach anyone. It still works, it’s just I don’t really do much of the outreach.

Steve: Okay and in terms…

Neil: Also keep in mind that I’ve been around for so long that I’ve so many links I don’t even really need to have.

Steve: Yeah I know you don’t need to do it anymore. I was hoping that you could take it from the perspective of you having nothing though, you know what I’m saying?

Neil: Yeah, so for example I have a buddy named Tim. Tim sells financial products like ecommerce site, digital products like DVDs like physical DVDs, like he is mailing to you right, but it’s digital. And we do the same thing, we hire this guy and– what’s his name? Is it Anderson, he is a good guy. And he ends up charging $4 an hour, for roughly every 100 people that he emails he is getting around like 3.7 to link back. His English isn’t the best, but it’s not bad.

Steve: No way, okay and this is just random cold emails to people?

Neil: Yeah, but in quantity like sending out like thousands and thousands per week.

Steve: Okay, I was just — I get those like every day and I never read them, but I guess there is always going to be some people out there.

Neil: Yeah, how many people don’t know what you know?

Steve: I guess so, okay interesting.

Neil: Plus how many people are willing to link, it’s crazy.

Steve: Does it matter what quality of publication, like do you have some sort of filtering process?

Neil: No just a relevant site that doesn’t spammy.

Steve: Okay so it doesn’t matter, interesting. Let’s talk a little bit about the blogging aspect because I’ve read a whole bunch of your stuff about just content marketing, and you are definitely one of the experts out there.

How would you run a successful e-commerce store blog, because I see a bunch of e-commerce store blogs out there? All they do is they write about their deals and monthly reports, and I don’t really care about that stuff, so how would you structure yours?

Neil: My e-commerce blog?

Steve: Yes.

Neil: I would write on anything that is educational for people, like okay I know this is crazy and probably not the right thing, but this is what comes to my mind, because I was teaching my niece how to wipe her bum in my– we’re getting party drinks. I’m like, I don’t know if this is true, but there is probably a right way to use toilet paper wrongly, but you sell bathroom supplies, why not have a whole article on like how to make your toilet paper last longer.

That sounds crazy, but probably well, I seriously would, right. I know this sounds crazy, but it’s like educational, informational. It applies to almost every single person in the world other than babies.

Steve: When you come up with topics to blog about, is it very deliberate? For example do you do keyword research on a title before you blog about it, or do you just blog about something that you feel might be interesting without even taking that into consideration?

Neil: I just write anything that I think people will really love like that’s the deliberate part, and I make sure it is relevant to my business. Like think about the topic I just gave you, it sounds crazy right, would you agree with that?

Steve: It does, yes.

Neil: I bet it would go viral.

Steve: Interesting, so you’re going for virility as opposed to search?

Neil: Yes, because virility usually means it’s more relevant to people, I’m just helping them out. The other thing that I do for e-commerce I’m going for search traffic. I go to Quota, and I have taken all questions related to the products I’m selling, because then you see the most common ones sorted by votes, and then I write articles with those questions as a headline, and you find that you get a lot of search traffic after 6 to like months, maybe a year max, but it usually takes 6 months plus.

Steve: Interesting, so without building links you would find that these articles will just naturally rank?

Neil: Yeah because it’s really helpful, when people are typing questions and there is not enough good content that has answers.

Steve: You mentioned like you solicit for back links. Are you soliciting for back links to your store or to relevant posts, like you have to be selective, right?

Neil: Yeah, for team we just do it to the store.

Steve: To the store, the front page or category pages or…

Neil: It depends, if someone is linking to like people are selling financial products, then they’ll just link to his own page, but if someone is linking to training videos and they are selling a lot of them, and they have links to 5 other courses then you would be like, “Oh check out this course, it would be very valuable, here you go.” The cool part is one thing that we have seen that helps increase your ratio if you give him a discount code or a coupon code for their readers.

Steve: Do you, so this friend since we have been talking about him, does he have like a back end funnel as well for sales?

Neil: He does, yeah he has a whole sales team.

Steve: Okay, and so is the goal then to get them on this funnel, or is the goal for this just to get the sale right away typically?

Neil: A sale right away.

Steve: A sale right away, okay.

Neil: Yeah, because if they don’t get a sale then the back end funnel doesn’t work.

Steve: Since we are on the topic of links, what is your view of buying links these days, because I still notice like it seems pretty obvious to me like when I read an article on certain large publications that these links, it just seems a little suspicious to me, and so is that still going on and what is your view on that?

Neil: Yeah, with the buying links it’s still going on. It’s not as effective as it used to be. I’m not a fan, I think it is too short sighted, but people do it. I believe if you can create a good product or service, naturally others will just want to link to you.

Steve: Okay, and so back on that topic of what we were talking about with that blog post. I mean obviously the headlines are very important, right?

Neil: The headline is very important, yes.

Steve: What you just suggested had a really catchy headline, but it didn’t really take into account any SEO keywords, sorry or maybe it did, I don’t know, but do you try and mix the 2 like when you are trying to decide the title tag for example, what is your criteria?

Neil: Something that is appealing and it will get quixed [ph] because people love it. I don’t go for ranking on equipment title types.

Steve: So you don’t purposely try to incorporate search terms I guess?

Neil: Eventually yes, once they start ranking, then I will go on to Google search console, you choose your e-commerce site. Once you click on your profile, you click on searching the navigation, then search analytics which is also on the left navigation. If you want to check 3 boxes, clicks, impressions, position, and the default things that they show you is the keywords, then how many clicks you are getting for how many impressions, and your position.

You want to look for a position 5 or lower, better than 10, and you want to look for a low click through rate. A click through because they also have a CTR box, you can check that as well. I look for a CTR box, CTR ratio, that’s below like 3 or 4%.

Now what you want to do is make sure when you adjust these title tags, those keywords in that title tag, it’s really appealing where people want to click on it, and it’s short and to the point roughly 6 words. So when you do that your rankings will start going up, because your click through rate is higher.

If you can increase your click through rate higher than the person above you, what does it tell Google? It’s hey everyone is clicking on the number 6 result, instead on the 5th result. Well, oh, maybe we should put number 6 before 5, right, that’s what happens all the time.

Steve: going back a little bit, you mentioned that your title should have 6 words in it?

Neil: We roughly do 6 words titles. We found that it gets more clicks, I don’t know why, but that’s from the data we analyzed. It can have more or less, but you don’t want to have like 20 words in there.

Steve: Interesting, can you give me an example of one of your best articles that’s 6 words in the headline?

Neil: Let’s see, they are not always right, but okay one is on quicksprout.com, the beginner’s guide to online marketing, links number one for online marketing in the US, and in different regions. I think Dublin I’m number one as well, Canada I think I’m number one too.

Steve: 6 words just doesn’t seem like a lot, but this is based on the data that you have gathered for your sites, right?

Neil: Yeah, I’m not saying don’t do more. You can do like 7, 8 it’s not a big deal, it doesn’t affect that much Google, 6 is just a general rule of thumb. You don’t want to go 10 because if you start going too many it is going to get cut off, so somebody is going to read your title tag and they won’t be able to see it all.

Steve: So once you post your article, is there anything special that you do to promote it?

Neil: What we do is we go to search.twitter.com, or technically we go to basumo.com.

Steve: Basumo, okay.

Neil: Type in the keywords relevant to our space in that article, see the most popular ones, then we click view shares on Basumo, and this is if you have a paid account, it shows you all the people who clicked out. If you don’t have a paid account, take that URL; go to search.twitter.com, put in that URL for free. They show you all the people that tweeted it out, reach out to them, and letting them know that, “Hey I noticed you tweeted out X, Y and Z article, other similar one coming out, let me know if you want to check it out.”

Then a lot of people will say yes, and then they will share it. If you get like 15-30% of the people tweeting it out, you are doing all right. For me I’m averaging somewhere in the 27, it is above 25%, it is below 30%, a ratio of people who tweet it out from the people that you know.

Steve: Do you think people are tweeting it out because you are you?

Neil: That’s why I’m saying I have ratio for getting above 15, it works well, but I have done it with people I have known in the industry.

Steve: What do they get?

Neil: Usually under 20%, but above 15.

Steve: Interesting, so when you put out a publication or an article, do you have any criteria for it in terms of comprehensiveness, in terms of length and that sort of thing to encourage people to tweet it?

Neil: At least 2000 words which means that is a thorough article, actionable with insights. You have an intro, you have a body with headings, sub headings, you have a conclusion. That makes it easier for people to scheme it without reading it, attractive headline. 8 out of 10 people will read your headline, only 2 out of 10 will read the rest of the article, so we try to make the headline really appealing.

Once we do that we go out there, reach out to people and try to get them to share. We also look at the space, like we go to Basumo before hand, before we are writing which is being as we want to know everyone who’s written an article that has done well, and we make sure our article is more thorough, and better, and higher in quality.

Steve: Okay, and so that encourages sharing?

Neil: That’s correct.

Steve: Okay, so really there is a lot of pieces to this, right?

Neil: Yeah people don’t want to share crap, would you?

Steve: No, absolutely not. In fact if I got a solicitation to tweet something, I almost never do actually which is why I’m asking.

Neil: Yeah, but you are not the average person, most people don’t mind. If you tweet our article that says 10 ways to greater e-commerce sales, and I email you and saying, “Hey I have another article called a 101 ways to greater e-commerce sales, would you be interested in checking it out?’

Steve: I want to take a moment to thank ReferralCandy for being a sponsor of the show. Now in this day and age word of mouth is a huge driver of business for most e-commerce stores, and the best way to amplify word of mouth marketing is through a referral program, and this is where ReferralCandy shines.

With just a couple of clicks of the mouse you can add a referral program to your e-commerce store, and reward your customers for telling their friends about your shop, and this tactic works wonders. In fact it is not uncommon to get a ridiculous return on investment.

For example Greats Footwear who is a ReferralCandy customer is currently seeing a 20X ROI. Referral word mouth marketing is also useful for building up your social media presence as well, because everyone is talking about your company with their friends on Facebook, and Twitter.

The best part is that ReferralCandy is a set it and forget it service, requires no technical set up, and they are giving My Wife Quit Her Job listeners 50 bucks to try them out if you go to promo.referralcandy.com/Steve. Once again it’s promo.referralcandy.com/Steve to get a $50 credit to try out the service risk free, now back to the show.

I will definitely check it out, but if I didn’t know who the person was, my suspicious radar always goes off.

Neil: Okay, but if you don’t know who the person was and you checked it out, and it was really thorough and amazing, would you tweet it out?

Steve: I would probably tweet it because that is a low barrier, right. I would be a little more hesitant to share it on my Facebook.

Neil: Exactly, that’s why we ask for the tweet.

Steve: I see, okay so you are just asking for tweets.

Neil: Yeah, never ask for the shares. It is too hard to get the share.

Steve: Okay that covers tweets, but do tweets get a lot of traffic for your stuff?

Neil: It does.

Steve: Interesting.

Neil: I think for the last 30 days, July I was like 30 something thousand visitors from Twitter.

Steve: What is your greatest source of traffic?

Neil: Google then Facebook.

Steve: Google just SEO organic?

Neil: Aha.

Steve: Okay, and so for the Facebook traffic …

Neil: Google, email, then Facebook, then Twitter.

Steve: For the Facebook stuff that implies people are sharing your stuff on there, right?

Neil: I also have a proper Facebook page, I have like 300,000 plus fans.

Steve: Okay, there is so many ways you can go with this, so the Facebook page, how did you build it up to so many fans over the years?

Neil: I have a strong brand, I don’t think it’s that easy to replicate, but the real reason my Facebook fan page does really well is because the brand speaking of competence, and then I do a ton of paid advertising on Facebook. I probably spend like 50 or 60 grand to build up the fan page.

I have high engagement, like people look at some of my posts, like oh it gets like 50 shares or 100, 200 shares, some of them get post scale like 3, 4, 500 shares. Images sometimes can get well over a 1000, but what they don’t notice is I have fans in different regions.

For example I have over 100,000 fans in Brazil, you yourself will never see it because you probably don’t speak Portuguese, so posts in Portuguese are only seen by people in Brazil, posts from an English blog are only seen by people who speak English, so my fan page is segmented out. My Portuguese posts tend to get more engaged with my English posts, like more likes, more shares, and more comments.

Steve: Interesting, in terms of actual revenue though, do you find that you are making proportionally more money from your Portuguese people?

Neil: No, by far I’m making more money in English, but it’s adding up. I would say within, it’s going to take a while, but I would say within 2 and a half to 3 years the Portuguese blog will generate more value than the English version.

Steve: For your fan page, are you just posting your own stuff, or do you just post any article that you might find interesting?

Neil: Own stuff or shit about me, it’s one or the other, like in one of my interview I did on Chris [inaudible 00:28:35].com, amazing guy, I loved the interview I did with him. I also love the content that he has on his blog, he is a good chill guy, I shared it. It got him extra 120 likes, 11 shares, and 20,000 people reach. It wasn’t bad at all, it was pretty good.

Steve: No, that’s pretty good

Neil: Especially because Facebook kept screwing up their algorithm. Before they did this I was getting like 200 plus likes.

Steve: Yeah, they keep downing it down lower and lower, so you got to pay for it, right?

Neil: Yeah, and I don’t want to pay for it because paying for likes is like come on Facebook.

Steve: Are you still paying for likes, or do you actually just boost articles or whatever and then get the likes from there?

Neil: No I really pay for likes, I don’t like boosting articles.

Steve: Interesting, so what is the rationale for doing that as opposed to posts?

Neil: I don’t like paying per play, I like paying to build up platform or audience that you can keep leveraging, because if you run out of money at least you can keep going back to the same well.

Steve: Even if that well is constantly getting lower and lower percentage of visibility?

Neil: That’s correct, yes because if you look at the algorithm, the articles that are really good, they still get a ton of play. Even if they reduce the visibility, if something was supposed to go viral, it’s still going viral, and it’s still getting a ton of natural likes and shares.

Steve: Interesting, how much do you pay per like if I might ask?

Neil: Which region?

Steve: Let’s do US because that’s where most of the listeners are.

Neil: A dollar per like, I usually don’t do much advertising in the US though.

Steve: I see.

Neil: Unless in the B to B category. Brazil I’m paying on for a really good like around 11 cents, a shitty like around 3 cents. I don’t optimize for numbers, I would like to optimize for engagement. How can you get the least amount of likes and get the most comments, likes on your shares or on your personal shares, because it increases your idling scores which is their algorithm. If you have less fans but you have way more engagement, it’s much more likely to go viral and for Facebook to show it to other people.

Steve: Interesting okay, so buying likes a dollar per likes sounds really expensive. So that’s probably why you don’t do it.

Neil: B to B category yes, but keep in mind some of my customers are worth over a million bucks [inaudible 00:30:40] on B to B, B to C probably not.

Steve: Right okay, so we talked a little bit about ranking a store in search. Are there any things that you care to talk about in terms of what is working, in terms of search engine optimization today?

Neil: The biggest thing that’s working in search engine optimization today is brand building. People don’t go and say, I want to buy this for like protein powder or making a program as an example.

Steve: Sure.

Neil: A lot of times they just go to Amazon and they type in protein powder.

Steve: Yeah.

Neil: And if you notice the companies with the strongest brands, they’ll just kidnap you the most back links, not just the most talked about the most but they are also ranked highly why? Because when people are searching for stuff and they see Amazon and Google search, they click on Amazon list and view the pack if they know it’s Amazon.

Yeah you are not going to create a stronger brand as Amazon, it’s really hard, but you can still create a strong brand within your space, like the reason neilpatel.com ranks so well, I have a strong brand. 18,000 plus people a month click on neilpatel.com by googling my name each month. That’s how many people search, that’s how many people click, right? That’s pretty good for a personal brand.

Steve: No it’s excellent. So when it comes to — since you mention Amazon, when it comes to Amazon versus your own store what would be your strategy there for trying to stand out. Like have your listing stand out over Amazon? Because obviously you make more money if someone buys directly on your site.

Neil: It’s hard. My buddy has a [inaudible 00:32:21] supplements. He was telling me how he keeps making more money; we were going over his numbers yesterday. His Amazon numbers and he is on ecommerce site. He is like damn it, like Amazon is growing faster than a normal site, yeah it should be.

And he is like why do you think so? I’m like dude the other day I was buying your green powder. They had this vegetable powder that it’s like really help you, you put in water. And he is like, oh you bought it? I’m like yeah I bought it from Amazon; I found it on your site.

And he is like, why don’t you buy it from my site? I’m like oh Amazon has prime shipping. And he is just like you really go to Amazon to buy; I’m like yeah I do it for everything. And he is just like — he started laughing. He is like I actually do the same thing too when I find — I go to Amazon to buy, I’m like that’s the problem, that’s consumer behavior in ecommerce.

Steve: So does that imply then that you would focus most of your efforts on Amazon then if you are an ecommerce guy?

Neil: I would do both, but I would actually focus more on Amazon than my own site, but I would do both. I would probably do like 60% Amazon, 40% focus on my own site.

Steve: Interesting. Just to chase the money now I guess the cash flow money, I don’t know I just seem — I feel like Amazon, they keep changing the rules and it’s kind of like a slippery slope, you know what I mean?

Neil: Not necess– yes but that’s with everything, Google does the same thing, Facebook does the same thing, you have to adapt as a business. The beautiful part about them changing the rules is it eliminates competition too. So the way I see it is if you can build up your own site and your own audience you can use that for Amazon.

When I was talking to my buddy, I’m not going to name his site. It could be [inaudible 00:33:53] it could be someone else; it could be the financial guy. But when they sell stuff on Amazon and they got a ton of bad reviews because people are screwing up their listing, they just do an email blast, and they are usually– it’s like look some people are giving us bad reviews, here are the best ones, upload them, right?

Steve: Sure.

Neil: And it helps like people like him would do better on Amazon because they are doing both, because they are able to leverage their website audience for Amazon as well.

Steve: So I have talked to a couple of other guys who sell mostly on Amazon, and what they do is they take their email list and they blast out for people to go buy their products on Amazon as opposed to their own site. How would you feel about that if you were running things?

Neil: I wouldn’t mind with that, I’ve tested it and I have found that it converts better on Amazon. The other thing that we used to do is when you do the Amazon, we would put in their like you score on Amazon. You search for a keyword that relates to your product, then you scroll all the way down to find your product. Click on it and then when you do the email blast and when people buy, your ranking will sky rocket. They’ve changed it, well it doesn’t work anymore, but that worked really well.

Steve: Yeah that used to work in the past, I think they don’t count that anymore. But you can tell someone to go on Amazon, do a search and then click on your product and then buy it, and that still works.

Neil: Yeah but it doesn’t convert as well, because it’s hard to get people to do that.

Steve: Interesting, so you would probably focus more on Amazon sales as opposed to your own site?

Neil: That’s correct.

Steve: Okay and then in the long-term there is no repercussions for doing that?

Neil: Not that I know.

Steve: Okay, that’s interesting.

Neil: All the businesses I have, I know companies who do $60 million a year in ecommerce sales, and they focus more on Amazon than their own ecommerce site, and they are still doing well, big companies.

Steve: And in terms of PPC what would you use?

Neil: I would use Google AdWords, I would use some Facebook ads, Facebook ads would be number three. Google AdWords and Google shopping or shopping bids number one, handling it all together. Number two is Amazon paid ads. Number three would be Facebook.

Steve: Okay and in terms of Facebook ads, so let’s say for Google let’s say we are selling t-shirts or something. That in general is not conducive to an AdWords ad because the keywords are really competitive, right? So how do you kind of structure your campaigns for that example?

Neil: Wait for AdWord ads or you are saying–

Steve: AdWords yeah no, not shopping but just AdWord ads.

Neil: Yeah people typing in if I’m selling computers like a specific type of laptop, I’ll just hit on them and send it to my site.

Steve: Yes but those keywords will tend to be extremely expensive, right?

Neil: Yeah but landing pages are optimized for conversions, you are fine. And you can use sites like [inaudible 00:36:41] I think it’s called that. And it shows you like other ecommerce case studies, and it talks about people improving their conversions, stuff like you do all that stuff then you should get good results.

Steve: So it’s your belief that if you run your campaigns effectively you can make AdWords work for any demographic or any type of products?

Neil: Almost yes.

Steve: Interesting okay. And in terms of your Facebook ads actually when you run for ecommerce, what is your strategy there? Is it for the sale or is it to get them on some sort of funnel?

Neil: No, I first send people to our landing page that breaks down the case study of like what people use the product for, where they did from, and true one not a fake one that people make up.

Steve: Okay.

Neil: Then from there I get them to click through to like our Amazon page where they can buy.

Steve: Okay, and do you entice them with coupons or anything like that?

Neil: No.

Steve: No, okay.

Neil: I hate doing coupons.

Steve: And there are no email signups or anything like that?

Neil: Email signups on the landing page upon exit where they are scrolling away, you capture email.

Steve: Okay cool man, it’s really good to hear this from someone who has just interacted with so many different businesses like all across the board, right? I mean you’ve dabbled with ecommerce businesses, software business all across the board. So I want to switch gears a little bit, I want to talk about your book actually.

Neil: All right.

Steve: What is it called and what’s it going to be about?

Neil: It’s going to be called Hustle, and think of it this way, right now in this day and age everyone feels it’s harder to just succeed. The rich are getting richer, and the people who are the haves are getting everything; the have nots are getting nothing. Would you agree with that?

Steve: Yeah definitely.

Neil: Okay, and what we found is that’s not necessarily the case. I’ve done okay, I’m not saying I’m the richest person, but what did I come with, I was an immigrant. There are still a lot of entrepreneurs these days that are succeeding that have little to nothing to show when they first start. I didn’t have the best education either, and the commonality is when you look at a lot of these things it’s the actions that they take to succeed. In essence we are calling it a hustle.

How can you — well you have to go from point A to point Z, let’s assume Z is success. And it doesn’t have to be financial success I won’t believe you have to go through A, B, C, D and those all these steps. Not necessarily, you can succeed and there is many different ways.

I’m going to give you example of this. In the book we talk about making your own luck. And one of my co-authors, his name is Patrick. His son was Shane was in this like little creek, and they were looking for fish. Patrick looks down and he is like, oh Shane buddy, let’s go home, there is no fish in there.

Shane looks at his dad; he doesn’t say anything, he jumps into the little creek and start shuffling his feet. In essence he manufactured his own luck, and you know what happened when he shuffled his own feet? All these fish started popping up, and he is like oh daddy, look, look at all the fish. We are teaching people you can manufacture your own luck. People aren’t taking the actions to get the results.

Steve: I think this actually ties in well with this podcast interview because a lot of the strategies that you outlined were hustle based, right?

Neil: Yes…

Steve: Doing outreach for back links, doing outreach for tweets and shares, that sort of thing?

Neil: Yeah everyone was telling me, “Neil how do you start an agency and make money?” I was like, “Oh I called Collins. I’m like yeah I called every single person, I was spending a lot on pay per click, just typing random keywords, just Google the most expensive pay per click keywords, then you just go down the list, you Google for it.

Look at people on page 2, and 3 for the paid ads, not on page one, and you just call each and every single person up.” I was calling and be like, “Hey you want more traffic. If I get you results pay me, if I don’t, don’t pay me.” Everyone is like, “You are crazy.” I’m like, “I landed some contracts, they’ll pay me 15 grand a month when I was 16 years old from that. I was just cold calling.”

They are like, “What do you do by your age or any of this,” well objections you hear. I’m like, “I just speak to the phone, I never told anyone my age. I just called. I’m like people think things through too much and they are not willing to take action. You know what it worked, and after that once I started cold calling the business started growing a bit more, and we started building a brand getting inbound increase, I was like, “I want bigger companies.”

I would just go find everyone who is venture funded, these days it’s easier because you can go to Crunchbase, and I would go through all the results of the people recently funded, and I would email out the VC who recently funded them, and I would break down everything that they are doing to screw up their marketing, and I would just give it to him for free in a pedia.

You know what a lot of those people do, they are adventure guy, and then they are just like bored and they would be like, “Hey you should hire this guy, he seems pretty smart.” I got a lot of contracts that’s way.

Steve: Yeah, I don’t want to get into this whole millennial debate because I feel the same way like people just assume that they are entitled to get things without doing the hustle, and without doing the leg work, because I run a class of e-commerce students. They put up the site and they expect sales to come right away, but in the beginning I remember for myself, my online store, I was on the forms pretending to be a woman trying to get people to come back to my site to buy my handkerchiefs, and so a lot of that early work early on is what allowed us to gradually grow.

Neil: Yes, but you know what, you are scrappy, and most people just aren’t willing to put in the effort, but that’s the whole point that we are trying to make out of the book. We are not just trying to say these crappy book going through all the cons, and teaching you how to do exactly what you are doing while I’m doing, and what other people are doing to succeed, because I don’t care if you are rich or poor, you believe you are book smart or you are not, you can succeed if you put in the effort. Yeah you may not be a billionaire, or you may not even be a millionaire, but you will be better off than where you are right now if you use these tactics.

Steve: How do you convince someone to hustle?

Neil: You can’t convince them, they have it in them. They want to have to succeed; they want to have to do better.

Steve: As part of your book is it mostly case studies then, like how are you going to get these people to…

Neil: I want to say case studies, it breaks down like concepts. For example one of the things we break down in the book is how to find your passion. Most people don’t want do anything or hustle or put in the effort, because they don’t know what they want to do in life. We talk about how to find your true passion in life. Most people believe it’s oh I’m born, and I’m growing up, and I know as a kid I wanted to be an astronaut, so that’s what I’m going to be.

When you find out when you are older, what you wanted to be as a kid usually isn’t the same thing, like when you were a little kid, what did you want to be? I’m pretty sure it wasn’t related to selling stuff on the e-commerce or on the internet.

Steve: Absolutely.

Neil: You wanted to be like a doctor, a lawyer or something or…

Steve: Engineer.

Neil: Engineer, all right. I actually wanted to do one too; I also wanted to be doctor.

Steve: Of course, you are Indian.

Neil: There you go, and you are selling stuff on the web, but you know what most people think like, “Oh everyone just knows what they want to do. It doesn’t matter what your age is, you don’t just know what you want to do as you are older.” But as you try things you learn what you don’t want to do and you figure out what you are passion about, and eventually it leads you down the road of this is what I want to do in life. That’s what we teach you in the book, it’s like a trial and error, and we break down the whole process of this is how you figure out what you like and why.

Steve: Cool man, so just backtracking now a little bit, let’s say someone is out there who wants to start a business because they don’t like their job, what is– if you could sum everything up, what would be the best piece of advice for them, that you could give right now.

Neil: Well just do it, go find something you love, go find a problem that you can solve related to what you love, and from that point go and just do it. You may have a lot of questions, how do I start up a business, how do I do this? Figure out on your own. The reason I say that is if you can’t figure out those basic things, you won’t figure out how to succeed because starting up is the easiest part.

Steve: Do you believe that if you are passionate about something you can find some way to monetize it?

Neil: No, not always, because some things are not monitizable and some things shouldn’t be monitizable. I’m also like a hippy in certain ways like it’s almost passion about cancer research, and they figured how to solve cancer, yeah it’s monitizable, but should they monetize it? Hopefully not.

Steve: Okay, and so it does require a certain amount of research.

Neil: Yeah like it does because– what’s a good example of this? If you can create videos and tutorials on how to be a really good knitter okay, yeah you can try to make money selling knitting products, but you can go to YouTube and find so many stuff for free, how can I do it too well?

Steve: But you could probably tie that into some sort of physical product play.

Neil: You can, and that’s a bad example, but the point I’m getting is you are not going to make a lot from that.

Steve: Sure, sure, okay cool man well we have been chatting for 40 minutes, I want to be respectful of your time since you are a busy man. Where can they find you, when is the book coming out, and what conferences are you going be at?

Neil: I believe the book is coming out September 13th, I could be wrong on the date, but I believe it is around 13th. They can find me at neilpatel.com, the next conference I’m at is [inaudible 00:45:54] in Brazil.

Steve: In Brazil? Cool.

Neil: Well because I do it international.

Steve: Really, are you going to be speaking Portuguese or?

Neil: No, it’s funny, last time I was there speaking which was technically a week ago, last week, yeah some week ago I was in Brazil, and I started my speech, and I’m like I was telling them how I love Brazil. I started in Portuguese which I forgot how to say now, and I told them I was going to do my lecture in Portuguese, and they are all excited, and I’m Like, “Just kidding.” But there is always translators there, and so everyone is wearing headphones.

Steve: Oh interesting, okay so they don’t understand you, so someone else is translating on the fly, interesting.

Neil: Yeah because most of conferences that I speak at are international, and almost in all of them there is translators there.

Steve: Actually why is that by the way?

Neil: Like for me it helps me learn more. I know the US market really well. When you go see other random countries that you have never been to, you see the culture, how people interact, how they buy online, the way their society works, and it’s just refreshing and you actually learn a lot, the world doesn’t revolve around the US.

US is a great country, I love it to death, and the opportunities we have. Even our government people complain about it, but if you go to a lot of different regions, it’s hard to set up a business in certain countries, like the US is very pro, entrepreneurship and business. They are helpful in many ways, but you just learn a lot, like culturally on how different things work, and you realize that there are so many opportunities overseas that no one is speaking about.

Steve: Let me ask you this question to close this interview, you are a successful guy, you probably have more money than you know what to do with, so what is your goal from here on out, like what are your projects that you are going to take part in?

Neil: I will start farming, help others out, and that’s really it. I don’t really have an objectives like I got to do this, I got to do that. I just really enjoy blogging, and helping people out. Like when I get an email from a mom who is running a bed and breakfast and cheese, it’s like, “My son had to work at Home Depot, because we couldn’t afford to send him to college and they didn’t want to do loans.

And she’s like now by reading your stuff, my bed and breakfast is like packed all the time. He was able to quit his job, and I was able to send him to college.” That makes me happy. Is she a rich millionaire? No, but impacting that one person’s life for me it’s satisfying.

Steve: I totally know how you feel, yeah after running the class and the blog too, I can totally relate.

Neil: Yeah, it’s an amazing feeling; it’s not about the money. I’m giving away bonuses when people buy my book right now, and I get people even like oh we can’t afford, I’m like, “Here is the bonuses for free.” When they respond back they are like, “Thank you, this has helped change my life.” I’m just happy, I know this sounds crazy, but it’s not about the money, it’s just about helping others.

Steve: Cool man, hey Neil thanks a lot for coming on the show, really appreciate it.

Neil: Thanks for having me.

Steve: All right take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. I’ve actually been a huge fan of Neil for a very long time, and I was thrilled to finally get him on the podcast. The man knows what he is doing, and you have to go and check out some of his monster guides that he has written online.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode 137. Once again I want to thank sitelock.com for sponsoring this episode. Now if you have an e-commerce store, go there right now, and find out how long it takes to load. Does it take more than 5 seconds, and if so did you know that 60% of consumers only wait up to 5 seconds before bouncing from a site, and never making a purchase.

Did you know that at least 68% of shoppers do not return to poorly performing websites? These are huge percentages, and they mean lost revenue and reputation damage for your business. Now with SiteLock Truespeed is state of the art global content delivery network. They can improve your website speed by up to 50%, and reduce bandwidth usage by up to 40 to 70%. For more details on how you can speed up your website, visit sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob, and get your first 3 months free. Once again that’s sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob.

Once again if you are interested in starting your own online business head on over to mywifequitherjob.com and sign up for my free six day mini course on how to start a profitable online store. Sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

136: How To Sell An Online Business And Why Spencer Haws Sold Long Tail Pro

136: How To Sell An Online Business And Why Spencer Haws Sold Long Tail Pro

Today I’m thrilled to have Spencer Haws back on the show. If you don’t remember him from Episode 54, Spencer runs the popular blog NichePursuits.com where he teaches others how to start niche online businesses.

He was one of the speakers at the Sellers Summit talking about SEO. He’s also the creator of Long Tail Pro which is one of the best keyword research tools on the market today.

But recently, he decided to sell that business and being the nosy guy that I am, I wanted all the details. Enjoy the show!

What You’ll Learn

  • Why Spencer decided to sell Long Tail Pro.
  • What services he used to find buyers.
  • The pros and cons of using a broker. How much do they charge?
  • The due diligence process.
  • How developer support works when selling a software program.
  • What he looked for in a sales partner.
  • How the sale was structured.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

ReferralCandy.com – If you’re already getting steady orders every month, adding a refer-a-friend program to your store can give you a new sales channel. And ReferralCandy is the best in the business. Click here and get a FREE $50 credit towards your account.
referral candy

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. If you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free 6-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin, I want to give a quick shout out to sitelock.com for being a sponsor of the show. SiteLock is the leader in website security, and protects over 8 million websites by monitoring them from malicious activity 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. So here is the thing, most online business owners never think about security until they get hacked. My online store got hacked long ago, and it was the most miserable experience ever.

I basically lost thousands of dollars as I frantically tried to patch the issues, and get my store back online as quickly as possible. In the event that you get hacked, call sitelock.com, and they will help you out, or even better protect your site before you get hacked. Right now you can get 3 months of SiteLock free if you go to sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. Now on to the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Spencer Haws back on the show. Now if you don’t remember him from episode 54, Spencer runs the popular blog nichepursuits.com where he teaches other people how to start niche online businesses. He is also one of the speakers at my first conference the Sellers Summit and he spoke about SEO.

He is also the creator of Long Tail Pro which is one of the best keyword research tools on the market today. But recently he actually decided to sell that business and being the nosy guy that I am, I wanted all the details. So I brought Spencer on the show to talk about the sale and also to see what he is up to right now. And with that welcome back on the show Spencer, how are you doing today man?

Spencer: Thanks Steve, it’s great to be back on the podcast, and I’m doing great. I’m sitting in a new house, we just moved a couple of weeks ago. And so I’m breaking in this office with your podcast here.

Steve: Yeah, we were joking how Long Tail Pro money bought that house.

Spencer: That’s right. Definitely there was a little bit of Long Tail Pro money that helped us decide we should move.

Steve: So we actually covered your bio back in episode 54, and I don’t want to rehash any of the old things that you said. So let’s just jump into the meat of it. First and foremost I am very curious why you decided to sell Long Tail Pro, which was like your baby for so many years right?

Spencer: Yeah absolutely. So I did, I started Long Tail Pro over five years ago. It’s been my baby working on it day in day out for five years. And I am — I was the 100% sole owner. So I decided to sell it for a couple of reasons. One is I had been working on it for a really long time and grown it to a certain point. And anytime that you do that I feel like maybe it’s time — I felt like maybe it was time to take a little bit of money off the tables, right? And just—I had put a lot of effort in and knew that it was a valuable business, and perhaps I felt like I needed to take some cash off the table.

And sort of the other side of that coin, the other reason is when you have so much of your business sort of in one thing, right, Long Tail Pro is doing very well, and I would have hated to see it start to decline. So there is a lot of risk especially when you’re relying on Google, I was always worried — and as business owners maybe we worry too much about things that don’t ever happen. But I always think about what if Google changed how keywords worked and how they ranked websites and that sort of thing.

So I felt like there was risk there. I felt like you know what, I have had a great run, I’m going to take some money off the table, take some risk off the table and hopefully let somebody else take it to the next level. So that was my couple of reasons for selling the business.

Steve: So when you are talking about Google making changes are you referring to just them taking away like the keyword API and stuff like that, that could just totally destroy the business?

Spencer: Yeah that definitely was the prominent reason I would say. If they would have shut down the Google Keyword Planner or yeah any APIs, that’s really where we were getting a lot of the data right? And that would have been devastating to the business.

Steve: Has that happened at all in the past five years, where Google has made some sort of drastic change and you had to adjust with Long Tail Pro?

Spencer: Yeah that definitely did happen. Before the Google Keyword Planner I believe it was just called the Google Keyword Tool, and that was two and a half three years ago where they made that switch. And that was quite a dramatic shift, because we had built our software on the old Google Keyword Tool. So we had to re-program how we were gathering data and everything.

So that’s quite a large change that had me scared for a long time two or three years ago. So I went through that and everything was fine. But yeah there definitely had been changes and we had always been able to adjust along the way.

Steve: Okay in terms of maintenance, was it a lot of work towards the end?

Spencer: In terms of maintenance as far as just coding, or just business in general?

Steve: Just in general like how many hours of your day was devoted to Long Tail Pro?

Spencer: I would say about half my day was devoted to Long Tail Pro, the other half was other projects, Niche Pursuits and my other websites and things like that. I really had setup processes and had people helping me out, a customer support team, I had developers, and Jake had really become my affiliate manager and sort of outreach person.

So really it had become fairly hands off in a way. I just worked on the larger strategic decisions or putting fires out when that happened. So it’s about half my day I would say.

Steve: So from a marketing school were you doing mostly marketing work or?

Spencer: Yeah I would do — that’s probably marketing and then just management overall, right? So marketing, strategic marketing, reaching out to different contacts or setting up special offers. Or yeah just tweaking sales pages and that sort of thing is primarily what I was doing.

Steve: Okay and so can we talk a little bit about just multiples real quick before we get into the guts. Like it’s a software company, and what multiples typically are there for software companies for sale?

Spencer: Yeah definitely there are definitely some standard multiples, and it varies with size usually. And I don’t know the exact breakdown, but typically when you buy a website, whether it’s software or just affiliate website, that on the lower end, so maybe under 100,000 or something like that, right? You are looking at maybe 20 to 25 monthly earning. So maybe 2X annual earnings or something…

Steve: Earnings or revenue – earnings, right?

Spencer: Earnings correct yeah.

Steve: That seems really low considering ecommerce stores get like 3X.

Spencer: Yeah, and it can depend on the size. I mean if — a good market place to look at if people go to Empire Flippers, that was their standard for a long time was a 20 times monthly earnings. They’ve since — because they are primarily dealing with smaller websites under $250,000 and a lot under $100,000. So 20 to 25 is roughly what they sell for. And then as you get a little bit bigger, or just depending on the company it can be 3X or plus, right?

Steve: Okay, can we comment on like where your Long Tail Pro kind of fell into on that spectrum? Because I just know based on my affiliate earnings you are not in that spectrum, so…

Spencer: Yeah mine was just slightly over 3X.

Steve: Okay, all right got it. And was it — so it sounded like you weren’t spending a whole lot of time on it, and so 3X means — so 3X earnings. So like did you ever feel at any time that why don’t I just run this for another 3 years, and then just take the money, because it was relatively low effort, right?

Spencer: Yeah I know it was relatively low effort, and again it just sort of the thing that kept me up at night were just the risks involved. I felt like if Google changed anything, and I also should say that when I had built the application, it was built on Adobe Air which is a fairly old platform. Maybe back in 2010 it was still in its heyday, but now it’s not.

And so there was always some work around with that. So I just– yes I certainly thought about yeah I could just write this and collect the earnings for a few years. And that would have been an okay move, but then the rest just kept me up at night sometimes, and the opportunity arose to sell it, and so I took that opportunity.

Steve: Okay, so let’s say I want to sell my company, like can we just kind of talk about the process involved, like what was your first step?

Spencer: So yeah absolutely, I really didn’t know, I had never sold a large property before. I have sold a few websites here and there, but I had never sold a software company, and this is the first software company I had built. I really didn’t know the process. So my story maybe won’t match up with what other people do, but I actually ended up going to Rhodium weekend it’s a conference primarily for people buying and selling websites.

Steve: What is it called sorry?

Spencer: Rhodium weekend.

Steve: Rhodium, okay.

Spencer: Yeah, and I have been to it before and so I knew that this guy, a lot of web brokers attended this type of conference. So I actually reached out a few weeks before this conference took place and started chatting with Chris Yates, he’s the one that puts on that conference and just saying hey I’m considering maybe selling Long Tail Pro, do you have any tips?

Anyways that sort of snowballed into me actually having a small round table at the conference where we talked about what would happen if Spencer sold Long Tail Pro, and what’s the process. So it’s kind of cool, I got some consulting at the conference right there. And basically the steps for selling your company is typically– especially when you have larger company is to contact a broker to work with them, to go out and find buyers for you, to get your business listed if — and there is a few out there quite like brokerage…

Steve: FE International?

Spencer: FE International, and a few others that would do this for you. So that’s typically going to be the step that people are going to want to take. That’s not actually how it happened for me. I was thinking, okay when I get back from the conference; I’m going to start talking to some brokers and get it listed up. But actually because I talked about it at the conference, word got out, and somebody contacted me privately before I even had a chance to list it…

Steve: Really, okay.

Spencer: And we started discussions there and that person or that group ended up buying it from me.

Steve: Can we talk about like what was going — what are the pros and cons of using a broker? Like why did you decide to go with that person who contacted you instead of getting perhaps like a bidding word going?

Spencer: Yes so there are definitely some advantages to going to a broker, because as you mention they can reach lots of potential buyers. They do charge a brokerage fee, which I was basically able to avoid by not going through a brokerage.

Steve: Do you know how much that is?

Spencer: Well — I should have come better prepared for the percentage, it’s usually a percentage off of the top, and I don’t recall what it is off the top.

Steve: Was it double digits though, or single digits?

Spencer: Yeah it is close — that actually maybe it’s very close to 10%. It maybe 10% like FE International maybe right around that. Don’t quote me on that, but I believe it’s pretty close to 10%.

Steve: So it’s significant basically?

Spencer: Yeah, it is a significant brokerage fee, but they typically do a lot of work. They get all the due diligence, paper work in place and present that to potential investors. I went with the group that contacted me first, because I had also looked at the multiples that similar software businesses were being sold for, and their bid was very competitive with what I believe I would have gotten anyways.

And the process was much quicker going privately just because they had a different and faster due diligence process than maybe other potential buyers would have. So there is a few to less headaches there, because I actually knew the potential buyer — I had known the potential buyer for a few years actually.

So all of those things sort of added up competitive, multiple, less due diligence, smaller brokerage fee, or no brokerage fee, and I already knew the potential buyer. I had some trust there, and I felt like they would do a great job with the business, so I just went with it.

Steve: Can we talk a little bit about the due diligence process, like what are some of the things that they ask for, did you have to do any work involved?

Spencer: Yeah, they asked for all financials, so basically 3 years worth of financials, and in my case for the last 12 months they wanted a breakdown of all revenue and expenses broken down by month for the most recent year, and then just the 2 previous years before that, just an annual breakdown essentially.

Steve: When they ask for this, do they need an independent party to audit it, or is it just based on your accounting?

Spencer: They did it on my accounting, and that definitely could be different based on the potential buyer, so they essentially just asked me, what are your numbers? They did ask for logins, so they were able to login or get screen shots of a lot of different revenues or expenses.

They actually got my affiliate logins so they could see what affiliates were doing what, and those sort of things, so they did verify with logins as well. It was a lot of work, but I believe it is a lot less work than if I had gone with other potential buyers.

Steve: So they go in, and they look at all of your numbers, were there any other factors involved that they were looking for, and let’s talk about those?

Spencer: Yeah, I mean they really want to look at all aspects of the business, and they are thinking about what are the risks here, and one of the risks in my case is they felt like, “Well if Spencer stops promoting or mentioning Long Tail Pro on Niche Pursuits, that’s a big chunk of the business, because definitely nichepursuits.com has always sent a lot of traffic over the Long Tail Pro.

And so there was some clauses in there stating that I would continue to write about and keep all my existing links on Niche Pursuits for the next 3 years. Those sorts of things, and then there was definitely strong non compete clauses, you know I can’t go out and create another keyword research tool for a number of years, those sorts of things. A lot of that due diligence as far as I need to keep putting in some work, because I am so integral to the business, and that I can’t go out and compete directly with the existing company.

Steve: What about your email list and social media properties, are those all part of the deal as well?

Spencer: Yes, that was all part of the deal, and that was definitely a big part of the deal was the size of the email list. I had to turn all that over to the new buyers, and certainly all the social media properties, and really everything associated with Long Tail Pro, and the brand was turned over to the new owners.

Steve: When you turn over something like an email list, are you allowed to keep the people on the list for a separate list, does that make sense?

Spencer: Right, that does make sense, no, I was not. So once I turned over that email list, I was no longer allowed to email them separately for other things. That list is theirs, they own it.

Steve: You mentioned that you looked at other companies who sold at similar multiples, where did you find that resource that you could do such a comparison?

Spencer: Yeah, so actually on FE International is where I found some similar software companies, and in fact on e of those was Hit Tail that was sold not too long ago. They were sold through FE international, so they actually provide– you can get– they provide the basic stats, what’s the multiple, what’s the earnings and those sorts of things. That was actually a very direct comparison, and my multiple was very similar to what Hit Tail sold for as well.

Steve: When you are thinking about this multiple, like what other factors go into it. I would imagine growth, and a whole bunch of things outside the immediate numbers fall into play, right?

Spencer: Right, yeah you are absolutely right, and it’s not an exact science either. I mean it’s something that can be negotiated. Certainly growth, and market potential, and other things that might come into play can increase or decrease the eventual selling price, and it was one of those things where the potential buyers presented a multiple, and then we negotiated from there.

Steve: Okay, what I was trying to get at actually was Long Tail Pro is still growing every single year during the sale?

Spencer: Yes, Long Tail Pro has grown every single year that I have owned it, and it’s still growing.

Steve: Okay, and in terms of marketing, like from their perspective was there any more clauses for you to continue to help market, or did you turn over the marketing all to them?

Spencer: There were some still some clauses for me to continue marketing. For example whenever there is any new major updates, they want essentially me to be available to blog about it on Niche Pursuits, so I have some ongoing commitments. When there is any big changes to the software, I need to mention that and promote that.

For example the change has been going through to make Long Tail Pro cloud based, and so when that happens which should be very soon, I need to blog about that, essentially promote it, and say, “Hey now it’s cloud based, you guys should go check it out.” I do have those ongoing commitments to continue blogging, and doing a few other things if there is any big promotions to get involve a little bit there as well.

Steve: Okay, and any software implications? For example let’s say I run a software company, and I want to buy Long Tail Pro, and I want to make sure that it could integrate in with my platform, were there any discussions about like leveraging your developer? Actually first question before that one, was the developer part of the deal?

Spencer: Not really, they did talk with the developer before purchasing the company to make sure that he would come over, and the reason I say not really is because they had always planned to bring in their own developer anyways. My existing developer stayed on for– it was really only maybe 2-3 months before they had fully integrated their own development team, and transitioned out the old developer.

Steve: Okay, and so did they do any like did you turn over the source code for them to do due diligence on?

Spencer: Yes, we did give them access to view the source code, so they brought in their own developer to view that, and definitely do due diligence to make sure it was clean code, and easy enough to work with, that sort of thing.

Steve: Okay, and naturally you had to sign some sort of NDA to see all this stuff, right?

Spencer: Right, correct.

Steve: Okay, so how was the deal structured? Can we just talk about the negotiation process, like what were the important things that you wanted, and what were some of the things they wanted, and how did you compromise?

Spencer: Yeah, absolutely, so I’m mentioned a couple of things that they wanted, a lot of it did surround me, and me still blogging about it, still being involved a little bit, and maybe I should back up, we didn’t mention this, but I still own some of the company. I still own 20% of the company.

Steve: Okay, I didn’t know that.

Spencer: I didn’t sell all of it because I still honestly I feel like there is tons of growth potential. I think it is a great business, and that was actually positive for them to have me still be a small owner because it aligned our interests. Both of us still want the company to grow, and do well.

That was a lot of what they wanted anyways is for me to stay on. And so we did negotiate that a little bit as far as how much should I be blogging, and mentioning that, and we negotiated as I mentioned anytime there is a large update, what might be considered a large update to the software will be required to blog about it.

Steve: How did you come up with 20%?

Spencer: We played around with a couple of different numbers. I definitely wanted to sell the majority of it. There is really no magic reason, I think we initially started out at 25%, and I don’t know if this gets too much into the weeds, but it was a management group of 3 guys that essentially were leading the investment to buy Long Tail Pro. They brought in a number of other investors as well, to come in on the purchase, so there is about 15 total investors, that bought into Long Tail Pro.

Just the way the numbers worked out, so that the 20% is where it landed with you know the investors and how much money they brought, and how much percentage I still wanted. I knew I wanted more than 10%, and anyways we just ended up with that number.

Steve: I want to take a moment to thank ReferralCandy for being a sponsor of the show. Now in this day and age word of mouth is a huge driver of business for most e-commerce stores, and the best way to amplify word of mouth marketing is through a referral program, and this is where ReferralCandy shines. With just a couple of clicks to the mouse, you could add a referral program to your e-commerce store, and reward your customers for telling their friends about your shop, and this tactic works wonders. In fact it is not uncommon to get a ridiculous return on investment.

For example Greats Footwear who is a ReferralCandy customer is currently seeing a 20X ROI. Referral word of mouth marketing is also useful for building up your social media presence as well, because everyone is talking about your company with their friends on Facebook, and Twitter. The best part is that ReferralCandy is a set it and forget it service, requires no technical set up, and they are giving My Wife Quit Her Job listeners 50 bucks to try them out if you go to promo.referrallcandy.com/Steve. Once again it’s promo.referrallcandy.com/Steve to get a $50 credit to try out the service risk free, now back to the show.

In terms of your involvement though, the commitment basically for you for that 20% is just to continue blogging about the tool?

Spencer: Primarily yeah, primarily and to not change anything from old links that I had or anything like that. I couldn’t go out and all of a sudden all the traffic I was pushing to change those links somewhere else, but yeah.

Steve: Are you still expected to be somewhat like the face of the business?

Spencer: No, not really, although they did– this also was another piece is they didn’t want me to talk about the sale for at least a few months, and so you are one of the very first times I have talked publicly about this. I sold the company in February, so it’s now been almost 6 months, so they want me to have a quiet period just so that existing buyers didn’t believe I had left the company.

Steve: Sure, that makes sense.

Spencer: I have been the face still of the company, but I’m going to be hopefully less and less so here now that I’m going to be talking publicly about it.

Steve: Okay, and in terms of what you wanted out of the deal, what were some of the things that you were pretty adamant on?

Spencer: Yeah, so I really wanted Long Tail Pro to go into good hands. I wanted somebody that had a similar vision to me, in that I believe the Long Tail Pro can continue to grow, and continue to serve the user base that we’ve served. There was a lot of little points surrounding that in terms of just the direction of the software, I wanted to make sure that we didn’t alienate our user base.

Those were– the fact that they are moving it over to the cloud, that was something that I always wanted, and so really just a lot of things that they were going to do to the software is really reason that confirmed to my head, “Hey I should be selling it to these people.” In terms of negotiation of what I wanted, a lot of the negotiation was just surrounding the price. Once I sold it they were all on board with this similar strategy, price, and then just yeah my involvement.

Steve: How long did this process take from start to finish?

Spencer: The process for us, I’m trying to think, so Rhodium weekend was in October of 2015, and I started talking to these guys probably at the end of that month, and then it was just early February, so it was …

Steve: Like 5 months, 4-5 months.

Spencer: Yeah maybe 3-4 months of talking and discussing, so relatively quickly actually.

Steve: Yeah, that is really quick actually, and I noticed that they changed the model to a more SaaS based model. Was that something that you were planning on doing anyways or?

Spencer: Yeah it was, it was something that I was planning on doing. It’s funny because I had taken a look at my business, and I was at the point, “Okay how do I take this to the next level? I need to strategize; I need to probably take it to the cloud. I probably need to make it a full SaaS model, so everybody is on a monthly plan.” I came up with a strategy, and then I decided to sell the company. I’m happy to say that yeah, they ran with the same plan, and have moved over to a full SaaS model, and done all of those things.

Steve: Yeah, I remember in the back of my mind at least for the longest time, I was wondering how you could possibly support a single sale purchase model, and support these people, like you almost have to go to a SaaS model especially if Google is going to be changing everything from time to time.

Spencer: Yeah, you really do, I mean had started Long Tail Pro, and it was a onetime purchase really to model Market Samurai, my top competitor at the time back in 2011. And that worked for a while, but I could quickly see that I needed some monthly recurring subscription, so it actually was in 20; I want to say January 2013, beginning of the year that I actually introduced Long Tail Platinum that was a monthly subscription. So definitely having a monthly subscription, recurring revenue was huge for the business, and there is no way I could have grown Long Tail Pro like I did without that piece.

Steve: Okay, cool well you know Spence, let’s switch gears a little bit, and you know you have 50% of your time back, and so I’m just curious what you are up to now, like what are you doing with your time now besides buying houses and moving?

Spencer: That’s right, now that the house buying is settled down, we are getting moved in, I do have a couple of more projects going on. One thing I partnered up with a couple of guys, and we have been out buying websites, and doing everything we can to grow those, and so I’m with some partners that we’ve been building websites for 10 plus years, each of us individually essentially, and so we have a lot of skills.

What we decided to do is well why don’t we train others, give them our strategies for keyword research, and creating content, and doing link building to help us grow these websites, and then they can essentially do the work for us, and in exchange they get all those strategies and skills that they can go and use eventually on their own websites.

This is the model that we have implemented. We have been hiring interns, they come, they work for us for a period of 4 weeks, they go through our training program, and then they help us grow these websites. We call it authority machine internship where we bring on a number of interns and they can learn from us, and work with us on some websites, and help us grow those websites, and then after the 4 weeks they go, and of course hopefully can work on their sites and see the same growth there.

And because we have already set up a whole team to train others, and to give people, we’ve put together video tutorials and all these things. We also sell that package of training to people. If they don’t want to work on our websites and don’t want to go through the 4 week training and work for us, they can just buy the course or the training package, and go through on their own as well.

Steve: This is a virtual training, like is there a live component to it?

Spencer: Yes, it is a virtual training, we do have some webinars, but it is all virtual, work from your own home, wherever you want.

Steve: That’s an interesting model, so you are getting interns, and I imagine they are just doing this just for the learning point where you are not compensating these interns, are you?

Spencer: Right, correct.

Steve: They are helping you build your own authority properties. Can we talk about these authority properties? Are they for the purpose of affiliate revenue; are they for physical product sales?

Spencer: They are all affiliate websites.

Steve: Okay, so the goal is to rank these sites in search?

Spencer: Correct, we are really good at SEO, that’s our background, so exactly we are trying to grow the search traffic.

Steve: That’s interesting, because I remember in our last interview you used to, like way back in the day you had like hundreds of niche sites right, and then you transitioned to software, and then you transitioned over to physical products and e-commerce, and it seems like you have gone back. Would you consider these niche sites?

Spencer: Yeah, I mean, I don’t know what the right phrase is, there are larger websites, but they are. They are definitely focused on one niche, or one area, so I would call them niche sites, but there is something that we hope to grow into much larger properties. I mean to give you an example, one website that we purchased just a few months ago, we’ve since added 500 articles or pieces of content to that in a period of a couple of months, so these are large properties, but they are really focused on one niche.

Steve: I see, so to produce that much content, I guess you are, are you paying people in the US, or are these interns doing the content building?

Spencer: Yes, so the interns are doing the content creation, so that’s the work that they put in, they get all the training, and see the internal workings of our website and our strategies, and then they have to write like 10 articles in a period of 4 weeks, so that’s some of their payment in exchange for the training that they get in working with us.

Steve: Can we talk a little bit about just content creation real quick, so I noticed that the trend is more towards long form content now, as opposed to just quantity, so are these 500 posts, are they like beefy posts?

Spencer: Yeah, so they are all roughly 1500 words long, so fairly decent sized articles. They are not short articles, and we do also create charts, and images, and maybe insert YouTube videos, so they are what I would consider fairly in-depth articles, all of them.

Steve: Okay, and then you have some of these authority sites up already, can you comment on how much revenue they are generating?

Spencer: Yeah, so one of them we purchased a few months ago, and it was making roughly $2,500-3,000 a month when we bought it, and we have now doubled that income, so it’s making $5,000-6,000 a month. We’ve more than doubled the organic traffic in about 3 months to that particular website, and their revenue is increased.

It locks up with that, so we’ve basically doubled that. The other website that we purchased– well we purchased a few, we just barely purchased one a few weeks ago, so no results there, but the other website that we purchased also in April, so a few months ago. We have actually 5Xed the organic traffic coming to that website.

Steve: Really, in what period of time?

Spencer: About 3 months.

Steve: Crazy, okay, so since we’ve been on the topic of selling businesses, can we talk a little bit about your buying criteria?

Spencer: Yeah, so for these websites we are definitely looking for established websites that are doing– we are primarily looking for websites that we know will do well in Google. The way to know that they are going to do well in Google is that they are already doing well in Google for certain key terms. So we look at these websites, we see what they are already ranking for, and we look at the authority of them, so have they been around for a long time, does it look like Google is treating them well?

If they are we feel like that puts you so far ahead of the game already. We come in, we add tons of content, we have strategies for building lots of links to add even more authority, so that’s primarily what we are looking at is where is the traffic coming from, how well is it doing in Google, and how authoritative is this website?

Steve: Of these sites that you’ve purchased, clearly the owners were not doing certain things, so are there any certain aspects that you are looking for? Like the quality of content or I don’t know, what are you looking for that can be improved upon?

Spencer: Yeah, a lot of these websites, it’s not that the web masters were doing anything wrong, they were actually doing a lot of things right, you know to make them Google friendly, but like all of us myself included, we have projects that just fade, right? So a lot of these websites just haven’t been worked on for a year plus, right. People just sort forget about them, they have moved on to other things.

The first website I mentioned that was making 2500 to 3000 a month, the people that owned this website they have much larger websites that they are working on, right? And so these are just little websites. So that is one of the things that we look at is how long has it been since people have added content to this. Is this something that they’ve forgotten about and just not putting any work into? Because that’s a lot of it, you just got to grind and put in the work and if you do that consistently you are going to see growth.

Steve: And in terms of making money via affiliate, are they in some sort of niche that you kind of specialize in, or they are all across the board?

Spencer: Right now they are all across the board, so ranging from health to computers and really kind of just across the board. We do have a couple of websites because we are trying to buy websites essentially every month here as a business. Yeah we are pretty aggressive; we have quiet aggressive growth goals here. But we do have a couple of websites in the works that maybe in the blogging niche itself, right?

And it may give us an opportunity to not only grow these websites that are already valuable, but because it’s in a blogging niche we know there is people that are interested in writing. We actually may be able to essentially hire visitors coming to these websites as interns for [inaudible 00:40:43] right? So it would become this circle of we are actually generating traffic for internship to work on these websites that maybe they came to originally, right?

Steve: That’s pretty ingenious actually, because like the tedious part or the time consuming part is the content. And by getting these interns to do the content, yeah it seems like a pretty good exchange. So how many interns do you have?

Spencer: It varies. So we’ve done a few different internship sessions, four week sessions, and we bring on — I mean like the first one I think we had 20 or so. And this next one we are hoping to have, I believe we are trying to hit 60. So we are bringing in a lot. And we actually have a whole team, there is a group of 10 guys that are happy to manage this whole process that are available via Skype, and are answering individual questions. So we have quite a team behind us making sure interns are taking care of it, going through all the processes and procedures that we’ve set up for this.

Steve: So I’m just curious and this is just kind of me thinking about this, like what’s the incentive for them to just not take the training and just run and not do the content?

Spencer: So the way that we sort of make them have some skin in the game is we do ask them to put down a deposit. So they put down a deposit of a few hundred dollars, and then once their work is completed, once they’ve done their 10 articles we return the few hundred dollar deposit. So that’s sort of our way to make sure they are committed to the process.

And we’ve always returned the deposits and we have no desire to keep their money. Sometimes it takes a little longer than four weeks to get them to finish what they are doing or whatever. Or if they really complain, we just give it back to them anyways. So [inaudible 00:42:42] guys, but yeah that’s our incentive for them to stick around.

Steve: That also implies that they all have to be able to write?

Spencer: Yes, we actually have them go through an application process. So we have them write a very short like 300 word response to the question. And then using that we judge okay can they write well, and if they can’t we don’t bring them on. However we may start allowing some people to come in and train them the process to actually outsource the content, but we haven’t really done that so maybe [inaudible 00:43:19] into that right?

Steve: Yeah.

Spencer: But there is certainly a way even if you don’t speak or write well you can outsource content.

Steve: So they don’t require any domain specific knowledge at all?

Spencer: Correct.

Steve: Wow, that’s an interesting model. And it sounds like the results that you’ve been getting have been fairly quick. Like three months is a very short amount of time in the SEO world, right?

Spencer: Yeah it absolutely is. So we do a couple of other things like I said. Content really is a huge piece of that, but then we go into the website and make sure it’s all SEO friendly and maybe speed up the website and do some other things so it loads faster. And all of those things combined along with some like building that we do to just really boost the website.

Steve: Cool man, so where can people go if they are interested in your internship?

Spencer: Yeah, so people can head over to authoritymahcine.com, and maybe we’ll make sure we have a link so that we can track them back to you. So let’s go ahead and do authoritymachine.com/Steve. If people go to that, we’ll make sure to have a specific page for any podcast listeners here. So yeah authoritymachine.com/Steve and they can see the different options that are there, internship or training and learn more about it.

Steve: Cool man, yeah it sounds like a great way to learn without having to pay any money and actually get some experience in the process.

Spencer: Exactly, and I think what a lot of people really like is the fact that they can see the actual websites, right. They can go to the real domain; they can see what we’ve done to that website. And then of course through the training they learn, well here is what we are going to do to grow the website. And really it can be a great way for people to gain some knowledge and skills to apply to their own site.

I mean the fact of the matter is we really are teaching what works, because these are our own websites that we purchased, and we want to return our money, right? And so we are definitely teaching interns what we believe are the best processes and procedures for doing these sorts of things. So we feel like it’s a win-win, and hopefully the interns that come in feel the same way.

Steve: Cool and in terms of your long-term plan for these sites, are they to sell them like your flipping sites or are you planning on just keeping them?

Spencer: Yeah the long term I mean we may hold on to some of them, but for now at least we feel like probably after a year or so of holding these sites we’ll probably turn around and flip them.

Steve: Okay wow, so you are really embracing this whole buy and sell model?

Spencer: Yeah, it’s kind of fun.

Steve: Awesome, well hey thanks for sharing the details of your sale of Long Tail Pro. I’m honored that this is the first podcast that you’ve talked about it.

Spencer: Yeah absolutely, no it’s been great to chat about it.

Steve: Cool well thanks for coming on the show Spence, and we’ll see if — I’m sure a lot of people listening are going to be interested in the Authority Machine, so cool man.

Spencer: Hey I appreciate your time very much, and I appreciate the listeners are sticking around and let us chat about it. So thanks again.

Steve: Cool man, take care Spencer.

Spencer: All right bye, bye.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. I have been a long time user of Long Tail Pro, and it’s probably a tool that I use the most often for my online businesses. Now I have had several people on the show who have bought businesses but not sold them. And it was interesting to get the perspective from Spencer, and his motivations behind the transaction.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode136. Once again I want to thank sitelock.com for sponsoring this episode. If you run your own hosted online store, or any website for that matter that handles monetary transactions, you should give SiteLock a look. They can also help your site with site speed issues as well. Did you know that ecommerce sites that take longer than 5 seconds to load often shed customers?

SiteLock offers a service called TrueSpeed which is a content delivery network that can increase download speeds by up to 50%. So go check out SiteLock.com today at sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob, and get your first three months free. Once again that’s sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob.

Once again if you are interested in starting your own online business, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com, and sign up for my free 6 day mini course on how to start a profitable online store. Sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

135: How To Buy A Company And Use Amazon To Triple Your Profit With Dana Jaunzemis

135: How To Buy A Company And Triple The Profit On Amazon With Dana Jaunzemis

Today I’m really excited to have Dana Jaunzemis back on the show. Dana is someone who I met through Andrew Youderian and she’s actually in a private group that I meet with on a semi monthly basis.

If you don’t remember Dana, I had her on episode 85 of the podcast where we discussed her strategies for acquiring and growing existing businesses.

Well since that interview Dana has acquired yet another company and we’re going to talk about how she’s already doubled its revenues. In addition, she was lucky enough to attend Amazon’s womens conference last month which we discuss in this interview. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • What attracted Dana to her latest acquisition and the multiples involved.
  • The specific strategies that she used to grow this company and why it was different from her last company
  • Dana’s primary strategy for growing her new business on Amazon
  • Why she decided to focus more on Amazon vs her own shop this time around
  • Dana’s experience at the Amazon Womens Conference

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

SellersSummit.com – The ultimate ecommerce learning conference! Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories and high level BS, the Sellers Summit is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an ecommerce business. Click here and get your ticket now before it sells out.
Sellers Summit

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. If you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free 6-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin, I want to give a quick shout out to sitelock.com for being a sponsor of the show. SiteLock is the leader in website security, and protects over 8 million websites by monitoring them from malicious activity 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. So here is the thing, most online business owners never think about security until they get hacked. My online store got hacked long ago, and it was the most miserable experience ever.

I basically lost thousands of dollars as I frantically tried to patch the issues, and get my store back online as quickly as possible. In the event that you get hacked, call sitelock.com, and they will help you out, or even better protect your site before you get hacked. Right now you can get 3 months of SiteLock free if you go to sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. Now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m really excited to have Dana Jauzemis on the show. Now Dana is someone who I met through Andrew Youderian, and she is actually on a private group that I meet with on a semi monthly basis and if you don’t remember Dana I actually had her back on episode 85 of the podcast, where we discussed her strategies for acquiring and growing existing businesses.

Well since that interview Dana has acquired yet another company and we are going to talk about how she has already doubled — I don’t even know if it’s tripled its revenue, Dana you can correctly me later. But she was also lucky enough to attend Amazon’s Women’s Conference a couple of months ago. So I’m pretty eager to hear all about that as well. And with that welcome back to the show Dana, how are you doing today?

Dana: Great, thanks for having me Steve.

Steve: So was it double or triple within a year or two?

Dana: I think we are triple right now.

Steve: That’s crazy, it’s crazy. So let’s talk about that latest acquisition. I know you didn’t really want to reveal the product, because it is in a competitive industry, and so we can just refer to it as just like your widget company.

Dana: Okay.

Steve: When you were shopping for companies and this is kind of like a real life case study of what we talked about in the last episode. What attracted you to this company, and what were the multiples like when you bought it?

Dana: So the seller had it priced really high at a multiple of like four on net profits. But I didn’t let that deter me, I wasn’t going to pay for — but I was — it was a listing with an internet broker which is interesting sometimes if they are with– it was with a local broker. So I think somebody he knew from a club or church or something.

So I figured they just were aggressive on pricing. But it took a lot longer to get it under contract because of that, so my first offer was actually — I made my first offer at a multiple of two which I knew was aggressive on my side on a low side. So obviously my first offer was half of what he was asking, he was not happy. Actually he was kind of mad.

Steve: Yeah, that’s what I was going to say, he’s smart to not even want to deal with you at all?

Dana: Well it did in a sense, they went to counter offer. And I called the broker a few days later and like I haven’t heard from you guys, and he goes, well your offer really didn’t deserve consideration. And I said well I think it did if you would counter offer, and he just said no. So…

Steve: Are the multiples still on the order of like two or three for an ecommerce company?

Dana: Yes somewhere between the two and a half and three and a half depending on — it kind of — it gets a little squarely around the size of the — like a lower value site if it’s — like if a site is only making 100,000 a year. Sometimes the multiple can go a little higher at times, because it’s– well let me say it at 50,000 a year the multiple can go higher because it’s a more affordable site if that makes sense.

So then people are like oh yeah I can buy one for 150 at a multiple of three. Which sometimes those it’s not a value issue, it’s just what people can afford. But once it gets over– if the site is making over a 100, what I have noticed 100,000, 150,000 then the multiples are — they are staying in that– well I don’t know, two and half to three kind of range.

And then they might move again after you get– if a site is making over 500,000 actually then the multiples are going change, over a million it’s definitely going to change. The whole way they value is very different, but for average sites making under 500,000 right now, we are still seeing like that two and a half to three and a half multiple.

Steve: Okay and so how did you get these guys to deal with you again?

Dana: I skipped the broker right. I did something very unusual and contacted the seller directly and said, look I just want to touch base with you again. I want to make another offer, but I want to know what you didn’t like about my offer. So I removed the broker from the middle. I knew I could — I had already met the seller so…

Steve: In person you mean?

Dana: I went and visited him.

Steve: Oh interesting, okay.

Dana: Yeah, I was very interested in the business as soon as it was listed. So I went and visited him and my offer came after the visit.

Steve: I see.

Dana: So I called him and that was actually under the advice of my attorney who did a great job of advising me. And she said you just need to remove the broker from the middle. You need to get the seller to talk to you, not to remove him from the process but just this conversation of how we are going to agree on price. So I actually had a conversation with the seller and really found out what his pain points were so that I could address those points in my next offer. Even though my next offer was still low, but…

Steve: What were those pain points that he had?

Dana: He wanted all cash.

Steve: Okay.

Dana: That was his biggest pain point, but I wasn’t asking for financing, because the other people were offering for price, but they wanted financing.

Steve: Financing on his behalf or?

Dana: Yes, they wanted him to hold like 50% of the value.

Steve: Okay yeah that’s not good okay.

Dana: So it really wasn’t apples to apples, but that’s kind of hard to get somebody to separate in their mind. Well they are willing to pay me let’s say $600,000, but they want me to hold 300 but she is only going to pay me 300.

Steve: Right.

Dana: So you are really are, but he was adamant about — I mean in one way you could say that those were the same offers as far as what would happen today. He would get the same amount of money.

Steve: Right but it just doesn’t sound as attractive to me at all, right? So okay so how did you rationalize that then?

Dana: Well I had to increase my offer and I knew I would. But I had to — his other sticking point was valuing inventory. So we had to work through that and — those were the two biggest — I mean the financing was the biggest issue. And then in the second round of offers overall it took — he listed it in January, we didn’t close till May. So it took a long time, this was one of the longer ones to get it under contract.

Steve: Okay.

Dana: But mostly because he started out at way too high of a price. And so we had to let the market bring it down to what was reality, what was going to happen.

Steve: But he was getting offers at that price?

Dana: Yeah I think it must have been a little bit less than that. I think it was actually — it wasn’t full price, I know it was 50% financing.

Steve: Okay, and then so what did end up being the multiple if you wouldn’t mind?

Dana: It was three, right at three.

Steve: Right at three, okay.

Dana: I’m pretty sure, yeah.

Steve: And in terms of the actual product, do you usually care? Like was there anything that actually attracted you to the product itself?

Dana: It was definitely the customer base, it’s a B to B model, and that is my favorite for many reasons. But where we are in today’s landscape of ecommerce, I think B to B has some of the best growth ahead of it. So it’s B to B and it’s a high margin kind of product, I’m just a margin, that’s all I look at. So I didn’t want any business– I won’t even look at a business that’s operating on like 30% or 40% gross profit margins.

Steve: What would you say is your minimum, like 50 then?

Dana: 50 is my minimum, and I want something in the mix that’s more like 70.

Steve: Okay and is this business, are they manufacturing their own stuff or is it a wholesale type of business?

Dana: Wholesale, it’s not manufacturing.

Steve: Wholesale okay. And one thing Dana and I were chatting before this and something that was just kind of interesting is that the way you’ve grown this company compared to your last one which was Home Health Testing for those of you who don’t remember the last episode. How has it been different, and why did you take a different strategy with this particular business?

Dana: Well I mean part of the reason is see I bought Home Health Testing either six or seven years ago now? I think it’s about seven years. I mean the ecommerce landscape has just changed tremendously in seven years. I just find an amazing when you look at seven years ago pretty much our whole mentality was to be like Amazon. If Amazon does it you should do it, you should have everything in your store and we are all long tail converts of have it all. And I think that’s an outmoded way of thinking now.

I think Amazon won that game and they are the everything store model. But I think stand alone ecommerce sites now they really need to have a reason to exist outside of Amazon, and they need to do something that Amazon can’t do. And B to B is one area that still has a lot of those components because maybe it’s just that customers buy differently. So this model I could have grown it easily by just using the same method, but I wouldn’t have been able to grow as much.

So what we looked at when I was looking for a business was whereas a business that is doing well because they are doing something that can’t be done as easily on Amazon. But I also looked for one that had an angle to be on Amazon, because we don’t put Home Health Testing on Amazon. So I wanted something that we could experience what it was like to have some items on Amazon, so this one fit that bill. It was a B to B model, decent margins and had some potential for Amazon.

So what we decided after we converted it or took over ownership and got our feet wet on really understanding our product line, and we would have to rebuild the website that it was selling on, because that was…

Steve: Was it a bad website when you got it?

Dana: Oh yeah it was horrible, horrible. It wasn’t even on a cart, it was HTML straight up.

Steve: Oh wow, and they were still doing pretty well despite…

Dana: Yeah, and that’s always — I think that’s a really strong indicator. If somebody is willing to go to that kind of site to purchase, then that’s a strong indicator for future success. If you navigate that well and convert it to up to date cart and user experience, then that’s — I always look at size that way. If somebody is willing to buy on this site, can you imagine if it was better, so that’s what we did.

Steve: Just curious how come you never took Home Health Testing on Amazon?

Dana: Drug testing is a very different market, very, very different. And it’s very competitive and we just — we actually make our unique selling preposition on our site that we value your privacy, and we’ll never contact you again, and we’ll ship it privately. So we go the opposite tact of saying — and again this goes back to how much ecommerce has changed. If you are not going to be on Amazon you need to have a compelling reason to exist. So that’s what we make, that is our compelling reason is people like privacy in drug testing.

Steve: Okay.

Dana: And then we also have business buyers and I think that business buyers like is knowing your inventory, and knowing the age and the expiration date on your inventory. So we provide more information and consistency of inventory for our business customers right now than Amazon does.

Steve: Okay I see. And then if you were to sell on Amazon though, the competition would just be too fierce, and your value add obviously would not be a part of that?

Dana: Right.

Steve: Right, okay. Whereas with this new company is there heavy competition on Amazon for what you sell?

Dana: Not as much no.

Steve: Not as much okay. And are you continuing to try to grow the B to B side or have you been focusing more on the Amazon side with this business?

Dana: We are growing the B to B just pretty much what’s happening naturally from the site being improved. We are doing online advertising, that was the other thing is previous owner did no advertising at all, so …

Steve: How did he get customers in then?

Dana: The good old fashion organic way.

Steve: SEO you mean?

Dana: Yeah, but it was actually because the site was old, and it’s less competitive, so he wasn’t doing anything on SEO. It was actually because the site was so old and just HTML, there was no extra code on the site, and it was all about this one area. It was just a very informative site, it had good information on it, but it was, I think it was actually doing well just because– however I will say he had been declining in sales for the last 2 years, and that was the other thing.

They had done their multiple based on a year ago sales, or a year and a half ago sales, so we had a lot of things to deal with, and getting the price right was– you are not, you have this high multiple because you are thinking you are still worth what you would have been worth 2 years ago. Sales were declining, and they were declining because now he had run out of his good luck with SEO, and he hadn’t changed his site in a couple of years, so there was no updates, there was nothing new on the site, so it was losing value in my opinion.

Steve: He must have at least had his tags and everything correct even the index, right, so he wasn’t…

Dana: Yes.

Steve: Okay, and when you moved, I’m just curious which platform did you move to?

Dana: We moved it to AmeriCommerce, because we have another site on AmeriCommerce, and the B to B features for AmeriCommerce are good. They are somewhat better than other carts right out of the box. I don’t know if I was doing it today, I don’t know if that’s what I would do, but for the decision, I’m not upset about the decision yet I think. The next few months will tell if I feel like I need to move. It’s going to be dependent on how much AmeriCommerce actually continues to improve.

Steve: Did it come down to with Shopify and BigCommerce in equation at all when you made that decision?

Dana: Yeah, I evaluated those 3, that was my 3 choices.

Steve: Okay and it just came down to B to B features?

Dana: Right.

Steve: Can you give me an example of like one B to B feature that it has that Shopify doesn’t for example?

Dana: Shopify might have a lot of these if you keep adding the add-ons, and then you are just escalating the price of the cart, so a lot of the features straight out in AmeriCommerce are the order history that people can go back in to their order and place reorders, and we have a lot of repeat customers, so they can log in and see their orders, and just reorder from that.

We can track accounts receivable in AmeriCommerce, we don’t actually have to use another, we don’t have to export at all to our accounting and do it there, we can do it in AmeriCommerce. Some things like that, nothing huge, and I’m sure that with Shopify you could add those features with that, I’m sure.

Steve: For the reordering, is that– so do you store like credit card tokens so that you can just hit a button?

Dana: Yes.

Steve: Okay, got it.

Dana: And my model for that was I like U-line, I like the way their site works, it’s not fancy but when you are– if you want to look at your previous orders, and just click reorder and say yes, I mean that one, that one, and that one again. I think U-line has a good model for that.

I think a lot of small business owners go back to it because it’s easy, and you get the same thing. That was the model I was looking for is how could we replicate something like that with clearly not having a custom cart. I’m not going to do that, I want to be on a platform, but I wanted it to work that simply.

Steve: I see and you mentioned that you are considering switching in case something doesn’t change. What is that one thing right now?

Dana: Apple Pay.

Steve: Apple Pay, interesting, do you get a lot of customers who want to pay by Apple Pay?

Dana: No, but I think that’s going to be the next big change in e-commerce, and Shopify announces as soon as Apple releases it, they will get it in their stores. I think it’s going to be big, personally I think it will be as big for on mobile as PayPal for a payment. I think it will be bigger than PayPal for a payment option. I might be really wrong, but if they don’t do that I’m going to say that would be almost a nail on the coffin to say we are not going to be future developers of this platform.

Steve: Interesting, I just rejiggered [ph] my PayPal Express recently, and it boosted my mobile conversions in the double digits again.

Dana: Yeah, isn’t it amazing, I mean it’s a really important thing.

Steve: I mean totally, mobile and tablet, like this tab wasn’t affected, but mobile and tablet was pretty huge.

Dana: Yeah. Do you think Apple Pay is going to make a difference?

Steve: Well, I mean if you have to do Apple Pay you got to do Android Pay too, right? I’ve noticed actually in a lot of places in my area, they have started taking Android Pay, and so, you know it’s hard to say like giving more options always helps, like whatever is convenient where they don’t have to enter any information, and right now I think PayPal is the winner in that department.

Then if you get Apple Pay that’s like, I don’t know how many iPhone users are now, but it’s less than android users. You offer all 3 and then your mobile conversions I’m sure will be pretty good.

Dana: Yeah I think so, and I think whatever carts are working hardest on that whole mobile experience is probably, if I was picking right now today, I would look at that as my deciding factor, because it is amazing how much traffic is coming that way.

Steve: You know what’s funny right now is I think Android is actually, I’m getting more sales form Android users now than iPhone users. It wasn’t like that in the past.

Dana: Interesting, I haven’t actually looked at the user, I just always look at the mobile statistics.

Steve: In a way I actually don’t like offering too many payment options too, because it’s confusing, so I’m just hoping one person just comes out ahead so I can only implement one thing. Moving on, okay so we talked about the cart and you mentioned that you took this company on Amazon, and just from chatting with you prior to this interview you’ve a lot of success there.

So I was hoping to just talk about some of your strategies for growing this business on Amazon. Is there anything, well let’s start from the beginning, when you launched a product on Amazon for this business like what are some of the things that you’ve done that have been working?

Dana: I think our biggest thing is when we looked at the competition, and again it is on Amazon, it is definitely a lower competition, it is partly because it is a boring product, almost like …

Steve: Yes, an unsexy boring product that sells well.

Dana: Yeah all my businesses are very, very boring products, so the competition, nobody really was really making a full listing, they weren’t trying very hard. You know a lot of it was one picture and no details, just really simple listings. So we definitely had been schooled very well by many of my great friends and mentors who were telling me exactly how to do it, and it was just complete titles using every bullet point, writing a full paragraph description, and then use every picture spot.

There was no detail, I mean I was really scraping the bottom of the barrel to figure out what to write, because it’s actually hard to fill it out on boring products, to fill out everything, but we did. We figured out something we could say, you know whether it will be the material it’s made out of, definitely all sizing, colors, anything possible.

Steve: Would you say that the pictures made the biggest difference or [inaudible 00:23:32]?

Dana: I don’t know, you know, I don’t know, how would you know?

Steve: I guess the only way to know would be to just adjust it one by one which you probably didn’t do, right?

Dana: No, we just went at it full force and I think that’s a little bit how I do everything. It’s I’m going to go out full force with everything I know about the platform right now, so I sort out the best knowledge. I have great people advising me, listen to podcasts like yours and others, and just do what everybody says is working now.

Everything that I believe is good for a customer. I think I will take that back, I won’t do everything, like I personally hate all caps in the bullets, I just don’t like it. It’s personal thing, and I don’t think it’s good for the customer, and I think it’s against terms of services, isn’t it?

Steve: I don’t think so.

Dana: I’m not sure, yeah. Anyway I put it through 2 lenses of I go with what everybody who is succeeding is doing now what they say is working, and then I put it through the customer lens of I want to feel good when I look at the listing, that it’s really top notch. That’s how we do it, and we really do not skip any piece of information, we do everything.

Steve: I just want to let you know that tickets for the 2017 Sellers Summit are now on sale at sellerssummit.com. Now what is the Sellers Summit? It is the conference that I hold every year that specifically targets e-commerce entrepreneurs selling physical products online. Unlike other events that focus on inspirational stories, and high level BS, mine is a curriculum based conference where you will leave with practical and actionable strategies specifically for an e-commerce business.

In fact every speaker that I invite is deep in the trenches of their e-commerce business, entrepreneurs who are importing large quantities of physical goods, and not some high level guys who are overseeing their companies at 50,000 feet. The other thing I can also assure you is that the Sellers Summit will be small and intimate.

Last year we cut off ticket sales around 100 people, so this event will sell out quickly. This event caters to sellers of all levels, and if you are a beginner you will leave the Sellers Summit with a product to sell, potential vendors, and a road map for your business. If you are an existing shop owner you will learn proven techniques to take your business to the next level, whether it be through learning advance Amazon selling techniques, SEO, social media, pay per click advertizing, copywriting, email marketing, you name it.

If you are an e-commerce entrepreneur making more than $250,000 per year, we are also offering an exclusive mastermind with other top sellers. The Sellers Summit is going to be held in Fort Lauderdale, Florida from May 18th to May 20th, and for more information you can go to sellerssummit.com, once again sellerssummit.com or just Google it. Now back to the show.

Would you say that your listings are better than all your competitors at this point?

Dana: Of course they are.

Steve: Okay.

Dana: But then the other thing I think that is this is huge, and if you have an e-commerce site, I really feel like your competitive edge on Amazon, if you already have an e-commerce site, because you are going up against a lot of people who are only selling on Amazon, I mean all of us are. The one thing they don’t have, and I consider this like inside or training information, is they don’t actually know in advance how buyers buy, and we know that with an e-commerce site.

If we have one with history, and the site I bought had actually been around for 10 years, so I had a lot of data history. I know how, definitely B to B buyers buy based on our history, so if on Amazon, if there is something selling on there, and it sells in a 3 pack, but I know I sell 100 packs on our e-commerce site all day long, I can put 100 packs on Amazon with confidence that there are buyers for that.

I think that was one of our biggest difference is we had all this sales data from our e-commerce site, and we just used it the same way on Amazon, and that was one area that was probably been our biggest success is we sell larger volume, because we know there is buyers that buy larger volumes, but a lot of the things packaged previously on Amazon were smaller.

Steve: Interesting, so have you found that the competitors have started copying that model then?

Dana: Yeah, definitely.

Steve: Okay, and when you launched presumably you had less feedbacks, and that sort of thing from the other guys, did you end up doing any giveaways or anything in the beginning?

Dana: I think we did 2, and I stopped.

Steve: Two units?

Dana: Two yeah, and I stopped, and I said you know because we were making sales, so we did our model was pretty much, get the listings up, quality listings, turn on automatic ads, and wait until we get enough feedback that it gets better, and just we would use Feedback Genius to get the feedback, and it was really coming in slow, but in my mind I just said, don’t worry about that. We have enough work to do to get our listings up, to get them all written.

So let’s just focus on that, and we are going to let feedback take care of itself on these products. It has, and now, that’s why we are actually, I think we are seeing growth right now, we’ve only have been on for 8 months, so is that now our feedback is catching up with, you know we’ve got enough, and the sales volume is there.

Amazon is seeing good conversion rates, now seeing really enough feedback on each product that there is consistency, but we didn’t solicit any additional feedback other than if they bought it, they got the one email.

Steve: How much stock do you actually keep in Amazon’s warehouse?

Dana: Number of units or?

Steve: Not units, I guess months or whatever, in terms of time.

Dana: Oh time, we’ve been pushing that up, so we were only keeping 3 weeks, and we are trying to get all of our best sellers up to 8 weeks.

Steve: Okay, and in terms of getting additional product to your warehouse, like what’s your lead times usually?

Dana: Getting it into our warehouse before we send it to Amazon?

Steve: Like to making more step — yeah essentially yeah.

Dana: Two weeks is about all.

Steve: Okay so your turn around times are pretty quick, so…

Dana: Yes, very fast yeah.

Steve: Okay so why would you justify eight weeks worth of inventory when you can get stuff into — is it just because FBA is just taking a lot longer now?

Dana: Well going into the holiday, so our goal was to get it up to eight weeks, because we are heading into the holiday season.

Steve: Okay.

Dana: So but what we noticed was we only started with our best sellers. And I don’t have a correlation for this, but we only had three weeks supply and we pushed it — every time we pushed it more supply in, we kept selling more. Like our sales were going up kind of dramatically on the items that we thought we were stocking ahead, but actually the sales were kind of keeping up with it.

So every time we thought we would have four or six weeks in, then we would look at the numbers and we are like what the heck, we are back to three and four weeks, but it was sales velocity. So I’m kind of testing that without being overly analytical about it, and asking some people and different people were telling me that they’ve experienced around eight weeks is a good amount to keep in.

Steve: Okay I heard from Jeff Cohen, he is on the podcast that the more inventory you have, that’s like a signal to Amazon that they can push the sales a little more and not go out of stock, I was just curious. It sounds like you’ve kind of been experiencing that?

Dana: Yeah, we experienced it without me hearing that. So I had never heard that from anyone, we were just truly doing it to get ahead of the holidays, both for our workflow in-house, and because of FBA might slow down later. So we were just trying to be proactive, and then realized that we were getting huge sales bumps in the items that we were doing that on. So now of course I want to do it on everything, but…

Steve: Correct, are you selling as a vendor at all?

Dana: We did for a little bit, yes.

Steve: Okay, why did you stop?

Dana: Partly because I didn’t know — I didn’t set the case pack right, and their orders were coming too frequent and they were too small. So if I go back in — I will probably go back and do it again. But I was getting these like eight different orders a week from Amazon from like three of this, two of that, one of that and it was really annoying. But I realize now, I asked somebody why that was happening, and they said well you didn’t set the case pack. Other than that…

Steve: Can you describe that — sorry what’s a case pack?

Dana: I think instead of allowing them to order one at a time, say that they come 10 in a case or 12 in a case.

Steve: Oh got it okay.

Dana: So then they wouldn’t order that way.

Steve: I see, is it worth the hustle in general though? Your feeling with vendor, being a vendor?

Dana: I think so.

Steve: Okay.

Dana: Yeah, it takes a little bit off your plate; you are not worried about that listing. I wouldn’t do it with the listing I was super serious about. I just — I personally would want that control over the listing.

Steve: Okay and in terms of like the new ad features that you get for being a vendor, has that been worth it?

Dana: They are worth it is you don’t get a lot clicks on it, but they are definitely — the conversion rate on those ads is excellent. But you just — people have the same– those really look like ads I think on Amazon. So people have the same kind of ad blindness, they don’t get near as many clicks.

Steve: I see, okay so just regular…

Dana: In my category. I doubt that’s the same for everyone, but that’s how it is in my category.

Steve: Okay and in terms of this new business, since it’s kind of on the more boring side, I would imagine like social media channels aren’t as big of a deal?

Dana: Right, I don’t — yeah I’m not a big social media. So I think I’ll actually look at businesses that don’t need that kind of attention, but you are right. You could actually do really well on Pinterest with it, I just haven’t so…

Steve: Okay, and so in terms of the time that you are spending right now, in terms of percentages, what percentage would you say you are spending on Amazon versus just the site itself growing the B to B sales?

Dana: Definitively the majority of my time is focused on Amazon so…

Steve: Okay.

Dana: As far as growth time I would say I’m 80% Amazon, and only 20% looking at our own site. I do know what needs to be done on my own site, I have already done the analysis. I know the direction it needs to go, but every time I think I’m going to work on it, I kind of get excited about something on Amazon, I go that direction.

Steve: Because the sales are just coming in a lot faster, right?

Dana: Yeah, and it’s interesting and some of it is just because it’s new to me. So it just makes it more exciting than doing the old hut stuff of writing good quality content on our site and doing videos and things like that.

Steve: Okay and then so you don’t have any qualms about just continuing to go all in on Amazon versus spending a little bit more time on your own property?

Dana: Right now I do not, and the reason is because my B to B site, the ecommerce site is well established, and we have high repeat customers. And I do feel like the transition we made there is probably something to be said for kind of digesting the amount of changes we made in the last year on the site, because we re-platformed it. We changed how we shipped, we changed all the pricing, we changed a lot in the first four months. So it’s probably good that I have something else to work on, and I just couldn’t let the repeat customers get used to everything as it is now.

Steve: Did the site have a negative effect at all? Like did you get complaints from people who were just been long established?

Dana: No, no.

Steve: No.

Dana: No it was horrible; I don’t still even know why they were ordering.

Steve: Okay.

Dana: No I’m sure, and we didn’t get any like loving notes either — nobody said oh this is great, thanks so much for finally doing something, it’s just– but I know they are happier, I know. It was because our site was doing the same thing weirdly, and this is what I just said about using your insider knowledge on your site is our site was putting things in three packs and odd numbers of things, but people were ordering like 57, three packs.

Steve: I see okay.

Dana: And so one of the big changes we made when we restructured the site is to get everything on a base ten so you can order a ten pack, 100 pack or a 1000 pack. And so I think that was a little hair confusing for some customers, but we’ve gotten past it now so — and the site’s growing on its own. It’s up about 25% to 28% this year, so it’s doing good.

Steve: Is that the result of the redesign?

Dana: Well I think online advertising too.

Steve: Okay oh right. He wasn’t doing any ads?

Dana: Yeah we are doing shopping ads.

Steve: Okay.

Dana: And they are not huge, but they are nice, they are doing a good job.

Steve: Are you doing regular AdWords as well?

Dana: Yeah, we don’t get a lot through that. We are doing a little bit yes, but mostly it’s the shopping ads that are bringing in some nice repeat B to B customers.

Steve: Okay, and then once you have one of these B to B customers they just hit the re-order button after that?

Dana: Right exactly.

Steve: Okay nice. Let’s switch gears a little bit and talk about this Amazon’s Women’s Conference that you had the opportunity to go to. Pretty amazing I think there is only 200 women there, right?

Dana: Yeah.

Steve: And you were one of the lucky ones?

Dana: I was.

Steve: So can we talk a little bit about some of the key takeaways that you got from that conference, because I understand there was a lot of Amazon people — Amazon developers and people in charge of a lot of the features there, right?

Dana: Right, so all of the speakers other than one panel of sellers, all the speakers were Amazon employees. So it wasn’t a tactical conference, it was more just an insight into the people and the attitude behind the marketplace. The developers that developed seller central and the seller’s app, anybody that’s doing anything that’s forward facing to the sellers on the marketplace, or the speakers pretty much.

Steve: Okay.

Dana: And then upper level management in the marketplace. So the VP of the marketplace and things like that. So it was really an insight into how Amazon sees the marketplace. And I think my hugest takeaway was just a new respect for how Amazon values the marketplace sellers, and their desire to help us succeed, and I did give you…

Steve: Okay I mean that’s not any evident right now and what they’ve done the last couple of weeks even.

Dana: It is evident or it’s not?

Steve: It’s evident.

Dana: Okay yeah.

Steve: Yeah.

Dana: But sometimes if you only interact in seller communities or forums, you hear a lot of fear and negativity about Amazon, and it’s sometimes hard when you are — since I’m new on it this year to hear a lot of negativity, and a lot of people saying, I’m not going to do business on there, or I have taken everything off of their — and the bad things that can happen.

It was really refreshing to actually just put that down from a seller perspective and hear from the people who are managing the marketplace. And they really are working hard, and making it incredibly useful for sellers and to make it — I mean obviously their end result is the customer, so their prime customers are who is they want to have the big wins, but they know that the market place is part of that.

Since they want to be the everything store, and they want to have every item available in the world, you know a catalogue of everything, they know they need the market place to do that in addition to the other things they do.

Steve: Specifically what are some of the things that they have planned specifically to help sellers?

Dana: Some of the big things they announced, and they said the biggest one that actually got a round of applause when they said it is that there would be brand central coming out instead of a more robust brand registry, and that once you have proved who you are, that you will be able to lock your brand, so other people couldn’t come on the listings, and that will be huge as we all know.

Steve: That’s already started happening actually in the last couple of weeks.

Dana: Right and right now is just for the big brands.

Steve: Correct some of the little guys too actually from what I have heard.

Dana: Oh okay, I didn’t realize that, so I don’t know how that’s going to shake out, they didn’t mention that, but I know on the big brands it’s, I mean you are paying a gating fee is what I’ve read, is that what you’ve heard as well?

Steve: Mm-hmm.

Dana: Yeah, so I don’t know if it is always, if we are going to pay to lock that, and or not, or if it’s just going to be later become something that once you prove it you can lock it.

Steve: Are they doing anything about people just copying and listing on a different skew and listing it as far as you know?

Dana: They didn’t mention anything.

Steve: Okay, but in terms …

Dana: They said that brand owners were the fastest growing population of sellers, and that they were trying to develop tools to help them, and make it a better selling experience.

Steve: One thing I did want to ask you since we are in this topic is that you mentioned earlier that you sell wholesale, but does that imply that you are using your wholesalers brand, or you are putting your own brand on your products?

Dana: We are putting our own brand, because we assemble kits in a sense.

Steve: I see.

Dana: It is not a one off, we don’t buy it as it is and send it straight into Amazon, we actually combine it with something else where the buyers buy.

Steve: Is the wholesaler selling its own products on Amazon as well?

Dana: They are.

Steve: They are, so you are competing against the wholesaler?

Dana: I am.

Steve: Interesting, and they are just not doing as good of a job?

Dana: Right, so again it goes back to that understanding the customer, and I’m possibly going after a different type of customer than they are based on the knowledge of what we know works on our website. I think that’s where a lot of people, they are looking– if you look at Amazon as a standalone place and you try to do your market research there, and you don’t use other information, you are really limiting your success or your ability to succeed.

Since so many of your listeners are e-commerce stores, I mean really look at it through the lens of why are people buying on your site today, and truthfully you know they would rather buy on Amazon, the user experience. Even the best of sites, yours is probably exceptional Steve, but mine is not, my user experience on my site is not.

Steve: Well someone trashed my site at summer tree which resulted in me having to safe face and redesign it.

Dana: Great, but Steve now it is exceptional, yours is exceptional, but just from– let’s just take prime as just this simple, the free 2 day shipping. It is hard for any of us as site owners to compete with that. If you think about your customer from the point of view that they would actually rather complete this transaction on Amazon, and that’s what I think about.

That’s how I looked at Amazon, and I was just, all I was trying to do is replicate the experience of buying on our site as far as what they got onto Amazon. But if I looked at Amazon by itself I wouldn’t see the same products or quantities being sold on Amazon, so I guess I could have taken away from that or I will fail, oh there is no market for this because I can’t, you know when I open Jungle Scout there is no product that matches that. That doesn’t mean it won’t work, because you already have proof it worked on your site.

Steve: Actually it’s funny for our site, and for our products too, we’ve listed some stuff that has had no traction whatsoever on Amazon meaning no one else is selling it, but when we started listing them they were selling. Yeah you are right, just because no one is selling doesn’t necessarily mean it is not going to work.

Dana: No, and especially if you know it is selling on your site. I mean that’s just priceless data to have.

Steve: Have any of the products that you have listed for this new site, has anyone just copied you or your packaging, and have driven the prices down overtime, or you are still on that honeymoon period?

Dana: No, I’m still on the honeymoon period, there are some copies, but we haven’t slid all the way to the bottom yet.

Steve: Okay, any other key takeaways from the conference that are just worth noting for people?

Dana: The B to B side, so Amazon business is truly Amazon’s big push, so they have related it this way. They said there are 3 pillars inside Amazon as far as how they make money; the marketplace sellers, AWS, and their web services, and prime customers. That is what they consider their 3 pillars. They think number 4 will be Amazon business, and they see the B to B market, their number they used is 10 times larger than the B to C market.

That’s accurate if you bring anything else outside of you know from like internet retailer has now B to B division of internet retailer, and they said the same thing, so it’s a much larger market. One thing they said and I found this interesting is the millenials, their prime users, there is 2 times as many millenials as prime users, which makes sense because of that media side of prime. But they are saying when we look at the business marketplace, those saying millenials are now buyers for the government and buyers for big companies.

They are the workforce; the millenials are now the largest workforce I think as well. They want the same buying experience as their prime account. They don’t even understand why if you are a business buyer and you have to go to [inaudible 00:47:19] to get hardware and Office Depot to get your office supplies, and then some other site to get something else because those are your B to B buying accounts, or say Uline.

They don’t want to do that, and they want to go to Amazon, and order at one place and get it in 2 days. Amazon sees the growth of where you can go with B to B, and obviously they tried a couple of years ago, but I think they came back from Amazon supply and they regrouped, and they are going to change, they are going to totally disrupt B to B buying I think. They currently have 400,000 business buyers registered. They are actively feet on the ground going– Amazon is going to trade shows, and doing sales in government institutions, hospitals, universities.

I’ve read recently they said one of their business users has 100,000 users in their account because what they designed on the back end of Amazon business was the ability to have these multi level accounts with structure that allows people to approve other people’s orders. So if you got a maintenance personnel in the field ordering supplies, gets approved by somebody in acquisitions or a PO number gets attached to it.

They are going to majorly change, and if you think about it, if you sell anything, and it doesn’t have to be a pure business product. For some reason at the conference they used the example of a lingerie company, and they were getting these business orders.

Steve: Interesting.

Dana: Yeah, they said, I mean businesses buy gifts, businesses buy everything. So to be registered on Amazon business is you really should be, so right now they said that there is only 37,000 sellers registered on Amazon business.

Steve: I recently registered as a result of you telling me to, and how can I tell if anything has happened, and what are some other things that I could be doing with this business account that I just signed up for?

Dana: You can see it in your reports, but right now we are still seeing, and I talked to one other people on Amazon business about this, and they said they are still seeing a ton of small businesses are still using their prime account. So you won’t see B to B necessarily, but they did break it out in the reports just in the last 2 months maybe, but when you go into any of the reports on Amazon sellers central, you will see an extra column for B to B. It will tell you number of units.

Steve: Interesting.

Dana: It’s right next, they’ve added a column for B to B on units and volumes of everything, so you can see it, and I think right now ours is only running 3%, but it’s going to change. So some of the things they talked about having coming once, right now you can upload different prices for business buyers, which is great.

Steve: Okay, I see.

Dana: Those prices will show up in search results if someone has logged in as a business account, so your regular customers won’t see it, but if they log in as a business they could see a different price. You can include a quantity discount schedule, so buy one of these at this, but if you buy 5 the price goes to this, if you buy 10 the price goes to this.

Steve: You know what’s interesting about this business account is I signed up for, and I accidentally signed up as a business buyer, and it was just completely free, I didn’t have to do anything. So I’m just curious like even a regular user, why don’t they just sign up as a business and start ripping some of the discounts that some of these businesses …

Dana: I think you have to put your tax payer or ID on it when you sign up as a business.

Steve: Sure yeah, but you can also include your social for that, right, so interesting.

Dana: Well if you think about though on the single unit level, Amazon is really competitive. We’re already at a competitive price point for one. I mean I think most people are, you are not going to see huge discounts, all you are going to see it on Amazon business is if you need a 100 or 50. If you buy 1 filing cabinet, if you want to buy that as a consumer with your prime account, there is probably not much room for that vendor to go down in price. We are already pretty, everybody is competitive on price.

Steve: Yeah, so I’m just curious for you, are you listing it at the same price for single unit quantities?

Dana: No we are doing discounts.

Steve: You are doing discounts, just even, okay, interesting.

Dana: I think what we are going to see if you– and it has been a little more time logged in as a business account just to see what the experience is like. I think we are going to see some huge, huge advances on that level, and there is already a lot of features on the business side, you know from POs Amazon has a lending where they will set up finance accounts for the big customers so they can do purchase orders, so I think …

Steve: Yeah, that’s going to be huge.

Dana: There is a lot behind it, and then they also have credentials so you should look at the credentials and see what you qualify for. I think there is over 18 different quality and diversity credentials on the business side as the seller, so like we are a woman known small business, and we are also a small business, so for any government or university institution has to meet their diversity goals. If they have to buy every government, federal government contract is supposed to spend 5% with either small businesses or under different credentials.

Amazon prime or Amazon businesses, you are giving them the ability to see those credentials, and they are working on getting it to– so if I was say buying for Boeing Corporation, and I knew I needed to hit my 5% diversity goal, I could actually on Amazon business say, “Show me, I need to buy file cabinets, show me people who are women owned small business or small businesses so I can hit my diversity criteria.”

Steve: Right and you also get to go to the Amazon’s women’s conference because you are a woman too.

Dana: Exactly, so you would want to put that on there, but the credentialing is going to be huge because it is a nightmare for them to find credential businesses and they have to go through– some don’t go often the ways they do it now. So can you imagine that — and then they are going to get a report from Amazon at the end of the month or at the end of the quarter, end of the year to show how much they spend with small business sellers. It’s probably huge, that’s huge.

Steve: Because breaking with the government is a pain, right?

Dana: Yes.

Steve: Dana, so going forward where are you going to be spending most of your time growing on your business this new one?

Dana: We are going to continue on Amazon, I don’t see that stopping, and we will continue doing what we can on our site. So I have one area that needs a lot of work, one category on our site. So I hope to get to that in the short term.

Steve: Okay in terms, so just mainly more skews?

Dana: On Amazon or on our site?

Steve: On Amazon.

Dana: More skews on Amazon, but less skews on our site actually.

Steve: Interesting.

Dana: I’m a gross margin hawk. So the area that we’ve identified on our site that we think has the most potential is just from looking at gross margins. So we are looking at what’s already selling the best with the best margins. And there is a handful of items all in the same category. I think if I develop that category a little stronger with a lot more information, that we are going to have a big win and we won’t have to increase sales that much on the site, because we are going to be increasing margins more rapidly.

Steve: And then on the flipside you are going to be removing skews that aren’t selling that well, and are you going to be listing those on Amazon?

Dana: No, if we list it we are going to keep them in both places. I do think there are some brand awareness that we are gaining on Amazon.

Steve: Interesting okay.

Dana: So no if — well I won’t have something on Amazon that’s not on our site. And it’s — at that point there is no problem because we have the inventory, so that doesn’t bother me.

Steve: Okay.

Dana: But if I don’t consider it worthy on our site and we are not selling it on Amazon, then it’ll go away from those places.

Steve: Okay, cool.

Dana: Or if it has a pain in the ass kind of factor to it, then it might go away in both places.

Steve: Like kitting like extensive kitting requirements or something like that?

Dana: Yeah or customers don’t understand it, and it just requires too much customer support, it doesn’t work well. So we use a lot of the same Amazon principles on our site. If it causes too much friction and we can’t overcome that friction by making our instructions better or labeling the product, then we might not keep the product.

Steve: Okay and you guys are pretty lean too right; you just have like a handful of people?

Dana: Right.

Steve: Right like three or four or something like that?

Dana: Yeah, it’s five or six now but yeah, but yeah we’re lean.

Steve: Dana we’ve already been chatting for quite a while, and I want to be respectful of your time. Where can people find you if they have any questions for just either on the buy side or the Amazon side, or some of the things that you are working on?

Dana: My blog that I never ever write on is 44ideas.net.

Steve: Wait to advertize that.

Dana: You’ll see like a year or two year old article on there, but I do that is my email, so 44ideas.net, you can find me there. And same place on Twitter and those kinds of things.

Steve: Cool, well Dana thanks for coming on the show, I learned a lot especially about the new Amazon stuff that’s coming along. And basically your thought process in how you grow your business is that you acquire, it’s been great.

Dana: It’s been fun, thanks for having me, thanks for all you do. I can’t tell you how much I’ve learned from the people you talk to, and you as well. I mean just that you bring the conversations out so people can hear these all tidbits, so thank you.

Steve: Thanks Dana, all right take care.

Dana: All right.

Steve: Hope you found that episode useful. What’s interesting about Dana’s story is that she has taken on completely different tactics to grow her various ecommerce acquisitions, which just goes to show that there is never one single cookie cutter strategy. You got to look at your business objectively, and figure out what needs to improve.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode135. Once again I want to thank sitelock.com for sponsoring this episode. If you own your own hosted online store, or any website for that matter that handles monetary transactions, you should give SiteLock a look. They can also help your site with site speed issues as well. Did you know that ecommerce sites that take longer than 5 seconds to load often shed customers?

SiteLock offers a service called TrueSpeed which is a content delivery network that can increase download speeds by up to 50%. So go check out SiteLock.com today at sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob, and get your first three months free. Once again that’s sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob.

Once again if you are interested in starting your own online business, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com, and sign up for my free 6 day mini course on how to start a profitable online store. Sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

134: Email Marketing Best Practices For Small Companies With Susan Su

Email Marketing Best Practices For A Small Company With Susan Su

Today I’m excited to have Susan Su on the show. Susan has worked with a bunch of well known entrepreneurs including Ramit Sethi of I Will Teach You To Be Rich and Noah Kagan of AppSumo.

She has a ton of experience with email and content marketing specifically targeting small businesses and is a partner at 500 Startups today.

Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • How to break through the noise given the average person gets 500 marketing emails per month
  • Best practices for improving the open and click through rate
  • Copywriting tips for maximum engagement
  • How to improve the deliverability rate
  • Best practices to improve the conversion rate of emails

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. If you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free 6-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin, I want to give a quick shout out to sitelock.com for being a sponsor of the show. SiteLock is the leader in website security, and protects over 8 million websites by monitoring them from malicious activity 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. So here is the thing, most online business owners never think about security until they get hacked. My online store got hacked long ago, and it was the most miserable experience ever.

I basically lost thousands of dollars as I frantically tried to patch the issues, and get my store back online as quickly as possible. In the event that you get hacked, call sitelock.com, and they will help you out, or even better protect your site before you get hacked. Right now you can get 3 months of SiteLock free if you go to sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. Now on to the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m excited to have Susan Sue on the show. Now it was actually pretty random how Susan and I started talking. Recently she spoke at the Unbounce conference and used one of my emails as an example in her talk. And one of my friends who was actually at the conference let me know that I was mentioned by Susan. And so I looked her up, noticed that she was a Stanford alumnus with a lot of mutual friends, and so I reached out.

Anyway Susan has worked with a bunch of well known entrepreneurs including Ramit Sethi of I Will Teach You To Be Rich doing marketing. She’s also developed email marketing campaigns for AppSumo, Noah Kagan’s company, and right now she is at 500 Startups. But the reason why I decided to have Susan on the show today is to talk about email, and her content marketing experience. And with that welcome to the show Susan, how are you doing today?

Susan: I’m doing great, thank you so much for having me Steve.

Steve: Yeah, before we start give us the quick background of how you kind of got started with — I Will Teach You To Be Rich followed by AppSumo, and then how did you guys hook up?

Susan: Well it’s a really funny story. I actually was already — I was in a job at Google at the time when I first met Ramit. And I wasn’t very satisfied with my job like Google. Not that there is anything wrong with Google, but I’m just not a really big cooperate type of person, and I was looking for a new job. And after months and months of what seemed like picking on a part time job of job searching, I finally got contacted by a recruiter for a mid kind of mid stage, I think post series B startup in San Francisco in my dream city.

I was living in South and Silicon Valley at the time. This recruiter said, hey we got a really great job for you, we would love to bring you into the company and so we started talks. A couple of weeks later they had an offer for me and I had been reading this book about negotiation and about how women never negotiates their salaries.

So I thought I’m not going to let that happen to me, I’m going to negotiate. However, because I was very inexperienced and it really was my first time ever doing that, and I hadn’t practiced, I basically botched it. I named — I did the number one mistake which was I didn’t do my research. I named a random number, I don’t know where and I basically lost all of my true confidence and just kind of was very random things random things.

So I went to Ramit for help not because I knew Ramit, but because I had read about him in the New York Times, a trusted source. And I said, “Hey Ramit, you don’t know me, but I also went to Stanford,” and I explained to him the situation and I said, hey is there anyway you can help. And he actually replied within like I don’t know 10, 15 minutes.

And he said I’m willing to help you if you will meet me at the this random dally in the middle of Redwood Shores which for anybody that knows the Bay Area Redwood Shores is not a major upper center of startup activity, it’s pretty in the middle of nowhere. In the middle of the day — Oh sorry it wasn’t a random dally; it was kind of like a diner or a denise type place. In the middle of the day and you will let me record you. And I thought I’m going to do it, this is worth it.

And I guess he was so impressed with my ability to get past his barriers that he put up sort of as test that we made friends, we kept talking, we talked more about negotiation. I did a bunch of free work for him which I always think is really key if you are trying to get to know high potential entrepreneurs and founders. And some months later I ended up leaving my job, and working with him fulltime.

Steve: Okay and then for him what were you doing, were you doing email stuff?

Susan: We were doing some email stuff; we were doing a lot of different tasks. He had just published — he had just finished the book I will Teach You To Be Rich. And I just published it, and had marketed it to become its own New York Times in Amazon and Wall Street Journal best seller.

Not thanks to any efforts of his publisher, but all thanks to his own marketing efforts, which I thought was really incredible. And everybody at that time was saying hey Ramit, when is the next book going to come out? And he would just basically laugh quietly behind their backs, because he could see that they didn’t understand that really it really wasn’t about the book.

The book was actually just content marketing for his bigger business vision. And that vision included doing a lot more online education, a lot more community building into the kind of media and course empire that he is running today. So I was working with him to build up those first couple of products, one called Earn 1K…

Steve: I was an affiliate for that a long time ago.

Susan: Oh yeah there you go. And there is a whole lot like email marketing was a huge component of it, but it wasn’t just email marketing. I mean a lot of it was creating the content itself, trying different continuity programs, trying different landing pages. So yeah it’s when you are very early, and you are just kind of running a lot of experiments at high velocity, usually the teams can’t really afford to have such specialization as like, okay this person only will work on email marketing. Actually it’s more like that person’s got to do email marketing as one of the 10 things they need to accomplish today.

Steve: Yeah, jack of all trades basically.

Susan: Right.

Steve: Yes so but I – the reason why I came across you was you’ve been speaking at conferences lately and mainly focusing on email and content marketing. And so I know for me at least email, the automation aspect is key, because I don’t have much time and I don’t have an army of employees.

And I kind of wanted to talk today about some of the best practices that you kind of talked about, or have been talking about on improving the open and click through rate of emails and also the delivery rate. And I was hoping if you could just go over some of the best practices that you’ve been taking about.

Susan: Sure, I would like to start with the best practice; I think it’s a little bit counter intuitive, one of the biggest enemies to your open rate. And actually I haven’t really talked about this at any conferences or publicly yet, but I think it’s worth noting. And you specifically reminded me of it Steve, because you mentioned the word automation. One of the biggest enemies is actually believe it or not it’s actually not emailing frequently enough.

So many people are afraid at least in a startup world, now I have advised dozens or probably by now over 100 startups on their email marketing. And most of the founders that I encounter are specifically afraid of being too spammy. Those are like that’s their exact words. But is it going to be too spammy if I email them this week and next week, something like that.

Or if I email them twice a month, is it too spammy? Actually what they don’t understand is that it’s much spammier if you email your recipient once in a blue moon, and that affects both your open rates, and well it affects primarily your deliverability rate and it affects your open rates as well, because you are this kind of weird out of the blue unfamiliar sender.

The number one like kind of step zero thing that they find and you can do to help your email marketing efforts, is to set a frequency that’s probably about twice the frequency that you would naturally feel comfortable with, just assuming that most people err on the side of being risk averse.

Steve: What would you say would be the minimum frequency that you recommend?

Susan: It depends on the type of business. It can really vary, but let’s say you are doing an ecommerce, I would say you need to — especially when you first meet somebody, I mean sorry I always think about it in terms of meeting people. When somebody first subscribes to your list to have at least four touches per week, or even five or more depending on what type of category your business is in, and what type of subscribe that is.

But if you are only having one touch with them this week and then one touch with them next week, that’s too far apart for you to stay top of mind. So most people receive over 500 marketing messages in their inboxes per month, and that’s not even your highest value customers. That could be even higher number if you are emailing people that subscribe to a lot of products, or that are really active consumers.

And so to cut through all of that noise, if you are sending one email a week or three emails a month, that’s three out of 500 plus or 600 marketing messages that they are getting. Just the sheer percentage is so, so low. How do you expect to really stay relevant to their experience?

Steve: So this is like the Facebook newsfeed in away, right? Only a small percentage of your messages are getting through, so you want to post more often just on the chance of one of them will actually get through, is that accurate?

Susan: That’s right, and it’s interesting because everybody kind of gets that about Facebook, and well I won’t say everybody, but more people understand that about Facebook and Twitter. I think people are less afraid of posting more often or repeating themselves on those channels.

But for some reason when it comes to email we think we have this — we are in this private room; we are in a one on one conversation with that recipient, which just by the sheer numbers is not true. So it actually in reality resembles something much more like a feed, and much less like that one on one conversation you are picturing. They are not pouring over your every word.

Steve: What would you say would be the average opening click through rate of ecommerce email?

Susan: It depends on the exact category of ecommerce, but if you are doing below 20% you can probably stand to do better, if you are doing above 20% then great. And the thing that I really like to watch for besides just open rate, the sheer open rate is really your drop off between open rates from email to email in your sequence.

Steve: Okay.

Susan: So if you can hold steady from your first email, your second, your welcome email, and your first few emails into your nth email, and when I say hold steady I mean have a delta of less than 10%, then you are doing a great job. Because you are not losing the people that are opening your email, and actually you are still finding a way to market to that same customer and continue to sell them the back end or whatever it is that you are selling.

Steve: So when you are talking about the sequence, are you talking about like the first engagement sequence for an ecommerce store?

Susan: Did you say sequence as the first word there?

Steve: Yeah.

Susan: Yeah, so I always advocate and this is again related to automation, before you start emailing, really map out what your drip is going to be, so that it’s not up to on a Wednesday you think, oh gosh it’s Wednesday again, I have got to email my people, what am I going to send them today? And that just puts up such a barrier, and it also makes it feel like emailing is this like really like pulling teeth kind of thing, and it’s bothering them and all these kind of negative aspects of emailing.

Instead what I advocate is setting up the whole journey as far in advance before hand as possible. And then you know okay when somebody goes into this journey it’s like going into the labyrinth in a positive way. Not the negative way of labyrinth, but the kind of that really makes people reflect more and arrive at some kind of positive conclusion.

And so what I would — and that also helps you to automate your workflow and your operational process for creating the emails. So I would say, okay here is what I know. I know that I have got to send four emails in the first week, and the second week I want to send four emails. In the third week I want to send two emails. By the fourth week I’m going to put them on what I think of as the back pointer which is a weekly digest.

And this would be maybe for like a smaller to mid size earlier type of company, maybe not exactly your Amazons, or your other largely ecommerce that’s going to be emailing at a very high frequency, but yeah but something smaller. And so knowing that you’ve got about 10 to 12 emails that you want put out, just seeing it all from this advantage point before you get started you realize, okay great I have got 12 emails I need to write, that’s not that many.

And try to write them all in one go so that they really form a cohesive journey. It’s not automation per see in that you don’t have to do anything, but the sending of those emails it becomes an automated process once it’s under way, because you’ve already created the content, and then now you can just tweak things like the subject line, the times, and a segmentation.

Steve: So to just kind of summarize what you were saying in terms of frequency, you recommend sending emails out almost like on a daily basis for like the first several emails, and then gradually reducing frequency, is that what I heard?

Susan: I do and that’s just the most basic formulae. I would say if you want to get more sophisticated or if you are more sophisticated, or you have more resources to dedicate to it, I actually would create, I would advice creating segments based on the type of user it is. So if it is somebody that’s really active versus somebody that’s less active, you know people that are less active, it’s probably not going to activate them to send them more and more and more emails.

However somebody that’s really active, you know you probably don’t really need to do that kind of tapering that you would otherwise be doing for your general list. If somebody is really active and they are really into it, and they are opening your every email in those first 4 emails, well why not keep going. Again for each person’s business it really depends on how many resources you have available to get really nuanced, but you can do a lot more with it.

Steve: So you’re basically segmenting people who are clicking on the links within your email, and you are emailing those guys more often, whereas people who don’t open as often you might want to taper back the frequency.

Susan: Yeah, I would certainly based on clicks, based on the actions, and I’ll also even just segments just based on opens. So I feel a lot of times people open but they don’t click, or better yet they open a bunch of times, so if they open a bunch of times, but they don’t click, that is telling me so much information.

That’s telling me they are quite engaged, or even maybe they are forwarding it to their friends, and they are not taking action either because it is not appropriate to the device they open their email on, maybe they are mobile or what not, or maybe they are just a little bit unsure, but they like me. They are opening, so there is more that you can do with that segment as well.

Steve: What about some tips on improving the open rate and the click through rate?

Susan: Well I think the number one thing you can do, the simplest thing that you can do to improve your open rate which will also improve your click through rate by default is to make sure your sender identity is verified. It’s really, really simple, you can tell if the sender identity is verified or not. If you send yourself an email, and then you click, and there is a down arrow, if you are using Gmail for example there is a little down arrow next to the sender name, and it will say who it’s mailed by, and who it’s signed by.
Now let’s say you want to send an email from steve@mywifequitherjob.com, and you span that little down window, and it says, “It’s not actually mailed by mywifequitherjob.com. It is mailed or signed by a different domain, and mailed by different domain.”

That actually affects your deliverability rate, and it actually affects your open rates. So I have seen companies see jumps of up to 30%, they have really bad open rates before, but up to 30%, and very typically 5-10% that’s much more normal, just by verifying their domain. So it is basically saying, “Yes I’m the owner of this domain, and yes I’m authorized to send email from it.”

Super simple, it’s just a technical thing, you need to go into your domain manager, and just you know put in a couple of update or see name records, and you don’t have to be technical to do it. In fact all you have to do is Google your email marketing tool that you are using, let’s say it is MailChimp plus DKIM, or sender verification, and then just do the instructions.

There will be a help center article about it, but a lot of people just don’t know it exists, a lot of really smart people. Even people who consider themselves marketers, they overlook this one simple administrative detail, and they are missing out on a lot of opens through that. So I always recommend you do that first before you think what fancy subject lines you can get going.

Steve: Just for the listeners out there, so SPF and then DKIM, did you say SPF, I was putting words in your mouth, sorry.

Susan: Yes SPF as well, and don’t worry about what it stands for, don’t get too caught up in trying to understand how it all works. Just go to the help center article for your email marketing tool, follow the instructions, and then you will never have to think about it about it again, just do it once and you will never have to think about it again.

Steve: Actually even better, you can just call up like AWeber or CovertKit or whatever, and they will take care of that for you. One thing that I’m putting words in your mouth again, but this is good stuff in your presentation, there is just this place called mail-tester.com where you can actually send yourself a test email to see if everything was actually in fact working.

Susan: Yeah, I always say there are more sophisticated, and paid tools out there, mail-tester is a really great free one. You can just check your sender score on a scale of 1-10. You should be aiming for a 9 or above. If you are not at 9 or above, then there is a lot more that you can probably improve in terms of your both deliverability rates and your open rates.

And the main reason that you wouldn’t be at a 9 or above is if you are getting a lot of hard bounces, you are sending to an unclean list, or you are on perhaps some black list, for you know somebody marked you as spam whether on purpose or accidentally. Hey it happens, but thing is to make sure you clean it up and get off those lists, and you can quickly bring your score up to spike, little bit of decent clean up, you can quickly bring your score back up to a 9 or even close to a 10.

Steve: I’m just curious in terms of open rate, like I get a lot of emails where I see my name in the subject line. Since I send out a lot of emails though, I know that this was just a tactic where I entered in my name when I signed up. Do you recommend people do that today?

Susan: Actually I don’t because you know Steve if we were emailing each other about this podcast, coordinating things, and when you emailed me you cannot write me an email that says subject line Susan doing this podcast. You don’t use the first person; you don’t use the person’s first name in the subject line when you are writing to somebody that you really know, where that’s actually important to you.

I don’t put my mom’s name in the subject line when I write to her, or my friends or my colleagues. It’s very unnatural, in fact now instead of a personalization flag which it’s intended to be, it now works as a promotion flag. You know, okay I get it, this one is a marketer that’s using first name in the subject line, they’re using that first name tag.

Instead I recommend what I call next level personalization which is using things like people’s company name, because a lot of times if you know where somebody works you can use their company name to further personalize the subject line.

Steve: Give me an example.

Susan: Probably an example that I saw once from HubSpot a couple of months ago was, is 500 Startups landing page doing well? I thought, “Oh my God, I need to open this because this is about work, this is about my job, it’s my job to open this.” Actually it went to my personal email address, it went to my Gmail, but it got my attention immediately.

I get tons of marketing messages in my Gmail every day, and that one got my attention immediately, because you know before I could even think about it my brain had already been triggered into that oops work thing, go to open. I was already I think three quarters all the way through the email before I realized it was a mass marketing message.

Steve: How did they pull that off without collecting your info at some point though?

Susan: They do, but so, HubSpot does collect your info, and I had forgotten. So that’s the tricky thing, a lot of times people enter their information in various places. If it is to download a special e-book, you know they have a special webbing page for that, I had entered my email at some point, and I just you know I straight up forgot. Look at me, I’ve got 20 tabs open on my browser right now, how I’m I going to remember if I gave you my company name, or my city or whatever it is?

By the way city is another great way to do next level personalization, because people’s eyes are on the lookout for Miami, San Francisco, Fort Lauderdale wherever it is that they live, they are used to looking for that as a way to look out for content that’s highly relevant to them.

Steve: What’s your view on collecting all this extraneous information versus just getting the sign up?

Susan: I think it’s important to just get the sign up in the beginning. It’s the most important, just get the sign up, and you know just in the HubSpot example they didn’t collect the extra information right up front. They collected it later on when they enticed me with other cool e-books or free content that I wanted to check out, because honest to God did seem really valuable, but in order to access that information I had to add in more details about myself, like my company, my location, my job, my job title and all that stuff.

Steve: Interesting, so what you are suggesting then is to just to get the email in the beginning and later on gradually collect more information by giving away even better offers.

Susan: Right, so don’t make the wall too high in the beginning, and also don’t think that the first opt-in is one and the only opt-in that you’ll ever be going to have in your final. It’s really a series of continually having people self qualify themselves into different segments and different engagement buckets.

Steve: Along the same lines what’s your view on single versus double opt-in?

Susan: You know it’s hard to get double opt-in, it does create an extra layer, but it’s so hard because as a marketer I just want to get that email as quickly as possible. I really want that myself, but on the other hand I do see that when it’s double opt-in the results are outstandingly better, and you will get much higher deliverability rates, you will get much higher open rates.

At the end of the day it’s like, are you really– don’t get pulled in by the vanity matrix. So what is your matrix in this case, is it your subscriber list size, or is it your open rates, or is it– what is it that really matters to you? Does the open rate matter to you that much, does the subscriber list size matter to you that much, or do at the end of the day the conversions or the buys really matter to you the most?

You can have actually higher revenue amount with a smaller list if your list is really engaged, if 100% of those emails are going through, and if 60% of that list is opening your emails. I would rather have that personally than a huge list with low open rates, low click through rates, and dismal engagement rates.

Either way I’m very enticed, it’s just like short terms wins. I want to get the email right now. More and more I’m trying to encourage all the companies that I work with to go with double opt-in. By the way there are some things you can do to encourage the opt-in to complete, so I recommend people to include very clear instructions and motivation on the thank you page after they sign up, after your subscriber signs up to direct them to complete that second level of opt-in.

Steve: What’s a good example of motivation?

Susan: A good example of a motivation is if they sign up to get a download or get some offer gift, just remind them that where it is and to remind them that, “Hey you know go ahead and confirm the email, otherwise we won’t be able to send to you, so you can actually put the offer at the other end of the double opt-in. We won’t be able to send to you your free e-book or your swipe file or your tool kit or whatever it is.”

Another way to do it is also just, I’ve seen more and more marketers do this, I don’t know if you are doing this yourself Steve, but I’ve seen people link directly to the confirmation email search result in people’s Gmail inbox, and their main inbox.

Steve: Oh interesting, okay.

Susan: Does that …

Steve: I have not tried that, no, is that working well? That might be something I’ll try.

Susan: I think it works, I think it also can’t hurt, and it’s really simple to implement, and even if not all of your subscribers are using Gmail, even if it only gets you like 5% or 10% more opt-in, that is 5% or 10% more double opt-in, and I think that’s worth trying no matter what.

Steve: Interesting, okay, so this link only works for Gmail though, right?

Susan: It only works for Gmail; well I think you have to decide. I don’t think it would look good on the landing page to have a bunch of different options on there, and so …

Steve: Yeah that’s what I was thinking.

Susan: You need to make a gut check, and say, “Okay well Gmail is probably going to be the most important one for me, so I’m just going to link it to Gmail and everybody else, or well it won’t work for them, but at least I will get that 5% more Gmail subscribers which are more valuable demo anyway.”

Steve: Interesting, what are your views on using like these trick triggers in subject lines, so for example like pretending like it was forwarded to you or pretending that you are applying to an existing email, what is your feeling on that?

Susan: I think it depends on how you use them, they work really, really well for me personally, but I wouldn’t use them for every type of email. For example, I think it has to be really in context, and it has to make sense; it has to be natural as well. For example if I want somebody to RSVP to a webinar, and the first email, you know I send the first email about the webinar, and then a whole bunch of people don’t see it.

Let’s say it gets an open rate of 40% which is excellent already, but 60% of those people who got that email didn’t see it. I think that would be the perfect opportunity to actually go back and say, “Hey forward, I just want to make sure you didn’t miss it.”
The reason why it makes sense is because in the first place that first email was an invite, and so it’s a natural language, it’s a natural way that we would use our email with our colleagues, with our friends. We would forward invites, and say, “Hey I just want to make sure you didn’t miss this meet up. Hey I just want to make sure you didn’t miss this branch, or this webinar or whatever it is.”

I probably wouldn’t do it if it’s you know something like a direct a sales email, like forward, hey the hard sales here and now or something like that. That wouldn’t really make sense just because it doesn’t fit in with the natural way that we would use forward and RE in our personal email, but the fact of the matter is it does work, as long as you are being genuine and outright spammy, it does work.

Steve: What about in terms of emailing the people who haven’t opened your emails, so first of all 2 questions, one would you use this tactic, and then 2 how soon after the initial send would you send to your un-opens?

Susan: I would definitely retarget the un-opens, sorry, I just call it retarget. I would resend to the un-opens, and I would also, I would — it depends on what you are selling if it’s worth it. But you might try also doing actual ad retargeting to the un-opens. There are a variety of reasons why people don’t open their email, and most of the time it’s much simpler than you think, it’s just because they didn’t see it.

And so it’s kind of like that Twitter and Facebook newsfeed issue we were talking about, and people just miss it, and it’s not because it’s not relevant to them or they are not a great potential customer in the making. But you have to help them along before they can be helped along they’ve got to open your email. So I definitely would resend to the un-opens and I would also use — my basic assumption is people don’t open their email because attention is lacking.

And so if I want to resend the un-opens the main thing I need to optimize for is getting attention right away in the subject line. If that means using a forward where appropriate I would use forward. If that means using RE in a subject line where appropriate I will use RE. If that means using better deal personalization, a company personalization I would do that.

Steve: And how soon after the initial send do you resend the un-opens?

Susan: We try to do it the very next day, maybe not the very same day depending, but it could be due to the time of day, it could be due to another factor, so maybe change that up a little bit and follow it along closely.

Steve: Okay, and then one final question because I know you have to go pretty soon. In terms of split testing your email, is that something that you do and then how — like what’s your procedure for split testing if you do, do it?

Susan: I do, do split testing. I like to do split testing on the subject line, because I have seen some pretty — you always think basically no, I don’t need to split test, I got this, I am a seasoned marketer. But actually the results always surprise me, so I think it’s worth doing whenever you’ve got the time.

And I basically just live it up to my email marketing tool to do it for me. I personally use HubSpot in my current role at 500 Startups. And I wish I could say something smarter, but HubSpot just kind of makes it really easy. I set up my two tests, and I hit go and it sends it out to 5% of the list, and whatever is the winner it sends out to the rest of the list.

Steve: Okay and in terms of just that 5%, you just let HubSpot choose?

Susan: Yeah.

Steve: Okay so there is no specific targeting there?

Susan: No.

Steve: Okay interesting, okay. And before you go what mistake are you seeing a lot of people making with their email marketing that just kind of like a quick wind that you can leave the listeners with?

Susan: Well I hope this isn’t too repeating myself, because I say this in a lot of places. But then again I see the mistake continuing to persist, and that is including large images in your emails is the number one way to make sure your recipients never see that email. And never get attempts to click through of course.

And so this is one thing that I specifically called out Steve’s email marketing for, because I love that although there is a lot of opportunities to include buttons and length, snippets of landing pages and pictures of himself, or pictures of his product, or a picture of a part of a video thumbnail to watch a webinar.

You Steve you successfully resisted all of those temptations, and you’ve kept your emails just text only. Not plain text because they are still being trapped, but text only. And that just gives you the highest possibility of getting through to the inbox, and to the main inbox that you possibly can get, and that’s the most important thing.

That’s more important than branding, that’s more important than your logo, and that’s more important than any pictures. Now if you are in ecommerce there is one caveat that’s a little bit difficult. If you are having a very product focused ecommerce, so you are selling some beautiful product where the picture of the product is really critical to its sale and to its success, and you feel like you really have to include an image, then at least chop out all other potential design elements like all kinds of unnecessary background boxes, borders, logos, headers, footers, all that stuff that you don’t need so that really slim down your email.

If you want to include that picture, include the picture of your product but include one picture, and then let people go to a landing page where they can browse other things, instead of trying out to put the landing page into the email, so that’s the mistake. The email itself is not your landing page.

Steve: Interesting, so you are advising the use of no images for your email if possible even for ecommerce store?

Susan: If you can yeah, I would advise if you can, depending on what kind of ecommerce it is. If you can tell the story with your words and get people — don’t think of the email as doing all the selling for you. The email is just passing the button to your landing page. And on your landing page go ahead and put up all the beautiful pictures and branding and logos that you want, that’s what it’s there for. But the email can succeed in its job of passing a button if it’s all way down like think of a sprinter right, you got to keep it light.

Steve: Yeah I tend to ignore those emails to kind of think of it when it looks like a magazine article, and I’m not in the mood to shop, so yeah I can see that. Hey Susan I know you got to run, so I just want to thank you for coming on the show. Where can people reach you if they have any questions about what we talked about today?

Susan: Well, they can go to my site which is emailforstartups.com if they want to learn more specifically about email, or they can always find me on twitter @susanfsue that’s my first name Susan the letter F as in fantastic. And then my last name Sue, Susanfsue, so that’s me on Twitter, always feel free to send me a message or a mention there, and I’m happy to help out with anything else.

Steve: Cool Susan, thanks for coming on the show, I really appreciate it.

Susan: Thank you Steve.
Steve: All right take care.
Hope you found that episode useful. Email marketing is such a huge part of my business, so whenever I come across someone who knows email really well, I instantly want to talk with him to discover their latest strategies.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode134. Once again I want to thank sitelock.com again for sponsoring this episode. If you run your own hosted online store, or any website for that matter that handles monetary transactions, you should give SiteLock a look. They can also help your site with site speed issues as well. Did you know that ecommerce sites that take longer than 5 seconds to load often shed customers?

SiteLock offers a service called TrueSpeed which is a content delivery network that can increase download speeds by up to 50%. So go check out SiteLock today at sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob and get your first three months free.

Once again if you are interested in starting your own online business, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com, and sign up for my free 6 day mini course, where I show you how to start a profitable online store right away. So sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

133: How Mike Brown Created A Multi Million Dollar Online Coffee Company

133: How Mike Brown Created A Multi Million Dollar Online Coffee Company

Today I have Mike Brown on the show. Mike is someone who I was introduced to through by Tommy Walker who runs the Shopify Plus blog.

Anyway, normally I don’t interview referrals who I haven’t met but Mike has an amazing story. He runs the popular coffee brand Death Wish Coffee which even has its own wiki page.

His company has been featured in countless publications and even had an ad in the superbowl. Normally, I wouldn’t necessarily advise anyone go into the coffee niche because it’s extremely competitive and saturated, but Mike made it work with a very unique value proposition.

What You’ll Learn

  • Where Mike generates most of his revenue today.
  • The main drivers of traffic to his ecommerce store
  • How his strategy changed after getting on the Super Bowl.
  • The effect of the Super Bowl on sales.
  • How he markets his coffee today.
  • How he built a cult following for his brand.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. If you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free 6-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin, I also want to give a shout out to sitelock.com for being a sponsor of the show. SiteLock is the leader in website security, and protects over 8 million websites by monitoring them from malicious activity 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. So here is the thing, most online business owners never think about security until they get hacked. My online store got hacked long ago, and it was the most miserable experience ever.

I basically lost thousands of dollars as I frantically tried to patch the issues, and get my store back online as quickly as possible. In the event that you get hacked, call sitelock.com, and they will help you out, or even better protect your site before you get hacked. Right now you can get 3 months of SiteLock free if you go to sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. Now on to the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I have Mike Brown on the show. Now Mike is someone who I was introduced to through Tommie Walker who runs the Shopify Plus blog. Normally I don’t actually interview referrals who I haven’t met, but Mike has an amazing story.

He runs the popular coffee brand Death Wish Coffee, which even has its own Wiki page which I found out while I was doing my research. His company has been featured in countless publications, and he even had an ad in a super bowl which is pretty cool.

Normally I wouldn’t necessarily advise anyone to go into the coffee business, because it is extremely competitive and quite saturated, but Mike made it work with a very unique value proposition. With that welcome to the show Mike, how are you doing today man?

Mike: I am great, thanks for having me here.

Steve: Yeah, so I did a bunch of research on you prior to this interview, but please give us the quick background story, and tell us about Death Wish Coffee, how you got started in the coffee business.

Mike: I was a [inaudible 00:03:03] right out of college, and I worked for the city of New York in the controller’s office, and I realized real quick that wasn’t for me really. I got to study forensic behind a desk all day look inside like bank accounts, so I just took time off. I tried to figure out what I wanted to do and I’ll hang out of coffee shops a lot. I sat there, I decided, hey maybe I’ll try and start my own coffee shop.

Steve: Just randomly or?

Mike: Yeah right away, I wanted to learn about business, learn how to run a business, and the coffee business seemed pretty simple, just making coffee and sell it to customers that walked in.

Steve: So this is a brick and mortar coffee shop, right?

Mike: Right, a brick and mortar coffee shop. I tried to start a couple; it didn’t really work out so well. Then I finally found a company, I found a guy that wanted to sell his coffee shop, this is in 2008 when everything was kind of turning sour for everyone.

I got a decent deal on it, but at the same time it’s not a great time to go on business by yourself, so I started losing money head over face. I learnt that running a business wasn’t as simple as putting products on the shelf and hoping people will walk in.

Steve: Was this because your coffee shop was just like every other coffee shop, and was it like the rent that was pretty much dominating your costs?

Mike: Yes, certainly a grey area, but yeah the rent was high. Actually the employees, that the cost employs it, that was always the highest expense on my books just keeping people behind the counter, and yeah it was like every other coffee shop. I mean we tried to differentiate ourselves a bit by offering fair trade organic products, and some local products, but I don’t think that was enough really.

Steve: Were you selling online at the time or no?

Mike: No, not at this time, it was just solely brick and mortar. I kind of made the big mistake of when customers came in and gave me a suggestion, I pretty much took everyone’s suggestion, I put on the menu. After a couple of years I had this menu that was like four pages long. Buying inventory was a nightmare, and just keeping stock was a nightmare and things would go bad.

It was a big mess throughout; I realized I was going to lose money. It took me long to figure out how to run the business and what decisions I should make to make the business a little bit more profitable.

Steve: At the time it wasn’t called Death Wish Coffee either, right?

Mike: No, it wasn’t, it was called Saratoga Coffee Traders. It still exists in Saratoga Springs New York. The menu is a lot smaller now; really kind of learned to kind of focus on our best products.

Steve: How did that evolve into Death Wish then?

Mike: As I was struggling with making ends meet, I started doing whatever I could to learn more about business, to learn more about making money so I could keep the coffee shop always open. I started reading a lot of books about selling online, and that really caught my interest. I had an idea for this coffee by customers actually coming all the day, and every day and ask for my strongest cup of coffee.

I was always like do I give the dark rose or do I give them the coffee that the most caffeine, which sometimes isn’t the dark rose. When I knew what they were looking for, the taste, but they also wanted the caffeine as well. I put together a dark rose to have a lot of caffeine, and put our scary label on it. I sat down one day after work and made up this website, and I called it Death Wish Coffee.

Steve: What was the website, was this your own personal ecommerce store at the time?

Mike: Yeah it was. It was deathwishcoffee.com, it still is today. It looks a lot different now than it did when I first made it.

Steve: Sure, what platform you were on, just curious?

Mike: I was on Weebly.

Steve: Weebly, okay wow, and then what is it on now?

Mike: Now it’s on Shopify.

Steve: Shopify, okay of course dah, tell me about that.

Mike: I put these websites together, and I made the logo myself and put some software I got at Staples. I had the coffee, I knew what the coffee was going to be, and I knew what– I had the logo online. I didn’t actually have a product at the time put together. It wasn’t until I think a few weeks later when someone actually went on my website and bought the first bag.

I was like okay crap, now I need to put these products together, so I went back to Staples, I got some stickers, I got a coffee bag. I put together the beans out of my coffee shop and I blended them together the way I’ve been testing and I sent it out, and I got a good review. From there I sold a couple more.

Steve: How did that first customer find you, just curious?

Mike: On Facebook ad.

Steve: Oh you were running ads to a site when you didn’t even have a product?

Mike: Exactly yeah. I really wanted just to test it out first to see if it would sell. I did some testing on the product search. I had the product, but actually I didn’t have the packaging or anything, does that make sense?

Steve: Yeah, yeah of course. Okay, so you had already developed this really strong blend of coffee.

Mike: Mm-hmm.

Steve: And you were actually probably serving it in your shop?

Mike: Yeah, I was testing it out on my customers in the coffee shop, and they were loving it.

Steve: Okay, so you run Facebook– can describe what that first Facebook ad looked like?

Mike: It was a sword and cross bones, and I believe it said something along the lines of do you like strong coffee, click here pretty much.

Steve: And it just led to your site, you only had one product on the site?

Mike: Yeah just one product and actually still we don’t have many products. We just focus on our signature brand, our Death Wish Coffee. We do have 2 other brands, Walhalla Java and Belvolene [ph] coffee, but our focus is very more of I don’t know, I guess I want to say a separate basic, they are like a separate project off of the Death Wish Coffee

Steve: Okay and I actually looked around for strong coffee and there weren’t a whole– I mean there is a lot of people who sell coffee, but I couldn’t find a lot of people that specialize in the strongest coffee. Would you say that that’s the main reason why you’re standing out?

Mike: I think so, yeah, because at the time when my customers were asking me for strong coffee, I went on Google, and I was like, hey if I could find I’m the strongest coffee out there, and amaze my customers with it one morning, they are going to think I’m great, and consider even coming to my coffee shop.

When I goggled there was nothing, at the time there really wasn’t any strong coffees available. And the ones that were available they weren’t — I have had them before, and they weren’t that great. So that was the light bulb that went off. I was like; okay I can make this and sell it online.

Steve: So you have your site now and you are driving Facebook ads to it. Meanwhile you are still running your brick and mortar coffee shop, right?

Mike: Right.

Steve: So when did this shift happen and how did it happen?

Mike: So the shift happened when I decided to really focus on — I won’t even say focus, really good consistent on marketing like my new coffee brand. Actually one of my barristers was quitting and I’m like — she said, I’m like what are you going to do? And she goes like, well I don’t have real shares, I don’t want to be behind the counter being a barrister any longer.

And I said, well I got this new coffee project I’m working on; it’s an online coffee company. I’ve got a couple of sales; I’ve got some good reviews I think it can really take off if I really put some focus on it. So if you wanted to just work on the computer every day, and just post on social media, pay attention to the Facebook ads, pay attention to the different social platforms and kind of get a conversation going, I think that would be valuable.

And once she started doing that, that’s when it started to take off. When we started working on it every single day and actually I wrote out a template for her. I’m like here is a template, just a letter. Send it out to influencers, people online that have a lot of followers, or they have a good blog, or that have a good following, and see if they want to review this coffee and…

Steve: Can you talk about what was in that letter or template?

Mike: Yeah, of course I have it somewhere, but actually I know I’ll look it for now. But yes said something along the lines of we’re big fans of what you do. We have this great product; it’s got a lot of great reviews. Our audience is growing and we would like to see if you would like to try our products and possibly write a review. If so we’ll share the review with our audience.

Steve: So these were coffee blogs?

Mike: No actually, never really focused on coffee blogs. We focus more on blogs that had cool innovative products like one of the blogs…

Steve: What was your biggest here, what was your biggest feature at the time like your first early feature?

Mike: Well a blog called Cool Material…

Steve: Cool Material, okay.

Mike: Yeah they wrote a nice piece on us, and then…

Steve: And you pitched your coffee as like the world’s strongest coffee?

Mike: Yeah, we pitched it as the strongest coffee and I’m trying to remember exactly how this went, it’s a few years ago now. And it’s funny after Cool Material wrote about us, all these bloggers and news reporters, I feel like they all follow each other in some way.

So once one big blogger wrote, and I think it was a Cool Material blogger who wrote this blog piece. We started getting phone calls from other bloggers and other news reporters. And then in March of 2013 Good Morning America called, and were like, hey we read about your coffee online, we want to come up to your coffee shop and shoot a report…

Steve: Wait you didn’t do anything for that one, it was just — they just came to you out of the blue because of these blog mentions?

Mike: Exactly, yeah they came to me out of blue, they were like, they called me at 10 am, and I’m about three hours north of New York City where they are out of. And yeah they called me at 10 am and they are there by 4 pm, so I hardly had any time to prepare. And the next morning they actually opened their show drinking my coffee, and gave us glowing reviews and they said how much they loved it.

And then right after that, sales kind of took off right off almost to the point where it’s detrimental to my business, because we were selling a very small amount at that time, maybe 10 pounds a day. And all of a sudden we had thousands and thousands of pounds of coffee that we needed to fulfill. We didn’t have enough bags, we didn’t have enough coffee, we didn’t have enough labels.

I didn’t have enough staff; it was just me and my barrister, my former barrister. So I actually called customers out of the store to help me fulfill as much as I could, like place the orders for more coffee or more bags. It took me 30 days to fulfill some of these orders. I ended up refunding half the money. But what I did do throughout the entire time, I mean even though I got kicked off — I was selling on Amazon at this time too.

I got kicked off of Amazon; I got kicked off in eBay. But even though it took me 30 days to fulfill some orders and I had to give a lot of the money back, I always kept on good terms with the customer, and I was able to capture their information. So I was able to build my mailing list by about probably 30,000 people at this time. So even though the first six…

Steve: Okay hold on, so before the Good Morning America you already had 30,000 subscribers prior to the Good Morning America?

Mike: No, I probably had 20, but I think I gained another 30 right after.

Steve: Okay, so let’s back up then. So how did you get these 20,000 subscribers?

Mike: So one of the — from day one I’ve always had an email opt-in on my website, and I’ve always run campaigns to get people to opt-in to my mailing list.

Steve: These are Facebook ads?

Mike: Yeah mostly Facebook ads, I might have messed around with Google ads at the time. But yeah I was just trying driving people to our capture page, lead capture page. I think I was even…

Steve: So what were you giving away?

Mike: I think I was giving away free samples at the time of the coffee. That worked well, I mean it turned out to be kind of expensive, I mean it probably cost me about $2 for the coffee, and then another two bucks to send it out. So it just cost me four bucks a lead.

So I wasn’t making any money from the coffee, I was kind of investing just about every dollar of sales back into the business. But it’s working, it’s build there a good list and as that list grew I saw my revenue rising.

Steve: Okay that’s really interesting. So you started your list very early on giving away free coffee samples, that sounds really expensive. That’s like $80,000 worth of free samples?

Mike: Yeah, I mean I’m sure they weren’t all free samples, I’m sure some were like organic, that does sound like a lot at that time especially because I was broke.

Steve: Yeah, I’m sure this is overtime but yeah.

Mike: Yeah, that’s over a couple of years.

Steve: Okay so you would drive Facebook ad over to a landing page where you gave out a free sample. And then you would send it out, people would try it, and they would come back for sales. So I’m just curious how did you correlate the sales from those people back to your store?

Mike: I don’t think I understand the question. How did I correlate — how did I track that?

Steve: Yeah, how did you track it?

Mike: I don’t think I did at the time, I wasn’t tracking. But I was seeing growth on my mailing list, and I was — we would offer pretty much a deal just about every week, or we had some type of free giveaway, every week. So we sent out a newsletter. We could see as our list grew the revenue also increased, and we still do that today.

Steve: Who do you guys use for email provider?

Mike: Right now — we were using MailChimp back then, now we are using — I’m sorry we were using Constant Contact back then, we are using MailChimp now.

Steve: Okay and you mentioned that you got kicked off of Amazon, presumably you were doing merchant fulfilled then?

Mike: Oh yeah, yeah I was doing merchant fulfilled. Actually I was doing FBA, but then as my inventory ran out, I didn’t want the sales to stop, so I switched to merchant fulfilled, which wasn’t a great idea. But it took a little bit of time for me to get back on both platforms. Actually eBay was a lot of harder to get back on than Amazon believe it or not.

Steve: Really? Okay so when you get banned what happens? Like so Amazon banned you obviously because you couldn’t fulfill your orders and you had to cancel a bunch, right? So how did you appeal?

Mike: Right, you just write them letters, just call them up, talk to them. We had to put a plan in place. Pretty much draw up a plan that says why will this never happen again. Pretty much I just told them I’m just going to keep on FBA, and I’m not going to switch it back over to fulfillment by seller all the time, but on inventory and they record that.

Steve: Okay and in terms of when you first got started, did Amazon come first or eBay come first, or did your own site come first?

Mike: My own site came first. But if I had to do it over again I would recommend testing out the product on Amazon or eBay first before…

Steve: Okay and so when did you actually start selling on Amazon then, shortly after?

Mike: It is relatively shortly after. I don’t remember exactly but I started in 2000 — end of 2011, I was probably selling on Amazon in 2000. No, I was definitely selling on Amazon in 2012 because I got one of those, I think they sent them out to everyone at the time. But there was one of those cards that said you are a top Amazon seller in 2012 or top holiday seller. I was so thrilled, and then everyone I know now is like yeah I got one of those too.

Steve: Yeah, but you were one of the early ones. So would it be fair to say that your Amazon sales were exceeding your own website sales in the beginning or?

Mike: They were about…

Steve: They were about equal?

Mike: They were about equal. I think the website was a little bit more just because I had that email list, and that’s a lot — I drove a lot of business that way.

Steve: Okay, let’s talk about your email list real quick. So did you have autoresponders, or were you just sending out deals on like a weekly basis?

Mike: I did set up an autorespond program; basically if someone signed up from my list they got a welcome letter, and then a couple like a week later they got a discount probably in the week. I think pretty minimum and it wasn’t based on any — it wasn’t really based on anything. They were getting them whether they bought something or not, you know what I mean?

I think now ours is a little more dynamic where if they don’t purchase, then they’ll get a reminder something like that. It’s sort of more complicated right now, but yeah back then it was pretty just — I think there was like three or four emails in the autorespond chain.

Steve: So I was just — was most of your business derived from email, would it be fair to say early on?

Mike: I would say possibly, I think most of it was derived from influencers writing blog posts about us. We were really able to really crash it early on, because people were reviewing our products and giving us great reviews online.

Steve: Okay so the influence — in terms of finding those influencers was it just basic outreach, did you use any services to do that?

Mike: Yes basic outreach, I would go on make a list of people I saw on like Twitter, Facebook just in news articles. I would go to like BuzzFeed, and I would like find their authors that go to New York Times, Huffington Post.

Basically anyone I could find, I would write — and don’t get me wrong most probably about 90%-95% of people wouldn’t respond at all or would say no. But between like 2% and 5% would respond and only a couple would say yes, and it really only takes a couple of people to say yes for it to have a big impact.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now I love running my ecommerce store, but you know what I hate doing the most? Book keeping, seriously keeping track of receipts, expenses, and especially inventory costs are easily the worst aspects of entrepreneurship hands down.

Here is where Bench Accounting comes in. Bench is an online book keeping service that specializes in ecommerce businesses. They are experts at handling all ecommerce related reports, whether it be from Amazon, Shopify, BigCommerce, Stripe, you name it. All you got to do is sign up, and they will pair you with a team of dedicated book keepers who will handle everything for you.

No more data entry, no more data crunching, no more headaches, plus it’s reasonably priced. The best part is you can get 20% off your first 6 months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off your first 6 months, now back to the show.

So I’m just curious you mentioned early on that you didn’t really target coffee blogs. Is it because you were just looking for much larger publications, like what was the rationale for that?

Mike: I feel like coffee blogs at the time and even now they are more focused on really high — they are focused on a different type of coffee, I guess the specialty coffee, the third way of coffee, the high — I don’t know. A lot of specialty coffee is in the market right now. They are like the opposite of what our coffee is.

They try to get like the sweet floral and fruity notes out of the coffee bean where that’s not my coffee. My coffee is like the high caffeinated, you taste it and it wakes you up immediately. And I actually use Robusta beans in my blends. And Robusta beans are looked down upon in the coffee industry for probably the last 20 years. It’s just recently that they are coming around now.

I think it’s because there is such good quality of Robusta beans coming into the market right now. That there is actually Robusta coffee that isn’t even considered a specialty coffee by the SCAA, and only Arabica beans are. So the fact that I was using Robusta beans in my blends I avoided the coffee brands…

Steve: I think I understand where you are getting at, like there is similar things with wine, right? Yeah okay cool. So let’s — okay so how did the super bowl ad thing happen? So you have an email following at this point, you’ve been on Good Morning America. How did the super bowl ad thing come into play because that was huge, right?

Mike: Yeah, this is a giant. In 2014, let’s see 2013 I watched GoldieBlox; it was a company that made engineering toys almost like legos for girls. And I watched them when the super bowl commercial threw into its small business begin competition. And I was like — I saw that and I was like, wow if I could win that with this business, it would be the biggest splash ever of a cool product.

I think it’s the best product in the world, I know I’m biased, but I think it’s amazing, and I think everyone else would too. And in 2015 last year in June they decided to run it again. I saw I had come across my Facebook news feed, and I got my team around me.

Actually a lot of my team that stay with me now are the same people I pulled out of my coffee shop back in 2013 to help me fulfill the orders. But I pulled those guys around, and I hear they are in this competition again. We have a decent online following now, I think we can make a run at this, and they are like yeah let’s give it a shot and…

Steve: So what was involved in entering the contest?

Mike: Entering the contest wasn’t too bad. We had to make a profile like online profile, and join their social network called Own It which is a social network for entrepreneurs. It’s actually really cool and helpful, you should check it out if you are entrepreneurs. And we had to make — I guess two activities such as take pictures of my team, make a video, answer a bunch of questions, take some interesting surveys, and basically make an online profile that when people went to it, they would want to vote for your company.

And it was all about entrepreneurship and who embodies entrepreneurship better than I guess the rest. And it actually would have come — the companies that came down too at the end, they are all amazing companies. And it was almost like a big vote off towards the end where there was 10 finalists, and we all had to see who could get — drive the most people to our voting link to get votes for…

Steve: So let’s talk about that a little bit. So you obviously used your email list for that, but how did you — because I imagine every company at this point has huge followings right, I would imagine?

Mike: Oh yeah, one of the companies Chivies they make short reports. I mean they have a following like millions of followers on Facebook and Instagram, and yeah they have a giant following. We thought they were going to be — were going to run away with it. And as it turned out they didn’t make it into the final three with us.

There was us, there was [inaudible 00:27:57] a brick and motor store actually out of Buffalo in New York, they were in the top three as well. They hardly had a social following at all. They had a few good YouTube videos, but they just had the support of the community around them, around Buffalo and New York. And they had such a loyal following in their community that they were able to just drive consistent votes every single day.

Steve: How did you guys do it?

Mike: So we tried everything, everything, everything, but I’ll tell you what I think works. We weren’t able to see the actual vote count or keep track along the way. So we were able to kind of get an idea of what was going on by looking at Facebook shares on everyone’s voting links. So we could see each person’s voting link and through Facebook we could see how many shares each of those got.

So we kind of used that as a gauge there. We were doing bad in the beginning, and it wasn’t so we just used the strategies that we use to build the business to reach out to influencers…

Steve: Interesting okay.

Mike: So we used Zack Wild, we actually do coffee for – he’s got millions of followers online. We were able to work with him and his Facebook account, and his social media account to push our leading link to his fans.

Steve: Well was there any incentive for him to do that, or was he just doing you a favor?

Mike: No there was incentive for him because we do sell, I’ll probably call it Walhalla Java which is for him and inspired by him, and actually he has all the branding rights on it. So he gets the royalty from that. So if we wanted, it was going to be good for him, and it has been great for him.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: Also Lisa Kelly from Ice Road Truckers, and the whole Ice Road Truckers crew, they helped us out of time and…

Steve: These are like major TV shows right, I mean Ice Road Truckers…

Mike: Yeah.

Steve: Yeah okay. How did you hookup with them?

Mike: Somebody on my team had a good relationship with their manager, or developed a good relationship with their manager. And yeah we started talking and they helped us out pretty much out of the kindness of their heart, there really wasn’t much in it for them. I mean we sent them coffee when they wanted, and we sent them sweat shirts and t-shirts and stuff, but they helped us out at the time, they are really good people.

Steve: So it sounds like a lot of what made Death Wish Coffee successful was like the people relationships that you developed in the outreach if you were to just choose one thing that voted you guys to the top, is that accurate or?

Mike: Yeah, that’s very accurate yeah. And I think right now when I think to have this win as we have some like crazy loyal fans who are amazing, and they are like huge brand ambassadors. They go above and beyond for us and not only voting, but they start their own campaigns and even get their own social campaigns going to try to get people to vote for us.

Steve: How did you get those fans? Was there anything special that you did to get those raving fans?

Mike: I think it was cool like logo cool brand identity, that’s part of it. But also we have pretty much of a no bullshit policy here where our number one value is customer satisfaction. If the customer isn’t satisfied they get their money back right away, and we’ll go over the top to make sure they are satisfied.

So not only that, our customers are always happy one, and we always try to over deliver and under promise. So everything we do we try to just kind of go above and beyond so when a customer gets the product they feel like they are taken care of. And we follow up with them afterwards to make sure they are happy, if they are not they get their money back.

It’s those things that we hear day to day; hey companies don’t do this anymore. They don’t really care about the customers, but you guys do. Like I have a customer service team, there is three of them right now, and that’s all they do all day is they not only reach out to the negative reviews. They reach out to every positive review, every question, every — yeah they are amazing.

Steve: Actually what I was trying to get out was are you guys actually putting out content also that people are consuming that really makes them huge fans, or is it really just about the product itself?

Mike: We put out some content, not enough I don’t think, but we would go over things to put out content. Our customers put out a lot of content which is even better…

Steve: Interesting.

Mike: Yeah they make content nonstop, and there is always — I always see my Google alerts newsfeed like a new piece of content, or a new video that one of our customers created on YouTube or something. And yeah those are…

Steve: So what do they talk about in this content — like if they put out a video, are they are just raving about your product?

Mike: Yeah they are really raving about it, or they are doing some type of challenge with our product like eating coffee grinds, yeah it sucks. Sometimes it’s like irresponsible stuff like how much of this coffee can I drink before, or really like makes me sick or something. I don’t know so they do crazy stuff sometimes. Most of the time it’s just they drink this coffee, and I don’t know like a rainbow shoots out their butt and they fly over the clouds. I don’t know they make some crazy stuff.

Steve: Okay and this is probably just the tribute effect that you have the strongest — you are known as the strongest coffee out there, right? So that kind of sparks off all these interesting pieces of content that people produce?

Mike: Yeah, absolutely.

Steve: Okay, so let’s talk post super bowl. So you get this ad, how do you prepare for it, and how much did your sales spike as a result of it?

Mike: So we found out in late November that we had won the competition. And we were super thrilled, but they were like okay now we really need to focus because how much coffee are we going to sell? Can our website handle this, can we produce enough, can we — there was all these questions. Is customer service going to get overwhelmed? We don’t want to get kicked off of Amazon again.

Since we got kicked off of Amazon in 2013, I had worked to make the business as scalable as possible. So we started working with fulfillment centers. So we didn’t fulfill our own products anymore, we had fulfillment centers do that. So we had to contact our fulfillment center, let them know. I actually made a list of every part of my business that would be affected by an increase in traffic, and came up with a worst case scenario, best case scenario, and probable scenario, and different steps to take at each one.

Steve: Okay, what was the actual scenario and — like first of all what was the increase in sales?

Mike: So the increase in sales once the commercial went live — and actually went live about two weeks before. They released the commercial on CBS This Morning — I think it’s CBS This Morning. Yeah they released commercial two instances before on CBS This Morning, and right from there we saw initial spike in sales.

Steve: Are we talking like 10X, 20X, 100X?

Mike: I think it’s probably about 10X to 15X on that day. But the day of the actual super bowl we did about 25 times of what we typically do on a day.

Steve: That’s crazy okay, and so at this point had you changed your website over from Weebly to Shopify or?

Mike: Yes, yes, yes, we were at Shopify at this time. We called them up, they had a team of 12 just waiting to see what happens when the commercial went live, and to handle any problems. We were able to follow the stats online through our…

Steve: And then you guys had enough coffee, because you had 4 months to prepare for this?

Mike: Yeah, we had to reach out to third party rosters to help us with the roasting process and packaging. But yeah we were able to get enough coffee everywhere our inventory channels where we didn’t run out. At the time of those commercials we had 125,000 people hit our website at the same time.

Steve: That’s crazy.

Mike: Yeah, it didn’t crash, it stayed up. That was a big — we celebrated for that. And then…

Steve: You– sorry go on.

Mike: Then after that sales were so good for — I mean it’s still good right now. They leveled off right around four or five times than they were before super bowl, so I have a business now that’s pretty big. It’s pretty big compared to where it was just a year ago today.

Steve: So wow okay, so the super bowl ad – you had already prepared for by using a fulfillment house. And were you using that fulfillment house prior to winning the contest, or were you still fulfilling everything yourself?

Mike: Yeah, but prior to the contest we were using the fulfillment center. We started using that at the beginning of– probably in the middle of 2014.

Steve: But you guys still have to pack up the coffee right, or were you still doing that yourself?

Mike: Yes.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: Yeah we package the coffee here, we put it in the case packs, and we send it down to our fulfillment center. From there the individual orders come in, and they ship it directly to the consumer.

Steve: So do you have a huge team then to do this packing at your own facility?

Mike: No, not a huge team. A year ago we had six — there were six of us. And now there is 14 of us. And on the production side there are– let me see, there is about seven.

Steve: Okay, I’m just trying to think like if you are getting like 100X sales or 25X sales during that stretch, I guess you had time to prepare, right? So you probably stock piled a bunch of stuff?

Mike: Yeah, we had time to prepare and at that time we were actually working with two third party rosters who were helping us roast and pack. Now we started to bring all that back in-house, we have invested in new equipment, two packaging machines, a new grinder, and we made some improvements on our roaster too.

Steve: Okay, and so a post super bowl like has your strategy changed at all?

Mike: We focused a lot of — a little bit. We’ve been focusing a lot on making those onetime purchasers regular purchasers. We want to get our frequency up, our products sometimes can come across as gimmicky, or I don’t know. I’ve heard some people figure as something you’ll find in Spencer’s and it’s really good coffee, and we really want to focus on getting those repeat purchases.

Steve: So how do you do that?

Mike: Well we started; we put a subscription platform in place.

Steve: Okay nice.

Mike: Yeah both on our website and on Amazon. And that’s a great route to — just in about a year I think we are up to like 6000 subscribers with…

Steve: How does that work? So they pay upfront for like a whole year, or they pay monthly?

Mike: Oh they pay monthly right. They just put in their payment information, and they get charged monthly at a discounted rate. And it just gets automatically shipped to the house, so they don’t have to worry about ordering coffee every month, it just shows up.

Steve: Okay, that’s very nice. And then for the other people who aren’t on the subscription plan are you just sending out emails to get them to join the subscription. Like what’s your strategy for acquiring subscription customers?

Mike: Yeah we have actually – it’s actually not released yet. But other than the discount there is a subscriber only deals that they can get on merchandised ads on exclusive releases that’s only available to them. And we would let our customers know through our mailing list…

Steve: Okay and then all this stuff is all done through Shopify, through some sort of add on?

Mike: Right, yes all done through Shopify apps. [inaudible 00:39:50] is a good company we work with and we have a good relationship with them. And they really do pretty much what we want most of the time, it’s fantastic.

Steve: Are you guys still running Facebook ads and Google ads?

Mike: Yeah. We still find that’s our best — I mean in my opinion that’s — I can’t quote the number here, I think Facebook ads have the best return on investment, other than maybe a super bowl commercial.

Steve: Yeah, other than a super bowl commercial. Real quick though on your Facebook ads like who you are targeting just curious. Like you are obviously targeting people that reach your website, but in terms of new customers how are you getting them?

Mike: We do look alike audiences. We do sometimes even competitor look like audiences, sometimes we do — we are always trying different things out.

Steve: What’s worked the best?

Mike: I mean re-targeting probably is the best, but yeah I mean other than re-targeting I guess look a likes or friends of our customers.

Steve: I’m just curious like when you are running these ads, are you still running them directly to your shop, or are you running them to content pages?

Mike: Right now I do them direct to our shop unless there is a specific goal we have in mind. If we are trying to build a mailing list we can send them two piece of content. But at this exact moment in time I think we are running — I think it’s some retargeting. Or somebody goes inside a product and they don’t buy it, they get retargeted with that product and there are news feeds somewhere.

Steve: I’m just curious are you still giving out free samples, or did you just stop doing that long ago?

Mike: Well actually we stopped doing that yeah. I mean we do it at events and stuff now when we go out like physically to events around the country, but yeah not online. We do have a free or we do have 100% money back guaranteed. If somebody is not completely satisfied with the product, I tell them, “Hey if you just want to try it, just buy it and if you don’t like it let us know, we’ll give you your money back,” it’s not a the big deal on our part. If you are trying the product we like to think that you are trying it to buy it anyway, so there is really no risk.

Steve: I’m just wondering how your Facebook ads have kind of evolved, like in the beginning you were trying to get leads by giving away free coffee. Like how has that evolved, is your brand name good enough now that you just put out an ad and link into your shop and people just buy?

Mike: I think it’s funny though, it’s changed a lot, because I don’t do it anymore and so…

Steve: Okay, so I’m asking all these specific questions around the campaigns, okay.

Mike: Cane a guy that works with me on my team. He handles our Facebook ads and most of our advertising. And we work with a consultant who works with us to try different things out and try to optimize it, so we have the most return on investment.

Steve: Okay, are you guys still doing Google ads or no?

Mike: Not as much, a little bit, but no not as much, they got really expensive.

Steve: Yeah, because I would imagine like coffee keywords is just ridiculous I would imagine.

Mike: Yeah they are ridiculous, and it turns out we ended up — yeah it just seemed like a lot of keywords we were targeting weren’t working out as planned, and like some of them got expensive so – a little bit on the fence. Like for a while we were targeting like our own branded keywords. I mean that seemed to be doing well but…

Steve: You would probably write number one for those anyways but yeah.

Mike: Exactly so it’s always like am I just throwing money away here or not?

Steve: So let me ask you this, so I mean a lot has happened over the years. And if you were to start a coffee business from scratch today, like what advice would you give? Because it is still a saturated niche, so how would you have done things differently, and what things would you have done the same?

Mike: You definitely want to stand out. So I won’t do that the same. I probably would have done more testing in markets that are already setup before I went ahead and created my own website.

Steve: So what does that mean exactly?

Mike: I mean the first thing I did when I started my brand is I went and I spent money to build the website. I didn’t spend a lot of money, because I did it myself, but there was still money like signing up for the Weebly platform. I could have just made the product and put it on Amazon, and done the same thing, and it wouldn’t have cost me anything.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: Definitely I would have started the mailing list like I did, maybe focus on that even a little bit more. I think that’s — I think there is still tons of value there even with the changes that Gmail and I think will be happening in the future, where people will be able to kind of get ads out of their news — out of their email. But I still find there is tons of value there, I might focus a little more on Google ads in the beginning, I think they are so worthwhile at the time.

Steve: What type of ads like AdWords or Google shopping or what type specifically?

Mike: I was using Google AdWords back then.

Steve: AdWords, okay.

Mike: I think we are doing more Google shopping now, but I can’t seem to get results I want with that so…

Steve: Interesting, okay.

Mike: Yeah it just requires more work, a little more work on it.

Steve: So influencer marketing would still be your number one?

Mike: Oh yeah anything free. The free step I think is the best. We do influencer marketing, yeah that’s by far the best. What are some of the free — I had a whole — there is this book actually out there, it’s by Jim Cockrum, it’s called 101 Free Marketing — Online Free Marketing Lessons or something.

It’s by Jim Cockrum. I actually went through that book about six times, and everything I tried in that book was knocking out a product, and it didn’t cost any money. So I mean the return on investment there was surreal.

Steve: Amazing okay, so you didn’t really have to compensate these influencers that much outside of giving product away?

Mike: Yeah no I didn’t pay them anything, I was just kind of showing a new product, giving them some content that they were looking for at the time. I think that the game might have changed a little bit now I think influencer marketing is more of a popular term than it was back in 2012.

Steve: Sure oh yeah definitely. So in terms of — I imagine you were getting back links this whole time also right whenever you got published?

Mike: Yeah, I never focused on SEO or back links. I mean I’ve kind of started to look into it more now, but at the time I was just kind of focusing on my product, my customers. The content I was putting out there wasn’t like — there was no strategy behind it. I was just doing what I thought was best for my customers.

Steve: So is search like a significant portion of your sales, or not so much mostly social influencers and that sort of thing?

Mike: Well we get a lot of traffic from search definitely now, and we just started working with an SEO Company to help us learn how live it more now. They’ll hopefully sign to it because a lot of the content we have is great content, it’s just not like optimized for anything.

Steve: Okay cool man. Well it sounds good, the subscription thing is going to be huge I would imagine. Because then yeah you got this customer, and they are just paying you every month for life.

Mike: Right, the trick there is to get them to stay on, and to continually provide more value month and month out, so that’s been a challenge for us. As many subscribers as we have there is been good amount that’s dropped off, just because all the value must not have been there. So we are revisiting that, and we are putting together a pretty cool platform where they are able to get a lot more for less money.

Steve: And I would imagine once people try your product and it’s really strong, they can’t really go to any other coffee brand after that, right?

Mike: That’s what I hear.

Steve: Because your stuff is like crack.

Mike: That’s all I drink.

Steve: Cool Mike, I have had you on the show for over 40 minutes, and I want to be respectful of your time. Where can people find you, and where can they actually try some of your coffee?

Mike: So if you are located in upstate New York, that’s where I am from, all the New York and Connecticut area, or you just moved in to over 100 price choppers. If you are not in upstate New York, but anywhere else in the world you can go to Amazon, or usually you can just type in coffee, we are usually the number one two or three coffee on Amazon just about every single day. And you could also look through deathwishcofee.com, and signup for our mailing list, you’ll get tons of free stuff with every order.

Steve: That’s awesome mike, well hey I really appreciate you coming on the show, it was great.

Mike: Yeah thank you so much, thanks for having me.

Steve: All right, take care.

Mike: Bye, bye.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed hearing about Mike’s incredible story. And here is the important take away; if you are going to go into a competitive niche like coffee, you better have a strong value proposition. And the reason mike succeeded was because his coffee was the strongest.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode133. Once again I want to thank sitelock.com for sponsoring this episode. If you run your own hosted online store or any website for that matter that handles monetary transactions, then you should definitely give SiteLock a look. They can also help your site with site speed issues as well, and did you know that ecommerce sites that take longer than 5 seconds to load often shed customers.

Now SiteLock offers a service called TrueSpeed which is a content delivery network that can increase download speeds by up to 50%. So go ahead and check out SiteLock today at sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob.

Once again if you are interested in starting your own online business, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com, and sign up for my free 6 day mini course, where I teach you how to start your own profitable online store. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

132: How Ryan Grant Scaled His Amazon Retail Arbitrage Business To 7 Figures

132: How Ryan Grant Scaled His Amazon Retail Arbitrage Business To 7 Figures

Ryan Grant is someone who I met at the Import Summit last year and I’ve been following his work every since.

He runs the popular site OnlineSellingExperiment.com where he talks about all of his adventures selling physical products online.

Now if you recall way back in episode 17, I had Jessica Larrew on the podcast to talk about her Amazon retail arbitrage business.

Well Ryan has taken that same model of retail and online arbitrage and scaled it to small company with employees.

What is online and retail arbitrage? It’s the process of buying from retail stores and liquidation outlets and selling those products on Amazon.

Anyway, last time we spoke, Ryan had a pretty nifty operation going on and I want to catch up with what he’s up to today. Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Ryan got into selling online.
  • Ryan’s motivations for starting his business
  • How to scale a retail arbitrage business
  • How he knows what goods are going to sell.
  • Where he consistently finds goods to sell.
  • How he deals with unsold inventory.
  • The many challenges of running a retail arbitrage business

Other Resources And Books

OnlineSellingExperiment.com

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. If you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free 6-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin, I also want to give a shout out to sitelock.com for being a sponsor of the show. SiteLock is the leader in website security, and protects over 8 million websites by monitoring them from malicious activities 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. So here is the thing, most online business owners never think about security until they get hacked. My online store got hacked long ago, and it was the most miserable experience ever.

I basically lost thousands of dollars as I frantically tried to patch the issues, and get my store back online as quickly as possible. In the event that you get hacked, call sitelock.com, and they will help you out, or even better protect your site before you get hacked. Right now you can get 3 months of SiteLock free if you go to sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. Now on to the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: All right we’re good now, okay. Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Ryan Grant on the podcast today. Ryan is somebody who I met at the Import Summit last year, and I’ve been following his work ever since. He runs the popular site onlinesellingexperiment.com, where he talks about all his adventures selling physical products online.

If you recall way back in episode 17, I had this woman named Jessica Larrew on the podcast to talk about her Amazon retail arbitrage business. Well Ryan has taken a similar model of retail and online arbitrage, and he’s scaled it to a small company with employees and procedures. Now what is online and retail arbitrage? It’s the process of buying from retail stores and liquidation outlets, and selling those products on Amazon.

Anyways last time we spoke Ryan had a pretty nifty operation going on, and I want to catch up with him and see what he’s up to today. With that welcome to the show Ryan, how are you doing today man?

Ryan: Doing great Steve, thanks for having me.

Steve: Yeah, give us the quick background story; tell us about your business, how you got started, and kind of what you sell, and how your operation is like today?

Ryan: Sure, so I got started selling on Amazon back in 2008 when I was a freshman in college. I went to the college book store with the text books that I had paid quite a bit of money for, and saw what they were offering for those books, and was quite disappointed with the offer. So I began to explore other options for selling those books which ultimately led me to Amazon.

Then throughout college I would sell my books, I would sell friend’s books, and eventually started buying books from essentially as many students as possible at the university I went in Minnesota. Then we gradually expanded to other campuses as well, primarily focused just on text books. Then I had that going from about 2008, and in 2013, that was about 2 years after I graduated was still doing the text book stuff.

I had a job as an accountant, didn’t really like that, so I decided to see if I could pursue selling on Amazon as a full time income. On September 2013 is when I started my current operation, which is the primary income source for me now, and then that is selling arbitrage products like Steve mentioned in the introduction.

So it’s everywhere from online stores, retail stores, we’ll buy liquidations and close out from companies that are looking to get rid of goods in bulk, and then we’ll buy direct from manufacturers of brands. We don’t try to label anything at the moment, but we’ll buy like tickets. That’s why a company like Mitel for example we don’t buy from them, but we buy direct from those.

The operation currently, there is myself and then there is 7 other people, and they have a variety of roles to running the operations of the business, going out to these stores and some of our sources, and purchasing the goods. Then there is people that are processing the goods for Amazon at their warehouses as well removing price stickers, doing all the things that need to be done to meet Amazon’s requirements.

It’s been a gradual process, but all about the past 3 and a half years, and working at the point where my time isn’t needed to run the business day to day. That goal was pretty much realized in January of this year, so for the past 5 or 6 months I’ve been able to pretty much have things continue to grow without a ton of my direct involvement. There still sometime that goes there, but it’s primarily focused exclusively on growth as opposed to just day to day operations. That’s a quick look at where things are at today.

Steve: Awesome, is the textbook operation still alive or is that…

Ryan: The textbook operation is not currently going; it’s something I might revive now that we’ve got a bigger team in place. It’s something I see out of doing just because it’s fairly capital intensive and very seasonal. There is 2 main times a year to buy textbooks at the end of each semester.

So I switched over to buying products that sell better year round, but now that the business is in a better financial position, and then there is more manpower as well, it’s something that I’m looking to put back into the fold in the near future, most likely in December of this year when the close of the next college semester comes.

Steve: Interesting, I’ve been out of school for a long time, they still use paper text books?

Ryan: Yes they do.

Steve: They do, okay.

Ryan: They try to [inaudible 00:06:47] e-books. Honestly they end up being a lot more expensive for students, because they can’t resell them when they’re done with them. So even if you pay like 200 bucks for a book, and then at the end you can sell it for 120 bucks, you only loose 80 buck. So even if the e-book was 20% cheaper at the beginning, and you paid 160, you come out quite a bit better with the physical book.

Steve: I see that makes sense. Did you ever work as an accountant?

Ryan: I did, yeah I worked at an accounting firm in Minneapolis for about one year and 9 months. I made it through two busy seasons is what they call it or two tax seasons April through January to April. By the end of the second one I knew…

Steve: You had enough.

Ryan: I wasn’t going to stick it out.

Steve: Were you doing your Amazon thing while you were working as an accountant?

Ryan: I was doing it a little bit, so I knew I wanted to quit my job previous, well honestly within the first 6 months I had it. I kind of began planning my exit. One of the big reasons I didn’t quit right away is I just wanted to be in a good financial position to give myself as much run way to try out something new as possible.

One of the things I wanted to do before I quit was to buy an owner occupied duplex which I was able to do, and then I got that in place, and then I started to spend more time on the Amazon business prior to quitting. So I would say like the past six months before I quit I was trying to spend five to ten hours a week at least on the Amazon business.

It was still the point where I was making between $500 and $1000 dollars a month at the point when I quit. I felt that the time investment would scale up to a full time income if I was able to dedicate full time hours to the Amazon business, which ultimately played out pretty well.

Steve: I was hoping you would be able to walk me through the arbitrage business, and how the business works exactly. Back when you didn’t have a full team, can you talk about where you got the products and what the procedure was like, and how you priced everything, that sort of thing?

Ryan: Yeah, we can well do that. Back when it was just me, my main sources initially were just retail source, Wal-Marts, Targets, Toys R Us, things like that, that were available nationwide. Then some of the better sources were some of the Mom and Pop discount type source that were only available in my area just due to people not being able to get their hands on the same products nationwide, it helps to maintain prices online.

The general concept though is you go into these stores, you look for items that are sold at a discount, or might only be available in your region, and you’re looking for items that will be selling for more on Amazon than they are in the stores, or in the store that you’re sourcing in or you’re buying in. Sourcing is the term that’s generally used in the arbitrage world for going and finding products.

You have an app on your phone, now there is one called the Amazon seller app, it’s completely free, and it does pretty much everything you need. You use the camera on the phone to scan the barcode on the products, and it’s going to display all the details on that product. You will be able to see the price it’s selling for on Amazon.

You’ll also be able to see the fees that will come out if you sell it via the fulfillment by Amazon program, so you can see exactly how that compares with the prices at that store. Then you can also see the reviews of the product, and the sales record of the product. The sales record of the products is something specific to Amazon, and it gives you an idea of how well that product sells.

The law of the sales right number, the better the product sells as a general rule, and that number is going to fluctuate over time. Basically you’re looking for products that return the minimum return on investment that you’re looking for. I normally recommend starting out somewhere between 50 and 100% depending on your risk tolerance straight away.

Steve: This is after fees, Right?

Ryan: Exactly, after fees as that gives you some margin for error if prices go down, if the item [inaudible 00:11:16] and things like that. The higher you can stretch what you set right away, the higher the probability of success, and the more things can go wrong, you still come out okay.

The primary things on the app like right away I’m looking at, the number one thing is the net pay out or the net amount that I will get after fees. Then you calculate your ROI percentage based on that, and then I want a sales rank. Generally speaking there is many caveats to this, but generally speaking less than 10,000 is an item that is going to sell relatively quickly in most categories.

One of the things about sales rank is that every category on Amazon has a different sales rank, so textbooks or books is an entire category, and it’s entirely separate from say the health and beauty category in a sales rank of say 50, 000 in both categories is going to sell through in at a vastly different rates. So those are cut signs are some of the things you pick out right away. Starting with looking for items right under 100,000 is a decent way to start, and then as you get sales, you can iterate on that and find out what’s working, and expand those rankings to what works best for you.

Steve: In terms of just a product, like I wouldn’t just walk in to like a Wal-Mart and just start randomly scanning stuff, right? Do you have any criteria, or where you like to go typically?

Ryan: Yeah, typically I like to start with like the clearance sections of the store, and then that works better like local discount stores and Wal-Marts, places that don’t have nationwide clearance. Target for example they typically, if an item is on clearance at one Target, it’s typically on clearance at thousands of other Targets throughout the country, and there is many people who do this.

We issue a lot of competition on the listings, and then the prices go down. Generally speaking I’m looking for either clearance items or items that are discounted, or the other type of category of item I like to look for is regional products, or something that’s only going to be available to my…

Steve: Give me an example of that.

Ryan: In Minnesota there is a leap year soft drink, it’s called Dad’s [inaudible 00:13:32] and it’s only available in certain areas. It’s available for example at [inaudible 00:13:38] usually. You can get a liter bottle for about a dollar. For quite a while you could sell a three pack of them for about $25.

Steve: Really?

Ryan: Yeah, and these even you didn’t have to ship merchant fulfilled, so that’s not using Amazon’s FBA program just because it’s an item that can explode, because of– like that item is only available in Minnesota for example. If people move to another state, and they really loved that product, they’re often willing to pay a very huge premium for it online. That’s the logic for the regional product, and it’s just a little bit more exclusive, and they are let’s say a copy of the board game monopoly, or something that’s going to be available in every store.

Steve: Do you only have an idea of what products you’re looking for when you do this, or is it random like you walk in a clearance section, and you look for regional products

Ryan: Yeah, it depends on what is available in each store. Basically with this model you’ll sell just about anything. It doesn’t really matter if it’s a toy or if it’s a [inaudible 00:14:56] item for example, or if it’s toothpaste.

All that really matters is what it’s going for online versus what you can buy it for, and the sales process. Really it’s not that focused when you’re doing the retail arbitrage. You evaluate the opportunities that exist in whatever store that you are in regardless of the category.
Steve: Amazon has gotten a little more strict about on gating for categories, right? Do you have any comments on that, like food and beverage for example you have to get on gated for that?

Ryan: Yes they are, so if you’re brand new to the count you won’t be able to sell grocery, health, and beauty. You won’t be able to sell like clothes, shoes, luggage, high end handbags, sunglasses, things like that. Mainly consumables and high end products or things that are easily counterfeited are the main products that you can’t sell right out of the gate.

There is an approval process for all of them. It generally involves buying direct from wholesalers or distributors, so those will be buying more high up the supply chain, more direct from the brand or from a distributor of those brands, and then you submit those invoices to Amazon, and then you’ll be allowed to sell pretty much any product in those categories.

If you get the approval once, you’ll get to go to sell all the products in that category. It’s not generally something I would recommend just right out of the gate. There’s tons of categories that are available to sell in upon. But if you give it a go and you have some real success, and you’re looking to expand, then I definitely recommend looking into getting that approvals and spending the time to get that approval, because there is less competition in those products and categories just due to not all new sellers being able to sell them, so it’s a little bit more exclusive.

Steve: Okay, so once you do find a product, and presumably you’re listing it on top of another process listing, right? Another listing on Amazon?

Ryan: Correct, yeah.

Steve: It’s right, okay. So does that mean that you have to constantly monitor your listing to make sure you have the buy box?

Ryan: Yes, so you’re always looking to have the buy box, and then that’s a pretty big topic in and of itself, because there is many components that go in to winning the buy box. The ones that you can easily control are your feedback percentage, your fulfillment method, and what your price is.

Feedback is, you can use tools to make sure that you’re maximizing your feedback and sending follow up sequences to buyers to maximize that percentage. Fulfillment method if you get a bomb going for the buy box when you use fulfillment by Amazon program versus shipping the item yourself. The closer you are to the lowest price generally speaking, the higher the chance you’ll have the buy box.

Steve: When you’re talking about feedback in the world of retail arbitrage, is that seller feedback, or is that product feedback that you’re more concerned about?

Ryan: That would be seller feedback.

Steve: Okay, got it. So does that imply then that your sequences are more focused on getting the person to leave you seller feedback, like the product feedback doesn’t matter at all at that point, right?

Ryan: Exactly, yeah it’s purely to get a feedback for the individual seller.

Steve: Okay, and then are you doing all of your stuff FBA when you can?

Ryan: Absolutely, yeah.

Steve: Okay and I’m just curious how many skews do you have outstanding today across all your employees and everything?

Ryan: That’s a good question.

Steve: It doesn’t have to be exact; I’m just trying to get an idea of what ball park it is.

Ryan: Between three and 5,000 I would say.

Steve: Three and 5,000 skews, okay. So for all those skews you have to monitor whether you have the buy box on a day to day basis, right?

Ryan: Yep, and there is software that we use to do that. It’s called the repricer, and you set up rules to have– basically have them change your price depending on what is going on with these individual listings so that you don’t have to monitor each one individually.

Steve: One thing I’ve always been curious about is if everyone is using this repricing software, doesn’t the price just continue sinking lower and lower?

Ryan: It can, it depends on which rules you use for the repricer. So my recommendation to people and what I do personally is I don’t want you participating in the item continuing to drop in price. So what I want my profiles to do is to maximize my sales value, so generally what I’ll do is I’ll price lately between one cent above the lowest price, and about one a half percent above the lowest price depending on the individual products, and depending on the category.

Rarely am I going to contribute pushing the price down, because I want my price a little bit above, and you’re still able to take the buy box even at a higher price than the other buy boxes. There is many factors that go into it such as the location of the item relative to where the customer is and things like that.

Then the most aggressive profile that I usually do is matching the buy box, or matching the FBA price. So if another seller has it set to consistently beat whoever lowest price is, or they always want to be say a cent below the lowest offer available, then I will sort of contribute to that.

Another important piece with the repricer is you set up a minimum price or a floor price that repricer won’t go below regardless of what the market is doing, but then you have to take action on the listing if you wanted to drop the price further. So there’s quite a few precautions.

But yeah if people don’t know what they’re doing with repricer, it can get ugly and in reality that can create some buying opportunities too, because if two people are every 15 minutes, they are lowering their price by a penny or by 10 cents, that reduces prices very quickly, but then that creates an arbitrage opportunity to ultimately buy the item from those sellers, and sell back at the same listing.

So if you do some tricks to take advantage of those situations for profit still, but to the overall market place when the repricer gets in to the hands of someone who doesn’t know how to use it, it’s a little bit dangerous.

Steve: So you obviously need the buy box to make sales, but from what it sounds like you’re saying is that the buy box can shift multiple times during the day?

Ryan: Absolutely, different people, say someone on the East Coast and someone on the West Coast could be looking at an identical products, and see a different story on the buy box at the same exact time. So yeah the buy box is constantly rotating, and there is reports that you can run in Amazon on kind of individual item basis to see what percentage of the time you are in the buy box, and then that can help you tweak your repricing, and also create a pricing strategies at the minimum.

Steve: So what do you like to see this percentage at, because presumably all your items have other people selling on it, right?

Ryan: Most do. I would say 95% probably have other sellers. Typically the percentage, it purely depends on the demand for the product. Like if you’re selling say one of the top selling toys…

Steve: Like a chiboka mask for example.

Ryan: Like a chiboka mask, exactly. If you’re selling one of those, it might not matter if you only have the buy box one percent of the time if you have say 10 units or less. Then say it’s a book or a home improvement item that doesn’t sell very often, you might want the buy box more like 50% of the time if you can have that.

So I don’t know, it really depends on a per item basis, but at the minimum I usually like double digit percentages on most listings unless– so 10% or more unless it’s something that’s really flying off the shelves.

Steve: Interesting, do you do any bundling?

Ryan: I don’t do very much bundling; it’s mainly selling on existing listings for now.

Steve: Okay, I was going to ask for your opinion on how like Amazon’s cracking down on the bar codes right now, especially for bundling of bigger brands, but it doesn’t sound like you encounter that at all.

Ryan: Yeah, I haven’t had to deal with that juice yet, it sounds like– I mean if people want to be 100% safe, it sounds like you want a GS1 which is the official place, that’s the safest route to go. It’s more expensive, but it ensures your bases are covered.

Steve: Okay and so one question I’ve always wondered about just the whole retail and online arbitrage space is how do you consistently get goods to sell on a consistent basis?

Ryan: With this type of business, it really is all a function of spending. It’s all based on the products you’re buying and buying correctly. Over the past three years we’ve created with my business pretty specific buying guidelines that we’re looking for, and criteria that we’re looking for in products.

So we’re looking for a certain return on investment, we’re looking for a certain sales rank, certain reviews, there is some other things we factor in as well. But when we buy products that fit those criteria, and then when it’s spread out over enough skews, it has a way of being consistent over time.

I don’t know, it’s kind of like the more or less divine guidelines or the formula, if you put the right inputs into the formula, you get the right output. It’s only sure on top of if you buy right, and then if you’re on top of every pricing and making sure that you’re controlling your inventory levels on each individual item, you tend to get pretty usable results.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now I love running my ecommerce store, but you know what I hate doing the most? Book keeping, seriously keeping track of receipts, expenses, and especially inventory costs are easily the worse aspects of entrepreneurship hands down.

Here is where Bench Accounting comes in. Bench is an online book keeping service that specializes in ecommerce businesses. They are experts at handling all ecommerce related reports, whether it be from Amazon, Shopify, BigCommerce, Stripe, you name it. All you got to do is sign up, and they will pair you with a team of dedicated book keepers who will handle everything for you.

No more data entry, no more data crunching, no more headaches, plus it’s reasonably priced. The best part is you can get 20% off your first 6 months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off you first 6 months, now back to the show.

The people who are doing the buying right now for you, are they literally still walking into Wal-Marts, or do you have like a more consistent source of goods now.

Ryan: The Wal-Mart piece, some are literary still walking into Wal-Marts, but we also have– like some of our online sources are more sustainable, and then some of our wholesalers are wholesale sources where we buy direct from either the distributor, or direct from the company. Those are products we also consistently buy again and again.

Steve: How does that work actually, so are you kind of acting like a marshals in a way?

Ryan: In the sense of like buying from a distributor?

Steve: Yeah.

Ryan: Sure, in a sense it’s more or less like let’s just say I like using with the game monopoly for examples, so if you can buy that direct from Hasbro I believe they’re– it’s Hasbro or Parker Brothers, whoever makes it. You can buy that say direct from them for 6 bucks a unit, and then you can sell it Amazon for 15, and make I don’t know 3 or 4 bucks.

The way that works is essentially you buy 100 to start, then once you get down to say 25 units, you just call them up and say, “Hey I want another 100 units of this,” then you can keep selling that. So we just do that with various products on Amazon.

Steve: But someone like Hasbro is not going to want to sell to someone who just sells on Amazon, right?

Ryan: Generally speaking no. They would be able to handle that on their own, and Hasbro for example, they probably aren’t going to give someone like me the discounts that I would need to even make a profit. Yeah, this tends to work better with much smaller companies who are looking for more a soldier for their products.

Steve: Can you give me an example so like a much smaller like no name brand or?

Ryan: Yeah like a no name brands let’s say generally yeah– let’s see.

Steve: You don’t want to give away that.

Ryan: I don’t want to give away specific products, that’s kind of one of the unfortunate things about an Amazon arbitrage business is that you can’t directly promote yourself to everyone out there, or it kind of creates problems.

Steve: Well, so it’s not important what the exact company is, but why doesn’t that company just list its own stuff on Amazon?

Ryan: That’s a good question. They might not have the expertise, they might not have all the– the short answer is they should, but they might not for a variety of reasons. Like a lot of companies for example they sell products, they just might sell from a reseller presence for like physical transactions, they don’t do much in the role of e-commerce at all. There is lots of people that really don’t even know that it’s an option.

Steve: For these guys then, are you creating a new listing, or do they already have a listing existing at Amazon?

Ryan: We went only targeting ones that have an existing listing, and it will help them to improve the listing, because we just like to see some sense of demand for the products which is hard to do before it’s on Amazon, and then we’ll have to improve it if needed.

Steve: Wait okay, so they are already selling on Amazon then or?

Ryan: Well someone has sold their product on Amazon previously.

Steve: Got it, got it.

Ryan: Pretty much anybody could create a listing for any product they want regardless of if they are the actual brand or not, and then all people going forward will use that listing to sell for that unique UBC.

Steve: Okay, and so you’re helping the brand with their listing?

Ryan: Well yes, I guess so we would improve the listing which helps the brand. Ultimately I guess our main service though is helping them with sales. The way we do that though is by improving the listing that their products are on. They can go through some steps to register on their own, that’s not always something we’ll have them go through, it’s more or less…

Steve: I’m just curious like I’m that company, you’re helping me do this, after a while I’m just going to be like wow thanks, I’m going to just start shipping my own stuff there. So I’m just curious, like what the turnover is like between the vendors that you use?

Ryan: Most of the ones that we’re targeting, they’re looking to sell wholesale, like they don’t want to go direct to the consumer, they want to sell 100 units at a time, make their hit to the margin, and then they’re happy with that. I mean we don’t see a ton of turnover due to them moving on and wanting to sell the products on their own. A more likely scenario that happens is too many sellers come in that are willing to sell at a lower margin, or Amazon themselves comes in and sells that same products. Those are the bigger things that we run into.

Steve: Then there are guys who are selling you the wholesale stuff; do they have relationships directly with the brands?

Ryan: Yes, they work in direct with the brands, sometimes they represent many, sometimes they represent just one. It ultimately depends on the business and the individual.

Steve: And then do those guys have retail shops as well, or are they purely like a middle man?

Ryan: Most of them are purely a middle man.

Steve: Interesting, okay. I’m just wondering what the incentive for brands to work with these guys are? I guess there is liquidation outlets?

Ryan: Some are liquidation, like liquidation has gone to a whole another ball game. I guess the reason brands in my opinion do it is because they are good at making the products, there’s kind of like a private label or importing any product. They are just the first line of the food chain, like they get all the value with the IP that their brand has, like the components of like a game of monopoly for example costs nothing to make.

If they can sell it in bulk for six or seven bucks to one level, and then they turn around and sell it for 10, and the retailer sells it at 15, everybody gets some piece of the pie, but some of these big companies just don’t want to go through– they got the manufacturer piece, but they don’t want to get involved with the sales.

I agree with you they could cut out all these levels and create a lot of margin for themselves. I don’t think they see it as their core businesses. That’s similar to like where stores like Target and Wal-Mart, they’ll move items on clearance to clear shelf space if they don’t sell on there, so ultimately ship them as liquidators, because they know that that shelf space to them is more valuable than really recouping any value for a small percentage of the products.

It’s ultimately that each process in my opinion is just focusing on their core business and not ruining what they’re good at, at the expense of opportunities that appear to be shining objects.

Steve: Would you say that in the arbitrage game like the Holy Grail is to find these wholesale outlets as opposed walking through like a Wal-Mart or Target?

Ryan: It’s definitely a lot more sustainable, so yes. That’s ultimately the direction I’m trying to go in my business is make it sustainable

Steve: Where do you find these wholesale outlets, like do you just go on the internet, or is there a procedure for finding them?

Ryan: Pretty much we’ll go to like tradeshow websites, and see if we can find people that are looking to sell their products. Then reach out to them if their product is already on Amazon, and see if we can represent them there, or if they’re willing to sell to us, or we’ll sell it on Amazon, but then go to Google and see if we can find a distributor with the arbitrage on to you.

You’re selling a ton of different products, so you know what sells well in some cases, and you might not be able to get it in retail stores any more. You could go and look at the packaging and then go direct to the source, and see if you can find it that way. So there is quite a few different options for finding them.

Steve: Interesting, okay.

Ryan: It really comes down to preference though, like the deals are out there in retail stores, they are out there on online stores; they are out there in wholesale. It’s just thinking which one is your focus, and go on with it. In my opinion resale arbitrage is a really good way to keep and create cash to ultimately find out the things…

Steve: Sure.

Ryan: That’s the route my business has taken. We’ve been doing that for a long time, we’ve got good systems in place, so there is no point of really slowing down, but with the excess cash flow, that’s starting to build up a wholesale business and things that are more sustainable than just constantly going into the retail stores.

Steve: So are you doing wholesaling now then, and private labeling?

Ryan: The wholesaling like the piece where we– I guess the terms that we are…

Steve: Yeah they are a really fussy yeah.

Ryan: Yeah, so wholesale what I talk about there is purchasing direct from a distributor or manufacturer, or a brand. That we’re doing, but we’re not like wholesaling products out to someone else.

Steve: Okay, got it.

Ryan: So my college is there.

Steve: For your staff, I’m just curious like how do you assign them to source, like you got seven guys, right?

Ryan: Yup, and three of them source pretty much all the time, and then one sources some of the time, then the other three are in the warehouse working at wholesale, or working on shipping products out the door.

Steve: Okay, and then in terms of your assignment, so you mentioned you do a little bit of everything, right? So how do you decide like how do you distribute resources whether you want them to go to retail stores versus reaching out to wholesalers, and that sort of thing?

Ryan: Yeah so the retail stores we’ve got schedules for each person, and there are certain stores that we know that we can just historically we’ve done well on. We want to make sure we hit those stores every couple of weeks, so that we’re constantly getting those spaces covered. Then one of the guy’s primary focus is wholesale, because that’s a priority.

We let the cash available at any given point in time; we have a spending threshold that we’re looking to hit each month. Initially we’ll hit our main retail spots, our retail arbitrage type locations, spend pretty much as much as we can there. Then depending on what available budget we have left, we’ll shift the time to wholesale, because the wholesale type buying where we’re buying direct from the distributor or manufacturer, those take a little bit longer to pan out, and they are not as expensive right away. You are in charge of like…

Steve: But you have to put down more money upfront though for those, don’t you?

Ryan: You do, but normally we’re starting with the task order that’s less than $1000.

Steve: So do your workers pull up to like Wal-Mart in like 18 wheeler?

Ryan: They should, but it’s pretty normal occurrence. They actually all have just photos to dance…

Steve: Oh really, okay so we’re talking still pretty small quantities right? Whatever can fit, it’s a done.

Ryan: Yeah, it only calls for services needed, it’s up to them. I have a truck with a topper and stuff, so you can really load up if needed, but most of the [inaudible 00:38:05] there are coming from the source, so you’ll just have regular cars.

Steve: This issue of trust like what’s stopping them from just buying the stuff themselves and doing the same thing on the side?

Ryan: Sure, well we try to build that trust with each one of the guys before turning them over to be able to source. Then we also have like a basic non-compete agreement that says you’re not going to use this strategy for yourself while you’re doing it for me. They are compensated based on how much they buy too, and they only know one piece of the puzzle.

We centralize them based on the amount that they purchase, and then they still only know one piece of the puzzle, like they might see that the items sells for this, but then they’re dropping it off at our warehouse, and the rest of the process is handled for them. Even though they know quite a bit, but they don’t necessarily know everything it takes to actually make the money.

Steve: So the buyers do the buying, and then do you take care of the listing part then, is that like your secret source?

Ryan: No, listing was outsourced now too beginning in January. That’s taken care of too, but each person is fairly segmented, like a sourcer to source, the lister lists and ships, and then the shippers pretty much just process items. So try to make sure that each person right away only knows exactly what they need to, but then as they show interest and aptitude to do more, then we’ll look into moving them into other roles and get them further into the business as it makes sense.

Steve: Okay, and then so do you have like a big warehouse to run this operation then?

Ryan: My warehouse is about 725 square feet, so it’s…

Steve: Okay so it’s tiny.

Ryan: Yeah, it’s pretty much just used as a processing space. We bring the products in and then one of the benefits of having a smaller space is it forces you to get products back out the door quickly, because we’re ultimately shipping them all to Amazon’s warehouse, and then they handle the rest.

Steve: So is your turnaround like a day then?

Ryan: Most of the time that will be our average.

Steve: Okay, so I know for a fact that Amazon is making it much harder for people to arbitrage these days. Can you just comment on some of the recent Amazon changes, and how that’s affected you at all if it has affected you at all?

Ryan: Yeah, so I guess it’s very strange this particular…

Steve: I don’t know, I’m asking that question to you in general yeah.

Ryan: Okay, things that make it harder, there are certain brands or certain product lines that they are becoming stingy on I would say. For example there was a game that was selling extremely well, it was called Pie Face in December, and then Amazon– right away anybody could sell it, you could list it, but then half way through they issued restrictions, so that not everyone could sell it unless you submitted invoices.

The reason they did that was because there were counterfeit sellers mainly from overseas, but some from US as well who were selling on these listings and taking advantage of the demand. So that types of issues happening more and more. With that Amazon is doing what they can, and they are putting restrictions in place. Sometimes these restrictions come into place after you already have the items at Amazon’s warehouses, and then you’re kind of stuck with the inventory, or you have to sell via another route.

Steve: What’s your other route, just curious?

Ryan: Next option for us is usually eBay, and then after that we’re going to look to basically liquidate it. I’ve used liquidation.com before, and then there are some companies locally that will pay you effectively pennies on the dollar for items you can’t sell. So that’s our last stop, but we’re usually able to get rid of most of what doesn’t sell on Amazon on eBay.

Steve: Can you comment a little bit about just arbitrage, the landscape in general, because I know a lot of people are starting to go into it. As a result of that there is more and more people hopping on these listings, so what is your secret sauce so to speak on how to stay above like all the other people who are entering the space?

Ryan: That’s one of the things about an arbitrage opportunity is eventually people come in and try to close– not try but over time they get close. Some of the things that we do, we’re very diligent on our margins, we have very specific buying guidelines, so we can weather the storm if we need to, if the price on an item starts to increase, we’re pretty specific about where we purchase from.

With three years of experience of doing this with many people involved, we know which places are good, which places we can get better than average deals, like in some places we’re getting better deals than are available to the general public. In some cases it is as much as 50% off what the stores generally sells it for. Since we’re buying in such large quantities, we get volume discounts.

Building relationships with the right people in the stores goes a long way, and then just– I mean to the point the business is now at the point too where there is quite a bit of capital available, so we are not forced to sell products at a loss if we don’t want to. There is definitely times where we take losses, but if say we have a lot of stock in, and then because there is like a clearance at Target, it might be 3 to 6 months before that item re-bounce.

Initially when all those sellers come in, the price will go down, but if you look at prices reach outs, and there are a few sites out there that will show you these, eventually items recover. Very few the price deteriorates, and then consistently stays down. So if you are able to weather that storm and hold on until a better opportunity to sell, that creates a lot of opportunities as well, because a lot of people are looking to sell the items within say 30 or 60 days, and then they’ll sell it no matter what the prices after that timeframe.

Generally we’re looking to sell the items quickly too, but we’re not forced to just based on having more capital.

Steve: What’s your goal on moving a particular buy, within 30 days or?

Ryan: Our typical goal is within 90 days, we want to be sold out, and then that’s on some of our like higher quantity, I mean that’s the full quantity we’re buying on like a retail arbitrage buyer. Then we will adjust that too based on what the ROI percentage is. If it’s a lower ROI percentage we’re wanting it to move quicker, but if it’s say a 200% ROI we might be okay holding it for 5 to 6 months.

Steve: When you say low, low is like 50%?

Ryan: Low would be like 25%.

Steve: 25%, okay and normal is 100% for you would you say?

Ryan: I would say about 75% is pretty common for the bulk of the stuff we’re doing, and then once we’re talking wholesale or buying direct from the distributors or manufacturers, that then drops a bit, then it’s going to be anywhere from 30 to 75% range. It depends on…

Steve: Okay, but those are easier to manage, right?

Ryan: Oh yeah, you’re getting started at once, and then until you can keep some of the products as long as you want.

Steve: Okay, so let me ask you this, like how much longer do you think that this whole getting into retail arbitrage and online arbitrage is going to last?

Ryan: I think it’s going to last quite some time, so it’s hard to put an exact time line on it. Just based on what I see from myself and then all the people I know selling on Amazon, I know a lot of people that are doing quite well at it to the point where I’m confident if you know what you’re doing you can do really well.

At the same time I do see lots of people coming in, so I think eventually the gaps are going to close or start compressing. But with enough money or with enough inputs I think there is still going to be a lot of opportunity either way. I mean in reality the fact that you can go in a Wal-Mart and buy something and make 75% return on your investment in a month on products that are generally available on the shelf is ridiculous.

Steve: Yeah, it’s pretty crazy.

Ryan: Yeah, I think it’s got a long way to go. Online arbitrage, there’s tons of tools and services coming out lately that are making it more accessible to get the information you need to make purchases, but if you’re disciplined in your buys, and you really put in the time to get the right items to your research, I think there is a lot of runway for both retail and online arbitrage.

I think it’s a great way to create cash, but then at the same stroke and I think it’s wise to diversify and to wholesale or private label, or another sourcing method that’s going to be more sustainable for the long run.

Steve: So just curious you mentioned that you have really good cash flow from this, how are you expanding going forward?

Ryan: Right now we’re looking, like the primary amount of the new cash will be going to wholesale, so buying direct from the manufacturers and distributors. We will be looking to potentially add either people locally or potentially virtual assistants to help us with a lot of that research, and we’ll do the actual outreach. That’s the primary focus for the near term is to get as much money in the wholesale type accounts as possible.

In terms of financing that, it will just be through the business, like through– because at the beginning is very much to spend [inaudible 00:48:50] pretty much since the beginning I didn’t start. I started with I don’t know three to $5,000, I don’t know the exact number any more, and then use credit cards strategically, never get any interest, and then I’ve just used cash the whole way, and now we’ll do multiple millions in sales this year.

Steve: Do you guys take out loans, or is this just money within the business that you reinvest?

Ryan: I have access to a lot of credit, but I haven’t used it yet, so everything so far has just been finance with cash in the business.

Steve: Okay, that’s cool man, awesome.

Ryan: Yeah, it’s been good.

Steve: Well, hey Ryan I want to be respectful of your time, we’ve been chatting for quite a while. Where can people check out your work, I know you have a blog at Online Selling Experiment, but if anyone has any questions for you, where can they find you?

Ryan: Yeah, the best place is probably the website as you mentioned onlinesellingexperiment.com. You can email me if you want, my email is Ryan@onlinesellingexperiment.com. Twitter is @walkaway50K, and that is on the first blog post on my blog which is titled walking away from 50k, which I did after I left my job.

Steve: This is your accounting position?

Ryan: So that became the Twitter handle, so any of those places are best, but yeah reach out if you have questions.

Steve: Cool, hey well thanks for coming to the show Ryan, I really appreciate it

Ryan: Yeah Steve, thanks.

Steve: All right, take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. I find it amazing how Ryan has managed to scale a business model that is inherently not easily scalable, and with all the latest Amazon announcements about brand gating, I’m going to have to follow up with Ryan to see how this has affected his business.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode132. I want to thank sitelock.com once again for sponsoring this episode. If you run your own hosted online store or any website for that matter that handles monetary transactions, you should give SiteLock a look. They can also help you with your site speed issues as well, and did you know that ecommerce sites that take longer than 5 seconds to load often shed customers.

Now SiteLock offers a service called TrueSpeed that can increase download speeds by up to 50%. Go check out SiteLock today at sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. If you go to that link you will get three months free. Once again that’s sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob.

Once again if you are interested in starting your own online business, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com, and sign up for my free 6 day mini course, where I show you how to start a profitable online store. Sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

131: Which Ecommerce Business Model Is Right For You With Steve Chou

131: Which Ecommerce Business Model Is Right For You With Steve Chou

Today I decided to do a solo episode because it’s been a long time since I’ve taken the mic to give some of my own opinions.

A lot of people have been asking for advice lately on what type of ecommerce business model to pursue so I put together a quick and dirty episode to describe all the different models out there and give you enough information for you to make an educated decision for yourself.

Enjoy the episode!

What You’ll Learn

  • How dropshipping works
  • How private labeling works
  • How selling wholesale works
  • The pros and cons of each business model
  • Which business model is the most sustainable in the long run

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. If you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free 6-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email.

Now before we begin, I also want to give a shout out to sitelock.com for being a sponsor of the show. SiteLock is the leader in website security, and protects over 8 million websites by monitoring them from malicious activities 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. So here is the thing, most online business owners never think about security until they get hacked, and a long time ago my online store actually got hacked, and it was the most miserable experience ever.

I basically lost thousands of dollars as I frantically tried to patch the issues on my site, and get my store back online as quickly as possible. In the event that you get hacked, you can call sitelock.com, and they will help you out, or even better protect your site before you even get hacked. For more information, go to sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. Now on to the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quite Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I thought I do a solo episode mainly because I’ve been getting a lot of questions lately about what type of e-commerce business model to pursue. Every time I publish an article on entrepreneurship that encourages my readers to start their own businesses, I find myself tip-toeing across a very fine line.

On one hand starting an online business, an e-commerce business is pretty simple, relatively risk free, and it doesn’t require a lot of startup capital, but on the other hand running a successful business also requires a ton of hard work, perseverance, and a little bit of luck. The problem is when I emphasize the enormous amount of work that’s involved to launch a company; I tend to turn people away from wanting to start a business. But when I emphasize simplicity, people tend to harbor unrealistic expectations and expect a quick path to riches.

In fact one of the number one questions I do get asked is how long it actually takes to make good money with an e-commerce business. It’s unfortunate and this is a pattern that I’ve been seeing, but a lot of would be entrepreneurs tend to choose the business model to pursue based purely on how easy it is to start, as opposed to considering the actual probability of success. In fact just the other day I was getting emails from people asking me, why they should go through the hustle of selling physical products online when they can just be an affiliate.

Why should they start their own inventory when they can simply drop ship all their goods, and why should they even bother setting up a shopping cart when they can just put up a blog, and sell advertizing? What makes things even more confusing is that these people, they are on Facebook, and they are looking at their feeds, and every time they go on Facebook they see a brand new business guru pushing yet another e-commerce business model.

While a lot of these methods are legit, just the sheer number of choices is pretty overwhelming even to me, like I had to go through, and watch some of these webinars to just get an idea of what some of these gurus were pushing. Now I don’t really consider myself a guru, but I do get quite a few emails from readers asking for advice on what type of business model to begin.

What I thought I do today is go over all the different e-commerce business models that I’ve seen online, and give some commentary on them, and discuss the pros and cons, and let you decide for yourself. Whatever you do you should never pursue a business model simply because of how easy it is to start. Instead you got to make sure you consider other factors like the long term sustainably of the business as well as the probability of success.

Now keep in mind that when you are listening to the business models that I am about to describe, some of these business models are really easy, they have very low barriers to entry, low cost, and lower overhead. Some of these business models are easy to start, but they are super competitive. Some of these business models require a decent upfront investment to start. Some of them require inventory, some of them require that you put up your own website.

So I’m going to discuss the pros and cons of all these business models based on the following criteria, how easy it is to get started, how quickly you can make money, and the defensibility of your business and its long term potential to create sustainable income, and basically how hard it is to make money, and how easy it is for some of them to just go ahead, and all of a sudden launch a competitor to your business.

If you have been reading my blog for a long time, I have this strong belief that the more work and the more effort that you put into your business to be successful, the more sustainable your business will be in the long run, because it will be that much harder for someone to copy you. So that being said one of the most popular business models that I get asked about is drop shipping.

Now if you guys aren’t familiar with drop shipping, drop shipping is basically when you put up a website to take orders, but you don’t have to carry any inventory. Instead of fulfilling the products yourself, what happens is when you get an order, you don’t fulfill yourself, you send it over to your vendor, and then the vendor is responsible for shipping the order to the end customer.

One of the huge advantages of this business model is that you don’t have to carry any inventory; you don’t have to do any order fulfillment. It’s really cheap to start up a drop ship business, because all you need is a website essentially, and infact as part of my 6 day mini course I show you how to set up aside an open cart for 5 bucks a month, and you can easily do drop shipping with just a very simple open cart shopping cart.

It is really simple to start basically, all you need to do is find a vendor who is willing to drop ship for you, and all of a sudden you have a whole bunch of products that you can list on your site. In order to get one of these vendors to approve you, you have to show them that you are legit. Often times you might have to put up your website, and a good looking website, and populate it with mock products before you can even get approved as a retailer, but once you do get approved, you will have access to that vendor’s entire portfolio which you can list in your shop.

What’s nice about the drop shipping with your own website model also is that you are in full control of your store brand, because you own the website, but the downside of drop shipping of course is that the margins are super low. Mainly because someone else is storing all the inventory, and doing all the fulfillment for you, naturally you are going to have to pay for that.

Now the profit margins for typical drop ship stores are anywhere between 10 and 30%, and most people who I have met, who have had successful drop ship stores tend to sell products that are more expensive, anywhere from $200 to $1000. Because the profit margins are slimmer, you want to sell more expensive products to make up for that fact.

Now because the margins are so low, paid advertizing becomes a little bit more challenging, because you don’t have as much margin to play with, and as a result of that often times you are going to be stuck relying on search engine optimization only, and all the free traffic that Google can get for you, or you might rely on social media or Pinterest or Facebook.

Some of the drop shippers that I know who have been successful, they have been able to run Google shopping campaigns successfully, but in terms of regular Adwords or Facebook ads, they have not been able to get that profitable, mainly because it requires a larger margin to get those advertizing mediums to work.

Now the other thing that can be problematic as well with drop shipping is that you might be competing with other shops carrying the exact same product you are, except physically carrying inventory, and because their margins are higher they have a little bit more flexibility in what they can do with their products in terms of promotions and that sort of thing. Finally since you are selling other people’s products, you aren’t really in control of the product mix. A vendor can obsolete a product at any time, and you will have to update your website accordingly.

The other downside of drop shipping is that you are not really in control of your customer support, because you are not the one fulfilling the products. And so let’s say an order comes in, and you send it over to your vendor, and the customer complains that they never got it, well guess what, you are responsible for the fulfillment even though you are not the one doing it. What ends up happening is you have to contact the vendor and act as the go between, between the customer and your vendor to make sure the product reaches the end customer.

Anything that goes wrong it’s on you; it’s your store’s reputation and not your vendor’s. What’s also complicated also is maintaining inventory issues, because you don’t really want to be selling stuff when your vendor is out of stock. And so you want to make sure you work with the right vendors that have the EDI system in place, so that you can track the inventory and make sure you don’t sell something that is accidentally out of stock. But overall what makes a drop shipping a little bit more fragile in terms of business model for me, is that you’re heavily dependent on your vendors for your business reputation.

A vendor can cancel the drop shipping arrangement anytime. They can discontinue products, and basically you are at their mercy. The other thing I don’t like of course is the fact that the margins are low, which greatly limits the paid advertizing options. For our store at Bumblebee Linens, we spend a lot of money on paid advertizing, because it converts very well, and our margins are really high, so that we can afford to do them.

The next business model I want to talk about is drop shipping from Amazon to eBay. Now this is also known as eBay Amazon arbitrage, and here is how it works. First you find products at Amazon that are selling higher on eBay, and then you take the images and the product copy from the Amazon product, and you post an identical listing on eBay that is significantly higher in cost.

There is a bunch of courses and software out there that will do this for you pretty automatically, and the reason this business model works is because people who shop on eBay tend not to shop on Amazon, and for some reason there is a lot of people on eBay who are not aware that eBay is not the cheapest place to be shopping. As soon as the auction closes on eBay the seller then purchases the exact same product on Amazon, and has it shipped over to the eBay customer.

And so basically you are just leveraging the difference in prices from Amazon and eBay. What ends up being problematic to the brand owner is that the product gets shipped in an Amazon box. Let’s say you are an eBay customer and you get shipped a product in an Amazon box, you are going to be thinking to yourself, what’s going on here, and you might actually go and check up on Amazon for that exact same product, and then discover that you got ripped off.

Usually what happens is that that customer will complain to the brand directly, which usually results in a return, and so just this practice tends to piss off brand owners. I know a couple of brand owners who have complained and have gotten some of these eBay sellers banned, so this is a pretty dangerous business model. Personally I actually hate people that do this, but it is attractive if you want a business that has no over head costs, there is no website required, you don’t need vendors at all.

Basically all you need is an eBay account, and an Amazon purchasing account, and that’s it. Easy to get started, but you know you are going to get nasty letters from brand owners, you might get banned on eBay, you might get banned on Amazon. Personally I just don’t like people who do this business model, because you are not really adding any value at all. The other big downside of course is that you constantly have to be on the lookout for new products, and you have to watch the prices on Amazon like a hawk to make sure that you are still making a profit.

Overall that business is great for cash flow, but I wouldn’t even really call that a business, it’s more like money making scheme that’s temporary. The next business model I want to talk about is called retail arbitrage or RA for short, and it has become increasingly popular over the last couple of years because of Amazon. If you recall I had Jessica Larrew on the podcast a while back. She makes 6 figures doing this, and she has been teaching other people how to do this as well, and here is how it works.

Basically you walk into a liquidation store like a TJ Max or a Marshalls, and you go straight to the clearance section, and you will find that there is always going to be products that are cheaper than Amazon retail prices. So you basically go in, you buy the entire clearance section, and then you list those products on Amazon. The reason this model works is because a lot of consumers don’t have access to some of these stores, the only thing they have access to is Amazon, and so they are willing to pay higher prices.

What’s really nice about this business model is that you don’t need a website, you can leverage Amazon’s huge market place for instant sales, there is practically no start up cost except for your initial inventory. But the major downside here is that your business is 100% at the mercy of Amazon, and you basically constantly need to go on these shopping trips to find new goods to list on the platform, which basically means that the amount of money you can make doing retail arbitrage is limited to the amount of time you can go shopping for bargains.

Also in the last couple of weeks I would say Amazon has introduced a lot of new rules that strongly discourage this business model. So for example Amazon has been preventing sellers from selling certain brands without approval from the manufacture. Let’s say you just bought a couple of thousand dollars worth of Legos …

I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now I love running e-commerce store, but you know what I hate doing the most? Book keeping, seriously keeping track of receipts, expenses, and especially inventory cost are easily the worst aspect of entrepreneurship hands down. And here is where Bench Accounting comes in. Bench is an online book keeping service that specializes in e-commerce businesses. They are experts at handling all e-commerce related reports, whether they be from Amazon, Shopify, Big Commerce, Stripe, you name it.

All you got to do is sign up and they will pair you with a team of dedicated book keepers who will handle everything for you. So no more data entry, no more data crunching, no more headaches, plus it is reasonably priced, and the best part is you can get 20% off your 6 months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co./mywifequitherjob to get 20% off your first 6 months, now back to the show.

Recently Amazon actually started gating Lego products, and so you spend a couple of grand on this and guess what? Obviously you can’t sell this on Amazon anymore, and you are stuck with a couple of grand worth of legos that you can’t really get rid of because you can no longer sell those on Amazon. In fact all it takes is for Amazon to shut down a couple of brands that you have inventory of, and could shut your business down just like that. That’s why retail arbitrage is risky right now.

Amazon is placing more focus on supporting brands which does not favor retail arbitrage. They’ve also introduced some large upfront cost to sell certain brands anywhere from $500 to $5000 from what I heard just for the privilege of selling a brand. And also recently they’ve started enforcing using GS1 bar codes that where your barcodes must actually match the brand that you are selling. All of those factors are making retail arbitrage really difficult right now, and so as a result, while this business is easy to do and it can be lucrative, it is pretty risky right now because Amazon can ban your brand.

Next business model I want to talk about is drop shipping on Amazon, and drop shipping on Amazon against versus your own site, they are actually quite similar. The only difference is that you are drop shipping to people who’ve bought on Amazon instead, and the procedure is the same. You need to find drop ship vendors who are willing to ship products to the end customer on your behalf, and it’s important to note that this business model does not use FBA or fulfilled by Amazon.

Basically you are responsible for filling the order to the end customer in a timely manner, and this business model is attractive because there is no start up cost, you don’t need a website. Because you are going with a drop ship vendor you can instantly have hundreds of products at your disposal that you can list on Amazon, but of course the problem with drop shipping is that everyone has access to the exact same products. The fact that it is so easy to list something on Amazon, there is probably a high probability that particular item that you are trying to drop ship on Amazon is already being listed on there.

The other thing that’s extremely dangerous about this business model is that Amazon has really strict requirements on seller quality, and on time shipments. That’s why finding a reliable vendor is of the utmost of importance. So let’s say you have a huge sale, and you sell a whole bunch of products, but for some reason your distributor or your vendor has had an inventory glitch, and you can’t really fulfill the products to the end customers, and so what you end up doing is you have to cancel a whole bunch of orders on Amazon.

Well guess what? Amazon is probably going to ban your account for doing that. Like I said Amazon is really strict on, on time shipments, and the fact that you don’t cancel orders that you’ve already taken in. If you guys are interested in this business model, in episode 108 of my podcast, my buddy John Rampton, he was doing drop shipping on Amazon, and he actually got banned for the exact same reason I just described.

Basically he lost his 7 figure business overnight. So while this business model is very easy to get into, and it doesn’t have that much upfront cost to it, it is extremely risky, and it’s not really a sustainable business model. If you are thinking about doing this business model, go and listen to episode 108 first.

All right the next business model is private labeling your own goods. Now private labeling is the act of placing your own brand or label on a product that you produce yourself. Basically the way it works is you first have to find a manufacturer to produce products for you in bulk, and basically they will allow you to put your own brand on the product. What a lot of people are doing right now is they are going to Ali Baba to find these manufacturers.

Once you produce your product, you then ship off all of your goods to Amazon FBA, and you take advantage of Amazon’s huge market place to sell your goods. Because you are manufacturing, and you are buying your own products in bulk, you have to put more money upfront to actually get those products into Amazon’s warehouse first. So the typical minimum of investment I would say to do a private label product, the minimum, absolute minimum, is plan on the order of $500.

Preferably you should have a 1000 or a couple of 1000 in order to purchase that initial inventory. In general what’s really nice about this business model is that you don’t need a website, you don’t need to generate your own traffic, because Amazon’s market place is getting you all the sales. There are no inventory requirements, because Amazon is housing all of your inventory, and the best part is that you are producing products with your own brand on it, so in theory there are no competitors.

Now overall this business model is a little bit more challenging than the others, because it requires interaction with a vendor outside the country typically. You will have to likely deal with an Asian vendor where the cultures are different, but the big positive is that you own your own brand, you own your own products, and the margins are super high, greater than 66%. In fact for our store, for our private label products, our margins tend to be on the order of 75 all the way up to 95%. Because Amazon’s market place is so large, you can make a lot of money really quickly especially over the holidays when Amazon goes nuts.

Now the downside of course of private labeling on Amazon is that you are dependent on Amazon. It’s been getting really competitive lately. If you have a successful listing on Amazon chances are you will get piggy backed or hijacked. What that basically means is you might have other sellers trying to sell on your listing something that is not the exact same product, and the upshot of this is if you end up selling a popular product, you basically have to monitor your products like a hawk.

You also have to monitor your feedback for your products, because Amazon can ban you at anytime in the event that you get a string of negative feedback. The reason why this is really dangerous is because you are investing a large sum upfront for inventory, and so if you ever do get banned on Amazon for any reason, you could get stuck with a lot of unsellable products.

Now I have been selling private labeling products on Amazon for a couple of years now, and the market place is pretty cut throat, and I’ve met and encountered a bunch of scumbag sellers. I’ve gotten tons of piggy backers. I had one dude over the holidays, he bought up all my inventory, so I had nothing to sell for that particular product over the holidays, and then once the holidays were over, he ended up returning all the merchandize, and so I didn’t get to keep the money for those products, and I lost out on the holiday sales as well.

Stuff like this is going to happen, and it’s just a fact of doing business on Amazon. But you know overall selling private label products is actually the way I recommend, because you own the brand, you own the product, and you have the option of selling these private label products on your own website. It is by far the most sustainable way of making money on Amazon of any of the other models that I have presented so far.

Next business model I want to talk about is closely related to selling private label products on Amazon, it’s selling wholesale products on Amazon using FBA. To sell wholesale products on Amazon, you first have to find distributors who offer a variety of products to sell, and basically you buy those products that you think are going to be profitable, and then you list them on Amazon.

You send the on Amazon using FBA, and margins are typically on the order of 50%. Now similar of a private labeling, there is very few barriers to entry, you just need some product, then you just ship over to Amazon, and Amazon pretty much does the rest. You don’t really need a website. All you basically need to do is find wholesalers with large product catalogues.

Once you sign up with a couple of vendors, you instantly have access to hundreds of products to sell at your disposal. The main difference between private labeling and selling wholesale is that when you sell wholesale, you don’t have to buy a large upfront quantity of goods like private labeling. When you are doing wholesale often times the minimum order for a particular product is on the order of $100.

When you do wholesale, it’s really easy to just get a bunch of product, and just list them on Amazon, see which one sells, discard the ones that don’t sell, and then focus on the ones that do. But the main downside to selling wholesale on Amazon is that you are probably going to be selling the exact same product as someone else, and the thing about Amazon is that it’s really easy to list a product on there.

And so if you are listing a product on there, chances are someone is also listing the exact same product as well, and when that happens the price tends to erode really quickly. This is actually something that happened to my buddy Lass. For about a year he was the only seller of this wholesale product on Amazon, but all of a sudden got discovered by someone else. Then it was only a matter of months, it happened so quickly, and he said all of a sudden he had all this inventory that he couldn’t make a profit on, and he ended up having to just liquidate everything for no profit.

Selling wholesale on Amazon might sound attractive on the surface. In terms of long term potential, and sustainably, it’s not so great because you are selling other people’s products on Amazon, and chances are there is going to be others selling the exact same thing. Moving right along the next business model is selling wholesale products on your own website, and carrying inventory. Now 5 years ago this was pretty much the only business model around.

It’s a pretty traditional model, you basically carry products, you hold inventory, and then you ship to people who buy from your website. Margins tend to be on the order of 50% when you do wholesale, and you need to handle your own inventory, which is a negative to a lot of people, but you can use a 3PL or a 3rd Party Logistics firm to handle the shipping and fulfillment for you, or you can even use Amazon FBA. Whenever an order comes in, you can go on Amazon’s interface and have Amazon ship a product to the end customer, and so that way you can list on Amazon as well on your own website pretty easily.

Now what’s nice about doing wholesale on your own site once again is that the minimum order is a lot less than private label, often times on the order of 100 bucks. The main advantage of selling on your own website wholesale versus Amazon is that you are in control of your store brand; you are in control of what your shop looks like. You can probably do a better job with the sales process, putting content on there to convince people to buy, having an email sequence, and a funnel again to convert customers over.

The downside of selling wholesale once again as with all wholesale business models is that you are selling the same products as other people, and whenever that happens the prices tend to erode pretty quickly. You really need to differentiate yourself based on content and the sales experience in your customer service in the event that you decide to sell wholesale on your own site.

Now I saved the best business model for last which is basically selling private label products on your own website. It has the highest long term potential, because you are in charge of everything. You own the product because you are manufacturing your own products. You are driving traffic to your own store, you are in control of your own traffic, your own advertizing and everything. The downside of course is that you really need to know how to do all of these things on your site. You can’t rely on Amazon to drive traffic for you.

You basically have to learn how to drive traffic yourself, and similar to selling private label on Amazon it does require some upfront capital as well to import some of these goods from overseas, but it does carry the greatest long term sustainability. You are in control, you can set pricing, you can define the product however you want, you can never get banned by anyone. So in the long run, and this is the business model that I really favor in case you want to start a long term sustainable business.

If you are willing to put forth the work, selling your own branded products on your own site is easily the most secure way to run an e-commerce business. We have been in business since 2007, and things are still going strong, we have been growing in double and triple digits every single year. That’s just a high level overview of all the different e-commerce business models that I’ve seen around, and based on the webinars that I’ve been seeing on Facebook as well which I’ve watched.

Those are the basic e-commerce business models that people are pushing right now. Now it’s important to note that there is nothing that excludes you from combining the different models, so for example just because I run my own site doesn’t mean that I can’t sell on Amazon as well. Just because I sell my own private label products does not mean that I can’t drop ship either, and just because I sell private label products on Amazon doesn’t mean that I can’t mix it up and sell wholesale products on Amazon as well.

I suggest that you give all these business models a try to see which one fits your personality, but overall just keep in mind that selling private label products is the way to go in the long run if you want to create a sustainable business. It doesn’t matter whether you are selling on Amazon or your online store, owning your own brand and your products is the way to go. My philosophy is that if you are going to be spending the time and the effort to launch a business, you may as well chose a business model that is built to last, something that is sustainable in the long run.

Now for our e-commerce, we sell private label products on Amazon, we sell private label products on our own store, and we also sell wholesale products on our own store as well. In the past, in the very beginning, we also dropped hipped a couple of items to fill out our store, because when we first launched we didn’t have a whole lot of products in our store. So in order to fill out some of the categories we had a couple of drop shipped items that we actually ended up not really selling that many, because we jacked up the price, but it was just there to make the store look fuller.

One thing that you guys can do though if you are a little bit more risk averse is you can start out selling wholesale, and then find the wholesale goods that are selling the best, and then go and private label those products. Try to produce your own brand, make modifications to make those products better, and then just start selling under your own brand. The key thing to remember is that the more effort that you place on your business, the more defensible it’s going to be.

If there is one take away that you take out of this episode is that you don’t want to be tempted into just starting a business just because it’s quick and easy and little risk, because chances are it’s not going to be sustainable. Now let’s just take retail arbitrage for example, Amazon is already changing the rules by preventing any arbitrage seller from selling certain brands. I know for a fact that Amazon is going to be starting brand central pretty soon, which will allow other private label sellers to prevent other people from piggy backing on their brands.

And so when it comes down to just starting an e-commerce business, you really need just to be conscious of your cash flow needs, and decide whether you are going to be satisfied with doing something that’s a little bit more temporary in nature versus something built to last. One of the main reasons I like the private label route is because the barriers to entry are higher, because you got to source products, establish relationships with vendors in Asia. That’s one extra thing that a competitor has to do to copy your business idea, and that’s not even taking to account the relationships with the vendors that I have.

Those are very valuable, and it’s very hard for someone to replicate a relationship, because it takes time to establish that. And of course because I manufacture a lot of my own products, and I control my own website, it’s much more difficult for someone else to carry the exact same products, or to copy my site. I’ve got years of SEO work in there, I’ve got years of content, I’ve got years of B to B customers that I have built up overtime, and it’s really hard to take that away.

On the Amazon front as well, you know once brand central kicks in, it’s going to be hard for other people to sell my products as well. Amazon is less defensible than having your own website, but it’s really good to just launch your products on Amazon, pick the ones that are doing well, and then create your own website based on the products that are doing well on Amazon. Okay, and so hopefully that has provided you with a high level overview of all the business models.

I really don’t recommend drop shipping on Amazon or selling wholesale on Amazon, or especially doing the Amazon eBay arbitrage in the long run, because those business models tend to be less defensible. Well I hope you enjoyed that solo episode, and going forward I might mix in more solo podcasts in with the interviews if the response is positive.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode131. I also want to thank sitelock.com once again for sponsoring this episode. If you run your own hosted online store or any website for that matter that handles monetary transactions, you should probably give SiteLock a look. They can help you with your site, and your site speed issues as well, and did you know that e-commerce sites that take longer than 5 seconds to load often shed customers.

Now SiteLock also has a service called TrueSpeed, which is a content delivery network that can increase download speeds by up to 50%. Go check out SiteLock today at sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob, once again that is sitelock.com/mywifequitherjob. Once again if you are interested in starting your own online business, head on over to mywifequitherjob.com, and sign up for my free 6 day mini course, where I show you how to start a profitable online store. Sign up right there on the front page, and I will send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

130: Tips And Tricks On How To Find Suppliers And Source Product In Asia With Manuel Becvar

Tips And Tricks How To Find Suppliers And Source Product In Asia With Manuel Becvar

Today I have Manuel Becvar on the show. Now Manuel and I had exchanged several emails in the past few years but it wasn’t until Will Tjernlund and Peter Zapf of Global Sources and I started chatting did I get to know Manuel.

If you’ve never heard of Manuel, he runs ImportDojo.com which is a site that helps others source goods from Asia.

In fact, Manuel runs a sourcing service as well and he has been helping me source a few things from China.

Anyway, Manuel has a ton of experience sourcing products from Asia and he’s got a ton of contacts as well.

What You’ll Learn

  • The best way to find good suppliers
  • Services that Manuel recommends
  • Alibaba vs Global Sources vs Canton Fair vs Panjiva and Import Genius
  • How to perform quality control in Asia
  • How to negotiate MOQs.
  • How to get the attention of a supplier to let them know you’re serious.
  • How to attract quality suppliers.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. If you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free 6-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequiteherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email. Now onto the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m really excited to have Manuel Becvar on the show. Now Manuel and I exchanged several emails in the past, but it actually wasn’t until Will Chanlin and Peter Zapf of Global Sources and I started chatting did I start getting to know Manuel better. For all of you who have never heard of Manuel, he runs ImportDojo.com, which is a site that helps others source goods from Asia.

In fact Manuel runs a sourcing service as well, and he’s actually been helping me source a couple of things from China. I’ll probably write about the experience as soon as I have some product in hand to talk about. Anyway Manuel has a ton of experience sourcing products from Asia, and he’s got a ton of contacts as well. His blog at ImportDojo.com is also an excellent resource that you should check out as well.

With that, welcome to the show Manuel. How are you doing today man?

Manuel: Hey Steve, doing great. Thanks for having me on the show. I’m really excited.

Steve: We’ve been chatting for a little bit. I never got the whole back story. How did you get started in ecommerce, and what was the back story behind Import Dojo?

Manuel: It goes a long way I guess. Originally I’m from Austria. I moved to Hong Kong in was late 2005 when I was asked by a big DIY retail in Austria to take care of some of the import products in their sourcing office in Hong Kong. I moved to Hong Kong in 2005, and I’ve been working for this retailer and sourcing office for a while.

Then I changed jobs and essentially I ended up going back to that same company again in 2011. I was there until 2014. From 2005 to 2014 I was in several different positions in different companies mainly sourcing, going to China, accompanying buyers to factories, going to the exhibitions, negotiating prices, the whole package as a product manager based in Hong Kong.

Steve: What type of products were you sourcing for those companies?

Manuel: Mainly electronics actually. A couple of household products, but I think I’d say my expertise really lies in electronics, consumer electronics, household electronics, lighting, solar items, pretty much everything would apply. Beginning of 2014 I always wanted to have my own company, but never really figured out the right idea. Then in 2014 I just started to contact a couple of my customers.

They were really interested in my idea which was mainly purchasing products from China, consumer electronics, but modify them, improve them, put my own private label on them, have a nice packaging. In 2014 I started Mandarin Gear which is still my consumer electronics brand. I started out offering to my existing and older customers.

I started to realize that most of the people don’t really have any idea how to import from China, and all the regulations, the processes that come along with it. In late 2014 I also got into Amazon a little bit, but not that much. I started to write up a little guide on importing which quickly turned into a 65 pages eBook called the Import Bible. I think people can download it on my site for free.

I realized people want to know more. Not just the basic process, but also in-depth knowledge on sourcing from China, how to deliver to Amazon and the whole package. I created Import Dojo in early 2015 which was in the beginning just really a blog, and then where you can download my free eBook. I wrote three more books, and then made this into an online course with over 100 video tutorials right now.

On the side I started offering sourcing for mainly Amazon sellers who are not comfortable working with Chinese suppliers, or who like the experience or just want someone professional to handle the entire thing. All the while I also focused on my own Amazon business, and that’s what I’m doing today.

Steve: Can we talk about Mandarin Gear a little bit. What does that sell?

Manuel: Mandarin Gear sells Bluetooth speakers, smart phone accessories, but also have a French press of house hold product into it. They’ll be 3 new products under the brand coming up, but Mandarin Gear I mostly sell to retailers in Europe, the retail, not ecommerce.

Steve: I see, so you’re wholesaler.

Manuel: Exactly. I improve the product. Let’s say a Bluetooth speaker, I see it at the factory, I like to design, but for example the sound output is not good, or the finishing is not good. What I essentially did is I changed some of the components inside, made the sound better, changed the finishing let’s say from cheap plastic looking to rubber coating, and a nice packaging instruction manual and all that. Then put my label on top and offer it to buyers in Europe together with customer sales follow up and customer service.

Steve: How did you find your customers for that business?

Manuel: Mainly those were all contacts that I gathered in the 10 years that I was working as an employee in Hong Kong.

Steve: I see, okay.

Manuel: I was working as a sales person at some point, but also as the product manager for the retailer. I’ve collected a lot of contacts in the industry.

Steve: How does that differ from selling to the consumer like on Amazon versus being a wholesaler? Would you say that it’s easier? It’s harder? Okay.

Manuel: Oh no. It’s a lot more difficult, and it takes a long time. For some of my products I’m working on a customer for over a year now. They have long processes especially the big companies. There’re so many hierarchies and so many decisions, different decision makers. People quit their jobs. You need to talk to a new decision maker. The product goes through a long testing period. They need a lot of different samples. They want improvements done.

It’s complicated, but let’s say if you have a large retailer, and you’ve been working on that retailer for a long time and they do place an order, the benefits are good, are great because in one go you can sell 10,000, 20,000, 30,000 units of a product. Even if you only make a dollar profit on it, that’s $30,000 in your pocket in one day.

Steve: Right, and they’ll probably buy consistently from you too, right?

Manuel: Exactly. It’s about the reorders from those retailers. They will not just place reorders for the existing items. Once you have created a trustworthy relationship, they’ll also be interested in sourcing other products from you. You extend your assortment with them in a way. It has its up and downs, but it’s a lot more difficult to deal with retails than selling yourself on Amazon or ecommerce.

Steve: Is that why you’ve transitioned over to Amazon?

Manuel: Yes. One reason is because it’s easier. It’s not easy but it’s easier. Also retail slowing down a lot, ecommerce is hurting the retail in Europe massively. I’ve got all my retailers complaining, “Look, we need better prices. Amazon.de or UK, the prices are a lot lower.” Customers can have it within 2 days from the comforts of their homes.

Less and less people go actually into shops unless it’s a textile product or shoes or clothing. They still go to the store for that, but simple products, consumers are really shifting to ecommerce in Europe, and that’s hurting the retailers a lot.

Steve: Interesting. Do you sell the same products to your retailers? Do you sell the same items on Amazon?

Manuel: No. The ones I sell to the retailers are not available on Amazon.

Steve: I see. I was going to ask if you’re competing against your own customers.

Manuel: No.

Steve: Let’s talk a little bit about your fall away into Amazon. You have a sourcing company, and you obviously deal with a bunch of people, who you say don’t quite understand the sourcing process that well. What are some of the common mistakes that you’re seeing with some of the new people who are trying to source products from Asia?

Manuel: I think the most common mistake is not to have any inspections. Just the other day I was talking in a Facebook group. Someone said can you ship directly to Amazon? And I said, “Yes. I’ve been doing it a long time.” And she asked me what are the pitfalls, and it should be okay if I asked the supplier to take a few photos and send to Amazon. And I’m like, no, I mean there are so many things that can go wrong during a production.

The number one thing I tell people is always have an inspection, because even if you have a very good relationship with your sales contact at the factory, he’s not assembling the product.
Also in the production line, there can be many mistakes and even if you– let’s say you give very clear directions what the packaging is to look like, or how many labels you need, I’ve seen it so many times. I think I never had any inspection that went pass on the first time.

First of all, always have an inspection, second do a thorough background check on your supplier, not just trusting let’s say Alibaba goods supplier or background checked. You really need to look into each supplier’s in-depth, ask them for company registration certificates for different products. You need to ask who are his customers, which markets does he work for.

When you get the feeling okay this guy is delivering for example products to the Middle East, and he’s never worked with a customer in the US, I mean it’s probably very difficult to handle my order for the US. So make sure you work with suppliers that really work in your market, that know your requirements and most of all that are interested in working with you.

I mean if you are having troubles speaking to a supplier in the beginning and not getting answers to your questions, imagine how it would be when you actually later placed the order and tried to work with him. Find suppliers that are actually interested in your business.

Steve: Let’s talk about the– sorry.

Manuel: Just one last thing. Always get samples. Never place orders just through email, never having seen the actual product and probably get samples from different suppliers as well. I think those are let’s say three to four main pitfalls that people should look into.

Steve: Let’s talk a little bit about the inspection process. Do you grab samples off the line as well as do an inspection at the very end? What is your procedure? Who do you use and how much does it cost?

Manuel: Right now I use two different inspection companies. One is called chinaqualitycheck.com. It’s a very simple inspection service. I mean, they charge $100, but I only use them for like really simple products. Let’s say I have a big brush, or let’s say a silicon product that doesn’t need a lot of testing or handling in the production.

And on the other hand I work with AsiaInspection. I think it’s other really popular right now. They charge $309. The prices that I mentioned here are for final shipping inspection. So that’s not an online inspection or drawing any samples. That’s just the inspection before shipment.

I use them for like more complicated products, although I’ve used them for my recent products and the French press which is also the case study which required a bit more of looking into products. If I have an electronic product, I always use AsiaInspection. And in some cases I even use let’s say really reputable companies like TUB, Bureau Veritas or even Intertek in some cases, but they charge $400, 500 up.

Steve: So do you do any online inspection as well, or just at the end before the delivery?

Manuel: Sometimes. If I work with a supplier for a long term already, I do just the final inspection. But let’s say I have a complicated or difficult product, and I’m working with a supplier for the first time, I’ll probably also have an online inspection just to make sure everything is according to my requirements, and not that I show up on the last day of production with the final inspection, and I find out too many problems that can’t be reworked any more. So sometimes yes. If I work with a new factory, I also have online inspections.

Steve: Has it ever happened to you where at the very end the entire batch was bad?

Manuel: Not bad in a way that you couldn’t rework it anymore, but yes it happened quite a few times already. I mean mostly it’s labels missing or scratches on the product or dusty or whatever, but it also happened that– for example I got a completely different color manufactured, and I found that at the final inspection. That was too late.

Steve: So what do you say to the manufacturer at that point?

Manuel: Well, I do have contracts and purchase order agreements in place. So whenever I place an order, I tell him right away, these are my requirements. I will do an inspection, I pay for it. If there is anything wrong, and I find out during the inspection, we have to do a re-inspection and he has to rework the goods until they are what I ordered. If he doesn’t do that, he doesn’t get the rest of his money. Yeah, that’s pretty much.

Steve: I’m just wondering if any relationships that you had have been strained as a result of an inspection at the very end not turning out how you want, and then the manufacturer actually not making any money on the deal, because what they did was not up to your specifications.

Manuel: It happens. I had a product recently that didn’t go so well in the production, and in the end we had to rework twice and the supplier was not really willing to do any rework, but there’s nothing you could do. I mean he’s still waiting for his money and eventually we shipped the product and everything was okay. But I mean he’s not happy. Obviously he wants me to reorder or he wants me to place new order so that he can make up the loss.

For me, it really depends. If the supplier is like, “Okay, we realize the problem, we apologize, we’ll rework it, it’s all on our cost,” I may go ahead with the supplier in the future. But if he’s like really unwilling to help, and if he screws up the order entirely then yeah, I’ll just try to get the product shipped out, see that it’s okay. Well, if it really sells well, I’ll probably look for a supplier parallel. Yeah, I might not work with him again.

Steve: How do you find your suppliers?

Manuel: I have the advantage of being here for 11 years and every year I go to I’d say 20 to 25 exhibitions. So I’ve made a lot of contacts in the past. That’s why we also– I think I mentioned that before, we have a sourcing company. We have a database of over 1500 suppliers. We’ve collected a lot of context in the past. But for all of your listeners out there, I think the safest or best way to go is alibaba.com or globalsources.com where you can find most of your products.

I do go on through there sometimes especially if I look for new products, and we don’t have a supplier for it yet. You go through the background check, the vetting process with those suppliers. It’s the same as with my existing suppliers, I still do background check with them, because maybe management has changed, or they’ve changed the location or the production line has increased or decreased even.

Steve: Can we talk about your background check process? What do you do?

Manuel: All right, let’s say I have to go through Alibaba or let’s say I found a supplier at the exhibition. The first thing I probably do, I send him a general email with my company information. I also attach my company profile. It’s a simple PDF that I’ve put together, who I am. I introduce myself professionally, because I want him to have the feeling, “Okay this guy is serious.”

And if I see in the first reply that he doesn’t reply my questions, I know that he is not serious and I won’t move forward with him anyway. But if he’s serious, I will ask him for, I want to see his company registration. I will send him an exo [ph] file, I call it my vendor profile where he has to fill in certain things like how much turnover does he have, where is his factory located? Who are his customers? Which markets does he work with? Does he have certifications, like for example, FTA, or MCC for electronic products?

I want to see a couple of those, let’s say softcopies of the PDF reports. I want to see them. I want to actually see the certificate is issued in his name, and the certificate is not 25 years old. I want him to be proactive and deliver all those things to me, and if I feel he does that and he over delivers maybe, I feel comfortable working with him.

Steve: That’s interesting. You start out with those questions like right on the first interaction.

Manuel: Yes mostly. I mean, if I’m– let’s say I’m serious about a product that I really want to develop, then my first email will be very detailed to the supplier with a lot of questions.

Steve: I see. Can you comment a little bit about Alibaba versus Global Sources?

Manuel: I like both. Not sure I’m allowed to say who I prefer.

Steve: Yeah let’s not do that.

Manuel: I think we both know Peter from Global Sources is doing an excellent job on helping the community, but having said that Alibaba is great to find everything. You find really pretty much anything on Alibaba. It’s actually not been out there as long as Global Sources. Global Sources has longer background, but you may not find everything on Global Sources than you find on Alibaba.

Alibaba has good filters to actually find and search the supplies and products that you need. Global Sources on the other hand also has different background checks for example they do an actual credit check with the factory. They actually sometimes go to their office and check if they really operate in that specific location. For example I exhibited as a supplier of myself with Mandarin Gear last year in April at the Global Sources show.

To get there you have to actually have to be listed on Global Sources, and I had to go through a 3 stage verification process. They actually checked with me as a supplier, who I’m I, where is my business registration, what is my business turnover and so and so. I have gone through it personally, and I can say they are very professional on checking the suppliers.

Since I’m not on Alibaba I can’t say much about that, but one thing Alibaba is really quoted is the mass of products that you can find there. There is good suppliers on Alibaba and on Global Sources as well.

Steve: When would you use one over the other?

Manuel: If it’s a really special product, I’d probably only find it on Alibaba. If it’s a really common product, but I need to find a very good supplier, maybe even a bit more pricey, then I would probably go on to Global sources.

Steve: Reading between the lines it seems like Global Sources, the quality of the vendors tend to be better than Alibaba, because they do more vetting. Whereas it sounds like Alibaba has a much wider breadth of product options as opposed to Global Sources for that reason.

Manuel: I think that is correct, absolutely yes.

Steve: Have you ever used Panjiva or ImportGenius before?

Manuel: No I haven’t, actually I have never used them. I know that ImportGenius, I think you find suppliers based on records, is that correct?

Steve: That is correct.

Manuel: Never used them.

Steve: Just curious and I have a bunch of students in my class, and I’m just what is your procedure for doing this is. How do you negotiate minimum order quantities in the beginning for some of those people who might not have as much money to invest in upfront shipment of products?

Manuel: What you have to consider is that most Amazon sellers including myself, we are actually small fish for most factories. Retailers place orders of 10000, 20000, 30000 pieces up. When you come to a supplier and you say, “Okay I want the color box packaging, I want labels on it, I want engraving or logo on my product, and I want 300 pieces.” They are going to laugh at you.

What you need to consider is that it takes a factory a lot of work and effort to actually produce let’s say 500 pieces. It can be done within an hour or so, but to set up the production line just for this very small client, and disturb the regular production line for the large client. It’s a lot of effort for the factory. Some of them are unwilling to do smaller quantities.

Having said that I think you can approach it from 2 different ways. First you may want to only go for white box packaging, so that the supplier doesn’t have to bring a large quantity of packaging. If possible second option, you have to appeal to his business sense like, “All right, this is medium. Our first order, but in the future if everything goes well, we order 2000, 4000, 6000 pieces.” You appeal to his business sense and say, “For the sake of cooperation please accept my smaller order this time.”

Another thing that you can do is if the supplier tells me, “Sorry we can’t do less than a 1000 pieces.” I say, “Okay how about if I pay you 30 cents more and you do 500 pieces?” Surprisingly more suppliers are willing to do that. No one dares to ask because everyone wants to have cheap, cheap.

They may move on to a large supplier who does smaller quantities. I’d rather go with bigger suppliers who have a proper production set up, proper factory facilities, maybe a pay little bit more than the competition. You don’t ask for white box that usually brings down the MOQ by half. Appeals to his business sense and ask for corporation.

Steve: Are there any things that you do to be more attractive to a potential supplier? You mentioned this document that you send out. What does that document contain? It’s just an intro of you and your company?

Manuel: Yes, that’s actually a good point. That actually shows professionalism. That’s a good way to convince a supplier for smaller MOQs. It’s basically a PDF that I’ve created 2 years ago. Its 10 pages, basically an introduction about me and my company, what is my general turnover, which markets do I sell to.

Basically information about myself and I also show a bit of packaging examples. It’s just meaning top show the supplier, “Okay I’m not just test buyer at gmail.com who is looking for 10 samples to test the market. I’m really a serious guy who is looking to invest money into this factory and to place orders and look for a long term business relationship.”

Steve: If you are someone brand new, what would you suggest?

Manuel: I’d say take an hour, create a small PowerPoint, or at least put some wordings together on who you are when you introduce yourself to the supplier, look professional. A lot of times since I’m also a supplier as Mandarin Gear, I get emails from potential customers and they are like, “Hi there, saw your product, please quote price.” I’m like, “Who are you?

I want to do business with you, but please introduce yourself, show me that it is worth my time to actually spend time on preparing offers for you.” It takes a lot of time to prepare professional offers. I think you refuse those guys, I see it a lot with Amazon sellers who are just new that it’s not about being polite, but it’s about being professional. Show that you are a serious buyer that you want to do business in China.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now I love running my ecommerce store, but you know what I hate doing the most? Book keeping, seriously keeping track of receipts, expenses, and especially inventory cost are easily the worse aspects of entrepreneurship hands down.

Here is where Bench Accounting comes in. Bench is an online book keeping service that specializes in ecommerce businesses. They are experts at hailing all ecommerce related reports, whether it be from Amazon, Shopify, BigCommerce, Stripe you name it. All you got to do is sign up, and they will pair you with a team of dedicated book keepers who will handle everything for you.

No more data entry, no more data crunching, no more headaches, plus its reasonably priced. The best is that you get 20% off your first 6 months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that is bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off you first 6 months, now back to the show.

Let’s flip the script a little bit since you run a wholesale company. What are some things that you look for when someone is contacting for the very first time?

Manuel: You mean as a buyer? I’m the supplier, and …

Steve: Yeah you are the supplier and someone else is approaching you. What makes a proposal stand out?

Manuel: Well since I’m Caucasian, I’m Western; I have a different approach to business than most Chinese people. Most Chinese people will probably not do a thorough a research like me. When I get an email from Steve Chou mywifequitherjob.com, I probably look him up. I probably look at what he is doing, and how he is presenting himself on the internet, how he is presenting himself in the email, how he introduces himself.

I want to know what business or what are the quantities I can do with this guy, pretty much what I said. Have a proper presentation about yourself, and have online presence. At least 1 or 2 pages with about me section, and what the business does. A lot of suppliers do that actually, they look people up online. They do, yes.

Steve: They do? Let‘s switch gears a little bit and talk about one of your recent case studies that I saw on your blog where you sold $7000 worth of product in 10 days in a pretty competitive niche, and that product that you revealed was a French Press coffer maker, right?

Manuel: Correct.

Steve: Just curious, first of all why did you select a French Press which is pretty darn competitive in the first place?

Manuel: It is, yeah. I saw it in the exhibition at the Canton Fair in October 2015. I’m an avid coffee lover; I drink a lot of coffee every day. I have a proper coffee machine with the capsule machine you call it. I always loved the idea of the French Press, because I think it really looks stylish. I saw that line, and I saw it had a copper finishing. I really liked the finish, and I thought, can I actually go into that niche because I know it is very competitive.

It’s a very competitive product. I looked it up online, and there you go, there was no one with a copper version except the original brand Bodum. Their sales were very low, the price was very high. I thought, yeah actually that is a product that I could go for, because I have an advantage over those guys in terms of pricing. The look was also different in that one. I was the only other seller for this product.

Of course there are right now I think over 60 different designs on the French press on the market. I’m still doing okay now. Right now I’m not doing any promotions, because I’m waiting for my third re-order to come in. I’m almost running out of stock again for the second time. I looked it up in Amazon, I saw there’s only 1 other seller which is Bodum.

The design still looked different, and I went for it because I also had … Like I said I love coffee, and when I feel good about a product even if the competition is good. If I feel I can bring something good for this product and bring this over also in my listing, that my product is really superior, I go for it. I don’t even think too much about it, over analyzing, just go for it.

Steve: How large was your first order?

Manuel: 1008 pieces, product $4.53 including shipping, and testing and everything was about $8, $8000 investment.

Steve: It sells for?

Manuel: $29.90, I make between $14 to $16. Now that I’m shipping by sea the larger quantity, I actually make $18 profit.

Steve: Can we talk a little bit about the negotiation process. What did the vendor, first of all how many vendors did you approach, and what was the initial bid, how did you negotiate them down?

Manuel: I approached a total about 10 suppliers. 4 of my own suppliers that I know have similar products, and the rest I actually found on Alibaba and Global sources. In the course I also wanted to show that I don’t just go to my own suppliers, but I also source on those sites.

I think 5 of them replied with proper answers, and some of them didn’t reply, and some of them just left out my main questions, they were avoiding my questions. I found 5 initially, they were all in a pretty similar price range, one was very obviously expensive. He was a trading company, and after the 1st round I need to …

Steve: Just curious, how many of those that passed the initial screen came from Global Sources versus Alibaba versus your own supplier?

Manuel: My own supplier which was the one I actually placed the order with. Then I had 2 from Alibaba and 1 from Global sources. Global sources didn’t have that many listings on suppliers on that product.

Steve: I think Peter is telling me that Global Sources is really good for electronics, is that accurate?

Manuel: Correct, also their exhibitions in Asia, they heavily focus on electronics actually.

Steve: Okay that was probably part of the reason why it was harder to find a French Press on that platform.

Manuel: Probably, but the one that I got on Global sources, if I remember correctly the response was very good. They were also very professional, immediately sending me a copy of certificates, and eager to do business with me from the start. The next thing I did, you really need to compare apple with apples. I checked is the material the same for all products? Is the outlook the same, and eventually you order sample.

I didn’t really negotiate the prices right away. I filtered down to 3 suppliers who really had a good response. There was 1 Alibaba supplier, 1 Global Sources, and my own supplier that I met at the exhibition that were in the run. Yeah, I approached all three of them, all different samples. And prices were pretty similar on all three, but I just had the best feeling with the guy that I actually met at the show, because I met him personally.

Steve: Right, yes of course okay.

Manuel: If I wouldn’t have met this guy, I probably would have gone either with Alibaba or Global Sources supplier, because they both had a very good background. They had very high factory standards, one actually had BSCI standard which is the business social consumer initiative, which means the factory has a very high labor standard. People have access to fresh water; the factory is checked if there was no child labor. They are treated fairly; they get paid overtime and so on.

Steve: Can we talk about that a little bit, like where can you check all these things?

Manuel: Well, I guess you could look it up on my blog, or up in my book where I talk about the most common certifications and factory standards. For example BSCI is one of the highest factory standards. I mean if a factory tells you oh we have ISO 9001, I mean that’s nothing. Nearly every factory has that and it’s just to say that they work according to structured process.

So ISO 9001 is not the best sign. If the factory has BSCI that means they work with very large retailers like [inaudible 00:36:19], Wal-Mart, [inaudible 00:36:21], Amazon and so on. So the large retailers, they only work with those factories who have this kind of standard. If you look at…

Steve: I would imagine the minimum order quantities would be a lot higher for those factories too though, right?

Manuel: That’s true for example one of the factories had BSCI, they wanted a 5000 MOQ. And I only wanted to start out with a thousand pieces that maximum. And I mean that factory that I didn’t go with that had BCSI was actually cheaper than the one that I went with. But because of the MOQ was non-negotiable, I went with the other one. Otherwise I would have probably gone with the BSCI audited factory.

Steve: So you didn’t change anything about this product right, you kind of bought it as is, is that accurate?

Manuel: That’s correct. Well I added three extra fuel gauze. I did change the screw on the handle to make it also copper look, because it was a plain metal look. But other than that I just took it is, as it was.

Steve: I’m just wondering like why they wouldn’t bulge on the minimum order quantities if it was already an item that they kind of produced?

Manuel: Because I asked for FDA certificate. I asked for both silicates heat resistant class. And the standard product only comes with — the standard for a thousand pieces on that big factory only comes with regular class and no FDA certificate.

Steve: Okay I see, so you didn’t modify it?

Manuel: I guess so you could say, yeah.

Steve: Right to the point where it’s not one of their standard products?

Manuel: Yeah, but I didn’t change the outlook or anything. I just said I want a higher quality material, and yeah I guess in that way I changed it a bit.

Steve: Okay, and then so you sourced 1000 pieces, and you probably got an inspection and everything and you got everything sent in. Given that it’s a very competitive product, can you kind of talk about your product launch a little bit?

Manuel: Sure. I had different stages of product launch. The first one was obviously friends and family open Facebook review groups. And then I also launched through my email customer list, so I had a large list of customers that I collected over the years.

Steve: Customers for which products?

Manuel: Pretty much everything. And actually through the customer email list, I didn’t do so much sale. The really big sale came from my blogger list. I would talk about another thing that I did on the launch, but my own tools. I went through yeah the Facebook review groups, my customer emails, and I reached out to bloggers.

So I guess five or six weeks before my launch I went to Google, I looked for coffee bogs, I looked for coffee magazine, I looked for people just talking in general about coffees, coffee machines or coffee — different coffee beans and what not. So I reached out so I think about 25 bloggers. Three responded, and I eventually ended up with one blogger who wanted to do a review. I paid him $50, he got a free sample, and he actually gave me about up to today I think about 80 pieces of sale…

Steve: Not bad.

Manuel: Just from that blogger. So in the second week I used paid tools. One of them was ZonBlast. I also Review Kick, back then it was free. Review Kick went well also their reviews were good, but what really — yeah sorry.

Steve: I was just going to say so for those services did you get them away for free, or heavily discounted?

Manuel: You mean the product price, right?

Steve: That’s correct yes.

Manuel: I gave them away heavily discounted like $1, so instead 3.99 most of them I’d give away for $1.

Steve: So those reviews ended up being non-verified reviews, right?

Manuel: That’s correct.

Steve: Okay.

Manuel: Yeah, but I mean some of them are still there, but some of them have been removed from my listing. And then yeah I used ZonBlast, which was a big giveaway and also heavily discounted, and that pretty much put me on page– well for my main keyword on page one pretty first.

Steve: How many did you have to giveaway to get on page one?

Manuel: I think it’s all like giveaway up till today about 120 pieces, so more than 10% of my product — of my inventory.

Steve: Okay, that’s actually not a whole lot given– I’m just thinking coffee press. Were you targeting like copper coffee prices or?

Manuel: My main keyword that I targeted was French — no wait. French press coffee maker. But the biggest keyword would be French press, which is like three million searches and French press coffee makers like 150,000 searches. So for the main keyword I only got to take page 2 actually, and just briefly I think on page one.

But what really– because I didn’t giveaway so much, what really helped a lot was the blogger, and my email list of course and yeah the Facebook groups. And all that together was really, yeah it was really helpful. I also used [inaudible 00:41:38] in week four which put me — left me on the page — on page two of the main keyword. And my main keyword was still on page one. And that also helped a lot.

Steve: So I’m curious how did that blogger link to your Amazon product, was it just a direct link, did you do anything special with the URL? Because I know a bunch of people have been doing certain things that kind of encourage Amazon to rank your product with a certain keyword?

Manuel: I hadn’t done anything like that for the bloggers. I just actually asked him also to give him — sorry to give him an incentive. I asked them if they were not already as an Amazon affiliate. I asked him to sign up as an Amazon affiliate, and you can get the link from Amazon, and then you just post it in your blog post. I didn’t really ask him to do any targeting keywords or anything like that; I just told him you can make additional money by being an Amazon affiliate. So he only used an Amazon affiliate link.

Steve: Okay, I’m just wondering if that actually had a bigger impact on the ranking of your product, because you were driving outside traffic to your Amazon listing which was resulting in sales.

Manuel: Looking back it would have probably been smarter to have not a super URL, but some sort of keyword link yeah, it would have been better.

Steve: Oh no, I was just curios if that actually contributed more. Because like the ZonBlast and all those things it was obvious even though those reviews were not verified that they had a tremendous impact like the ZonBlast part?

Manuel: I think so, it makes sense to have the keyword targeted yeah, I think it would have made sense.

Steve: Okay and did those rankings last? I mean are you still on the front page for those keywords?

Manuel: No, actually I sold out middle of May, because in the last few weeks before I sold out I was like doing 25 to 50 units a day. So I didn’t expect that, and I pre-ordered way too late, I was waiting for more results. And yeah I sold out in middle of May, and kind of now I’m back. And then I came in with another 200 pieces at the end of May.

So I’m trying to keep inventory for now until prime day and until my stock comes back in, so right now my ranking is really bad to be honest. But I’m doing a few more giveaways when the big stock comes in, and I should be able to climb up again.

Steve: So are you doing a much larger order in time for the holidays, like what’s your next order size going to be?

Manuel: One is at sea now, it’s 2,500 pieces. And I’ll see how fast, let’s say 500 pieces go, and then I’ll probably do another order with 4000 pieces also by sea, and pretty fast probably, so yeah larger re-orders.

Steve: And then when you are sending stuff by sea over directly to Amazon, are you using anyone to help you with any process?

Manuel: Yes, well I use forward to that, I have been using for many years now. I kind of trained her the whole Amazon process. Like I’m doing the laboring in the factory myself, then she picks it up from the factory, she palletizes it. She puts the pallet labels on it. She handles the entire customs process in China, and in the US. She calls or their agent in the US, they call Amazon to make an appointment, and she delivers right to Amazon.

Steve: Okay, so you had someone that you’ve worked with for a long time cover all this for you?

Manuel: Yes.

Steve: And in terms of your defect percentage, do you have an idea of what that looks like?

Manuel: It was about 1%, but throughout to 14 pieces I think since I have launched. So pretty low, actually the Amazon defect rate is pretty low. I mean a normal rate for retail would be 5%, but Amazon is 1% is pretty ridiculous actually. I’m happy with my 1%.

Steve: Cool, and then after this you are in the process of launching a bunch of other different products as well, right?

Manuel: Yes, well I’ve been working on Amazon for a while now, but this was my very first product on the Mandarin Gear. I worked with my partner; he has his Amazon account with green products. Through him and I was just the back office guy for him. And now that I have launched through my own Amazon account, the public product, I have been in the process of launching six new products. Two already launched, and three more coming in the next few weeks.

Steve: Do you know anything about like Amazon presence over in Asia, like is there a presence over there?

Manuel: You mean in terms of a market place, or people working?

Steve: Yeah market places in Asia as opposed to — I mean you are concentrating in the US right now. But I was just curios what it’s like around where you live?

Manuel: Amazon is not really present here, I mean they are in India, but it’s very small. I mean yes of course they are in Japan, but it’s very difficult to handle Japan orders. I mean if you don’t have the product that doesn’t fit the Japanese market, it’s difficult. And also the import procedures are a lot more difficult. You need translating for the listing and everything. And you need Japanese customs support.

So if you don’t have someone who is helping, you it’s very complicated. As for China, they are not in china right now, but they are working a lot to help Chinese factories to go into the US or other companies. But we had other sites here that are predominant like Zalora and Lazada for example.

Steve: And are you taking advantage of those marketplaces, or are you just focusing on the US market in the beginning?

Manuel: For me its US market only, because I guess it’s very easy for me to deal with the US market also with the Hong Kong Company. And I have so many other different projects like kick starter and my sourcing company, the [inaudible 00:47:47] platform and courses, so yeah I’m trying to scale right now, but I will– the thing is to focus on Amazon US.

Steve: Okay, well cool hey Manuel it was great talking to you today. If anyone out there wants to find you online or access any of your awesome resources that you mentioned, where can they find you?

Manuel: Just look up importdojo.com. You can sign up for the newsletter, you will also get the free eBook, and the mail and my company details on the website, and yeah everyone please feel free to reach out, I would be happy to answer questions.

Steve: Awesome Manuel. Well hey thanks for coming on the show, I really appreciate it.

Manuel: Thanks for having me Steve, thanks a lot.

Steve: All right take care.

Manuel: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Manuel is an expert when it comes to importing and he’s actually helped me find some vendors as well for our linen store. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode130, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends and share this episode.

And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, signup right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course via email immediately, thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

129: How Nathalie Lussier Created A 7 Figure Business Selling Software And Courses Online

How Nathalie Lussier Created A 7 Figure Business Selling Software And Courses Online

Today, I’m thrilled to have Nathalie Lussier on the show. I’ve actually known Nathalie for a heck of a long time now dating back since 2010. In fact, I remember the early days when we were both launching our blogs

But since 2010, Nathalie has been kicking butt. She first found success with her site Raw Foods Witch where she teaches people about the benefits of raw foods. But what I love about Nathalie is that she’s a techie.

With her tech, design and marketing skills, she also created NathalieLussier.com where she now helps small online businesses get off the ground. Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Nathalie started Raw Foods Witch turned it into a success
  • How her blog transitioned into a software and training course company
  • How Nathalie gets traffic to her websites
  • How she built a strong community
  • How she gets ideas for her software tools

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequiteherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.
Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Nathalie Lussier on the show. Now I have actually known Nathalie for a heck of a long time now, and I think I just checked my email inbox and we were emailing back in 2010. In fact I remember the early days when we were both just launching our blogs.

Since 2010 Nathalie has been kicking butt, and she first found success with her site Raw Foods Witch where she teaches people about the benefits of raw foods. What I love about Nathalie is that she is a techy. With her tech, design, and marketing skills she also created Nathalie Lussier media where she now helps small online businesses get off the ground. In fact she is what I call a triple threat. With that welcome to the show, how are you doing today Nathalie?

Nathalie: I’m great, thanks so much for having me on the show Steve, this is awesome.

Steve: Give us your back story. I still remember the good old days with your blog, the Billionaire Woman, I don’t know if you …

Nathalie: Yes totally, that’s like really vintage.

Steve: That’s like 2009, right?

Nathalie: Yes.

Steve: I want to say what happened to that site actually?

Nathalie: That was my first real blog. I stared blogs when I was 12 or 13 before blogging was an actual thing. That was my real like, okay I’m going to try to make this into something real. It was called billionairewomen.com, and what ended up happening, it was all about wealth and mindset for women and that stuff, which is more of a passion than anything else.

People are … Obviously men kept emailing and commenting looking to hook up with Billionaire Women, like it was like a dating service or something. I was just fed up with that. Finally I was like okay this is just not quiet the right scene that I’m trying to attract here.

Steve: That’s hilarious, how did that move into raw foods … Is it Raw Foods Witch or Raw Foods Switch?

Nathalie: Originally it was Raw Foods Switch. That was the original intent of the site. What I ended up realizing is that nobody wanted to switch their entire diet to raw food. My boyfriend at the time who is now my husband was like, “Why don’t you just move that S around and make it Raw Foods Witch, because it could be fun and playful, and you like witches.”

He used to bring up the Teenage Witch and all these different things I was into. I was like, “Wow yeah okay let me try that.” Then as soon as I made that change to the domain, it was the exact same domain, but I just redesigned the site and had like a little witch on a carrot stick, everything changed, because it was a lot more playful and it wasn’t as dogmatic to switching your entire diet. A lot more people got behind the brand.

Steve: That was a site that actually was your breakthrough, right?

Nathalie: Yes exactly.

Steve: Would you say that that design aspect was what flipped the switch?

Nathalie: Yes, I think the design was huge. I also feel like I got a lot more clarity when I started blogging more about that topic. Actually talking to my ideal potential customers. When I was first blogging at rawfoodsswitch.com, I was writing to a lot of other people who were in the raw foods space.

When I made that transition to the witch I was like, “I need to really talk to people who were like me a couple of years ago before I started eating more fruits and vegetables.” I started writing really simple posts like what to do with an avocado, or how to open an avocado, or how to make your first screens movie.

When I started really bring it back to basics, I was able to really speak to the people back that could benefit from the information I was sharing. Before that I was just blogging for other bloggers like me.

Steve: It basically just landed a person. I think I went on that site you were actually dressed up as a witch, right?

Nathalie: Yes, it was the videos definitely.

Steve: Yeah, is the traffic going to that site, is it mainly SEO? Did you ever buy ads, or was it just collecting emails and building an audience?

Nathalie: Even to this point it’s practically 80% SEO at this point. We’ve got really good articles on different topics that people are searching for. The site comes up a lot; my people are looking for things. That was also key thing because I had learned SEO a little bit before I started this website.

I knew I could do something in this market. I never paid for ads, I don’t think that was really on my radar at the time, but I did do guest posting and I did other webinars and things with other people in the industry. I think that also helped a lot.

Steve: Were the articles that you chose to write about, was that very deliberate?

Nathalie: Yes, originally in the beginning they were not deliberate by any means. It was just like, “Hey here is the salad dressing that I really like.” But then I did some research on what people were searching for, and a lot of times they wanted to know what’s the difference between juicing and smoothies, or which blender should I get. Once I started writing some articles about the topics that people were actually searching for, that’s when things really started to take off on the SEO side.

Steve: How is that site monetized?

Nathalie: Right now we have Google Adsense, and then we also have Amazon affiliate links. I used to have an information product or a course that I taught, it was called Cure Cravings Forever. That was actually the main revenue at the time, but I have since sub-setted that course, because I’m no longer as active on the site. I didn’t want have to support that as much.

Steve: Was that site the one that allowed you to quit your job or your husband’s job or?

Nathalie: Yeah, actually when I started my business I didn’t have a job. I was fresh out of college, and I actually turned down a job on Wall Street to start this business. Basically in the first couple of months it was definitely touch and go. I was living with my boyfriend, and he was sending me little ads for different job openings that he wanted [inaudible 00:07:17], because sometimes things weren’t picking up as quickly as I expected or wanted to. Then things definitely did take off. That wasn’t actually the site that led to him quitting his job, that came a little bit later when I started the nathalielussier.com brand.

Steve: You didn’t take your job on Wall Street to start blogging?

Nathalie: No actually, yeah I … Well basically when I was graduating; I had actually worked on Wall Street as an intern, so I had some experience. I knew that at least for me it wasn’t quiet the right path. I had this like intuitive nudge that if I said yes I would just wake up 40 years down the line and wonder what happened to my life. Just because I knew how fast paced that environment was.

I probably wouldn’t have a chance to step off the treadmill so to speak. I knew I had to say yes or no right when I was graduating. Luckily enough my parents were like, “You are crazy.” But also, “It’s not the biggest deal.” You can try something, and if you fail you can always get another job. That was an interesting position for sure.

Steve: Did you have a nest stake saved up at that point?

Nathalie: I did, luckily the internships were paid. I actually had money to start my business.

Steve: Okay, and before we switch gears and talk about your software and courses business. I wanted your opinion; we started blogging way back in the day 2009, 2010. You’ve been doing since you’ve been 12, 13. Do you think today that blogging is still a viable way to make a significant amount of money?

Nathalie: I think the internet is a viable way to make a lot of money. I don’t think necessarily blogging by itself so much, just because even if you just look at magazines or newspapers like that … The whole advertising model is dying if you will, because it’s just not the way the people consume content as much these days.

I do feel like there is definitely ways that once you have built an audience that you can monetize it, whether that is through sponsored stuff or through creating your own products or services or that kind of thing. I think there is definitely tons of opportunity to have a successful business online, but I don’t think just blogging is really what it’s going take these days.

Steve: Great because we both have podcasts, we both have blogs and then we both do a little bit of video. You probably do a little bit more video than I do. If you were to start all over again would you just pick 1, or would you do all 3?

Nathalie: Such a good question. I feel like you have to eventually do all 3. Not necessarily, obviously if you hate video, if you hate audio don’t force yourself. I do feel like there’s different mediums that reach people in different ways. For example, text, Google is still primarily text based when you’re searching.

Having a blog or having really good SEOed pages on your sited is really key if you want to show up for certain things whether it’s local or a specific service that you offer, a product that you offer. But then some people much prefer to listen on the go, that’s why podcasting can reach those audiences. The same goes for videos, some people just hate reading. They would rather watch something.

I feel like eventually you will probably want to go in all directions, but I also like to caution people not to try to do everything at once. I would say pick one, get really good at it, and then add on the other one, which I think is something that both of us have done. We started with a blog, and then later we added on the other pieces once we kind of mastered the first one.

Steve: It’s really overwhelming to try to do even more than one thing at a time. I agree with you. That’s why I asked you the question, because people have been coming to me and they’ve been asking, “Hey, should I start a blog?” I’m like, “Blogging is just so saturated now that you really have to do something extraordinarily special in order to stand out, in order to succeed today.” Whereas back when we started it was a little easier I think.

Nathalie: I think that’s true, definitely. I think that there is always the first mover’s advantage. If you were to discover a new niche market of which I don’t know if that’s possible either, but maybe if I can do a new type of weaving baskets that people love, you could totally be the first one in that market. Then yes, you could definitely get away with just a blog or something like that. I think there is something to be said for what you mentioned there.

Steve: What I like about you now is we kind of have similar backgrounds. I’m a hardware, software guy, I run a blog, an ecommerce store training class, and now I’m moving into software myself. I was just curious; you transitioned over from your blog at Raw Foods Witch over to software and training courses. I was just curious what your motivations and how that happened.

Nathalie: It’s a really interesting story, because I like to call it my spiral staircase since I studied software in school. I didn’t actually go into that field when I graduated, because I started this business. It almost felt like I threw out the baby with the bath water, because I had all this training, but then here I was talking about healthy eating which had nothing to do with technology.

At the same time people kept asking me, “Who made your website, and how are you doing all these technical stuff on your own? Can I hire you?” In the beginning I actually put these people off. I was like, “No. I don’t do this. My passion is about healthy eating.” Then finally I realized there’s enough people who are asking this. Maybe this is actually something that comes super natural to me. Maybe I should go in that direction.

When I did that, that became the first time I hit the 6 figures in my business. I started actually designing people’s websites. I did that for about a year until I basically maxed out on my capacity of being able to do that.

Steve: This was like a consulting basis?

Nathalie: Exactly, consulting and actually implementing people’s websites. I actually hired other designers and developers to work with me. It was becoming this whole thing, and then I realized, “Wait, this wasn’t the business I wanted to start.” I took a step back and then that’s when I started doing more of the training courses because I realized I do have a gift of simplifying technical complicated things. I also applied that there into the technical trainings that I created and marketing trainings that I had learned along the way.

What that ended up happening is, it was still little bit too complicated. I realized, okay well I can simplify one more step by actually making software that does it for you. That’s how I brought my husband into the business, and got him to quit his job so that he could co-lead this company and be our main developer for all the different software products that we’ve since released.

For example, I’ll just give you a concrete example. I was teaching people how to create beautiful opt-ins on their website, but they still had to learn some HTML and some CSS code to really make it look how they wanted. My husband and I developed the PopupAlly plug-in which is actually … It lets you do pop ups as well as embedded optins on your site and really design everything without needing to touch any code. That was really from seeing people struggle with me trying to teach them all these things, so that now they can just install it, and customize it the way they want it to be and it’s really, really easy.

Steve: Customize it as in like drag and drop or?

Nathalie: Yeah, exactly. You can basically choose what colors, fonts, images, where you want everything to show up … Really simple. We have some templates too, but that’s really like, if you want to do a horizontal opt-in you can do it. If you want to do a transparent pop up, you could do that too.

Steve: You started out with courses, and then evolved in the software then or?

Nathalie: That’s right, yeah.

Steve: What were your first courses about?

Nathalie: Definitely the first course was in my Raw Food business and that was called, Cure Cravings Forever, but then once I transitioned to more of the tech space and the marketing space my first course I think was actually … Yeah, it was called Websites Made Easy. It was all about building your first WordPress website.

Steve: The reason you chose that topic was because you were getting a lot of people asking about it.

Nathalie: Exactly. I was doing it for people. I was setting up websites and helping them with that. Then I realized I had met my capacity doing that with one on one clients. How about if I teach people how to do it, and show them the shortcuts that I had learned along the way?

Steve: How did you launch that class in the very beginning? How big was your list at the time? Did you have a big audience?

Nathalie: Yeah. Around that time I think … It’s hard to say. I probably had 5,000 people on my list.

Steve: Those people were gathered from … Those obviously weren’t Raw Foods people, right?

Nathalie: I did actually invite all the people on my Raw Foods list over to my new business.

Steve: Really?

Nathalie: Yeah, I did.

Steve: That’s really random. How did that work out?

Nathalie: You would be surprised. There were so many people who emailed and who said, “I’ve been waiting for you to do this.” I was like, “What? That makes no sense.” For some reason I had just been … People were curious about my website and all the things I was doing. I think they were just ready to do their own stuff, but following in my footsteps I guess.

Steve: Interesting. You had a list of Raw Foods people.

Nathalie: Yes. I definitely grew some of that list about technology and marketing as well in between before I launched the course, because I had about a year in between there.

Steve: Was your strategy building up your list? Was that just through content at that point?

Nathalie: Yes. At that point I was doing a weekly little mini-tech tutorial. I was calling it, Getting Techy With It. I would teach like a new tool or a new plug-in or a new thing that I thought would help people, and that helped bridge the gap between the first business and the second one.

Steve: Was this video based?

Nathalie: Yes, they were all video tutorials.

Steve: Interesting. Who were the people you were attracting?

Nathalie: I was attracting actually a lot of other health coaches and people in the raw food business, and who had their own blogs. Like I said originally I was blogging to that audience by mistake, but then they saw how I became successful after I stopped blogging to them. That helped initially. Then through word of mouth I got connected with other business owners and people in the marketing space or small business space. That really brought in the right people for what I was doing.

Steve: How did you launch your course, the very first one?

Nathalie: The very first one I did a webinar, and I sold it at the end of the webinar. Then I actually taught the program live on a webinar. Basically I used the free webinar to sell a paid webinar. That was the simplest way I could imagine doing it.

Steve: Wait, time out, that’s confusing. You used a free webinar to launch a paid webinar, meaning the paid webinar was your course.

Nathalie: Exactly. Then I recorded it and then that became my … You can log in and watch it.

Steve: Interesting. How much did you charge?

Nathalie: It was a $97 offer.

Steve: How many did you sell at that first course, that first webinar?

Nathalie: I don’t remember the exact number, but it went on to sell like hundreds. I’m pretty sure the very first time, like when I did my first live webinar, probably 20 is what I’m estimating.

Steve: That’s a good amount right there like for the first one. At that point, were you like, “This is a better business model?”

Nathalie: Yeah. I basically realized, okay if I can scale this, then it’s way different than actually working with clients. Also at that time I was realizing that working with clients really left me at their mercy a little bit. The week before my wedding, I was working on a really big project. One of my developer contractors basically said, “Okay I’m done. I can’t work on this anymore.”

I was left holding on to the project and trying to finish it and wrap it up before my wedding. That was the D-day. I had a couple of experiences like that that made me realize, there is something to this courses and product way of doing things.

Steve: I was looking on your portfolio software, and I noticed a webinar piece of software that you sell too. I’m starting to see a trend here. You start doing something. Did people ask you about how to do webinar?

Nathalie: Yes. That’s something that I keep realizing. I see people struggle with things and then I’m like, “Oh I think I can solve their problem.” I will develop something to do that. With WebinarAlly, I just was seeing people not necessarily doing enough webinars to warrant paying $400 a year or $100 a month for different webinar software. Also being not technically savvy enough to use the free Google Hangouts and copy and pasting code and doing all these things.

We developed WebinarAlly which is a super simple plug-in that works on WordPress, but that integrates Google Hangouts and helps you schedule your webinars and handles some of those things that make it too complicated to use usually. It’s just a super simple onetime $27 fee. People are just eating it up, because it’s that in between place. They are not quite ready to invest tons of money on webinars, but they need to try it in order to actually see if they’re going to be good at it, and if it’s something they want to do in their business.

Steve: How did you market this piece of software? Was it just to your list? Did ever buy ads or anything?

Nathalie: Yes. Initially we did our big launch to our list. We got a lot of word of mouth marketing from it, because it’s a no brainer in price point. People are like …

Steve: It’s super cheap. Like 27 bucks is like you don’t even have to think about it.

Nathalie: Exactly. That actually was huge just from word of mouth. We had residual sales from launching it. Then we did actually run … We tested some Google AdWords and then we also ran some ads on Facebook. It’s interesting. We’ve actually realized that for this price point, it doesn’t quite scale very well for ads, but we do sell it through the different products that we have, cross sale naturally that way. It works out pretty well.

Steve: Can you talk about why you priced it so low at 27 bucks?

Nathalie: Absolutely. Like I said I saw the need in the market place where there was just really expensive options or something free, but that’s really complicated. That was one of the initial things. We also toyed with the idea of just making it free because we do have a free version of PopUpAlly.

That was our, “Hey, maybe we can do a 2nd free plug-in and see if that works.” We realized we wanted it to have a big reach, but also we wanted people who were serious enough to be doing webinars in their business. That was our little compromise there.

Steve: With that $27, do they get free upgrades?

Nathalie: Yes. As long as they paid, yes, we’re going to be upgrading that. We’re probably not going to be building a ton of new features for it, but yeah.

Steve: Wow, because I find that just the maintenance of software is a huge expense. Do you find support for the plug-in is a problem at all?

Nathalie: Luckily with this one we have some good video tutorials and even written knowledge based articles. We haven’t had a lot of issues. But for some of our more complicated products … I wouldn’t say complicated, but they have more features. They have a lot more potential little pitfalls like PopUpAlly and ProgessAlly.

Yes, we do have a renewal. If you want to get future updates and if you want to keep getting support we do have that in place. We also like to keep that low, because we want people to feel like, “I like the software. I want to keep supporting it. It’s not going to take such a huge chunk out of my wallet either.”

Steve: I just wanted to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now I love running my ecommerce store, but you know what I hate doing the most, book keeping. Seriously keeping track of receipts, expenses, and especially inventory costs are easily the worst aspects of entrepreneurship hands down.

Here is where Bench Accounting comes in. Bench is an online book-keeping service that specializes in ecommerce businesses. They are experts at handling all ecommerce related reports whether it’d be from Amazon, Shopify, BigCommerce, Stripe, you name it.

All you got to do is sign up, and they’ll pair you with a team of dedicated book keepers who will handle everything for you. No more data entry, no more data crunching, no more headaches. Plus, it’s reasonably priced. The best part is you can get 20% off your first 6 months if you go to Bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s Bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off your first 6 months. Now back to the show.

Interesting, I’m just curious now that we’ve been talking. In terms of just revenue, where do you derive the most? Is it the software, or the courses, or affiliate stuff?

Nathalie: Good question. Now that you mentioned I’m like probably 33% each.

Steve: Really, okay.

Nathalie: Yeah. It is pretty sleek across all of them. The software is where we are focusing more these days, but the courses that we’ve created are still selling really well. That’s totally cool by us too.

Steve: Are the courses hands off? Do you give anything live for the courses or?

Nathalie: Yes. We basically have our membership program which is called Heartquarters, and that’s where we house all of the courses I have created over the years. We do maintain and update them if things go out of date. With that we basically have a quarterly coaching call with me. Every quarter I get on a Google Hangout and then we answer people’s questions. Then we also have a Facebook group where people can ask questions and support each other as well.

Steve: Is this like an all you can eat type of thing?

Nathalie: Interestingly enough it used to be you get access to everything, but we’ve recently switched to a credit based system, because it’s called Heartquarters, people earn hearts every month. You earn hearts for doing different things, like completing a course, supporting your accountability partners in the group. You also just get hearts every month for staying active. You can use your hearts to redeem courses.

We have all kinds of other cool things like you can actually get free hosting. It seems random, but you can also use it for plug-ins or anything else that we’ve created for them. It makes you a little bit more intentional when you use your hearts as opposed to just saying, “I have access to everything. I’ll get back to it later.” When you have them in your account, you’re like, “I need to use my hearts.” Then people actually unlock and finish things a lot more than they used to.

Steve: Interesting, so do you have to pay to get some hearts in the beginning or?

Nathalie: No, when you join you get I think it’s 300 hearts right away, so you can start unlocking things on your 1st day. But then to keep going, you have to either wait a little bit or you can purchase more hearts or you can just be more active, and that will earn you more hearts.

Steve: Is it a onetime fee to join?

Nathalie: It’s a yearly or a monthly fee.

Steve: I see, so it’s recurring revenue.

Nathalie: Exactly.

Steve: Okay cool. So how much do you charge?

Nathalie: For the full year it’s $750 or $79 a month.

Steve: You’re constantly adding content to this repository of courses.

Nathalie: Exactly, yeah. The way that we do it is that we ask our students, “What do you want to learn next?” Then we decide, “Okay, we’ll create a course about that.”

Steve: That’s ingenious. This heart thing, it doesn’t annoy people though that once they pay they want to access everything.

Nathalie: Well when we first switched over because we made the switch in early 2016, the old members were like, “Hey. I used to have access to everything.” We didn’t take anything away, but then they realized for any new stuff, they would have to use their hearts. We’re generous enough with the heart set, you can unlock stuff.

Obviously you can’t unlock everything on day 1. We’ve also seen people buying hearts, because they are eager enough to keep going. Also I feel like it really makes you choose what you want to focus on. One of the problems I see a lot with online marketing and online space is the shinny object syndrome. This is our way of combating that.

You can actually take one course, finish, implement, and then you go on to the next one, as opposed to saying, “I’m just to going to watch a little bit of this and a little bit of that and never actually get anything done.”

Steve: Interesting, so these hearts, like the implementation of that, is that something you custom coded?

Nathalie: That’s something that’s available in our AccessAlly Plug-in. It works with Infusionsoft and Ontraport and WordPress, and soon to be Convert … Not Convert but ActiveCampaign. Basically it’s a tag based thing with the CRM.

Steve: Interesting, okay. Then to sell these courses, do you do any paid ads or is it webinars?

Nathalie: Yes. We do ads that bring people into our space if you will, into our funnel and then we definitely do webinars, and do all kinds of other things to get people into the Heartquarters. The other thing that worked really well for us is that we have inside of our members’ area, we have some free courses. We have something called a 30 day list building challenge.

It’s actually happening right now, but it’s always available. That’s free and people join, but then they’re welcomed into our members’ area and they see all the other courses that are greyed out and that are on display, but not available. When they click on that they can sign up for the full … I think they can do the monthly or the full year, and then unlock those courses.

Steve: They actually get a log in.

Nathalie: They do.

Steve: By into your funnel, do you mean an email list? They’re giving you their email address?

Nathalie: Exactly, yes.

Steve: Okay, so once they give you their email address, they automatically get an account with your …

Nathalie: They do.

Steve: In which they see they can access anything.

Nathalie: Right or they can access all of the 30 day challenge videos. There is 30 videos and they are for them, 1 a day for 30 days. Alongside that they’ll see there is also a module about Facebook ads, or there is a module about doing an Amazon book, or there is a module about affiliate marketing. If they are curious about that, they can click on that and then decide to enroll in the program.

Steve: Interesting, okay. Can we talk a little bit about this email sequence, because I know you sell a whole bunch of different products? Does that mean you have separate email sequences for each?

Nathalie: Yes and no. Basically our main entry point is the 30 day challenge. That is 30 emails over 30 days which is a lot. But also it is the most high value thing that we give away for free. That’s why we want people to go there. People get amazing results from going through that challenge. But then we do also have smaller one-off things that we offer. For example we have an eBook all about how to setup your webinars, and that leads into WebinarAlly.

Then we have an eBook about how to use gamefication in your membership course, and that’s to sell our membership plug-ins. Yes, we do have smaller things that lead into separate funnels, but for all of our courses, the 30 day challenge is how we introduce them to it.

Steve: How does the 30 day challenge work?

Nathalie: It’s a free challenge that people just go, they put in their email address to sign up. Then over the 30 days they’ll get one email with one video, and a really simple action item that they can take to really grow their list. They also get to join our Facebook group. Right now we actually have a contest running, so when you complete the items on each day or share it on Facebook, you earn an entry towards the contest.

We’re giving away just some fun prizes for our products and for events that I’m going to be speaking at, and all kind of things like that. We are really trying to make that as interactive as possible. That’s something I will probably going to keep doing throughout the rest of the year too.

Steve: That’s sounds amazing. Every day for 30 days there is a video.

Nathalie: Yes. That was a pretty intense video shoot day.

Steve: Are these really short videos?

Nathalie: Yes. They are really short videos. Most of them are about two minutes. Some of them go up to about 10 minutes if they’re a little bit more technical, but yeah. They’re pretty short, and it’s really meant to be a digestible action item that you can take every day to grow your list. That’s why they are not super intense.

Steve: It’s something like, “Here is how you install PopupAlly, and collect email addresses that way.

Nathalie: Right, exactly or here is how to research where you should write a guest post, or how here is how to join Facebook groups that might be with your ideal audience in them.

Steve: I see. Then some of them lead to your products and some of them do not.

Nathalie: Exactly. I would say 80% of them don’t, but some of them do.

Steve: Then by the end of these 30 days, what’s the goal?

Nathalie: Yes. At the end of the 30 days, the ideal scenario for most people is that they’ve built a list, and now they’re probably thinking of launching a course or a product. We have a course that teaches that, so that’s our launch and profit course.

Steve: I see, so it leads in from the 30 day challenge to another sequence about courses.

Nathalie: Exactly, yes.

Steve: Okay, interesting. You teach them how to build an audience and then the next logical step is to create something that you can sell to the audience, and then that leads to WebinarAlly.

Nathalie: Yes.

Steve: This is interesting. I like it.

Nathalie: There is a lot of layering that’s happened over the years, but that’s how everything interconnects.

Steve: Are you guys using InfusionSoft by any chance?

Nathalie: We are, yes.

Steve: Because I noticed you had another piece of software that did something with InfusionSoft. I don’t remember.

Nathalie: Yeah, so that’s the AccessAlly that I mentioned. That’s the membership site plug-in that integrates with InfusionSoft that does all the cool tracking and credit system and unlocking and up-selling and cross-selling, and all that stuff.

Steve: When do you actually sell the full blown membership site?

Nathalie: You mean like the membership program?

Steve: At what point in the sequence?

Nathalie: That actually tends to happen on more of kind of when we do a launch kind of thing. It either happens when people see the courses and then they unlock them, or we’ll just do a promotion for them.

Steve: Can we talk about what a promotion would look like?

Nathalie: Yeah, absolutely. We actually just wrapped one up about a month ago.

Steve: How does it work? Do you do a webinar, or how does it work?

Nathalie: Yes, pretty much every time we do a promotion we’ll have a webinar. Sometimes we’ll have several webinars just because people are in different time zones. Sometimes we actually have the exact same content on all the webinars, but it’s just to catch people at different times. We’ll also invite our affiliates to help promote. We do have a good number of affiliates. Different affiliates will promote different things.

Some people just want to promote the software and some of them actually just prefer promoting the courses in the memberships. We’ll invite them to promote. We also do an affiliate contest. We do have prizes for affiliates who promote as well. We do kind of an email sequence leading up to the webinar, and special bonuses to get people to take action.

Steve: Can we talk about that? What do these pre-email sequences look like?

Nathalie: Yes. Depending on what the focus is, so for example our last one the focus was kind of on this new accountability feature that we added to the membership site. We talked a lot about accountability, so I had blog posts about how accountability groups are important for business.

Then we also had testimonials or other ways that people have enjoyed that feature already, or kind of gotten a lot out of in the course or the program. Then we just lead all of these things back into the webinar. So whatever the webinar topic is and getting them to show up live.

Steve: What was the topic of the last webinar?

Nathalie: The topic of the last webinar was all about productivity. I realized having an accountability group plus having the right information, and making sure you’re working on the most important things in your business really makes the biggest difference, especially because I just had a baby three months ago.

It was very high on my mind at the time of like, you should really be working on that 20% of the stuff that makes you 80% of the results in your business. That was kind of the main focus. But also getting people to realize that there is the shinny object thing, and you need to really be clear on what these next steps are for your business.

Steve: These webinars that you have with the affiliates, is it one big gigantic webinar with all the affiliates combined, or do you do separate ones per affiliate?

Nathalie: For this one it was just one. In the past we have done different webinars with different audiences and different joint venture partners, because of the baby. I was like I combine our efforts into one webinar.

Steve: Totally, interesting. In terms of the topic, not everyone who comes in is going to know you are. I was curious how you structure the webinar.

Nathalie: Yeah. I like to start with my story definitely to make sure people know how I came here, what my expertise is, and just kind of situate everybody and give them some context. The other thing I like to do is to really showcase our clients and our customers. If I have any good case studies that relate to the topic, I like to bring those up, or even just showcasing what they’ve done on their websites, and what they’re seeing in terms of results as a result of taking the courses that we’ve put together.

I think that’s huge too, because I could talk about myself all day, but it doesn’t really mean much, whereas if somebody else actually has direct experience with my work, or with our tools or anything like that, it speaks so much more than just myself.

Steve: Interesting, okay.

Nathalie: I was going to say also in terms of the flow of the webinar I definitely like to actually deliver real value, and have people to be able to start taking action on whatever I say after we hangout whether they sign up for something or not. My goal is really to make the offer just such a no brainer it’s an immediate yes for people. That usually means bonuses or special price or something that really makes them go, “Wow. I would be crazy not to say yes to this.”

Steve: In terms of your last webinar since that’s probably the freshest in your mind, what piece of productivity did you teach about, and what were some of your bonuses that you gave out?

Nathalie: The biggest thing that I’ve been realizing is and I kind of look at my community as my feedback loop for what to teach. What I’ve realized is that some people are actually really good when it comes to productivity. They can get so much stuff done in a day, because they have read all of the blogs, and they’ve got the cool planner, and they’ve got the cool apps and all the productivity stuff.

They’re applying all these productivity knowledge to the wrong activities I would say, or at least the easier activities because there is always those activities that are outside your comfort zone, and that push your buttons a little bit. For myself when I first starting in business having sales conversations, or reaching out to somebody who would actually be a potential partner or somebody who would promote something, that was always too scary for me to actually do.

I would put that off and then I would tweak my website, or do something that was really easy to do. I felt like I did so much or I accomplished so much or I checked so much off my to do list, but that 20%, it was not getting done, that stuff that actually moves the needle in your business. That was a really big key take away from that webinar. Then in terms of the bonuses that we offered, well we offered a really cool way to get your website hosted for free on WP Engine when you sign up for the Heartquarters program. We’ve actually partnered with WP Engine.

We’ve designed some templates for people to get started with their WordPress websites. If they were brand new and they were kind of like, “There is just too much to do. I don’t know how to get started. I don’t even have a website yet.” Or if they have website, their website is hosted somewhere else, but they keep getting hacked and they’re like, “I’m done with this cheap hosting,” then that was a big reason to get them onto our platform.

Steve: Interesting, and that WP Engine is like an affiliate relationship too, right. You benefit from that?

Nathalie: Yeah, we’ve actually moved it in-house, so we kind of handle the hosting ourselves. The tech support is handled by WP Engine, but we actually host the sites ourselves. People can use our plug-ins already installed. We’re moving towards an environment that we can help setup so that it’s not from scratch anymore.

Steve: Interesting, so you’re a hosting company too.

Nathalie: Yes. Very recently we went into that as an experiment because again every single I feel like I see a problem that people are having and I’m like, “I wonder if I can solve this for them.” Sometimes people have a hard time choosing a theme or setting up the plug-ins or getting really started on how to point their domain and a lot of stuff. Now we can really help them. They can literally just click the button inside of our members’ area and say, “Start my website.”

Steve: Interesting, are these servers hosted by WP Engine then, because I can’t imagine why they would to support …

Nathalie: Yes, they are.

Steve: Okay that makes sense then.

Nathalie: There is totally a WP Engine host. You get all the same features, but the main thing is that I guess we have our own scripts and things setup in between.

Steve: Right, they give you further access so you can custom manage the people that you’re bringing in so to speak.

Nathalie: Exactly.

Steve: That’s an interesting relationship. You have that offer. Do you usually discount?

Nathalie: Sometimes we do. For this one we didn’t, because it’s kind of a no brainer price at this point.

Steve: What was the pricing for?

Nathalie: It was $79 a month or 750 for the year.

Steve: Was there any scarcity introduced?

Nathalie: Yes, because we were doing our next coaching call. I think it was a week or two after the webinar, that was kind of the main like come and get coached, and you’d actually get some support for your business.

Steve: How do those coaching calls work? Do you get a lot of people to show up? What’s the attendance like?

Nathalie: Good question. Sometimes we have 20 people, 30 people. It does depend a lot because we have some people who are in different time zones like across Europe and Australia. It really depends on what time we schedule it for, but I do try to make it at least accessible as much as I can for those different time zones.

The people who show up get so much out of it, and that’s really to me the biggest thing. Of course they are recorded so people can also send in their questions. People do that as well. There is always so much activity after, because everybody is like, “Oh my God, I’m so fired up again.” I do feel like there is a lot of value in those calls.

Steve: Is there an agenda beforehand, or is it just Q&A?

Nathalie: What we usually do is we’ll go over people’s quarterly priorities, and that’s the thing that we do in our business too, is that we plan everything on a quarterly basis. I kind of bring people into our process and get them to do it live as well. They’ll share what their priorities are.

I will also coach them if I’m like, “Okay. That doesn’t look very realistic. Or maybe you should try a little bit outside your comfort zone on that particular piece.” There is some but then there is also plenty of time for actual questions too.

Steve: You don’t actually bring in any people to your webinars. You just bring in new people to your list, and then you setup these webinars strictly to your list. Is that …

Nathalie: Yes, exactly. That actually works better for us at this point.

Steve: Then in terms of the post-webinar, I imagine you have some sequence as well?

Nathalie: Yes we do. That’s right.

Steve: How many emails is that?

Nathalie: It really varies, but I would say no less than 4 usually.

Steve: What is your way of getting them to actually open these emails?

Nathalie: Good question. We do try to test our different subject lines to make sure that they are actually useful, and also have that curiosity and that open loop. Also if it’s like the last day to sign up with bonuses, just letting people know like, “Last chance or this is going away now, bonus is going away, that kind of thing.” We try to make it as curiosity based, but also let them know what’s happening so that they don’t miss it because of a cryptic subject line.

Steve: Here is something I’ve been struggling with. After a while, let’s say you discount the course or you offer bonuses, after a while people are only going to sign up during the webinar. How do you combat that?

Nathalie: Yes. Something we’re actually testing right now inside of our members’ area is we’re going to be offering a one month’s trial, and basically that is going to have a timed expiration date to take us up on that trial. Basically we’re kind of making the first month as easy to say yes to as possible, and then assuming that they enjoy what’s in there, they’re actually getting a discount by using that first month. It’s going to a dollar trial.

That is something that we’re just testing. I totally hear what you’re saying about like, “Wait, are people going to wait?” I also think that there is always new people finding you. That’s the other piece of that coin.

Steve: Sure and those people who have the one month trial don’t have access to everything because they don’t have enough hearts, right?

Nathalie: Exactly, yeah. There is definitely a reason to stay.

Steve: Interesting. This is really good stuff. I haven’t actually heard anyone use gamefication really in their courses. Are there other rewards for these hearts once you’ve unlocked everything?

Nathalie: Yeah, so the next thing we’re going to be rolling out which I’m really excited about it is going to be critiques. It’s going to be live with me, either an opt-in page, or a sales page or something that you want critiqued on your website. They are going to be individual and you can use your hearts to unlock that. We’ve actually built that into our ProgressAlly plug-in.

We’re calling them private notes. It’s kind of an individual way to communicate with customers inside the members’ area. It almost looks like a chat box, but it’s actually static on a web page. You could say, “This is the page for copy critiques,” but every single person will see a different reply, so that it’s individual to each person.

They can also review it down the line. It’s not like an email where they can archive it or whatever, but it’s going to be there inside their members’ area. That’s something that I’m kind of pumped about. Anybody else who does coaching on that individual basis, if you need to send notes after your coaching call or anything like that, you could use that ProgressAlly feature.

Steve: Interesting, yeah so what’s funny is the way I run my class I have points also. I do a little bit of gamefication. They get points for participating, for attending the weekly live sessions, and then they can redeem those points for a free consult or website critique. I’ve been doing those for five years now actually. I’ve got a whole bunch of them.

Nathalie: Oh my God, I love it.

Steve: I like the other ways that you’ve been talking about where some people, they go through a class and then they just start watching random videos and skip all over the place. I like how you have this heart system which keeps them on track.

Nathalie: Yes, and we actually have an assessment as soon as they join. They fill out some questions and then we recommend which course is best for them next, so that it’s not so overwhelming like, “Should I do a podcast or should I do a blog?” Like kind of what you’re saying.

We tell them like, “Based on where you’re at right now and what your skill sets are, we recommend these next steps.” That way it really sends them in the right direction, and then if they finish that course and they start implementing, then they could take the assessment again technically and go onto the next piece.

Steve: Would you say that your class is mainly targeted to people who want to build an audience and sell some digital product?

Nathalie: Yes. I would say that. There is definitely people who are on the ecommerce side, but they are a much, much smaller percentage. I do think that the online info space is definitely more the target market.

Steve: Okay, interesting. In terms of the people who’ve taken your class, is there a specific demographic? Are they into healthy eating, or is it just all over the place?

Nathalie: At this point, it’s a bit more broad. We’ve got like photographers, definitely some health coaches, regular coaches, life coaches, yoga people, even like dog trainers. We’ve got a pretty wide range of people at this point. It does tend to attract mostly women. We have a couple of guys, but for the most part it’s mostly women.

Steve: Actually we’re running out of time here, but I just was curious since you work with your husband primarily on this business. I’ve mentioned this several times in the past in podcasts. I’ve even had my wife on the podcast, where we actually don’t work that well together. We argue a lot especially if we’re overlapping on stuff. I’m just curious what the dynamic is like with your husband when you guys work together.

Nathalie: I think we work pretty well together. We think very differently, but we’re easily on the same page. One of the things that we learned the hard way was actually organizing one of our live in person conferences, because we were kind of giving each other orders, and we realized that that does not work very well for a relationship. We came up with the because rule.

Whenever we tell each other to do something or that we need to do something, we say, “Because.” Then we explain why. That really puts everything into context, and it takes the forceful ordering around kind of attitude out of it, and it’s like, “Oh okay. We’re immediately on the same page.” It’s like, “Oh okay well this might not be the highest priority, but I understand why we need to do this or whatever in whatever situation.” That can really diffuse some of that forceful energy that might be coming from working together with your spouse.

Steve: Interesting, I can see my wife going, “We’re doing it this way because you’re stupid.”

Nathalie: The other thing too is that we try to also have time where we don’t talk about business. It’s a little bit harder these days.

Steve: That’s hard to do for us. It’s probably really helpful now that you have your baby also that you guys both work together and at home, so you can alternate the duties I would imagine.

Nathalie: Yes. That’s been really helpful. For example when I’m on this interview, he’s on baby watch if she wakes up. If he has to really focus on something I can totally be there. It really helps us alternate. It also feels like we get to spend more time with her that way too, so we actually see her grow up, but also get a lot of work done which is kind of nice.

Steve: That’s awesome. Do you have a staff to run all this, or is it just you and your husband?

Nathalie: Oh yeah. We have … I think we’re up to a team of 7 now.

Steve: Oh really.

Nathalie: Yeah. They are all over North America. We’ve got people in Seattle and Canada and Colorado. We’ve got support, tech support. We’ve got a writer, a project manager in marketing, and then another developer, and then my husband and myself. We have a video editor as well.

Steve: That’s amazing. That’s awesome.

Nathalie: Yeah.

Steve: I want to respectful of your time and we’re running out of it. I do want everyone to know where they can find you, your courses and your products.

Nathalie: Yeah, absolutely. Like I mentioned the 30 Day List Building Challenge is a great way to get introduced to my work. That’s just that 30daylistbuildingchallenge.com, but to check out all of our products you can go to AmbitionAlly.com. You’ll see we’ve got all kinds of cool stuff for WordPress, and if you don’t use WordPress, then you can go and check out NathalieLussier.com.

We’ve got our off the chats podcasts there that you can take a listen too which Steve has been on and you as I said was very, very well loved and acclaimed, so that’s awesome. Those are the main places where I hang out, and I would love to get to know everybody and have you guys join us inside of our Face book groups, and see if there is any problems I can solve for you.

Steve: Nathalie needs more males.

Nathalie: Yes, come on down.

Steve: That’s the key take away that I got. Her sites are just so beautifully well designed as well. You guys should definitely check them out.

Nathalie: Thank you.

Steve: All right Nathalie, thanks a lot for coming on the show. I really appreciate you.

Nathalie: Thanks for having me.

Steve: All right, take care.

There you have it. What I love about Nathalie is that she’s a triple threat. She can market, she can code, and she can sell. I really admire what she’s done with her software business.

For more information about this episode, go to MyWifeQuitHerJob.com/episode 129. If you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is the best way to support the show and please tell your friends, because the greatest complement that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.

If you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to My Wife Quit Her Job for more information. Sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

128: The Dark Side Of SEO And Little Used Ways To Rank In Search With Glen Allsopp

The Dark Side Of SEO And How To Rank In Search With Glen Allsopp

Today, I’m thrilled to have Glen Allsop on the show. Glen runs the awesome site ViperChill.com where he teaches people how to get traffic to their websites.

Glen and I actually go way back to 2010 where we were members of the same blog voting group and we’ve loosely kept in touch since. He’s got an amazing array of articles that go into incredible depth. I want to say a short post for him is like 3000 words. And the reason why I follow Glen’s work is because he talks about topics that other people would not dare talk about.

For example, he talks about his experiments with private blog networks. He does in depth analysis on link building, both white and grey hat tactics. He doesn’t write very often, but when he does he always drops an atomic bomb in your brain. And with that, enjoy the episode!

What You’ll Learn

  • How to avoid getting penalized by Google and why big companies are getting away with it.
  • Some SEO tactics big companies are using that are black hat.
  • Which grey hat tactics would Glen consider using for new sites.
  • Glen’s main strategy when it comes to ranking a site in search.
  • Where Glen promotes his content.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, and if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.If you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini-course right away via email. Now on to the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here’s your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Glen Allsopp on the show. Glen runs the awesome site viperchill.com where he teaches people how to get traffic to their websites. Glen and I actually go way back to I want to say early 2010 where we were a member of the same blog group, and we’ve kind of loosely kept in touch ever since. He’s got an amazing array of articles that go in to incredible depth. I want to say that a short post for him is like 3,000 to 4,000 words. I’m not even exaggerating.

The reason why I follow Glen’s work is because he talks about topics that other people would not dare talk about. For example, he talks about his experiments with private blog networks. He goes in depth on analysis on link building, both white and grey hat tactics. He doesn’t write very often, but when he does, he always drops an atomic bomb in your head. With that welcome to the show Glen, how are you doing today man?

Glen: Steve I’m very here. Thank you for that awesome introduction.

Steve: It’s been so long, and jeez I’m so happy to have you on the podcast today. A bunch of people in the audience probably know who you are, but if you won’t mind just giving a very brief intro, how you got started online and the history behind ViperChill, your agencies and basically what you’ve been up to online.

Glen: Yeah, sure. It was my birthday last month. I turned 27 years old. The reason I say that just to put things into perspective. I actually started ViperChill 11 years ago. So I was 16 years old. You can go and check that in archives. You can see how terrible my website designs and my writing used to be. ViperChill was pretty much one of the first sites I started. It was actually the second website.

The first website I started was a Deejaying website. I was trying to get into Deejaying at the time. I wasn’t trying to get famous; I was just at home and having fun with it. I turned tables and stuff like that. I set up a website about it and no one came. I decided to learn about how Google works, and we started ranking for things like Deejay forums and reviews for particular equipments and stuff like that.
I realized I was actually having a lot more fun working out how Google works than it was actually learning how to mix tracks together and matching beats and stuff like that, so I started ViperChill. It was very much a kind of a diary of my SEO experiments. Like I said it was just something I seemed to enjoy far more than actually the original reason I had actually learned SEO in the first place.

As you said, we go way back, so I think 2008, 2009 something like that. I have 6, 7, 8 years now. I started plug in ID. I had just moved to South Africa. I got offered a job there when I was 18. Someone had found me, they were reading my blog, they found me on an SEO forum and they said, “Would you like to move to South Africa and come and work for us.” I was in college at the time. I had a part time job in a closed store in the UK. I turned it down. I thought it was ridiculous. I don’t know anyone in South Africa.

I goggled a bit about it and I was like it’s so unsafe, don’t go there. Like I said I was still living with my parents, still at home, I was like 16, 17 at this point. I told my mom like, “Hey this crazy guy in South Africa offered me a job to go and do internet marketing with all these big brands.” She said, “So you said yes?” I was kind of surprised and she said, “You know you don’t like college which is true.” I’m folding clothes in some shop and working out all my spare hours trying to rank websites in Google. She said, “Just go and do it.”

A few weeks later, I was 17 about to turn 18, I moved to Cape Town, South Africa and that’s where I started plug in ID. If anyone listening, it’s no longer online. I did end up selling that website. But yeah, that’s pretty much how we met and how my journey started.

Steve: I was just kind of coming through your blog and on your about page I think it said that you cleared 7 figures last year in 2015. I’m pretty sure that ViperChills isn’t really monetized. I was just wondering what you guys do actually just to generate revenue?

Glen: A lot of– we talked a bit about before the show. What I spent the last few years doing. Kind of go back to my original story a bit. I got to work with all these amazing clients in South Africa. I got to do instant marketing for like Land Rover and Nissan and Hewlett Packard, like the South African division. I got to work with all of these awesome clients, but the problem is, I soon learned when you are working with these awesome clients, although it sounds good, they are so slow to making any changes that you recommend.

You know if there’s an article I think they should write that could go viral, or an SEO change that they should implement to get more search traffic, that has to go to my manager, to their marketing manager, to their legal team, back to their manager, back to my manager, back to me. A change that should have really taken like a day for a personal website could take two months for one of these big clients. It wasn’t really ideal.

What I started doing on the side was I know about SEO, I know how to rank. I started deciding to rank more websites. I got into the affiliate kind of stuff and ranking websites that way. Like I said, one of the first websites was ViperChill and I just really loved doing SEO, and especially doing it for other people and new challenges and stuff like that. For the last two or three years now, we have built– so I say we is my business partner Diggy. We have built almost a dozen, so 10 or 11 I think maybe now niche focused SEO agencies.

So we have an SEO agency that only works with companies in Singapore. We have an SEO agency that only works with car dealers in the US, and so on. The reason I do that, is so it’s all one company, but the reason I separate all of the branding is because these companies, they want to work with someone who they feel, this is the guy I want. When you are selling SEO, you’ve got to compete with hundreds of thousands of emails that companies get saying, “Hey we can do SEO for you. Do you want SEO or do you want link building.” You don’t stand out. It’s very difficult.

What we did is we branded ourselves to say the SEO agency for Singapore, and yeah when we contacted people they would say, “Oh he’s doing SEO, but he only does it for guys in Singapore. He must know what he’s doing.” Pretty much all of my revenue for last year and pretty much the three years before that as well is just doing SEO for clients.

Steve: So that’s really smart. I imagine you pick very lucrative verticals to go into. You mentioned car dealers, right?

Glen: Yeah.

Steve: That means you probably own like all the SEO guys from the car dealerships I would imagine, right?

Glen: It’s actually very competitive space.

Steve: Oh it is, okay.

Glen: The reason I got into it is actually I found two brands. I’m trying to remember their names right now. I think one is called Auto Shop Solutions, and they build websites just for car dealers. There was another one who do like mailings, like direct mailings for car dealers. They print out the little fliers they can send out to potential clients and so on. I thought these guys have been doing a lot of money doing website sign just for car dealers. These guys are making a lot of money doing direct mail just for car dealers. I want to try SEO.

As I got into it, I did notice there was quite a bit of competition. Sadly I like to work remotely. A lot of potential clients do want to be able to meet you face to face as well which isn’t something that I wanted to do personally. But yeah, we do pretty well and like I said, as long as you have the right angle when you are approaching someone, you know, “This is my SEO Company. I only work with car dealers. I’ve researched how Google ranks websites in the automotive niche. I know the big competitors already. I know what kind of content people share in that industry. Would you like me to help you as well?” That’s pretty much…

Steve: That’s a very compelling argument. What I really like about you Glen as I mentioned earlier is that you cover topics that no one else really covers, and that just makes it super interesting. You talk a lot about SEO in your posts, and I was hoping to kind of steer the conversation towards like anomalies and grey hat tactics that are still working to rank in search today, even though Google has pretty much scared everyone from manual link building.

Glen: Right.

Steve: So let’s start with– you mentioned private blog networks earlier in our conversation. Are those still working, and is it dangerous?

Glen: First of all they definitely still work. Two to three years ago they were, I can’t say they were working better, but people were less scared to implement the tactic. So people were, I could happily say, “Hey, I run private blog networks,” and though people thought it was a bit, not purely white hat, they don’t really have such negative opinion about it. And then the official Google announcement came that we are cracking down the link networks. Everyone got scared and worried about it and so on. When Google say something you know people listen and they get worried.

I find today that the guys who do private blog networks and the people who build them generally do so privately which is myself as well. I still rank affiliate websites to this day and little niche websites. I don’t do this for clients, but I think it’s important to know what works. I think any good SEO should know all of the “earned links”– I’m making little speech bubbles speech marks with my fingers here. They should know what works naturally and what’s on the other side of the fence as well.

They are generally frowned upon by Google. They are kind of frowned upon if you say you offer that as a service or you do it. But as long as you can build them in a way that’s– it’s some way to review the website manually, it would look like a legitimate website, then for the most part you can be pretty safe.

That being said, you know if you are working with a huge client, you know like Land Rover or Hewlett Packard or something, obviously I wouldn’t go and do that for them. They could get a lot of negative backlash and so on. If you are happy to do it privately and for your own websites, it’s definitely something I would be comfortable recommending as long as you know the risks involved, but as far as doing it for clients and big brands and stuff like that, generally a no, no with that tactic.

Steve: I mean if you are doing a private blog network just for yourself, really that’s just a collection of websites then at that point, right?

Glen: Yeah, so it’s let’s just say you want a website, you want to rank for how to learn Spanish or something like that, and you want to sell a video course or an eBook or whatever on that topic, then you would go, and the way to rank in Google, a very simplistic way to break it all down is that you need links. So you need other websites linking to you. Now it’s not the easiest things in the world.

There are tens of thousands, maybe hundreds of thousands of websites on how to learn Spanish. They are all trying to compete. They are all on traffic from Google. They are all trying to get links. It’s not that easy. The short cut and the route many of us take is to go and build your own website on the similar topics, building out other websites on how to learn Spanish, and then linking them back to my original website in the hope that we’ll rank higher.

Steve: How do you get those, I mean there’s only so much time. You probably have to spend a lot of time to build up the sites in your blog network.

Glen: To be honest, my own experience is that the blog networks themselves do not have to be very good sites at all. Actually, especially two years ago, I would set up websites that were just three or four pages. They would still pass for what we call like link juice to what we also call the money site, that’s a website that we want to rank. They would still pass the juice. What you want to do is to kind of again the speed up the process which is why we do private link networks in the first place, and to kind of level the playing field a little bit is you want to find domains that used to be used for a website originally.

So someone had build a website, they’ve build a resource on the topic and for whatever reason, they let the website die, the domain expired, you can go and register it and so on. Then what we do is go pick up those domains that expired, put a website on it. There are people who recommend copying the old content. I would never do that.

First of all it’s illegal. But there are actually a lot of services out there that would copy the content from a website, how it used to look like before it experienced. But I will just build up new content on that website. And the reason we do this is because people were already linking to that website originally, so it kind of has again the most authority that it can pass on to your website.

Steve: Interesting. Yeah, I heard about this like a couple of years ago, but all of a sudden like no one started writing about it anymore. It’s still in fact is effective is what you are saying?

Glen: Yeah, and the reason no one is writing about it like I said is because of that Google update which made everyone, if you want to have a clean image when you are talking about internet marketing and SEO, then you kind of veer away from talking about private link networks.

Steve: I see, I see, interesting. So you recommend doing it just for yourself. I was going to say like the point of a private blog network is to be able to sell access to it. But it sounds like no one is really selling access to it. They are being extremely careful about who they allow into this network.

Glen: Yeah, there are certainly quite a lot of people who still sell access. I used to do the same. I don’t do that anymore. I actually sold the business that I did that with. So there are definitely people who still sell access to their private networks, but you are more likely to find them on private forums like Black Hat World and so on, than you are people being open about it in public like there used to be.

Steve: I see. One of the things that also intrigued me lately, and you are not the only person to have told me this, but there’s all these places where you can still buy back links on very reputable sites. Is that still going on with some of the larger companies that you know of, and like is it risky and where can you find places to do this?

Glen: What a lot of people do to get links on the most authoritative websites, and I’m talking about Forbes, Huffington Post, ink.com, entrepreneur.com, and obviously the respected big brands in different industries outside of business and marketing is that they connect with the people who are writing articles for those websites. Of course, Entrepreneur, they are not going to have a big section in their websites side basting sponsored links and here’s all the links.

What you can do is you can find someone who is regularly contributing to the website and say, “Hey I have a client, or I have my own website. I would like you to link to it. Would you sell a link in your next article, or is there anything else I can do for you?” I’ve heard of examples of people like fixing someone’s logo on their website in return for them writing about them on Forbes or something like that. It’s not always a direct money transaction, but generally it’s about reaching out to again the regular contributors. I can’t even speak today. I’m not going to try and say that word again. Reaching out to them and just seeing would they mention you.

That’s kind of– I wouldn’t say underground, but it’s you know, it’s not something that they are going to be saying, “Hey pay me money and I will write for you on Forbes.” You have to connect with them yourself and see what you can do with that. As far as buying links goes and seeing opportunities, what I recommend if you want to see how deep paid links buying goes on the internet is find– generally it’s kind of open source software and open source tools, and they allow you to sponsor the kind of development of their tool and in return they will give you a link back as a thank you.

Now of course any opportunity to get links, SEO will take advantage of. If you go to any kind of big open source software, open sourcing and people can get for free and they can download it and put it on their server whatever it is, even something like My SQL, they have a sponsors page, phpBB forum software. They have a sponsor’s page, and you will see the people who are already taking advantage of link buying.

And then because I’m a real total nerd when it comes to this SEO stuff, not only will I see, okay who’s buying all the links in this page, but then I’ll go and check all of the other back links and you know you it just– if you keep going and you keep going down the warm hole, and seeing all of the sites that are buying links somewhere, you will find all of these other opportunities in other websites where they are clearly buying links. Now, again not all of them are very open, so they are not all honest like hey, sponsor us for a $20 and you get a link.

Actually, one I contacted two weeks ago, has six sponsors and they look like kind of clearly generic websites, and they charge $10,000 a year for the link, so some people are paying a lot of money for these back links. Not all of them are open, and a lot of them you can see that the link is clearly bought, like it just doesn’t fit with the website. So maybe a website about WordPress themes and in the photo they have a link to law firm Michigan or something like that.

Although they don’t clearly state that they sell links, you can, and I generally do contact them, and how much are you selling links, how much do you sell them for and so on. Again it’s not something you will see out in the open too much, but there’s definitely a big industry and a lot of money being spent on links.

Steve: But if you can spot them, doesn’t that mean that Google can probably spot them as well.

Glen: Yeah, well here is the thing, let’s just say, I can’t remember which one. Say my SQL, what it is the other one, phpMyAdmin, they also have a lot of sponsor links on their website. There’s no way to detect whether I went and bought that for myself or someone bought it for me, and try to do negative things to my SEO. What SEOs generally would like Google to state– so a couple of days ago I read this amazing comment by Danny Sullivan.

He writes for Search Engine Land, pretty much the biggest authority on updates to Google and Bing and Yahoo and so on. His comments back from a few years ago when Google was saying no follow links in infographics and “no follow” just for everyone else means make sure that the link doesn’t count. You’re trying to get search, increase search engine rankings for it, and make sure you do that. And Danny said, “Google, will you just say we can’t do any link building. It would be so much easier than saying you can’t do this, you can’t do this, don’t do this, don’t do this.”

Yes, you have to be careful with any kind of link building. What I do is again, you have to keep your mind this, although I could buy and be buying links for myself, someone else could be buying them for me, and you know I could be penalized. I think Google has to be very careful, and the ideal solution for pretty much everyone, not only I think for Google’s reputation but for SEOs and link builders is for Google to just not count links that they don’t think are worth passing on.

I’m sure someone from Google already knows phpMyAdmin. You know it’s one of the biggest server softwares in the world used by millions of people. I’m sure if someone from Google found that sponsorship page, ideally they would just say this link isn’t passing any credit. You can keep buying it, you can keep thinking it’s helping your SEO, but actually we are not passing on any weight from this domain.

Again, although some of these links are very easy to spot, we don’t know who’s buying them. It could be someone trying to hurt the reputation of someone else. So ideally they are just not counted and you don’t really know.

Steve: If you decide to go this route, what are some best tactics to avoid getting penalized?

Glen: If you are going to be buying links?

Steve: Yes.

Glen: I think the safest route is generally to try and get links in content. So contacting webmasters who blog, people who write for these big websites. There’s no– without speaking with the writer directly, there’s no guaranteed way to know whether or not a link was paid for. In my view although it’s a bit of an idealistic view, if I find a website of mine got penalized, and again this happens very, very rarely these days.

Actually the people who tend to get penalized are the ones who are very public about their websites. I think it was Spencer Haws from Niche Site Pursuits. He was doing, he was using– I can’t remember exact thing. I think he was using PBNs, but he was very public about his case study and what was going on, and then a few months later on he got a thin content, or a bad back link warning, or something like that from Google.

So it’s generally the guys who are public about what they are doing with SEO tend to get caught, because they are kind of admitting to their process, and those who are– I don’t really see any big penalties happening for a lot of sites. For example the last major Google penalty that kind of got the SEO world talking was for Rap Genius, and this was a couple of years ago now.

They describe what Rap lyrics really mean and song lyrics, and they get millions of visitors a month. They were found to be doing some shady stuff like openly asking their audience for reviews and back links and so on, and they only got caught because they were actually asking about it in public. It wasn’t something like Google detected themselves. Someone blogged about it, and SEO blogged about it, Google saw that SEO’s blog post, and then they got penalized.

So as I was going to say, if I find a website of mine is going to get penalized which is very, very rare, it hasn’t happened for a long time, I could theoretically go on build the same links for my competition, get them penalized and have a better website of mine ranking high.

Steve: Right. So what’s really cool is that as I was just combing through some your articles in the last year, and you are pointing out that a lot of big companies are getting away with just blatant link building. And would you consider that black hat, grey hat, and why are they getting away with it?

Glen: The post I think you’re referring to is my article 16 companies dominating Google?

Steve: Yes.

Glen: So originally that post was entirely supposed to be about one network. It was about Hearst Media and for those who don’t know Hearst Media they own brands like, Elle, Esquire, Cosmopolitan, Woman’s Day and so on. So they owned a lot of fashion titles and they took those to the web, and they all started linking to one website bestproducts.com.

Now, I see nothing wrong with that, okay so Steve if you start a new website, it’s pretty normal for you to want to link to that from your own website not necessarily for such traffic and rankings, but to let your audience know I have this new website, and it’s fairly normal to want to link it from your website.

So what they were doing is for all of their websites Cosmo, Elle, Esquire, Vogue, and so on you will see in the footer of those websites every single one of them links to a brand new website which is bestproducts.com. Now again, because they own the website, I don’t see anything wrong with that tactic. However, what I don’t really like seeing is that Google have massively rewarded this tactic. I can’t remember the exact numbers, but this Best Products is now getting a few million visitors per month from Google, and it’s only a couple months old.

So anyone else trying to do the same thing for a product review website unless you work for one of these big brands, then you have no chance of getting those amazing links. So in my theory again Hearst weren’t doing anything wrong, but I really don’t like seeing Google give them so much weight, because it’s not something someone else can replicate, and in other words it’s just big money taking over.

So I wouldn’t say it’s black hat or grey hat or anything like that. It’s totally normal for a website to want to link to their other websites, but as far as Google are giving it so much credit is pretty disappointing for the SEO world.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now I love running my ecommerce store, but you know what I hate doing the most, bookkeeping. Seriously keeping track of receipts, expenses, and especially inventory cost are easily the worst aspects of entrepreneurship hands down. And here’s where Bench accounting comes in.

Bench is an online bookkeeping service that specializes in ecommerce businesses. They are experts at handling all ecommerce related reports whether it be from Amazon, Shopify, Bigcommerce, Stripe, you name it. All you got to do is sign up, and they will pair you with a team of dedicated bookkeepers who will handle everything for you.

So no more data entry, no more data crunching, no more headaches, plus it’s reasonably priced. And the best part is you can get 20% off your first six months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off your first six months. Now back to the show.

Steve: So there’s another example you gave I think on a different article where Houzz was putting in links on their widgets or something like that. I mean is that blatantly black hat too?

Glen: Yes. I tend to find black hat as hacking websites and stuff like that. It’s very negative term to me, so I will put this more on a grey hat side of things. So what they were doing, so Houzz, I think they are going to IPO next year and probably for a few billion dollars they’re valued at the moment, home design community.

You can put a widget on your website showing like bathroom photos or the latest house photos in that community and so on, and what they were doing is they were sticking in I think it was about ten links to all of their pages on their websites if you installed the widget. So you think the widget preview just shows you that you are going to get nice bath photos that you can put on the side bar of your home design blog, but in reality when you install the widget you had ten links to all of these different pages on Houzz.

Now I audit them, I don’t really like auditing, but I hated seeing this, because there are a lot of webmasters who had no idea. They are just normal mom and pop bloggers, whatever. They don’t think about link building and SEO, they are putting these widgets on their site, and they’re suddenly linking to all of these pages on Houzz.

They don’t really know what it is and what it’s for. So again I audited them on my blog, and within 24 hours they took away all of those links, they removed all of the links from their widget. No comments, no emails from them, but I was pretty proud of that. It’s nice to see and I checked…

Steve: It’s clearly working, right?

Glen: Yeah clearly working. Their search traffic was through the roof. And so I checked a few months ago, and although they removed it previously, they have now added one link back. It’s fine to add a link in a widget, but should really be no followed again. That’s kind of telling Google don’t count this link as something for search engine rankings. They are not doing that. They certainly should know that there should be no following that link and they’re linking to the photos pages on their website.

I’m pretty sure it’s just houzz.com/photos and that’s H-O-U-Z-Z for anyone again for people listening houzz.com/photos, but that links to all the other main pages on their site like bathroom photos, bedroom photos, kitchen photos, and those such terms they’re ranking pretty number one for everything in Google. Their search terms are sending them hundreds of thousands of visitors every single month. So again they went back to the kind of that shady grey hat ways, they are putting links on people’s website that people don’t know about, and they’re getting a lot of search traffic in return.

Steve: How do you feel about, let’s just take about a WordPress plug-in for example, like a free plug-in, but within that plug-in there’s like a little back link going back to their site? I mean does that tactic work, and how do you feel about that in terms of risk?

Glen: If the link is– on a general level forgetting about such changes for a second, I think that’s fine. If you’re using a free plug-in and add something to your website you give credit to the author. Now when it comes to search, Google recommends and strongly recommends that you no-follow that link again. So you’re telling them don’t use this link as something that would count for my search engine rankings, but it may send me traffic from that website to mine which is fine.

So if it’s going to be a popular plug in and it’s going to be used by a lot of people, very risky, someone’s going to mention it, someone’s going to talk about it, maybe Google are going to find it. Another thing, you have to be worried about is having too many links with the same text. You have … If I’m trying to rank for a holiday in Spanish. Even 90% of my links are just holiday in Spanish. There is something very odd going on there unnatural. It’s probably going to set off a few flags …

Steve: Houzz has been getting away with this right, maybe because they are such a strong domain that it doesn’t matter as much?

Glen: Yeah, exactly that’s pretty much my theory is that because they have many types of links anyway, some that don’t fit into the ideal criteria, they are left alone. To be honest that theory was thrown away when we see what happened when Hearst Media sent all their links to BestProducts.com. They didn’t have any other type of link, just links from every page in the footer of their other websites and now they are just ranking for everything in Google.
Again this is the reason I test so much, and the reason I write infrequently, but when I do I try and cover something in such depth is because what Google always say and what they recommend and what should be the case is actually very often not the case at all. Houzz get away with it one because Google didn’t find it. They are definitely not as smart as we think they are.

Two they have a strong brand and they have so many links that they negate the less quality ones. Again Best Products showed us that Google just aren’t good at saying these links shouldn’t count. They’ve got to scan what billions of web pages every day, rank for billions and billions of different search terms. There’s going to be a lot of things that they get wrong.

Steve: One thing I wanted to talk about is a lot of people listening they are not going to have really strong domains or really strong websites. I wanted to just switch gears a little bit and just talk about how you would proceed to rank let’s say a brand new ecommerce site in search. What would be your strategy at a high level?

Glen: The first thing I would do is just make sure all my onsite stuff is good. I don’t have a lot of duplicate pages. I’m not duplicate content everywhere; you want have a unique descriptions for your items and so on. Just always, although links are the most important factor you definitely just want to make sure you take care of the fundamentals to make sure that when you are getting links that they actually have a bit more effect. If I was going to start a brand new ecommerce blog I would definitely focus on trying to be creative and very transparent. I’d have a blog on there, content marketing. Although I’m focused on a lot of other aspects of link building I actually enjoy content marketing the most. I love having ideas for content and actually putting it out there.

In the ecommerce industry for instance I think you have to be creative. For example one company, it’s a bit borderline on ethics, but they are a slippers company in the UK and what they did is they ordered a slipper in size 43. That’s UK sizes; no more if it’s a 10 in UK it would be 43 in America. We are talking about a 44 in the UK, whatever that is in the States. They ordered it from China, and then they created this article saying, “Oh we ordered some slippers from China but they got our size wrong. The guys are sleeping inside the slipper, they got our size wrong.”

And obviously everyone started talking about it. Everyone linking to it, they got links in the Daily Mail, the Metro in the UK, they Guardian Newspaper. Look what happened when these guys ordered slippers from China. They got, lost in translation, wasn’t the case at all. They ordered the slippers themselves; it’s a viral stunt. It depends on your definition …

Steve: Let’s talk about that a little bit. How important is it to be deliberate with the keywords that you are targeting for a post as opposed to just making something go viral?

Glen: Well the thing that you have to keep in mind is that links to a page to spread throughout a website. They started ranking for slipper related terms but if people are searching for slippers they don’t really want to read an article on big slippers, they want to actually buy the product.
What you have to do is there’s two things; first of all keep in mind that the link authority and link juice whatever you want to call it should theoretically flow through to other pages on the website so you have your category pages ranking higher naturally. The other point is make sure there are elements on the page, on that page that will direct people to relevant product categories on your site.

For example Amazon, they rank for pretty much everything but those internal pages don’t actually have a lot of back links. It’s just because their domain as whole has built up so much authority. As long as you are getting links from other sources they don’t always have to be for specific keywords to a page that you actually want to rank high in Google when people are searching for product terms but it should help your website authority overall.

Steve: Interesting, because right now for my blog I always take the time, I fire up Long Tail Pro, and I look for keywords that I can rank for pretty easily for the post but it sounds like I should probably be mixing those up with maybe viral titles to just attract more back links which in turn will spread that juice to my other posts. Is that accurate?

Glen: Yeah I think it depends on the audience. For your blog, you have a specific audience. I think it would be a bit strange for them if you suddenly started writing things with click bait titles that were clearly designed just to attract links. I think that might put your audience off a little bit. Whereas an ecommerce brand they don’t, if they don’t already have a following like you said it’s a new site they can test new things and get away with things a little bit better.

One website I found doing very well with this was a … I think they sell kilts and just men’s clothing basically. They created a tactical army kilt. They created this kilt with all these pockets and so on, and it was a fake product, but everyone started talking about it and they got many requests that they actually made it into a real item, a kilt that you can actually take into battle with you. Yeah it got a lot of people talking.

It depends on your audience. I’m trying to think of a big clothing brand. Like a Louis Vuitton or Gucci or something like that it would be very bad for their brand to try and put out these viral stuff in order to get links and so on. For someone just starting out in this specific niche industry can definitely be a way to get people noticing your brand.

Steve: How do you feel about having the blog on a sub domain as opposed to the main domain which is what you might have to do with if you use a fully hosted shopping cart for example? Is it an absolute no, no?

Glen: I definitely prefer a blog to be on a sub folder. How Google worked for a long time and I believe this still to be the case is that a sub-domain is essentially being thought of as a new domain. Any “juice” that you want to pass from the sub domain to the main site isn’t really there unless the blog itself has a lot of links to it. Whereas as you are on a sub folder the authority of the main domain is passing authority to those sub pages and now those blog articles can rank higher because of the authority of the demand.

Preferably if you have the option definitely you put a blog on a sub-folder. If it’s going to be an integral part of your marketing anyway and you are going to be taking it seriously people are going to be linking to your blog. If it has to be on a sub folder, people have made it work, it’s definitely not impossible but ideally it would be on a sub-folder for me rather than a sub domain.

Steve: Okay and since we’ve been talking about grey hat tactics would you employ any of these tactics to give a boost to an ecommerce store if you were starting out?

Glen: As long as they know the risks involved then it’s something I would do. For example if I could get someone on the Huffington Post I don’t know what I’m selling. Let’s just say I’m selling a new line of designer glasses.

Steve: Sure.

Glen: If Huffington Post are doing a blog post, if they have a writer who talks about accessories and fashion and stuff like that. If I could suggest to them do a blog post comparing the UV protection of cheap sunglasses compared to for a dollar or those that costs $300. Giving them ideas for content and getting links from them and maybe the case that it’s a friend of mine or I paid them for that mention.

Or I gave them advice in their own websites, in their careers, something in return for that link. In Google’s world, ideal world I wouldn’t get that link or it shouldn’t count because I actively went out to seek that link unnaturally. Whereas to me what … I guess the simple solution is to try and build links that will also send traffic.
Do people really go and check out the sponsor’s page of phpMyAdmin? Not really, do they really go and click on these links not really. If I’m commenting on blogs or I’m participating in forums or I’m trying to offer great content on my website all of the things that could also get traffic to my of site then it’s generated the links I would want to build. Sometimes there are … Google have made it so that people are scared to do any link building.

In their eyes pretty much anything could be seen as grey hat if it’s not somehow I just got … Randomly got a link from these websites, it just happened. I actively go out and seek links. I guess that’s always seen as against their guidelines, but for a new site I’ll definitely try and reach out to influencers and authorities and see if there is any way I can get them to talk about me and of course send links back to my site.

Steve: Using that Huffington Post example, essentially Google has forced us to use social engineering to get these links. I was just curious what your strategy would be to reach out to someone on Huffington Post in your example who is writing about fashion or whatever that could be relevant to your store.
Glen: Sometimes it’s very obvious and that someone is already sending out links that are on a page basis. For example there is a guy … I’m not going to say his name. There is a guy who writes for Businessinsider.com in their wall room section. Very clearly half the articles he writes are … I don’t know if it’s him personally being paid or Business Insider trying to do in content ads or whatever it is, native ads if you want to call them.

I don’t know if it’s them collecting the money, but those articles are clearly being paid for. In that case I would just go to the guy and say again I’m trying not to say his name. I would just contact …

Steve: No that’s fine. What are some elements that you can instantly determine that these links are paid for? Are they just totally out of context or?

Glen: It’s just too much promotion and nice things and so many links. The one I saw recently was like this guy writes the best blog on this topic and then with a weird keyword link. He also just has a new book coming out which you can find here, I really recommend it. It’s just whereas if Mark Zuckerberg does something they’re really critical.

Whereas this new guy who no one’s ever heard of they are super nice about it and they just want to link to all pages of his website, which really stands out to me. Yeah you can just watch, for example one person I found recently is actually a team of people, 4 or 5 guys. I just noticed that in half the articles they were writing for Forbes and Entrepreneur they were all linking to each other.

You would say, “Guys look I know what’s going on.” I’m often very direct, “Look I know what’s going on I want to get in. I want to get a piece of this action as anyways get involved.” Same for Business Insider I would be very direct. Whereas if I wasn’t too sure or I just wanted to reach out at someone from Huffington Post I would generally just say something like, “Hey I really enjoyed your article about X. I also have a website like this is there any way we could discuss how I could help promote myself, it could be worth your time.” Don’t directly mention money or anything like that just saying, “I’m happy to … I’m happy to do something in return for your time.”

Steve: Interesting and when the people do respond do they just give you a rate sheet or how does it usually work, the conversation?

Glen: Funnily, if it’s a website, if I’m buying the link directly from a website and not a writer for one of these things they will literally reply with 2 sentences. “Hey Glen … “Actually I don’t use my name but will reply to the person the alias that I’m emailing from. If they see it’s from ViperChill as they go its, he just wants to write about me and selling links or whatever. They will say, “Hey yeah homepage link is $20 a month, if you want me to write a post for you its $100. If you want me to write the content it’s $150.” They’ll be very, very direct in their response a lot of the time. Other people will dismiss it.
If you do email someone who would never accept money which is a lot of people they will just ignore the email. Other people they are, “Yeah what do you have in mind.” I have an upcoming article on X, I could probably mention it, would you pay for that and so on.

Steve: Okay how do you feel about services like Tomoson which are places where you pay money for bloggers to review items?

Glen: What was that website sorry, Tomoson?

Steve: Tomoson yeah.

Glen: I don’t know about it personally.

Steve: Okay or just sites in general that hook you up with bloggers that are willing to review products.

Glen: Well the one thing that you have to be wary of is one of the links no follow or due follow, are they going to pass any juice? If they are generally the ones that aren’t going to be passing link authority, link juice. If they are is it easy for someone else to be able to do the same? Can a hundred people go to that same person and get links that’s going to look a bit dodgy for your website.

It’s going to … Maybe they are going to get flagged in the future or something like that. The one thing you want to be careful of in any network is you want to make sure that you don’t know about the website upfront. I don’t want … If there is a big database of all of these people selling reviews then that’s a bad sign. It’s very easy to see then of course someone else can see that, someone else being Google staff could see that and potentially crack down on that also.

As far as traffic and stuff goes again now everything is about search. If it could send you traffic go for it but probably you might want to as for that link to be no follow. If you are trying to get due follow links then just make sure it’s not too easy for everyone else to do the same and then not too obvious about what they are doing.

Steve: Okay and I’m just curious I’m jumping around a little bit here but what are your views on just content on your blog in terms of being a little thin? For example let’s say you had a blog for 5 or 6 years and some of your earlier posts are just really crappy. Do you recommend going back and deleting those or going back and rewriting them to make them much more complete? What are your thoughts on just kind of going through your old content?

Glen: Yeah I think I’m actually doing that right now. I rank 4th, 3rd or 4th in Google anywhere you search from, for WordPress SEO. I’m actually going to talk about interesting little text here right now and that post written in 2010 or ’11 I think it was. It still ranked for that even though it’s 6 years old. I have actually been working, that was around a 3,000 web post. It’s actually now a 10,000 word post in Evernote.

Steve: I was about to say 3000 words is pretty short for your Glen.

Glen: Yeah it’s about 10,000 words in Evernote. I still have to format that and spell check it and then I’m actually going to update that article because it still gets so much traffic. I definitely recommend to answer your question directly, yeah. If you can go back the way to maximize your time is to see which pages are getting the most search traffic already and start with those. They are …

Steve: Just turn those into much more comprehensive resources?

Glen: Yeah more comprehensive resources and just implementing things that are more talked about today. For example content upgrades, where you can offer someone a PDF of your post or a checklist that they can follow. They weren’t popular a few years ago; people didn’t used to use them. Now you can implement that in an old article and start getting more email subscribers for that post.

That’s exactly what I’m going to be doing on my WordPress SEO article. Making a more comprehensive, more up to date, more relevant, checking that the sources that maybe you linked to in the past still exist and so on. Maybe adding content upgrades, maybe linking to other relevant pages and posts on your site that you didn’t have previously.

Going back to what I did, that … like I said the articles was written in 2010 or 2011. Around 3 years ago Google made a massive update around freshness. Pretty much all search results had a date in them when the article was published. You’ll see that now you can search for anything, personally development, marketing related. You will see a date for a lot of results, not all of them for when the article was last updated. I had dropped to … What I did first of all it looked bad.

I thought people were going to Google searching for WordPress SEO in 2013 and they are seeing my article is written in 2010. They are probably not going to click on the result. I added a line of text, the first line of text in the article I changed it to last updated June 2014 or something like that. Within a few days Google noticed that change and everyone then assumed my article was fresh, I didn’t change anything else on the page.

Steve: Interesting.

Glen: I only changed the first sentence and then it looked like it was a more relevant article. Now I actually did this, I am planning to update the post but I did this as an SEO experiment very recently. I once again changed it. If you go to viperchills.com/wordpress-SEO the only thing I changed in the article was the first sentence that says last updated March something 2016. Now the reason I did this is because my page had dropped to 7th or 8th. My ranking had dropped 7th or 8th in Google for WordPress SEO and WordPress SEO guide.

Now 2 years later I updated that text showing that it was more fresh and my rankings have came back up to 3rd or 4th. It’s just something slightly unethical at least if you haven’t actually updated the page. For me it was an experiment to see are Google still giving value to content that they believe is more fresh, and I definitely believe that is the case.

Steve: Do you think that’s why comments are important because when someone leaves a comment technically that updates the page right?

Glen: Yeah originally, and I’m actually working on a big article for this that’s why I’m interested in it right now. Is that originally comments didn’t seem to be affecting the date that Google were picking up on. Actually a lot of bloggers that removed their dates from their comments because they didn’t want it to look older than it was. You’ll see that in Ramit Sethi, my friend Ramsey.

Steve: The same thing I did too yeah.

Glen: Yeah and was yours because of SEO reasons or just …

Steve: It was more because I didn’t want someone to come in and see an old article and just immediately dismiss it.

Glen: Right okay, yeah I can understand that. Definitely a lot of people did it for SEO reasons. I faked that in a way but I do plan on updating the article. As I was saying comments didn’t used to seem to be noticed by Google, however the dates are now. A good example of this is Udemy, the online training community.
If someone writes a new review on the page for a course Google will take that date for the latest review and put that as when the course was actually last updated. Even though the course could’ve been published years ago people now see it in search results and think, “Hey it’s only … It was updated 2 days ago, I’ll click on this.”

Steve: Interesting. Okay you are suggesting that adding the dates back into the comments might be valuable from a freshness perspective?

Glen: Absolutely, and but of course there is the other side of the coin like you said someone comes to my article in WordPress SEO they see a comment from 2010 they would concern that it’s still relevant today.

Steve: What are your views on the disavow tool and removing potentially bad backgrounds? Do you ever use that tool at all?

Glen: Yeah I think it’s a huge pain to be honest with you. It’s like Google are outsourcing their own job. As I was saying earlier it would be so nice if Google just … If they could just figure out we are not going to count these links. You don’t have to disavow them but we are worth more than $100 billion we are just going to … We are going to use our engineers and find out which links we should encounter.
We are not going to count those links, whereas they are saying, “Go out there and actively tell us which links you have that you don’t think are relevant.” And we are in Google’s playing field so there is not really too much we can do about it. If you do have a lot of links and you have warnings and stuff and webmaster tools then it’s just something that you have to do.

Steve: Okay you do use it but only when you get a warning or do you proactively do it?

Glen: Yeah if I’m taking on a new client then I’ll proactively do it just to … If I’m going to be building good new links, I want them to have the best effect possible. I don’t want to it to be, the website to be hindered in any way from any previous link building and stuff like that. If I was taking on a new client it’s something I would look into proactively.

Steve: I want to like end with a friend contacted me, and he knew that I was talking to you today. I just want to ask one of his questions to you.

Glen: Sure.

Steve: He has this domain and no matter what he does, and there is no panel he is associated with it, he can’t get anything to rank. Is it fair to say that there are certain domains that are just dead to Google and that you should start with a brand new domain? Have you ever seen that happen?

Glen: I have seen that yeah. Actually funnily there was a period 2 years ago when all dot info domains were removed from Google. There were slip offs that Google can make where a domain just doesn’t get rankings. There was a case I’m trying to remember the name, I think it’s Slash Film, a very popular movie review website. All of a sudden they lost all their traffic overnight, and there was a lot of other movie review websites complaining on Twitter saying hey we’ve lost all that traffic.
Eventually one of Google Googlers got in touch with them on Twitter saying, hey we had a little mistake there, we are going to rectify it in a few days. It’s something that Google can do on their end and you may not get any warnings, you may not really know about it. It’s definitely possible that something’s happened to that particular domain and you should start new.

Before he does that I definitely rule out that he’s just … Make sure he is not ranking just because he doesn’t have links or it’s very, very competitive and so on. Yeah definitely rule all of the obvious stuff out before he does go and create a new website.

Steve: Okay, hey Glenn we’ve been chatting for quite a while, and I want to be respectful of your time. I learned a lot today. Where can people find you if they need either your services or they just want to check out what you have to put out, or if they have an hour to read one of your posts?

Glen: Steve, thank you so much for having me. Sure they can find me on Viperchill.com that’s V-I-P-E-R-C-H-I-L-L, that’s the same username for Facebook and Twitter. Yeah just pretty much ViperChill is the best place, we can go from there.

Steve: Okay and you guys should really sign up for his email list, because in my opinion you can correct me if I’m wrong, you put out stuff on your email list that does not go out on your blog or anything, right?

Glen: Yeah, actually the first email I send if you join my email list is more than 40 … more than 30,000 words of content that I don’t link to anywhere else, just in the first email.

Steve: Yeah, but his posts are really addictive, and you should just go checkout his blog first and if you like what he puts out then sign up for his list by all means.

Glen: Thank you very much Steve.

Steve: All right Glen, thanks a lot for coming to the show man, I really appreciate it.

Glen: Cheers man, have a good one.

Steve: All right take care. Hope you enjoyed that episode. What I love about Glen is that he’s not afraid to talk about this grey hat SEO techniques. He never hesitates to call out larger companies for their actions. He always tells it like it is and he knows a tone about SEO from practicing what he preaches.
For more information about this episode go to mywifequiteherjob.com/episode128, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequiteherjob.com for more information, signup right there on the front page and I’ll send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequiteherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

127: How Nathan Latka Created The 8 Figure Business Heyo.com By Age 24

127: How Nathan Latka Created Heyo, An 8 Figure Business By Age 24

Today, I’m thrilled to have Nathan Latka on the show. Nathan is the founder of Heyo.com which is a company that does social giveaways for Facebook and other social media platforms.

Now what’s amazing about Nathan is that he started this 8 figure company at age 24 and then recently sold it to his main competitor for a nice sum.

What’s also cool is that Nathan started his businesses knowing absolutely nothing at age 21 and actually made 70K worth of revenue before he ever started building his product.

His story is truly inspirational. Enjoy the episode!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Nathan came up with the idea of starting Heyo
  • How Nathan pre-sold his first customers with nothing
  • How he found his partners
  • Nathan’s primary marketing channels
  • How Nathan grew Heyo exponentially

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, and if you are new here it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.If you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes and if you want to learn how to start your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100,000K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page and I’ll send you the mini-course right away via email. Now on to the show.

Welcome to The My Wife Quite Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here’s your host, SteveChou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today, I’m thrilled to have Nathan Latka on the show. Nathan is the founder of heyo.com which is a company that does social giveaways for Facebook, and other social media platforms. What’s amazing about Nathan is that he started this eight figure company at age 24, and then recently sold it to his main competitor for a very nice sum.

Now what’s also cool is that Nathan started his business knowing absolutely nothing at age 21, and actually made $70,000 worth of sales before he even started building his product. Now his story is truly inspirational and with that welcome to the show Nathan, how are you doing today man?

Nathan: Steve, thank you for having me man. I’m excited to be here.

Steve: Dude you know what, when I was in college I wasn’t doing any of this stuff. I’m just curious, how did you come up with the idea of starting Heyo. What’s the backstory here?

Nathan: Well, there’s not, I’m not going to try and make this sound sexy or anything other than what it actually was which was insecurity. I mean I was an architecture as a freshman at Virginia Tech. This is 09, and I overheard fifth years complaining, whining, pitching, and mourning that they couldn’t get a job, because no one was hiring architects after financial crush. I said, “No way I’m going to put myself through 5 years of college and do not have a guaranteed job at the end.”

I got super insecure and Steve that night I’ll never forget it. I went back to my dorm room, 12 foot, by 10 foot white cinder block stacked on top of each other. I was wearing my ex-girlfriend’s red Christmas boxer she had bought me, and I just started cold calling people who had Facebook fan pages with the word executive in them. And I would convince them on the call that they needed an executive Facebook fan page which coincidently I had.

Steve: How did you think about that? I mean, it seems kind of random.

Nathan: I mean, part of it was, right. I just wanted a way to make money. I mean, I went back to my dorm room and said, “I don’t have to rely on college or a job, how do I make money.” I’m like, “Well I’m using Facebook already as a college student. Let me search how businesses are using it.”

I learned that businesses use these things called fan pages, and I said if I can call up some people who have big egos because they have executive on their fan page title, convince them and like take a shot at their ego and make them feel vulnerable, and then be able to feel that vulnerability with my product, boom baby, I got a business.

Steve: How did you decide on your first customer list? Did you cold call these people?

Nathan: Yeah, they were. I was just cold calling people. I literally even do it today. I just went to Facebook, in the search bar I typed executive and a bunch of fan pages will come up with kind of like [inaudible 00:03:21] or something there for executive, or other people that call themselves an executive. Then I would look in their about section on Facebook page and get their phone number and call them and go from there.

Steve: Interesting, so you mentioned barefoot executive. Was that your first victim, I mean customer?

Nathan: Yeah, she was my first customer. By the way, like the least egotistical person you’ll ever meet. Amazing, amazing lady, but yeah she was the first $700 sale.

Steve: Okay, so how did you come up with that number? Just all seems kind of random to me. So you just cold call her and said you wanted to create a Facebook page for her for $700, and she said yes?

Nathan: No, it way more psychological warfare than that. It was, “Hey Carrie. My name is Nathan Latka. I’m just calling because I see you call yourself the Barefoot executive, but I noticed you don’t have an executive fan page tab. Are you an executive?” And she’s going to do one of two things when I say that. She’s going to say screw you and hung up, or she’s going to go what’s an executive fan page tab?

Thankfully she did the latter and gave me an opportunity to explain what it was, which was a landing page kind of tab on Facebook, where she could capture emails and run contests and things. Eventually she agreed to purchase and I said great, here’s my PayPal button. You can deposit $700 and then I need 6 months to deliver you the quality of product that I want to deliver to you, and if I can’t, I will refund you. The rule is when I did because if I didn’t make enough sales, I would refund everybody because it wasn’t worth my time to learn how to code.

Steve: Sorry, so your initial thing was just a PayPal button. It wasn’t on a website or wasn’t on a Facebook page with the PayPal button.

Nathan: I setup my own Facebook page for free. I couldn’t afford to go daddy domain. So I just did my own Facebook page with a PayPal button built in.

Steve: Okay then you’d used this same strategy. Is that how you made that $70,000?

Nathan: Yeah, exactly. So I sold over the next 6 months from my dorm room. I sold hundreds of those at 700 bucks a pop and then started watching YouTube videos on how to code something called FBML Facebook markup language. And that’s how I started building pages.

Steve: So your delivery time was 6 months and that was acceptable for everybody?

Nathan: You are thinking about it the wrong way. They are thinking about, “Wow if it’s going to take him six months to deliver the quality that he wants, it’s going to be an amazing quality, right?” It’s all how you word it. It’s positioning.

Steve: Okay. It’s a Facebook page though right?

Nathan: Yeah, yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: I mean look you work with an agent and if you hire an agency, they are like, do like, social making and [inaudible 00:05:33] crazy stuff now or designs or logos, I mean some of those take many, many weeks. I mean it wasn’t crazy. You just have to understand, it’s all comes down to the positioning.

Yeah, sure anyone listening who was skeptical was going to go, “Why the hell do people give him 6 months?” It’s because you didn’t get my kung fu judo skills on [inaudible 00:05:49] where I say like, I have to– I am coding this in FBML. I want to make sure the graphics are exactly right. I want to make sure the hexadecimal codes match your website colors perfectly. I want to make sure we get your MailChimp form embedded perfectly. I want to make sure this works on mobile as well.

So I’m going to need 6 months to make sure I deliver you the quality of product that you would expect from yourself, all right. And if I don’t, and if I can’t deliver you that kind of quality, I will refund you after 6 months. And it was a no brainer.

Steve: Okay, so you are not a technical guy from what it sounds like.

Nathan: That’s correct. I was architecture.

Steve: Okay, so you get a hundred people to sign up, and you’ve got to deliver that within 6 months. So you are busy learning how to do this on YouTube. Did you start doing them by hand or what was the next step?

Nathan: Yeah, that’s right. I did them all by hand. So just on my own– like I would use templates and edit the templates for each customer, but I did them all by hand. Eventually what I learned was I brought on 2 technical cofounders, and realized I didn’t want to spend my time building every page.

That’s like what an agency would do. To really build a big business, I needed a software platform where they could pay me monthly just go build their own pages using drag and drop technology. So I gave up 40% of the business to two technical cofounders. We grew it…

Steve: How did you find your partners?

Nathan: I created the entrepreneur club at Virginia Tech specifically to undercover, recruit 2 technical people. And then on the second or third meeting that year, I just said, “Hey guys I’ve got 70 grand in presales. Here’s my PayPal account with a screen shot. I need two or one technical cofounder. I’m willing to give up 40% to one set.” These two guys raised their hands. They both wanted to do and I said fine. Both of you can join. I barely knew the guys. I said but you have to [inaudible 00:07:25] 40% and that was that.

Steve: Okay, so you didn’t vet them or anything? These are just random college students?

Nathan: Yeah, that is one of my biggest mistakes. I knew these guys for about 2 minutes before we were signing founder agreements.

Steve: Oh my goodness. Okay so this was the precursor to Heyo, or was this Heyo?

Nathan: This was the build, yeah– we launched it as Lujure and then we renamed it as Heyo. But yeah, this was the same business.

Steve: Okay, so let’s talk about that a little bit. How did that work out and why was it your biggest mistake?

Nathan: Well, because I’m an action kind of guy. I like moving fast, but that was just a big mistake because like one of those guys ended up having a kid at year end, another one just didn’t align. So neither of them are with me anymore.

Ultimately, when I sold the business, there was a large chunk of equity that was on you know, I like to call it unallocated basically equity which is equity that is out of a business that’s not active. That’s never a good place to be. Thankfully we were able to buy some of the equity back, but you want to always keep equity active in your business.

Steve: So these guys actually invested a good portion of their stock?

Nathan: Yeah, I didn’t know what investing was. So everyone was vested from the outside which was like not good.

Steve: Oh okay, so they had 40% right off the butt.

Nathan: Yeah, you have to remember Steve, I’m like– like this is pre-puberty Nathan. I was like, I know nothing about business.

Steve: How old are you now Nathan, I’m just curious.

Nathan: 26.

Steve: Okay, so this is six years or five years ago.

Nathan: This all when I started when I was 19. That was when the presales came in, and when I started to get the thing going.

Steve: Okay so you have these customers, you do everything by hand, and then you start with this technical cofounders. What was your role at that point? Was it to get more business or?

Nathan: Yeah, yeah everything except coding. Sparking out new products docs to pass to them, you know, YO framing, new customers, webinar, support, all that stuff.

Steve: Let’s talk about some of these primary marketing channels. So early on when you had nothing, how did you get your first customers?

Nathan: Well me cold calling. So everyone who purchased the $700 one I did up-sale them a $30 a month plan to say, “Hey if you want to make edits on this instead of paying me 700 bucks every time, just pay us 30 bucks a month and you can edit whenever you want.” That’s why…

Steve: Okay, Nathan you are a really amazing sales guy, can you pretend I’m like one of your target customers. What would you say to me?

Nathan: Hey Steve. So you call yourself executive Steve on your Facebook page, but look I’ve done some research on this and I don’t– It doesn’t look like you have an executive Facebook fan page tab. Why don’t you have that upgrade yet?

Steve: Okay and I’ll ask, what is an executive Facebook fan page tab?

Nathan: See all executives on their Facebook page, they use it usually to capture emails to build their list so that they can sell more of their coaching or whatever they sell, but you are not doing any of that. Is there a reason why you are not doing that?

Steve: Because I didn’t know this existed.

Nathan: Yeah, here’s 3 examples from people that I just did this for. Here’s, Carrie Wilkerson. Do you want me to give you her phone number, so you can call her and ask what it’s like. Now, remember Steve, this is real Nathan speaking. I didn’t have any of these built yet, but what I would do is I would still use people that I’ve already purchased as referral.

Steve: Interesting. And did anyone ever contact these people?

Nathan: I always give out numbers, but I never heard of anyone actually following up and then and calling. They could have but they didn’t.

Steve: Interesting. So you delivered ultimately to this Carrie Wilkerson?

Nathan: Yeah I did.

Steve: And she was happy with everything and did she start endorsing you?

Nathan: Yeah, she was great. She would talk about us on stage when she spoke. It would drive tons of new customers.

Steve: In order to do that, you must have had a tremendous impact on her. What did– did you just deliver the page, or did you deliver anything else? How did that happen?

Nathan: I don’t have a good answer there. I mean I went above and beyond. For sure I want to blew her away, but ultimately it just comes down to kind of doing what you are saying you are going to do on time. I mean that was the key. I mean we over the span, once we got the software, the service business launch which is the monthly recurring model of this which we call the Lujure in the early days.

We grew it from nothing to about 35 grand in monthly recurring revenue in about 6 months. It went fast. When we sold it four years later which was February 2016 of this year, we sold it and had 10,000 monthly paying customers. They were paying between 30 and 300 bucks a month and raised 2.5 million bucks of venture capital, 20 team members. I mean it scaled fast.

Steve: So was that initial, was it $35,000 a month. Was that just through cold calling?

Nathan: No, a lot of that was– so once we got like an initial 10 or 12 or 15 people actually using the software, we also had a free plan. When people used the free plan, every fan page tab they published, they’d power by Heyo on it. A lot of our new customers would come in because they saw powered Heyo on another tab. It was product marketing.

Steve: Interesting. Can you comment a little bit about just offering a free option, and how much that cost and what are some of the pros and cons?

Nathan: In software that’s a marginal expense. You are looking– in a software world, after you build the initial prototype, unless you are really making changes or updates daily, you are going to be looking at gross margins in the 80 and 90% range, and that margins if you are controlling your marketing costs and your salary and rent and all that, your net margins could easily be passing 50, 60%. So it’s highly, highly profitable. So yeah, free users to us on average costs one or two cents per month.

Steve: Okay. Because what I found after talking to some other software guys is that when you go with that free model sometimes that takes up all of your resources in terms of just support, not necessarily just several resources.

Nathan: That’s the stupidest thing I’ve ever– that’s where most software founders eat their feet. It’s very difficult– especially if you are going out a no touch sales process on a mass market product, you know say more than a hundred or 200 customers, you can’t have support on a free plan. That’s the dumbest thing, because how it happens is the people that take most of your support time will be the free users, and a person paying you $300 a month you will never hear from.

Steve: Exactly. But in that respect, how many of your free users ended up becoming paying customers?

Nathan: We convert on average anywhere between like 11 and 13% of free users in a paid customer after the first 2 or 3 months.

Steve: Okay, and the reason you kept the free plan was because it was free marketing because of that Heyo link?

Nathan: That’s exactly right. It was our cheapest marketing avenue.

Steve: Interesting. So people would see these promotions, and I’m not that familiar with your product actually, so you do a giveaway and in the sign up form I guess, there’s a little powered by Heyo link?

Nathan: Yeah, it’s right on the Facebook tab. By the way, the folks that acquired the company they are keeping it live. It’s a key piece of their business. So it’s still live and Heyo.com so people can see it. But yeah, that’s exactly right to say, just like when you send an email from your phone and it says sent by phone? Same concept.

Steve: Okay and did you keep track of what the click throughs were like for those?

Nathan: Yeah this was– I mean– we started this, years ago. If I was going to say direct numbers for you now, I won’t be able to do it. But generally again generally about 30 to 40% of our new customers every month came from that powered by Heyo on free accounts.

Steve: That’s crazy. In terms of just people– did the people mostly start with the free account and then transition, or did a lot of people just start up by paying?

Nathan: That’s a tough question. I don’t really answer that.

Steve: Let me ask it in a different way then, what incentivized someone to actually come to you? How did you convince people to actually sign up and pay the money?

Nathan: They wanted to remove powered by Heyo.

Steve: That was the only reason?

Nathan: That wasn’t the only reason. It’s was a key reason. There were some other things like we unlock some additional options like you could do more. There were analytics if you paid, things like that.

Steve: I see, I see, so typical freemium stuff. So you get most of the features of the product and if you are more advanced user you want analytics, you pay the extra money and then you put your own branding on there.

Nathan: That’s right. I mean when you study some of the most powerful– on my podcast, when I have software and service entrepreneurs come on, I’ve had many that I’ve gotten over a billion, with a B, billion dollar valuations. The difference between people that have million dollar valuations or million dollars of revenue which is a billion dollars in revenue is they have, I don’t really know what to call it other than like product axis. Picture like– Steve you know what a Cartesian plane is? Like an X and Y axis?

Steve: Aha.

Nathan: You can then add in like a Z axis. Software folks that are listening who are broke, typically they only allow people to upgrade to get like more features or something like that. Where people make a lot of money is they have one axis that people upgrade on based off they unlock more features, they have another axis where maybe you unlock more seats for your company.

They have another axis where it’s like you– some other usage base metric, more storage space, or something. The more kind of pricing or usage based upgrade metrics you have, the stronger and usually more compelling it is for you to drive kind of up sale work revenue, and that’s rebuild really big businesses. We were trying to do that at Heyo. We had multiple pricing axes like this.

Steve: It was usage based increase in pricing, is what you are saying?

Nathan: It wasn’t just that. Again, we had multiple. One was you either you unlock more features, one was instead of just one fan page tab, they could launch 5 fan page tabs, and another pricing axis was instead of just using us on one Facebook page, you could use us on 10 Facebook pages, another one was if you want to invite your team members, you can have up to 10 seats. Again, that way, every time you get on a sales call you just figure out which pricing axis most directly aligns with the person you are talking to, and then sell them on that upgrade.

Steve: Interesting. I also noticed when I was on the page this morning that the way you were priced, it seems to be targeting like the individual consumer as opposed to businesses. It’s very low priced. Can you talk a little bit about your strategy for going after those people as opposed to some of the bigger customers who are going to be less maintenance?

Nathan: So I’m not involved anymore. I’ve been out of the business for about 6 months now, so I don’t know what they are doing with the pricing. What I can tell you is the main reason they acquired us was because– Votigo is the acquiring company. Their product is an enterprise focused product. That goes between 5 grand and 50 grand. They wanted something more downstream, because the downstream clients would eventually upgrade into higher priced plans. Their model is get as many people paying as little as possible as fast as possible, because it’s a great distribution channel to up-sale.

Steve: In terms of when you were starting, you mentioned that your freemium customers would have been, if you offered support, one of the most painy ass customers that you would have had. Just curious, why you stuck with going after those lower end customers as well?

Nathan: Because we didn’t have to support. We didn’t offer support.

Steve: At all for any of the plans?

Nathan: No, we didn’t offer them for free people.

Steve: Oh yeah, that’s what I meant though. Even the lower, like your lowest paid plans were in the order of like 20, 30 bucks, right?

Nathan: Well, sometimes we weren’t offering support on those either. That’s another pricing axis that you can say okay, one is a chat support. One is a phone and chat, one is phone, chat and email.

Steve: Okay. How lean was your company in the very beginning just curious? Like did you have a dedicated support person, developers?

Nathan: We would have between one and two dedicated support people depending on the time of the business, and our dev team would be between three and six depending on the day.

Steve: These are fulltime people or were they contractors?

Nathan: No, no, these were full time.

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: Yeah, full time.

Steve: And by the time you reached that $35,000 per month run rate, was your staff just like a handful of people still?

Nathan: Yeah. We were like five or six people. It was three founders, a support person, and one other kind ad man I think.

Steve: You mentioned, so you got a lot of business through that link through freemium. Did you also do anything else? Were you running ads, were you doing social media marketing, SEO, content marketing?

Nathan: Yeah, Steve, we tested all the paid stuff. I got to tell you is the quickest way to waste the most money possible. When I look at everything I’ve done in life business wise, I am the most dangerous when I have brainwashed myself to thinking that I’m broke, and I have no money because you get really creative. We tried paid stuff, it just did not work well, content marketing worked really great. We did a lot of webinars that drove a lot of new business. Those were our big channels.

Steve: Can we talk about some of your webinars since I’ve had a lot of luck with that with my business. How did you structure webinars? How did you get people on, and what was the content like?

Nathan: I’m just curious, how are you using those in your business?

Steve: Yes, so I sell a course on ecommerce, and so usually what I do is I get on and I teach a very detailed lesson on how to get started, and then at the end I mention that I run this class and if you want to join this there’s a limited time discount.

Nathan: Got it, got it. Yeah, we basically did the same thing. We would get the title would be, “10 Ways to Capture 6,000 emails From Your Facebook page.” We would feature 10 of our clients that are using us. At the end we would sell the annual $300, or the monthly $30 plan.

Steve: Interesting. So how did you get these people on? Were these just people from your email list, were you running ads to get people on or?

Nathan: It was almost all email list from our free user base. All the webinars are targeted at free users who had yet to upgrade to paid.

Steve: I see. What was the reason to getting the sign up right now?

Nathan: For the webinar or for a paid plan?

Steve: For a paid plan during the webinar.

Nathan: You’d always bonus, we’d had bonuses. I see a lot of people make this mistake. They discount to try and get people to take action. I think it’s one of the least intelligent things you can do because it devalues your brand. What we would do is we would add bonuses. So, “Hey guys, we love people that take action.” I’m in webinar pitch mode. We love people that take action. If you decide to purchase our $30 month plan right now, what we would do is we will send you a research report, take it from a 100 campaigns last month.

We’ll show you the three calls to action to use on your fan page that get the highest opt in rates. And we will show you how you should use the– what your image should be like in the upper right of your campaign to make sure you increase the conversion rate from fans to new email leads. If you sign up now, you’ll get those bonuses. Okay, there’s two left. Johnny thanks for signing up. There’s one left. Oh Karen got the last one. All right guys, thanks so much. Bye, bye.”

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now, I love running my ecommerce store, but you know what I hate doing the most, book keeping. Seriously keeping track of receipts, expenses and especially inventory costs are easily the worse aspect of entrepreneurship hands down.

And here’s where Bench Accounting comes in. Bench is an online book keeping service that specializes in ecommerce businesses. They are experts at handling all ecommerce related reports whether it be from Amazon, Shopify, Bigcommerce, Stripe, you name it. All you got to do is sign up and they’ll pair you with a team of dedicated book keepers who will handle everything for you.

So no more data entry, no more data crunching, no more headaches, plus it’s reasonably priced. The best part is you can get 20% off your first 6 months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off your first six months. Now back to the show.

Steve: Interesting. It sounds like content that you should already have on your site to encourage people to– that content helps them improve their campaigns, right?

Nathan: Yeah we do, yeah. Some of the content was on a blog, some of it wasn’t. But you have to create some incentive to get people to take action now, otherwise people are going to [inaudible 00:22:37] their hands the whole day.

Steve: Interesting. And what was your conversion rate like, I’m just curious?

Nathan: We would convert– of everyone who registered, we would get anywhere between– we actually pretty high tenants rates. We would get between 40 and 45% action.

Steve: Wow, that’s really high.

Nathan: It’s because we had an on boarding sequence for webinars. When you signed up, you’d get like a worksheet with fill in the blanks, so that would drive curiosity and encourage you to show up. Other people that showed up about 95% would stay to minute 47 which was when we gave the pitch. And usually between 7 and 17-ish percent would purchase a pay plan.

Steve: That is really high actually.

Nathan: Yeah, it was great. We were doing about two webinars kind of a week for many, many years.

Steve: Wow. And how many people would show up at these webinars?

Nathan: Anywhere between a 100 and 400.

Steve: Okay so that was– so that’s not a whole lot of people to drive a lot of business early on. What were some of your other marketing channels?

Nathan: What do you mean?

Steve: Meaning like you are getting like 17 per webinar. So that’s like 34–

Nathan: Yeah, new customers.

Steve: That obviously wasn’t like the main driver of customers, right?

Nathan: No, it was the main driver.

Steve: Oh it was the main driver.

Nathan: Early on, webinars was– the webinars plus the product marketing, powered by Heyo. Those were our two main drivers of new customers.

Steve: That’s amazing. And you had no luck with PPC at all, huh?

Nathan: No I just think it’s so– it’s just not intelligent. I mean look, maybe I’m just stupid, I don’t understand PPC. Look, if I can make money without spending money, I’d rather do that.

Steve: Absolutely. But if you are making money with your ads, it’s just another avenue to get more people to your site, right?

Nathan: Yeah, but the thing with ads, like, I just lie to you in my opinion. What happens is we have our ad guy. He goes, “Nathan we found a channel. It’s great. I can get one new customer for you, I can get one click for a $1.75. It takes a hundred clicks to get a new 3 on my paying customer and it’s great.” I’m like, “Okay great. Spend 5 grand next month on that.” Well the promise, like the number has changed. The keyword diminishes in our turn.

That part of gold is only 2 inches deep, so once you go through out inches then we have to find another channel. It’s actually a lot of work. What happens is like PPC plays emotional games with you. You find economics that work and you stick in the next sell sheet and project it over the next 7 years and you think wow, we are going to be a billion dollar company, because we found this channel. Nobody talks about, how to measure diminishing returns on PPC. And that’s really the key to understanding in my opinion PPC and paid ads.

Steve: Interesting. In my experience, the search ads have been pretty steady, meaning it is pretty predictable, but is the Facebook ads where you have to constantly be putting our new creatives, finding new audiences and that sort of thing. Did you find the same– did you have the same experience across all the different ad platforms?

Nathan: No, I don’t have a lot of experience on Google. A lot of our kind of pay per click stuff are cost per click that was on Facebook.

Steve: Okay. That makes sense. Facebook is a ton of maintenance in that respect.

Nathan: Yeah.

Steve: Okay, so what about SEO and your content marketing? I would imagine most of your content was teaching people how to use your platform and how to get leads, right?

Nathan: Yeah, I was just pulling data from our back end and making it and publishing it infographics and things like that.

Steve: Okay, and so how did you scale then? Like how did you go from the 34 or whatever people that you would get per webinar. Was it just a gradual uptake, or was there a point in your business where it just hockey-sticked?

Nathan: No I mean look if it was 4-5 years of work to build it to where we got it. It’s a slow gradual add five, six grand in monthly recurring revenue per month. It was a gradual turn, so you got a net five grand-ish per month. Then you keep doing that for five years, and before you know it, you got a big company.

Steve: Okay. I’m just curious though. Why did you decide to take on funding? What did you do with the money and why did you need it?

Nathan: It was just– it was not a good decision, ego, to be honest with you. I mean when we first raised– when we hit about 33 grand in monthly recurring revenue, when I was sending– I would send email updates out to kind of just business people I respected about how the business was doing, and we started getting replies of people going, “Hey can we invest?” And I said, “What do you mean invest, I don’t even know what means.” And they would– I would say, “Can you teach me?”

They’d invest time to tell me what it was. I’m like, “Sure why not. It would be great to have more of that person’s mind thinking about Heyo,” because I assumed if they put money, they’d think about us more. We never actually kind of needed the money, but I used financing as a way to get more mind share of the investors which would help us grow. But we were never in a point where we needed capital.

Steve: Just curious though, did they help a lot in terms of introducing you to other contacts, what was their value add?

Nathan: Oh totally, I mean, I will not bring on an angel investor. I look at them almost like an employee. I have a full list of like tasks I’d want them to do if we accepted their money. They had like many of them helped with all those things. It was very helpful to think about it that way.

Steve: Interesting. Was most of your funding angels, or did you get VC funding?

Nathan: We got 550 grand from angels in pack in March 2011 I believe was the year. But those were like very smart, David Cohen invested, the founder of Techstars. Pat Condon the founder of RackSpace, Dave McClure 500 Startups. We had, many people would say the A list. I mean we had the A list angels in the business, and we were in like the mountains of southwest Virginia, not the valley, not New York.

It was– many people say it was very impressive. We raised 550 there on a convertible no with a 5 million dollar cap, and 8% interest rate and 25% discount. I can explain it if you want in a second. Then we raised, many years after that, 2 million dollars on 8.5 million dollar putting money evaluation which was, that was a typical VC kind of a deal.

Steve: Yeah, actually, can you explain the first deal with the angels? I’ve always been curious. What is the difference between taking money from an angel versus a VC, and what was your decision making process there?

Nathan: Let me not talk about the person you take it from, let me talk about the form of how you take it from different.

Steve: Okay.

Nathan: The first deal that we did was called a convertible node. Convertible node is almost you can think of it like paying debt, but it’s very unlikely that it will ever get called. They put in 500 grand. Let’s just say 500 to make the number even. They put in 500 grand so that 500 grand will accumulate interest at 8%. And whenever we did do a price round meaning when someone else would come in and say Nathan your business is worth 8 million dollars, those angels that put in 500 grand would convert into equity.

They don’t have any equity when they put in the 550 or the 500, right? They convert into equity which is why it’s called a convertible node when we raised that first price round. A price round means there’s a evaluation on the business. They’d convert in at a discount. We were rewarding them for backing us early. They were our first backers. Then they got a 25% discount. That’s what a convertible node is, is that helpful?

Steve: Yes. It is very helpful, cool. You mentioned that taking money was a big mistake. Why do you say that?

Nathan: We just– less soon the angel side, more on the VC side. We just didn’t need the money. I would read TechCrunch and see all my friends raising capital. I’m competitive and I’m like, “Screw it. I can raise capital too.” Boom, boom, I took like two days. I mean it was super quick. It was nice for people to do that. But man oh man, we just got lazy. Once we raised capital, we just go lazy.

Steve: So you didn’t need the money and you didn’t have it allocated, but you have to spend it, right once you get it.

Nathan: Exactly. Every board meeting was this clash because investors want us to spend money faster, so we like have no money which means you have to– which means by the way you have to go cash flow negative. Because if you raise 2 million bucks and you have to spend it, and that 2 million is not coming from revenue, it’s going to put you in the red. I mean that makes sense to anybody. It puts you in the red which I hated.

I hated that because at some point, you are either going to have to cut back expenses to go back in the green or the black, or you keep spending and you have to go raise more money which means you have to go give up more equity to a VC which I don’t like that road either. It wasn’t good. It wasn’t good. I don’t think I’ll raise again unless it is very, very, very strategic money in the new business that I’m launching.

Steve: How did you spend that money?

Nathan: Well a lot of it we run ads which is like PPC.

Steve: Yeah.

Nathan: Yeah just horrible spend people, we had amazing, amazing people but we hired too fast. What else? We moved to a new bigger office. We went from paying a grand per month in rent to six grand per month in rent which was not a smart decision. Just things like that. We just got less creative because we had more money.

Steve: How did it work when your original two founding engineers left, because there was a lot of technical data at that point, right, when your founders leave? Did you just hire– did you rewrite the whole code base?

Nathan: No, no, I mean they had a team they were managing. So just the top person they were managing became the CTO.

Steve: I see. I see.

Nathan: So it was a team of five or six developers at that point.

Steve: Can we talk a little bit about churn. What tactics do you use to kind of encourage people to stay?

Nathan: Well, so, [inaudible 00:31:29] invented a very cool term called PQL, Product Qualified Lead. What that means is, don’t look so much at revenue coming in per month or MLR or free to paid plan, but rather look at usage metrics. So you kind of know in the back of your mind when you sell someone Steve a course on ecommerce, but they don’t watch the first video or if they never log in, you know that person is way more likely to email you ask for a refund.

It’s much better to look at the actions that you want your audience to be taking that you know will help them not churn, and focus on getting those actions done, and then just trust that channel will take care of itself. Does that make sense?

Steve: Yeah. So you probably walk them through the set up process which is probably one of your big huddles, right?

Nathan: Exactly, like we knew we had to first get the first email that went out, had to get them to log in. Then we had to get them to connect their Facebook fan page. Then we had to get them to launch their first campaign, capture their first email address through the campaign. Then once we got them to do these core metrics, it was then get them to a paid plan. Then once they were happy in a paid plan, it was getting them to invite their friends so we get more customers. There’s a whole life cycle that we built out.

Steve: So this is all done through email, or did you do some personal calling as well?

Nathan: No, most people done via kind of a no touch, so emails and kind of in product updates and tutorials.

Steve: Then those people who weren’t responding, I guess, even though they– do most of the people who were responding, were they free plans or were there any people who paid who actually didn’t use the product at all?

Nathan: Oh gosh, I mean have you ever ordered a coffee and then you throw it away when you eyes still have [fog 00:33:05] because it’s cold, same concept. We had people that paid that would never log in. It’s like, what the hell are you doing? Why did you buy the product? It happens all the time.

A lot of people lie to themselves. They’ll just go, “Oh look our MRL is great.” But that could be a very weak base of monthly recurring revenue if your usage metrics aren’t really high. That’s why private stocks like Twitter and Facebook, that’s why investors care so much about monthly active users and less about revenue.

Steve: Interesting, so if the people aren’t using the product, chances are they are not checking their emails either. I’m just curious, what did you do with that data? Once you figured out the people who weren’t using, what did you do with those people?

Nathan: We just would keep trying to reach out to them I mean via email. There wasn’t– we wouldn’t work really hard for people when we realized they weren’t even going to engage with the product.

Steve: In terms of your best customers, did you do anything special with those people?

Nathan: We’d feature them in blog posts, we would feature them on webinars, we’d invite them to guest post, things like that, let them know of upcoming features. We kind of had them in part of the inner circle.

Steve: Okay, and then in terms of your target customers, it seems like all of your stuff was organic.

Nathan: Well a lot of it was. I mean the majority of it was. It was product marketing, created by Heyo and webinars. The free plan stuff is huge. I mean you capture a lot of emails with the free plan.

Steve: How did you get people to evangelize your service? You mentioned Carrie Wilkerson, was she one of the evangelist that helped you grow your business? Or did you have other methods of– I’m just curious how you grew to such a large company, and whether it was just an organic path, or were there certain tactics that you used to accelerate the process.

Nathan: It’s a combination of both. I mean, first asking the question when someone pays for your product, what are you expecting to get just in an email. That’s just a question and they reply to you and they say, well, I hope that you can launch a Facebook page. You are like, great. We are getting the right customers. If someone writes back and says, I was hoping you are going to help me launch a hot air balloon. Like where the hell did that lead come from. What did they read that made them pay for us and think we were going to help them launch a hot air balloon? That’s not what we do.

That’s a key thing. It’s first understand what they think they are getting, and then check in, in a weeks later and say did you get what you expected? A lot of people use MPS score for that. It’s just, again making sure you are getting people in your funnel that match what your product delivers, making you sure they get that and the rest will take care of itself in terms of people talking about it.

Steve: The reason why I’m really interested in what you are doing here is I plan on starting a SaaS company too since I just recently gave notice at my job.

Nathan: Nice Steve. That is a big deal man, congrats.

Steve: What I want–

Nathan: Wait hold on Steve. What did you give up? I want to know like how much you gave up. What was your salary you quit on?

Steve: I’m not going to reveal that.

Nathan: Come on Steve.

Steve: I can’t do it. I can’t do it.

Nathan: More or less than six figures?

Steve: More than six figures. I mean I was an engineering director.

Nathan: Oh gosh, you were making like yeah. Were you in the valley?

Steve: Yeah I’m in the valley.

Nathan: Oh gosh. You are like, you don’t have to [inaudible 00:36:07] but you are like two or three hundred easy. Was it a software startup or a company that’s established?

Steve: I was director of microprocessor design. So I designed microprocessors.

Nathan: Oh gosh yeah. I love that Steve. People have to understand that because there are so many people listening. I know at least on my show, I don’t know if it’s the case on your show, but people– the reason people never go and start their own thing is because they don’t hear stories of other people giving up big things. People might be listening going, but I have two kids and I have a hundred thousand dollar job. Why would I ever give that up to start my own thing? When people hear your own story, it gets them more excited, and the hey they can do it.

Steve: Well let me tell you this Nathan, I’m a real conservative guy, and I actually didn’t give up a whole lot. My salary is like a very small portion of my overall revenue. In that respect, I’m pretty conservative. I wasn’t giving up that much. I mean it sounds like a large sum to maybe some of the people who are listening, but in terms of just overall house hold income, it wasn’t that big of a deal, and which is why it allowed me to pull the trigger.

Nathan: Yeah, if everything fails in the startup you are telling me you probably have like 12 or 24 months of runaway easy of personal expenses covered.

Steve: I’m even more conservative than that. I’ve got like a decade probably.

Nathan: That’s great. How old are you?

Steve: I am 40.

Nathan: Okay, got it. So you’ve been saving for a while.

Steve: Yeah.

Nathan: Yeah, that’s great.

Steve: But unfortunately I didn’t start this until much later. If I started at 19, I’d be like all powerful right now.

Nathan: Yeah, I’m in that mode right now. When I sold Heyo, by the way I recorded the whole negotiation. The buyer’s on the phone with me, I put it on the podcast. There’s a point where I’m like, “I want this many millions,” and he’s like screw you basically, and hangs up right. God knows if it’s going to go through or not. But I record all that, and put it on the show and I mean people can listen if they want at nathanlatka.com/sold to hear that. But Steve what I will tell you is like the second I sold that business, I had offers all over the place, like great offers to go take jobs that I would say would be easy salary wise for someone who is 26 in the top 1%.

But dude it took so much to say no because those would have been so comfortable and I would have done that for like a decade, and sure I would have saved a lot of money blah, blah, blah. There’s something special about turning down something safe, and being kind of in the wild and then just trusting yourself they are going to be able to feel that empty space you created with something amazing.

Steve: Let me ask you this. What is your end game? What are you doing right now?

Nathan: Oh gosh, I saw a bunch of things. I plan to launch a best-selling book next year, I’m going to sell a million copies in the first two years. That will put it like one of the best all time. That’s the next thing I’m focused on. On 2036 I will be eligible age-wise to run for president, so I plan to run for president and win. I want to launch a ticket company public by the time I turn 34. That’s another goal, probably after the presidency or maybe before I don’t know, probably after.

I plan to launch the world’s largest hedge fund, and that’s because I see so much waste in a lot of these public companies that I’m studying. I just have a lot of companies that can talk a lot of these [inaudible 00:38:58] and just spit off cash flow. I have all kinds of little goals like that. People are listening going, “No Nathan is such a capitalist.” And yeah, you’re damn right, I’m a capitalist. I love that.

Steve: That is amazing. What’s your book going to be about?

Nathan: When is it going to be out?

Steve: No, what is it going to be about? Oh, you’ve already written it?

Nathan: What is it going to be about? Yeah, it’s a– the working title, okay the working title is New Rich. The reason I chose that title is because we are talking pretty costive about how I kind of break down my dollar of income. It’s basically how I think a lot. If you look at someone’s personal balance sheet right now, like they have car on it, the house on it, foreign insurance, dah, dah, dah. Like we are moving into a world where rich people are actually, they are buying experiences and they are owning less physical assets, because there’s these companies that hold these physical assets on their balance sheet.

For example Uber will own the car in 10 years and you will just use the car. That saves you an expense. Someone else, [inaudible 00:40:04] will own your house and you will just use the house. So there’s this concept of like new rich that I’m kind of thinking about, which I think is critical for people who are my age that comes to kind of compounding money saving money, keeping expenses low, and investing in unbelievable experiences for yourself that keep people happy, healthy and growing. So it’s going to be something along those lines.

Steve: That sounds great. Can we talk a little bit about your conference too, because we chatted about this before, and the way you are running it is pretty unique. Feel free to talk about it.

Nathan: Yeah, what do you think is unique about it?

Steve: I think you are pitting against– you are pitting different speakers together to actually show exactly their process, and you are putting them into a competition live. Did I interpret that correctly?

Nathan: That’s accurate. Yeah, so I go to a lot of these conferences and it’s like two days. It’s like everyone is out to drink at night, and then you just have to like “Get through the speakers.” You know the speakers are usually like you are watching them going, “I’m way smarter than these people. Why are they on stage?” It’s because these speakers are friends of the conference organizer or something like that. Usually they are this like boring and not fun. So what I’m doing, like I don’t care about my speakers to be quite honest with you. I care about the audience getting something that they’ve never gotten before.

So part of– some of my sessions I’m going to be interviewing like one is called– let me see. One is called king of content. I’m going to have people like Neil Patel and Joe Pulizzi [inaudible 00:41:25] on stage launching a blog post live. There will be kind of 2 screens on stage, you’ll get to see their desktops as they launch a piece of content, and whoever gets the most unique views to their piece of content over that 60 minutes segment, I will write you know a $10,000, $20,000 $30,000 check to their charity or something. But the point is each segment is a competition where the experts are performing instead of talking. The audience gets to watch and learn from the performance.

Steve: That’s sounds amazing.

Nathan: Yeah.

Steve: For all of you guys out there.

Nathan: I tell you about the monkey Steve?

Steve: You did earlier, but feel free to talk about the monkeys.

Nathan: Was that– we didn’t record that.

Steve: We didn’t record that I know.

Nathan: I have these two capuchin monkeys. You want to talk about writing cold emails that get a reply, these two capuchin monkeys can sit at a computer, they can write email, and they can actually close deals better than most of you guys, the sales people. I mean it’s unbelievable how these monkeys work. You look at these monkeys and you go, “Oh brown fur, nice eyes, you know, bone structure looks normal.” But they are just not normal monkeys.

They are going to help me kick off the show, and yeah love that your people if they want to join me, they can check out more of the sessions which I think they’ll get a kick out at nathanlatka.com/austinlive. We’ll wrap it all up Steve with– we have a very cool Grammy award winner performer at the end of the show. Two of them will pit against each other. It’s going to be like American idol except two Grammy artists going each other.

Steve: Dude that’s awesome. Hey Nathan, where can people find you if they want to contact you?

Nathan: The best place to do it, I give out my personal phone number on my podcast which is called The Top Entrepreneurs. You can search that in iTunes or Stitcher now. It’s an orange logo with my kind of face black and white. You can find me there. They can also find me on Twitter at @nathanlatka. Or feel free to just shoot me a text directly. My number is 703-431-2709.

Steve: Amazing, you just gave out your phone number just like that.

Nathan: You know the sad thing is no one is going to text me.

Steve: No one is going to text you?

Nathan: That’s my challenge to the audience.

Steve: I texted you the other day, didn’t I?

Nathan: You did. I always give it out and only very few, it’s crazy– people mourn and groan, I can’t reach the person I want to reach. Well they probably gave their phone number somewhere. You just have to search hard enough, so there’s mine.

Steve: Sounds good Nathan. Thanks for coming on the show man.

Nathan: Thanks Steve.

Steve: All right take care. Hope you enjoyed that episode. As you can probably tell from the interview, Nathan is a go-getter. It just goes to show that it doesn’t matter how old you are, it’s just a matter of going out and doing something.
For more information about this episode go to mywifequiteherjob.com/episode127, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person, or to share it on the web.
If you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequiteherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

126: How To Make 7 Figures Selling Wall Decals Online With Jason Weisenthal

How To Make 7 Figures Selling Wall Decals Online With Jason Weisenthal

Today I’m thrilled to have Jason Weisenthal on the show. Jason is someone who I met at a mastermind group meeting that I attended in San Francisco last year.

And what’s cool about Jason is that he has managed to combine tech and ecommerce together to form WallMonkeys.com, an online store that offers more than 20 million images that you can print and stick on your wall.

Not only is his business model ingenious but he can basically run his 7 figure ecommerce company with just a handful of employees because of all of the automation that he has developed.

What’s also cool is that he has encouraged and raised his son to be a seasoned entrepreneur as well which something that I plan on doing with my kids. In fact, I really wanted his son on the show today, but Jason told me that I had to interview him first. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • Jason’s motivations were for starting his business.
  • What he was doing prior to Wall Monkeys.
  • The ingenious way Jason obtains the content for his stickers.
  • Why he chose the licensing route instead of creating his own images.
  • What a licensing deal looks like and how much it costs.
  • How to manage millions of images and products listings.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Steve: You’re listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. If you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes. If you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email. Now onto the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Jason Weisenthal. Jason is someone who I met at a Mastermind group meeting that I attended in San Francisco last year. What’s cool about Jason is that he has managed to combine tech and ecommerce together to form Wallmonkeys.com, which is an online store that offers more than 20 million images that you can print and stick on your wall.

Not only is his business model ingenious, but he can basically run his seven figure ecommerce company with just a handful of employees, because of all the automation that he has developed. What’s also cool is that he has encouraged and raised his son to be a seasoned entrepreneur as well, which is something that I plan on doing with my kids.

In fact I really wanted his son on the show today, but Jason told me that I had to interview him first. Fine, I’ll guess I’ll settle for dad. Welcome to the show Jason. How are you doing today man?

Jason: I’m great Steve. Thanks for having me.

Steve: Give us a quick background story about Wall Monkeys and how you came up with the idea of selling wall decals online, and what you were doing beforehand also?

Jason: Before Wall Monkeys, I was in a completely different business. I owned a retail children shoe store for about 14 years in New Jersey. Business was good, grew the business, was kind of …

Steve: Was it brick and mortar? Sorry.

Jason: Yeah, brick and mortar. Everybody walked in the front door: Nikes, Air Force Ones, Jordans, Timberlands, all that good stuff. We really had a good business, solid crew of employees and was finding myself bored in my office too often. I started to look at other businesses. It’s right around when Fathead came around, and I’m sure you’re familiar with Fathead. They have all the professional athletes. I thought it would be really cool to put … My son was playing little league baseball and so was my daughter. I thought it would be really cool to put my kids on the wall instead of Derek Jeter, A. Rod or a football player.

I checked out, looked around online and no one was doing it. That was the extent of my market research. I knew nothing about it, I just bought a printer. I did my research and bought the proper printer, found someone to help me learn how to use it, had someone to build a custom website. I just found people to put the pieces together and just learned step by step on my own.

Steve: Wait, so just based on that, you decided to start a store where people can upload pictures of their kids.

Jason: Yeah. I pretty much bought the printer.

Steve: Lease or did you buy?

Jason: I bought it.

Steve: Oh wow!

Jason: My retail business was doing fine. The printer at that time I think it was about $25,000. I didn’t want a monthly payment. Again there really wasn’t too much research. Shopify wasn’t around. It was just at the very beginning. It actually turned out to be a good idea that was just too soon. Cell phones didn’t take high enough resolution images. Parents who wanted to order, they had a hard time uploading the proper file sizes. We really struggled at the beginning. It was a good thing that it was a hobby and not my source of income, because we would have failed for sure.

Steve: I can imagine that’d be a pain in the butt, right, because a lot of people don’t know about images, and what’s required for printing.

Jason: Yeah. At that time I think most cell phones had about like a 1.3 megapixel image, and then email programs were compressing images. People would send a picture of their kid was like a spec in the background. A lot of times the sales we did make we were refunding … We didn’t have content at that time, it was all custom. While it was a good idea, it was too soon. I was able to stick it out and keep trying different ideas until I found a better way to make money in that same business.

Steve: How do you get your content today actually?

Jason: The majority of our content comes from licensing deals with companies like National Geographic, and Corbis Images, and Stocktrek images and some other stock photography companies. I looked for over time just to fill in every possible niche for medical images or animals, or just whatever I thought we needed more of. I found a company and made a deal. Now we have access to … Oh God probably 60 million images if you wanted to look.

Steve: That’s crazy. Do you still let people upload their own images anymore or no?

Jason: We do. Custom is a big part of our business. Whether it’s professional photographers or companies uploading business logos, things for trade shows … One of our strong suits is we are really good at turning orders around quickly, and it’s made in the USA. Custom is actually growing quite nicely right now because our quality is great, and our turnaround time is faster than practically anyone. Maybe it might be faster than everyone.

Steve: I’m just curious though. Why did you choose the licensing route instead of creating your own images and your own artwork?

Jason: When I first stumbled upon the idea of some content, I started with basic silhouettes and I was literally in my basement by myself. Again I wasn’t a graphic artist or anything … Clipping images in Photoshop and Illustrator, and saving them, and file naming them. I noticed they were starting to sell and just like any good entrepreneur, you do 100, you do 200 and you say, “Of 100, 200 sells, it’s going to take me a while to get to a million. What’s the fastest way to get a lot of images?” That’s through a licensing deal. That’s what we did. We went from nothing to a few 100, to millions. When you offer millions, you sell more.

Steve: What does a licensing deal look like, I’m curious? How much does it cost you guys and how is the deal structured?

Jason: There is 2 ways. It depends on the company you’re dealing with and the amount of money that you’re maybe either guaranteeing them, or based on your relationship. You’re either paying them a percentage of the sale. If you make $100 sale you might pay as an example, 10% or you can pay a flat dollar fee.

Steve: 10% of the sale or 10% of some other number you agree to.

Jason: 10% of it. It’s a retail. Print on demand … That’s an example. Not every deal is that, that’s just an example number but yeah, it would be on the retail selling price. Then we do have a couple of deals that are just based on … Because we print a lot of images, a flat fee per image. That works out to be a better deal for us, but because the volume is high, it works for us and for our partners.

Steve: I see. Is there any upfront cost?

Jason: For the licensing deals?

Steve: Yeah.

Jason: Again if you are a new person coming into the business, it depends on the brand, the licensing. We don’t have Disney. If you wanted Disney … Even if you could even get it, there would be a huge upfront cost. Some of our deals, I can’t tell you the exact numbers, but because of either our history or because of the confidence and knowing we would sell, some companies, you have to make sure you pay them say $25,000 or $50,000 over the course of the year to get that. It’s a volume discount just like anything else, so either based on if you’re willing to agree to a guaranteed minimum, or if your purchase history proves that you’re worthy of a better rate you can … Just like calling up anyone else to renegotiate, you can work out a better deal.

Steve: For you though when you were starting out with nothing, how did you approach your first company?

Jason: Actually he’s a really great friend of mine now. There is stock photo company … No one was really doing this for print on demand like APIs for … All these stock images were relatively new. The industry was totally different. I had this idea to rather than buy the images upfront which is what people were doing, I wanted to offer all of a company’s images, let my customers browse them, and then only pay when a sale is made.

That really wasn’t how it was happening. I just pitched my idea. You probably know or you’ve read how people say it all the time, just ask, somebody might say, “Yes”. I made my sales pitch and said, “I think this will benefit your company and mine. This is what I want to do. This is my vision.” The person that was in-charge of North America pitched it to the CEO, and they trusted me, and we made it work.

Steve: This is when you had nothing and your friend was instrumental in opening up the doors for you so to speak.

Jason: He wasn’t a friend then. Its just this company is our longest standing partner. The company is Fotolia. They got bought by Adobe several months ago. Chad believed in what I said and pushed it through. Just because it’s been so many years and he’s such a great guy, now we are great friends. At the time he just believed in what I presented.

Steve: One thing that I’ve been wondering is our online store only has 480 skews. Here you are talking about 60 million. Does that imply that you have 60 million product pages or just a library of 60 million products on your sites?

Jason: We filter down and we’re about to … It’s going to look really good in probably about definitely less than 2 weeks. It might be ready in a few days. Our search is pretty complicated. We have a Solr database. If we have access to 60 million, we’re going to offer far less than that. There is a lot of filters we use to purposely eliminate many images. It probably ends up being about the top 10% is what you could search through my site.

Steve: How does it work? Did you have to develop your own search algorithm or you have a Google Box or something? How do you do that?

Jason: We use Solr which like MySQL. Solr is a search program. I don’t know how to explain it. I don’t know if your people would really care so much about that, but because we had so many images we needed to create a custom solution. We couldn’t use Google search tool. We couldn’t use some of the other elastic search.

There is companies out there that will handle your database and do things like predictive texts and making suggestions and learning from sales. We built ours from scratch because we are importing so much metadata and images that we just needed to build it ourselves.

Steve: I’m curious, how many people do you guys have now? The last we talked it sounded like you only had a handful of people, right?

Jason: The business is really … The simplest way is its 2 pieces. We have the office where it’s customer service, production, shipping. Everything that has to do with the customer placing the order to the order leaving. That all happens 5 minutes from house in Maryland. In the office we have about … Not about, we have exactly 6 people and then outside of that is where everything else is: IT, things to do with SEO, pay-per-click advertising.

Those people are all outsourced freelancers, but I have pretty good relationships with them now. Most of them are giving me more than half their time. I’m definitely primary source of income and there is 8 people that do that. They are all part time to some degree, but there is a lot of IT.

We are constantly working on something, whether it has do with how we send information to Amazon or something to do with … Right now we have 3 people that are working to finish improving search on our site and how navigation works completely, how you can go through the user experience. That project is going to end and those 3 guys are going to drop off. I’ll probably dream up something new 5 minutes after that.

Steve: Everything is project based, and they’re of … You just hire them on a consulting basis.

Jason: For that kind of project. My pay-per-click guy has been with me for over a year now. I did hire a woman who is operations manager. She’s really helped become a go between the developers and people in the office and just to really take away a lot of the tedious tasks from me so that I can focus on bigger things. That’s been very, very helpful.

Steve: Are you a technical guy at all?

Jason: I am not technical programming wise but I have … The only way I can explain it, I can think it and communicate it very clearly. I know what skills are needed. I can and then hire the right people. I also have one of my IT guys who used to do a lot of programming. He is pretty much oversees all of the IT projects. His role, he doesn’t program anymore. He just takes what I say that’s in English and communicates it to these guys to the final …

Steve: Sure. No that’s all you really need, yeah.

Jason: Yeah, I know what I’m good at. Then I found people that fill in those places where I need help.

Steve: One thing I was curious about, you mentioned in the very beginning that you purchased your printer right off the bat, did you ever consider just having a printing partner because I used to work for a printing company. I know those machines are finicky and they require maintenance. I was just curious why you went that route right away.

Jason: At the very beginning, I could have looked for a partner, a company to print but I feel very strongly that’s our core competency is printing and we do a lot of rush orders a lot of things that are time sensitive, a lot of things where errors are not acceptable. If it’s your core competency, you need to do that in-house.

There’s no way that I would outsource printing. That’s what we do. If I outsource that, most of what we say, and most of our advantage over other companies would vanish, they would be in the hands of someone else to do the job.

Steve: Okay, and so you do it yourself mainly for customer service reasons and deliverable reasons, why we do our own embroidery, right?

Jason: It’s quality control. It’s our processes, it’s our procedures. It’s our automation. It’s our … If we make a mistake we can learn from it. There’s just no other way in my mind.

Steve: How much did it cost you to start the company then? Actually how many partners do you have now, I’m just curious.

Jason: We have 4. We use different printers now. We also now have cutters so we have … There’s 6 pieces of equipment in the office that are either printing and cutting or printing or cutting. How much did it cost us to start the business? I guess the printer cost $25,000. I probably spent another, God I don’t know. I’ll say $50,000. By the time I learned how to print and made a bunch of mistakes, built a website, painfully because it wasn’t really that easy back then, probably about 50 grand.

Steve: What platform are you on now? It was custom before but did you change platforms over the years?

Jason: Yeah, we use Magento.

Steve: Magento okay. Enterprise or regular?

Jason: Regular but it’s very highly customized. We’ve spent a lot on customizing that platform.

Steve: Okay, let’s talk about your process a little bit. Do you guys carry any inventory at all or is it all print-on-demand?

Jason: We ship some of our best sellers to Amazon now FBA. It is all print on demand. Orders come in and around 6 or 7 am every morning, we run an automation procedure that goes and pulls all the orders from the various sales channels, and then runs it through another automation that will identify and grab all the images that much the order and resizes them and renames them and puts them into the proper folders.

We print and ship over 95% of our orders within 24 hours. There’s no reason to hold inventory. We just print on demand and we get it right out.

Steve: As a tech guy, I’m really in awe of this automation that you have. Literally an order comes in, and then machines just automatically resize everything and then is it as simple as it being sent to the printer automatically and someone just needs to be there to pick it up and box it?

Jason: I wish. It’s not exactly but yeah, most of the steps it’s just, you just broke it down step by step so it’s not one big magical automation. We use … Our Amazon orders come in through ShipWorks. The program we wrote goes into ShipWorks and grabs the orders. The resizing, those are actions that we add written, scripts we had written that work in Photoshop and Illustrator and then we rename files with certain naming patterns. I had someone write a program that nests the orders to make the optimal use of space.

Once it gets through the whole process, the automatic part, the orders are nested. They are groups of orders that we just because of, just to make sure in case there’s a cancelled order or there’s a size change. If there’s something that needs to be addressed, that’s where the humans come in and will then take those orders and you are pretty much just dragging them into the rip software that’s going to print them.

Yeah, we print and we just have to cut the sheets off as they come and then they go to the back and the shipping labels are ready to go and the guys cut the orders down and march them up and put them into the shipping tubes, put the labels on. It’s still a process but we’ve just taken away a lot of the like the key stroke errors and a lot of the time wasting.

Steve: Sure, sure. No that’s incredible. You mentioned that you are selling on Amazon FBA as well. Given that most of your business on demand, how does it work for Amazon? I think I heard a rumor from someone. I can’t remember whether it was Jason or not who told me that you have a million skews on Amazon?

Jason: Yeah, we have more than a million. It’s a long tussle. We don’t have a million best sellers. We have a way to put a lot of listings up there and then the ones that are the best sellers, those are the ones that we’ll print in advance and send those to Amazon for FBA because they are going to show up as prime and the customer is going to get them faster. It’s important but it’s not that large of a percentage of our business because it’s such a long time. Everyday about 30% of our orders are images that are being ordered for the very first time.

Steve: I just wanted to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now I love running my ecommerce store, but you know what I hate doing the most? Bookkeeping. Seriously keeping track of receipts, expenses and especially inventory cost, are easily the worst aspect of entrepreneurship hands down. And here is where Bench Accounting comes in.

Bench is an online bookkeeping service that specializes in ecommerce businesses. They are experts at handling all ecommerce related reports whether it be from Amazon, Shopify, BigCommerce, Stripe, you name it. All you got to do is sign up and they’ll pair you with a team of dedicated bookkeepers who will handle everything for you. So no more data entry, no more data crunching, no more headaches, plus its reasonably priced.

And the best part is that you can get 20% off your first 6 months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off your first 6 months. Now back to the show.

Steve: Okay, in terms of Amazon then, how does your process work? Do you just ship a bunch there, see what sells and then drop some of the ones that aren’t selling?

Jason: No. We are going from historical sales data. We didn’t start to use FBA until I’ll say maybe a year or so ago. We have been selling on Amazon for years already. We have whatever tens of thousands, hundreds of thousands of sales and we can look in. We know certain things where you see them print 10 or 12 times every single day or whatever the number is.

Those were the items that we sent to Amazon first because they are going to sell even more and also it’s going to save time on a day to day basis. It’s a lot easier to send a 100 or 200 of something to Amazon than it is to send 10, 10, 10, 10, 10 every day to 10 individual customers.

Steve: I was just thinking; when you have that many listings, how do you do, do you spend a lot of time on the listings then? Amazon search is very important and I’m just curios how you manage so many different skews and still put out an optimized listing on Amazon. Do you run ads?

Jason: Yes we run ads. We’ve been trying to ramp up the spending as much as we can. It’s a lot easier to spend money on Google than it is on Amazon. The Amazon ads have been the most efficient ads spending that we have. To create the listing you have to optimize them, they are not as optimized as if you did them by hand. We have an automated process that creates the listings for us and it uses a combination of I call it static and dynamic information. The static information to be the brand name. Every listing has to say Wall Monkeys, wall decals but then it will take a look at the … Then grab from the image the title for example and say Picasso whatever.

We know to create all the sizes it’s … Everything is automated where it makes the size, it knows our pricing, it adds the shipping weight. All these things are preprogrammed in so that if we have a new batch of say 50,000 images, we can create those listings. We have software that sits on Google cloud and we can create those listings completely and send those to Amazon within 24 hours including the images. If you have a picture of whatever it is, a dog, it needs to also go on a wall and looks like it’s a wall decal, we’ve got that part of the process automated also where most people are doing that manually and it’s really time consuming.

Steve: What about SEO on your own website? With so many different listings, is it the same procedure as Amazon essentially? You take the title and you create a page, with that as the title tag?

Jason: Yeah. It’s similar. We do pay attention to the differences and say, how many characters are allowed for the title or what are the subtle differences that we are aware of. We are indexing many, many pages. It’s similar but different. We are just trying to make the changes where we can. With the new site, with the new Solr search, there’s going to be much better improvements as far as landing pages for categories and sub categories and different artists and things which I think is going to help our SEO. That’s an area that we can definitely improve.

Steve: Just curious, where for your main website, where do you most of your customers come in. Is it through SEO or other means?

Jason: SEO and we disband a fair amount on pay-per-click. Then, ripping customers are, especially our business customers, come back more frequently.

Steve: Business customers. That implies … Is that a large part of your business the business customers as opposed to the consumers?

Jason: It’s growing. Amazon, about I would say 18 months or 2 years ago, it became a little bit scary that Amazon was such a large percentage of our sales. Just like everyone, you need to diversify. We started to put a lot more effort into just getting sales from anywhere else and business to business jumped out as a really good place to go after. That’s something that we are focusing on.

Steve: That’s totally what we did also because those guys they don’t want to order on Amazon. They want to talk to someone on the phone and they have consistent business. That’s been really good for us as well.

Jason: Yeah, and the concern it’s not a race to the bottom with pricing like Amazon is, different … Is a different beast completely. A lot of the business customers, what they want is really great service and if they need it on a certain day, they want to have confidence that it’s going to get there. They are not as price sensitive as they are professionalism and accuracy sensitive.

Steve: Just curious, do you price your products the same on Amazon as you do on your own site?

Jason: We do but most of the business sales are going to be custom. We are just working off of what our pricing is; per square foot versus how much does that picture of a pink puppy cost or something.

Steve: Do you guys do anything with your Amazon stuff to get them back on to your website or you just keep the Amazon channel completely separate?

Jason: If I’m answering this with Amazon listening. That’s what every man … We follow the rules. We follow the rules right closely. I do look at it as Amazon’s customers are, all those sales, those are Amazon’s customers, not Wall Monkeys’ customers but we definitely know that and we see sales from both places. We don’t actively try and break rules and divert people, but on Amazon we are Wall Monkeys wall decors. You probably don’t need a PhD to figure out that if you type in WallMonkeys.com you might be able to see our website and find other things.

Steve: Let’s talk about the early phase of your business when you first got started. How did you get your first sales?

Jason: We got really lucky. One of the biggest breaks even though we didn’t make much money at the beginning, something that helped a lot was about 3 weeks after I started the company, 3 weeks after I got the website up, the contact number on the website was my cell phone. I was running it from either printing from my basement or running it from my kitchen table.

Steve: That’s awesome.

Jason: My phone rings and it was Darren Rovell. He works at ESPN now but he was a sport supporter for CNBC. Says he’s Darren Rovell and I knew who he was. He said, “Hey I was just checking out your products. It looks really great. I was looking at Fathead and I just think this is such a great idea. How would you like to be highlighted as one of the best gifts, best Christmas gifts for dad for 2009?”

Steve: I’m sorry how did this happen?

Jason: He was just doing research on Fathead and bumped into my company because we were one of the first. He just called me on the phone and asked if I wanted Wall Monkeys to be highlighted on CNBC right before Christmas. That was just a huge break because that made sales, but then we also from that we ended up … Somebody, a guy wrote an article for ESPN, the magazine and a couple of other outlets reached out. We got a bunch of press which really helped with sales for months after that. We were making sales every day off of the momentum of Darren Rovell.

Steve: Was that before you had all these licensing deals in place?

Jason: We had nothing, we just had customers, we had 3 weeks. I didn’t even really know how to … Had to have a graphic designer setup the orders to print. I was … We knew nothing.

Steve: That’s amazing, okay they must have found you through search, then I guess…

Jason: Yeah Darren Rovell found me through search. I still talk to him once in a while. I have printed some stuff for him and now he works for ESPN. He is just a really great guy. He was like right time, right place and it was just really fortunate; it was like a nice break.

Steve: Can we talk about search strategy? Do you pump out a lot of blog post? What’s your content strategy to get ranked?

Jason: It could be a lot better. We were blogging a lot more, right now we are not. Right now we are focusing on social media more. We have a visual product so every day in the office where everyone is taking pictures and putting them into this Google cloud … I’m sorry Google drive folder and Instagram and Pinterest right now seem to be best for us as far as driving traffic.

Steve: Okay and in terms of pay-per-click, are you running Facebook ads, Instagram ads, Pinterest ads?

Jason: Almost all of our spending is Google and Amazon. Amazon we are trying to ramp it as much as possible they just don’t seem to use our whole ads spent. I’m not sure where the magic formula is there yet.

Steve: In terms of Google you have so many different images that I can’t even imagine running one of your campaigns. How do you structure these campaigns, or are you bidding on more general terms like wall decals?

Jason: We are not bidding on wall decals, those are general terms.

Steve: Yeah because that would be a really expensive …

Jason: We just have niches. Different business niches, maybe veterinarians or nail salons, hair salons. We know what images. Again we have … We know what sold. We know where we want to drive people and we … It’s taken a long time to build them out but we built out very specific campaigns to target very specific niches.

Steve: Are you using the display network or just search ads?

Jason: Just search ads. Again I pay … I have, I see all the reporting. We have a lot of reports that come to me as well as talking to my pay-per-click guy every once a week but we get … I get reports like crazy.

Steve: Okay.

Jason: We are constantly trying to spend more and refine it and he’s got metrics to hit and luckily we’ve actually we’ve really been hitting them which is nice. I think once, I got to keep saying but once that new searches works on our site, I think all of our numbers are going to get better.

Steve: Have you tried some of the other ad platforms like Facebook and Pinterest. I would imagine those would work pretty well for you guys?

Jason: Facebook we just haven’t … we need to build out … I still feel like we are a start up. I can make a huge list and tell you all the things that were either not doing well enough or not doing yet that I want to. Facebook we’ve … Facebook ads haven’t been great for us but we are also not employing the strategy that I would want to. We need to build out a lot more landing pages to send people to where we really want them to go. Like I said yeah I would say for right now Google and Amazon it’s … And Amazon in particular it’s just keep trying to spend more because it works the best.

Steve: Let’s talk about what’s working well for you guys in terms of getting business. What are some of the things that you are doing that’s generating a lot of business for you?

Jason: FBA definitely is where we’ve been adding more and Amazon’s is huge.

Steve: Have you run into any problems with Amazon?

Jason: We have problems all the time. Recently there has been a lot … We have Wall Monkeys as our brand, it’s trademarked, we are in Amazon’s brand registry. Recently we’ve been spending hours every week. People are getting onto our listings and we have to send cease and desist letters and it’s a real time suck.

Steve: Right.

Jason: Its seems to be more of a free fall than never which is another reason to focus on, to put some more energy on our ecommerce side and on business to business and other things. There is just more sellers than ever and I don’t know when they are going to lock it down or put a limit on it. It’s getting … I see it getting diluted.

Steve: Oh yeah totally I give it 1 or 2 more years until it becomes saturated with junk and then Amazon has to do something about it.

Jason: I think they need to do something now. They don’t protect … they don’t want to get involved fighting for us for us for the brand. They will only get involved if the customer isn’t getting the product as described. Otherwise they are just going to make the money and they are not going to get involved.

Steve: Yeah in that regard, when you guys are doing customer service for Amazon or your own site generally do you just … I imagine your costs are pretty low. It’s just the cost of the paper and the ink right? When you guys run customer service, whenever someone complains do you just essentially give away the product and give them refund or?

Jason: Pretty much.

Steve: Okay.

Jason: Yeah if we think someone is really trying to be deceitful we’ll address it but yeah it’s just kind of the … one of the prices you pay especially for doing business on Amazon.

Steve: Does it worry you at all. What are some of the things that you are doing to shift away from Amazon to your own site?

Jason: There is a couple of things. It doesn’t worry me. I think if you are entrepreneur lots of things worry you. If I wanted to worry all day long I could probably do that. One of the biggest things that we are doing is we do have a pretty good scale at creating these mass listings on Amazon, and how we do it on our website also. We just started helping a couple of other companies create listings for their print on demand products on Amazon.

Companies that don’t have … Again they are facing the challenges that most people face. They might have 1000 listings or 2000 but they have access to say 50000 images and they can’t create those listings. Other companies are now paying us which is really great. Let them enable them they make money and we don’t have to … we are not going to enter that category anyway.

Steve: Is this software that you are selling?

Jason: We are not selling them software. It is software but we are doing it ourselves, we are not putting it in the hands of the customer. We are … There are bigger relationships. We are managing them. We are working hand in hand to create the listings for them and make them live.

Steve: I see okay, a services based thing. Are they your competition though?

Jason: No never. If we sell wall decals there might be a company that sells picture frames and they want to put images in those frames. Picture frames, pictures … A framed picture isn’t going to compete with a wall decal. Putting those images on a coffee mug as an example but you could go on Zazzle and look at hundreds of products. Getting the images is no problem it’s creating listings and all the metadata that needs to be plugged in in the right places, that people have a hard time with.

Steve: Okay going forward, you’ve been doing wall decals for quite a while now. What is your focus right now? Is it to grow the company; is it to enjoy life, what is your end goal with it?

Jason: I don’t know about end goal but right now my focus has been on for a while and I have been spending a lot of energy on just efficiencies in the office, and having creating a better work environment and happy employees. Then personally the same thing. I guard my morning rituals and the way I want my day to go and how I spend my time.

I guard that and always work on that religiously. Now that those things are a lot more in line I think now we are going to be poised for a really big phase of growth for the Wall Monkeys business. I felt we needed to get these other pieces straight before we grew sales more.

Steve: Where is that growth going to be coming from you think?

Jason: I think it’s going to come from all over. I think the biggest drivers are going to be … I keep saying B2B but there is a lot of businesses out there that don’t know we exist, and we are going to let them know that we exist. We also …

Steve: How do you plan on doing that? What’s your strategy for reaching out to B2B?

Jason: I don’t think I want to share it.

Steve: Okay.

Jason: I’ve spent a lot of time thinking about how we go after businesses and …

Steve: Okay.

Jason: Yeah, that’s something I guess everybody doesn’t need to hear.

Steve: Yeah, okay sure. I was curious because we are doing the same thing, maybe after this.

Jason: Yeah, we could talk about it after we hang up the phone.

Steve: Okay, sorry you got B2B, are you, A, Amazon is just going to grow naturally on its own. Do you have any specific strategies for growing your Amazon business?

Jason: We are going to update our listings, there’s … When we update our listings it’s not like going in and updating one, it’s like a pretty big deal because we are … We might be making some pretty major changes across a few hundred thousand listings. You want to really think about it and test it and make sure that they are going through the right way.

I guess the best way say it is, I feel we can do … Aside from the way we process orders and how quickly and accurately we do that, that’s majority of the time, almost every other part of our business can be improved. Whether it’s the ecommerce site, the search, our listings on Amazon, the quality of the content on Amazon, I feel we can do everything better.

Steve: Yeah, but it’s … Maybe you have limited resources, I’m just curious, are you going to be focusing on other ad platforms like Facebook? You mentioned you didn’t feel like you have been giving it any justice, are you going to start blogging again …

Jason: Facebook ads, when the search is done, there is going to be many landing pages for categories, sub categories, artists, lots of different businesses and business niches and types of images. Targeted Facebook advertising is going to be a pretty big part as well as I think our Google advertising has been … Is going to become a lot more efficient because we can change the pages that we’re driving the traffic to.

Steve: Okay, and in terms of staff, do you plan on growing that or do you feel running really lean is one of your goals?

Jason: Running lean is definitely one of my goals. One of the biggest challenges is managing people, I’ve learnt … Again I ran a retail business for 14 years, I’ve been doing this for 8 years, and I feel I’m learning all the time. Running lean is key and paying for A players is something that I learned too late, whether it’s programmers or the people putting in the images.

With programmers especially with Upwork and things like that, you can hire … There’s such a range. You could hire a $15 an hour php guy or you can hire someone who makes $100 an hour or more and there’s times when it really makes sense to hire those guys that are … To search out who’s the best in the world and just pay for it.

Steve: Where do you find these people, are they referrals or are you using services like Upwork?

Jason: Yeah, I’ll ask my network or I’ll use Upwork. For our search right now for Solar I went into that, I knew it was complicated, and I knew it was a specialized skill, and I took the approach on that one. Where can I find who is the best in the world, and I’m going to pay him. I looked on LinkedIn, LinkedIn is a pretty good resource just to look in groups and find … Get leads that way.

But for Solar this project I found the guy on Upwork and you just have to really know what you are looking for very specifically and check their references and make sure you are getting what you pay for. Hiring IT, IT project especially custom work, those are very expensive mistakes to me, because you are starting over you are wasting time, the money and time loss there is it’s expensive and exhausting.

Steve: We are coming on 40 minutes now, I was just curious, do you have any advice for people out there who want to go and into ecommerce? I’m just curious would you if you were to start all over again today, would go be doing this again? Your particular nature, physical products?

Jason: I like what I do, we have a niche, I feel we are … There’s lot of opportunity in my niche; selling on Amazon in general I think is pretty full. I think there might be more opportunity in helping … If I was going to start all over again I would, or if I just close my business tomorrow, or something happened, I would probably focus on using the knowledge that I have to help other sellers sell more, or help companies that have a weak or no presence, establish a strong presence. I think there is more money, a better opportunity, a better freedom helping others than there is in trying to fight it out on your own.

Steve: Interesting. One thing I also forgot to ask you, are you guys using email marketing at all for Wall Monkeys?

Jason: Yeah, we use … We actually use Constant Contact.

Steve: Constant Contact, okay. Is that a large part of your business?

Jason: When we send a good one, it is.

Steve: Okay, these are one offs, do you have auto responder sequences or?

Jason: We do, we have auto responder sequences and things, but I … They are fine, I like to look at the effectiveness of the weekly emails that we send and see if we’re crafting those messages the right way.

Steve: All right Jason, well hey thanks a lot for coming on the show man, I’ve always been really … I admire your business mainly because to me you are not really an ecommerce company, you are like a tech company because of all these process that you’ve put in place. You just happen to sell wall decals but the whole process was well thought out, and the fact you are able to run such a large company with still few people is pretty amazing to me.

Jason: Thank you.

Steve: Does that mean that I can have your son on next?

Jason: Yeah, you could ask him all the questions about being as teen entrepreneur, the websites he built and all that good stuff.

Steve: All right, thanks J.

Jason: All right.

Steve: Take care man.

Jason: Thank you Steve.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. What I find especially cool about Jason is that he’s managed to turn his wall decal company into a tech company by automating most of the processes. I also find that his business model is pretty ingenious. There are a lot of wall decal companies out there, but Wall Monkeys stands out, because they have the largest selection.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequiteherjob.com/episode126, and if you enjoy this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It’s the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequiteherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

125: Shipping Logistics And How To Transport Your Goods From Overseas With Pam Cail

Shipping Logistics And How To Transport Your Goods From Overseas With Pam Cail

Today I’m thrilled to have a very special guest on the show Pam Cail. Pam is the VP of a company called HYCLogistics and she’s helped thousands of sellers get their goods to their warehouses from Asia.

They’ve been in business since 1948 and she knows shipping and logistics inside and out. The reason why I have her on the show today is because many people are intimidated by the importing process.

Plus, my wife and I import many times a year by sea and we’ve also been confused by all of the fees that we get nickle and dimed on. We pretty much accept these fees blindly but they do add up.

So I’ve invited Pam on the show to hopefully clear up the most scary questions that people have about importing.

What You’ll Learn

  • Pam’s motivations for starting her business.
  • The margins for a logistics company and how the fees are factored in.
  • The biggest mistakes that people make when importing from overseas
  • How to find the permits that are required.
  • The Pros/cons of EXW vs FOB
  • When you should use air courier vs air freight vs sea freight
  • When to use a stateside broker vs an international broker.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Steve: You’re listening to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. If you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes. If you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to Mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email. Now onto the show.

Intro: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have a very special guest on the show, Pam Cail. Pam is the VP of a company called HYC Logistics, and she’s helped thousands of sellers get their goods to their warehouses from Asia. They’ve been in business since 1948. She knows shipping and logistics inside and out.

The reason I’ve decided to have her on the show today is because many people are very intimidated by the importing process. Plus my wife and I import many times a year by sea, and I’ve been often confused by all the fees on my invoices where we kind of feel like we’re getting nickel and dimed on. We pretty much pay these blindly in a lot of cases, but they do add up.

I’ve invited Pam on the show to hopefully clear up the most scary questions that people have about importing. With that welcome to the show Pam, how are you doing today?

Pam: Hi. Thank you. I’m doing great. I am. I’m very excited to be here.

Steve: Very excited to have you. What I want to start out with was can you give us a quick background story and tell us how you ended up running HYC Logistics?

Pam: I have always pretty much had a transportation background in my family. My father was the vice president of a large trucking company, and my mother was a school teacher. Together we’ve always talked about helping, learning, and also the trucking and transportation world. With that, I got into the accounting side of international shipping through a large a freight forwarder.

I started at the bottom doing accounts for savable accounts payable and have worked my way up. When Harvey Yaffee Company asked me to join their team, I was thrilled and I actually started as an accounting manager here, went into exports, imports. Now I am very happy to say that I run the company, and I’ve got a great group of people.

Steve: I’ve often wondered how someone gets into the shipping and logistics business. It sounds like it was something that you’ve done with your family and then you were interested in the business and worked your way up.

Pam: That’s exactly right.

Steve: I’ve always been curious; from a business perspective what are the margins like in such a heavy service based business? How are your fees factored in the equation when you help someone?

Pam: They are very minimal. I do have to say my CFO many a times says, “Who started this business?” Because most people in the jewelry industry, in the furniture industry, 200% 500% mark-up, whatever … In the shipping industry and freight forwarding like we do with the brokerage service, these are very minimal. At certain times if we make $50 that’s a good day. Anyway it ends up being relative to everything that actually is done at the shipment level if you do just brokerage or warehousing or transportation or whatever.

You make a minimal on each one of them. This is not one of those companies that you’re going to find, going to have the 24 karat gold garbage can. It’s nothing. We chose poorly if that’s what we wanted to achieve. All in all it’s a very necessary part of shipping in our economy and I guess having the background that I do, it’s certainly rewarding. We have time and we have the education to share with everybody and that’s what drives us, not the money.

Steve: A lot of people probably come to you with importing help. What are the biggest mistakes that you see that people have when they are first starting to do their first shipments when they first come to you?

Pam: I think one of them is telling the supplier that they are a new person in this. Just being overly honest because you don’t really know how they are going to react to you. Are they going to tell you things that may not be true or they might be true to them only? For instance, I was told that by one person that they only import into New York. This person came to me and said, “I see that you could only import into the United States by way of New York?” I said, “Where did you hear that?” They said, “Well the supplier.” See the supplier only imported into New York.

Therefore it was honest of the supplier, but it was misleading and they didn’t even know to ask the question, “Well, what about the other ports or is there anything else?” When you are a new person, you don’t even know the questions to ask. That’s the damn fault of not having a representative on the USA side.

When everything is handled on the Asia side, the China side or anywhere else, they don’t know the US customs laws. They don’t know what ports are available, what’s best, what our weather is even like. Are the rail roads flooded or are they iced over in Chicago during the winter? Those types of things we try to say, “Okay. Everyone is good at their area. Find an expert at their area especially if you are not.”

Steve: What are some of the questions that you should be asking to the vendor?

Pam: It depends on the shipment. That is one of those that has the weight, the volume, where your freight, what port they use, where are they going to ship out of, if it’s FOB. There are differences: is it air or ocean and is it airline or air courier express?

Steve: Let’s talk about that a little bit actually. I know typically when I go with a vendor they sometimes give me 2 different quotes. One for EXW and one for FOB. Can you comment on the pros and cons of both incoterms terms? First of all, if you wouldn’t mind defining them and then talking about the pros and cons.

Pam: Incoterms are an international commercial term. It’s used in both the exporting country and the importing country. In layman’s terms it tells you where and how your freight is going to be routed. As you asked, the Ex Works and FOB … The responsibilities of the partners … Ex Works is when your … Which would be my customer would be responsible for providing the financial means of getting their freight from the factory to the ship, the port.

FOB means Free On Board which means that the supplier of my client is financially responsible to get the product to the port. Then my client’s financial responsibility starts at the port, at exportation. There is big difference on that. If your freight forwarder doesn’t have a way to get your export freight to the port that could be a problem. You always want to make sure that if you do have Ex-Works terms on your commercial invoice, that you also have the ways and means of getting it from the warehouse to the port.

Steve: I noticed that the Ex Works quote is always less than the FOB quote probably because of that fact. Is that something you recommend or do you always recommend going with FOB at first?

Pam: No. I don’t have a preference. I do suggest that you get 2 quotes for your product because a lot of times the FOB will be more expensive than the EX Works. You need to judge and you need to analyze and say, “If the FOB quote is $500 more, would it better for you to get an Ex Works quote and have your freight forwarder bring it for $200 to the dock?” If you have that time and you have the desire it’s good to analyze all these. If not the simplest way for my clients is to have FOB terms. They know that it will get there when it’s supposed to and they don’t have to worry about a trucker or anything else on the Asia side that they are not familiar with.

Steve: I’m thinking about some of my factories that we use. They are deep within rural China where it might hard to actually get a freight forwarder there to move the goods to the port. Is that something that you guys handle too?

Pam: Yes, we do. We handle that because we have an agent and a partner over in China. That’s where I use their connection. Sometimes if you’ve got an agent that is not very large, they won’t have the connection. Sometimes if you’ve got agent that’s very large, they don’t want to take the time to go to rural China. They want to just do the nice easy [inaudible 00:12:11] type.

Steve: It just comes down to price really then, EXW versus FOB?

Pam: It does.

Steve: You also mentioned a couple of things. You mentioned air courier, air freight, and sea freight. Would you mind telling us what the differences are first? What some of the guidelines are in using one versus the other?

Pam: The air courier is the most expensive. The sea freight is the least expensive. With the caveat being that sea freight deals with minimums. You don’t want to have the shipment too small to where your minimums end up being larger than your courier. Then the middle of the road is airline is the fastest, but it also is not the most expensive and you can send a few cartons by airline that necessarily might be the middle of the road.

We always look at the carton count and see what’s best for the customer. I would highly recommend that anyone who has a freight forwarder and a broker that they ask for these options because surprisingly enough it maybe that you need to increase your carton count by 10 to make sea freight be so much cheaper.

Then the reverse depending on your financial status and so forth, you may not be able to do that or your supplier may not be able to give you 10 more cartons. Then you end up having maybe the courier versus the airline. Sometimes the courier ends up being cheaper than the airline because of the time of year and also the quantity.

Steve: Interesting, can we talk about the cut offs? When is a good time to use air courier versus air freight for example?

Pam: There is not really a precise cut off on that air courier versus air freight because air courier can be very pricey at Christmas time. It could be $8 a kilo whereas an airline maybe $1.97 a kilo. The difference on the courier and the airline is that on an airline is going to have to go an airport. You are going to have terminal charges and they are going to put it on a pallet. You are going to have to pay for those individual fees, the security filing, all that type. That will add extra dollars to your shipment but it won’t add all the way up to $8 a kilo.

Steve: Okay, would say then that air freight is always cheaper than air courier regardless of the size of your shipment?

Pam: No, I would not say that. Be careful with the season. I’m getting very good air courier rights right now. In a month, when the big retail stores start bringing in their end of the year holiday stuff, courier is going to go up fly up out of the chart. Then it’s going to be better to do airline and also think too that some of these airlines only need a small few packages to fill up their body in their cargo part. You will be able to get an airline right for a little cheaper. Whereas say in express shipment, that’s usually booked for the retail stores and so forth as a whole body of a plane.

Steve: Interesting. Okay, it sounds over the holidays; air courier will tend to be a lot more expensive than air freight. Whereas during the non peak times of the year, courier might be the same price or even cheaper than air freight, does that …

Pam: Yes, that’s it.

Steve: The reason for … Air freight, can we walk through that process? How much more of a hustle is it in the air courier because in the air courier case, they deliver everything straight to your warehouse. You don’t have to worry about anything right?

Pam: Right and it is much simpler, easier, they let the … It’s like sending a FedEx envelope. It’s all right there. All pretty, all but a bow on it. Airline, it would be the same basic airport from wherever you are guest origin is. Then it would bring in to the terminal whereas the courier will come into a warehouse or your final destination or whatever. You’d have to find the airport closest to where it would be. You would then need to take the second step of getting it to the final destination which would be adding trucking to it.

Steve: Okay, could I physically go to the airport and pick the stuff up myself though?

Pam: Yes you can. Yes you can. Now, depending on and I always say depending on the area that you are picking it up, some ports are more friendly, some airports are more friendly to having people walk in and go to the CFS. It is truly your right to be able to do that. Some of the busier airports, you will have to stay in line and wait for hours and pick decent time. You have got to weigh out what your value of time is.

Steve: Okay, and then you also have to factor in the cost of trucking from the airport to your destination which can be expensive as well, right?

Pam: Exactly. Then also don’t forget, our US customs brokerage services on an airline. You do have to … You have to pay for a broker just like in ocean freight for airline.

Steve: I see, I see. Okay, it ends up being a lot more of a hustle whereas air courier handles all that stuff and in my experience you pay the customs after the fact.

Pam: Right.

Steve: Okay, air freight is like sea freight. You have to handle all the customs and everything. The only difference really is that things are shipped by airline instead of boat and there’s no minimum it seems.

Pam: Exactly, right on.

Steve: Got it, got it. All right, that middle of the road option is that … First of all is air freight as fast as air courier or is it going to be slower?

Pam: It’s going to be slower but just by a couple days.

Steve: Okay, because of customs? Is that why?

Pam: No, just that they don’t … Air courier is known for getting to the United States in 3 days, 5 days whatever, however long it is. They leave every night. That’s how the name of the game is get it on there and put it on the first airplane that leaves China. Whereas the airline is a scheduled appointment just like an ocean freight is a scheduled …

Steve: I see. I see. Okay, and let’s talk about sea freight then and when it makes sense to go by sea.

Pam: It makes sense to go by sea when you’re carton count and your CBMs are around 3 CBMs. Depending on the size or the weight volume that determines what’s going to happen on sea freight. You can … I can’t say, okay 73 cartons is the magic number because your port may be different. Let’s concentrate more on the CBMs because that’s how ocean freight is calculated. Everything is calculated based on CBMs.

Steve: Which stands for cubic meters, correct?

Pam: Yes, cubic meters. Whereas an air freight, it’s all calculated by kilos and chargeable weight. Well on ocean freight, there’s no chargeable weight. A CBM is a CBM. A cubic meter is a cubic meter. We’ve got a small typo around here. I always tell the people I say, “Okay pretend it’s a small round table with corners.” To get an idea of what a CBM looks like. That’s the visual of a CBM.

On ocean freight usually from China and Asia they actually come loose. All your cartons come loose. Then when it gets to the United States, it is palletized at the container freight station which is the CFS. You are not paying for the weight of the pallet. You are not paying for someone in China to handle it differently. You don’t have to worry about a pallet jack or a fork lift or anything like that. We do agree with the Asian way of sending it loose freight because of we do not want to pay for any extra weight than we have to.

Steve: I just wanted to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now I love running my ecommerce store but you know what I hate doing the most? Book keeping. Seriously keeping track of receipts, expenses and especially inventory cost, are easily the worst aspect of entrepreneurship hands down. And here is where Bench Accounting comes in. Bench is an online bookkeeping service that specializes in ecommerce businesses.

They are experts at handling all ecommerce related reports whether it be from Amazon, Shopify, BigCommerce, Stripe, you name it. All you got to do is sign up and they’ll pair you with a team of dedicated bookkeepers who will handle everything for you. So no more data entry, no more data crunching, no more headaches, plus its reasonably priced. And the best part is that you can get 20% off your first 6 months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off your first 6 months. Now back to the show.

Steve: So just to summarize what you said. Sea freight is just by volume. It’s charged by volume whereas air freight is always charged by weight. It makes sense when you have stuff that’s super heavy that you go via sea freight because there’s no incremental cost to adding more stuff because it’s all calculated by a container load.

Pam: Exactly, exactly.

Steve: Okay, can we talk about less than a container load versus having your own container? How does LCL work?

Pam: A less than container load is LCL freight. What happens there is that say you’ve got your cartons and you only have 5 CBM, we are going to assume an FOP which means free on port. Your supplier is going to bring it to the port. The port has a container freight station where they put all these individual cartons together and they load a container. All right, I can arrange a container, my agent can arrange a container, the freight forwarder can arrange it, it could be any which way. We are going to say this is just a generic container.

Steve: Sure.

Pam: MSC has a generic container which is Mediterranean shipping line. Your 5 CBMs are part of this 20 foot container which unless you are sending water you really can’t go much more than 25, 28 CBMs in a 20 foot. Your 5 CBMs are part of we’ll say this 25 CBM container. Now, your freight is put with several other people’s freight. You don’t know them. You don’t know what it is, you don’t know their documentation status, you don’t know if they’re smuggling drugs, you don’t know if they are packaged right. The only thing you can know is that if it is HAZMAT it will not go into a normal container. It will go into a HAZMAT container. You are not going to be exploding … There’s not going to be your container blowing up because you got something next to you inside that container.

You’ve got all, we’ll call it all freight of all kinds and it’s on the container and now you get into the CFS. Your 5 CBMs are put together with this paper work, signed off, checked in, loaded in the container. When it gets to the United States, it is then taken off the vessel with a huge crane and it is taken back to a container freight station where it is actually divided up again. Your 5 CBMs and say your 70 cartons is put over here with this paper work and so forth. That container is divided out again.

The negative part of the LCL and sharing a container is that if your buddy, your new BFF that’s in that with you, if they get called for an exam, the whole container stays in an exam state until it is all cleared. US customs will not partially clear a container. Your paper work and your items might be perfect but if you are sharing it with somebody that’s not, that’s when it’s a negative. You might have a delay or a cost for sitting on the dock. That would be a downside of that even though you are an innocent party.

Steve: For example, let’s say I was sharing a container with someone who didn’t properly label their goods, customs goes in and they notice that the goods weren’t labeled properly, that would delay my shipment as well?

Pam: Yes, yes.

Steve: Okay, I see. Is there any control over who your buddy is on a container?

Pam: I have made that control because I do my own containers. I know that we handle the paper work; I know the due diligence that goes into the products that are picked and put on the container. The control of that is and can be handled if you’ve got somebody like me that will basically hand pick who your new BFFs are.

Steve: I see. Okay since you guys do a lot of business, and often times it’s from the same originating port, you are able to put together different customers within the same container because you know what’s in there and you know that they’ve labeled everything properly and it will clear customs, is that accurate?

Pam: Exactly. They will all have their continuous bonds and we won’t have any hang ups as far as a single entry bond having to be signed off.

Steve: I see, okay. Given that you know who your buddies are on a container and everything clears, is there any other disadvantages to using LCL?

Pam: I don’t really know. It is more costly after it gets to probably about 7 to 10 CBMs. We always recommend if you are at the 10 CBM mark, it is actually going to be cheaper for you to get a full container and only fill it up half way or see if I can find somebody to marry with you because the port charges are so expensive. The core load of these are so expensive. Basically they want to deter having to unload 200 cartons on the CFAs.

They would rather say, “Okay we are dealing with union laborers; we are dealing with port charges that our government mandated so it’s more pricey.” They’ll put extra charges on there, extra fees for that, which is the extra labor and time that they are going to have to do that with. They are going to have to prioritize all those 200 cartons and they come every which way on those pallets. It’s not a nice neat like you would think in a warehouse type environment, palletizing. They’ll just throw along any each way to get them all together.

Then of course something like Amazon or someone that you would want to send it and have a good name for yourself. You would not want to send a pallet looking as though it was all mixed up and upside down yeah.

Steve: Interesting, when you have your full container it doesn’t need to be unloaded for inspection?

Pam: No it doesn’t it will … If it does need inspection and I say an exam inspection, they’ll take the whole container and run through the electronic ice. Then if that still fails then they will ask for it to be moved off of the site. Then they’ll unload it and that’s called an intensive exam. Those are really pricey.

Steve: Okay how often does that happen?

Pam: Not very often we rarely have intensive exams but that’s not to say that you don’t get them. The exams … We usually say about 30% of the US customs has to be examined, things that go through US customs about 30%. That’s where we get into this. Examined and intensive examined are 2 different things. Running it through a laser basically seeing if there is anything that flashes up is totally different and a lot cheaper because it can all stay in the container.

When you start unloading, now you’ve got union workers, government workers and you’ve got an offsite facility. You have to take it off site this that is bonded for an intensive. That’s why it’s so pricey as well.

Steve: Okay how does one decides on a good port of entry for a shipment; let’s say if you don’t live near water?

Pam: It depends your final destination, and how quickly you need it too. Now why we send so much to Long Beach is because it takes 13 to 15 days of sailing time to get it there. Well that’s pretty quick. If you’ve got your decks on a row and your supplier is actually done when they say, and you’ve got it all, everything paid documents everything perfect.

You could have your freight in 30 days if you did a container or whatever. You could have it easily at your warehouse in 30 days. It only takes we’ll say 15 for ground purposes, 15 days for sailing, a few days at the port on each side. It doesn’t … This is one that doesn’t get an exam and you are sitting here looking at 23 days.

Steve: If I’m in New York for example, would it pay to get it shipped to Long Beach and then trucked over. Would that be the fastest way versus sailing all the way around?

Pam: That would be the fastest way, it’s not the cheapest but it would be the fastest way.

Steve: Okay, I see and there is just tradeoffs that depend on how fast you need your goods. What would be cost differential for example for a container?

Pam: I don’t even know to be honest with you. I can tell you that we just, we looked at a trucking for … From LA to Tampa and it runs about $4500.

Steve: Okay for a container load?

Pam: For a container load.

Steve: Okay that’s significant.

Pam: Very significant. New York probably $5200 maybe, because there is a little diversion there.

Steve: Sailing to New York takes significantly longer right?

Pam: It does because it’s called all water A-W-S is all water. We’ve got all water to Houston, Miami, New York. The only one that we have that’s the most economical would be to LA or possibly Seattle to Cama getting into upstate up there. It does take even a couple of more days longer to get to Seattle to Cama than it does LA. Now the other choice is not to truck it. Bring it in to LA and to put it on a rail. A rail road and rail it to New York.

Steve: Interesting okay.

Pam: How it works is there is … We do it in degrees. The ocean freight, sea sailing is the cheapest. You want to keep it on there as long as you can if time doesn’t matter. [inaudible 00:35:55]. Then the rail … The rail road is cheaper, then truck it. You want to keep it on the rail as long as you can. Then the third is you track it the shortest distance you can.

Steve: Okay that makes sense. Can we talk a little bit about customs bonds, first of all what are they and why do you need one?

Pam: All right in order to import into the United States you have to have a customs bond. That gives basically permission for a responsible insurance policy for US customs to get their duty and taxes paid okay? We’ve got 2 types; we’ve got a continuous bond and a single entry bond. A single entry bond is based on 1 entry, 1 shipment and it’s paid every time. It is more costly and it is based on duty and value of your commercial invoice. In a matter of speaking you could easily pay more for a single entry bond than a customs bond, a continuous bond. A continuous bond is $500 for 12 consecutive months.

That means if you got it today this is June, it would expire on June 9th. It’s not a January to December, and you can’t partial you can’t pay for a half of the year. Its 12 months continuous and it starts where it is. In a matter of depending on your duty and your commercial value, you could easily pay for your continuous bond in 3 shipments. Sometimes 2 if you’ve got a high duty rate or a high commercial value right? Remember its $550 a thousand based on the duty and commercial revenue.

Steve: Okay and in general if you plan on doing at least 3 shipments it pays to get the continuous bond?

Pam: Yes, if there is several other caveats to the continuous bond that I personally like. I think it is good to be known by the US government as you support the economic and the retail market wherever you are selling if you are a wholesaler, retailer whatever. You want the government to know that you are not a fly by night. That you are not doing this one time. You are invested in the US economy.

With a continuous bond, that’s what its stating to somebody that just sees a log. It says, “Okay this guy’s really serious about making a difference in our retail or wholesale world.” Whereas a single entry bond it says, “Oh I’m going to give this a try, I’m going to put my toe in it just a little bit, and it may not happen.” Also you’ll have …

Steve: Would you say then you are less likely to get an in-depth exam if you have a continuous bond or?

Pam: I would because that is what we hear. There is nothing of course written that way but it does seem to be an issue on that. Why, if I could explain why. With the single entry bond, the physical paperwork, the documents, they hold your commercial invoice, your packing list, the 7501 which talks about the duty and your release. That is the paperwork, and it basically has to be taken to US customs and signed off. Then that paperwork has to be reviewed at the same time that they are reviewing your product.

You got US customs officer that is actually got your stack of papers in his hands, and he is also looking at your 70 cartons or whatever. He is, just in human sight. If you’re going to have to put your John Hancock on something, you are going to look twice because you know that your authorities know that you are standing right there by and if it doesn’t say that it is made in China or if something doesn’t look right then shame on you. You are just lying; you are leaving yourself wide open for an exam I think personally because of just human nature.

Steve: Interesting, okay that is really good to know. Couple of other things that I often get asked is how do you know what all the different permits that are required when you are importing something in?

Pam: US customs and the government, it stated that you as the importer have to know everything you need to import. You don’t have to do it but you have to know what you need. Let’s just be real, you don’t know everything you need because you don’t even know what to ask. You know that if you’ve got [inaudible 00:42:06] and so forth, you know that if you got a food article that you know food and drug is needed.

It is very important that your US customs broker is up to date and knows about this. If you need certificates, if it’s something that requires FDA or XCC trademark, but if you have a blue tick with the trademark, you’ve got to have permission and that’s got be part of your document packing. That is very important to get this done before it sits at the port, because remember the port is very expensive because it’s union labor and that port has got a lot of movement in it, and that space is very expensive if you are holding, if you are taking up a room.

Steve: Okay.

Pam: For the actual cost, do your due diligence ahead of time. Make sure your customs broker is familiar with the rulings and the filings that are associated with your [inaudible 00:43:21] code which is how deviant taxes are calculated.

Steve: Okay, I can’t imagine doing all these stuff on my own which is why I have always used a customs broker, but I’m just … Can we just go through the entire process from beginning to end, in terms of what’s necessary. I imagine when someone comes to you, you probably ask them very specific questions on how large their shipment is, exactly what they are importing. Can you just walk me through the process as if I was coming to you as a client.

Pam: Sure, the very first thing is we ask a group of 13-17 questions, and that makes it much easier for you to get a qualified quote. We are strong and your quote needs to be your invoice. How can you run a company if you keep getting bills that come through after the facts? We ask very detailed questions. Where is your supplier, what is your incoterms, is it FOP or Ex-Works, do you even have a picture of it so that my compliance manager can look at it and make sure that we are suggesting the correct [inaudible 00:44:44] code.

We go through your carton count, volume pieces, how the value is done. We make sure everything is fair including the commodity, the origin destination. We even go in to; do you need a lift gate at the final destination? Does your warehouse have the access for a regular truck to come in or do you need a lift gate? If you have, do you live in a rural area if you are going to have it be delivered to your house? Will you have someone there to unload because you only have 2 hours free time. Then you start getting charges for holding up the truck driver, and the container or their truck.

We try to get as much information as we can on this, and then that is the generic first of, and then we start getting nitty gritty. We start taking you through the ocean freight? This is your cost. Do you want marine insurance? That’s insurance that covers you while you are at sea. Do you want additional insurance? Do you want warehousing? Do you want trucking? That’s talked about.

Now we have to talk about the Asia side. Does your China supplier have an export license if it’s going to be FOB terms because remember FOB means they get it all the way, and it’s to the ship. Your supplier has to clear it through China customs. Your supplier has to make sure the documents are correct, and in China they have to be licensed just like we have to be licensed in the United States. If not then we need to find somebody who is, that can offer that service.

Steve: Incidentally if you go Ex-Works, the responsibility then is on you to clear China customs, is that correct?

Pam: Yes, that is correct. We need to find out a little more, and then sometimes people don’t know. We will interact with the supplier at this point in time, and we will ask these questions, and keep the client in copy. Sometimes they get too in depth with the answers, and they get confused as far as what are we really trying to say or something especially if you’ve got a language barrier. Then we bring it on, and we go through and we take care of everything, make sure everything is taken care of even if we are not responsible for it.

We make sure that you are taken care of with the terms in China. We get it on the water, we bring it to the port, after the port we break it down. If it’s LCL, if it’s not LCL which is less than container load. If it is a full container, we will get a tractor; we will bring the container to our warehouse. We will take it apart at that point in time, unload it and then we can store it, or we send it on to the final destination.

Steve: Do you have warehouses at each port?

Pam: Not at each port, we have a warehouse in California, and we have a warehouse in Tampa. We are looking into a warehouse in Miami at this point in time. At this point our warehouse in California is more the storage and the traditional warehouse. The Tampa warehouse is more for bundling, shrink wrapping, maybe making something, putting a bow on it.

It’s a little more, what should I say, detailed, and whereas, I was thinking the traditional warehouse is your fork cleft, and you’ve got a bunch of boxes moving around. They can do, is it broken, is it damaged, but can that fork cleft driver really put some shrink wrap round a perfume bottle or a lotion and make it look as good as if it was on a Macy’s shelf, probably thinking not. That’s why we ended up with our Tampa warehouse.

Steve: Doe that imply then that people can ship their goods from China directly to you for some processing and then have you forwarded directly to Amazon’s warehouse?

Pam: Yes, most definitely.

Steve: Okay, I didn’t realize that was a service that you guys offered.

Pam: We do, when I say we are full service we are full service. We can pick it up. The only thing that I can’t do is I can’t pick your product, but everything else I can take care of it, and we can take what you want. We’ve actually improved some people’s product that has got into Amazon. Somebody used to put their product in like a little baggy, for lack of a better word. He folded it over and put a sticker on it, and that was his label, the danger warning and all that. Well when we took it to our Tampa warehouse because he just wasn’t getting the dollar value that he felt like he needed.

We took it our Tampa warehouse and said, “What can we do?” Rather than the 3 labels, and they weren’t always even, we made up an insert that bagged the product, so you could see it, and then we shrink wrapped it to where it did the like the image. Where it all sucks around the product, so that it was nice and neat rather than this zip lock bag. He is very happy; he has gotten his price up because it looks like it is an expensive product that it is. The product was being devalued based on the packaging, and our Tampa warehouse came up with that idea, and he is very happy.

Steve: Interesting, hey Pam, where can people reach you if they need to contact you? If they have any questions about the import process or anything like that?

Pam: You could reach me at, pam@hyclogistics.com, and then copy please my A team that will go to several people incase I’m out of town or away from my desk or helping someone else, and that would be ateam@hyclogistics.com.

Steve: Thanks a lot for your time today Pam. I learnt a lot especially about the air freight versus sea freight. I have actually never used air freight before; I didn’t even realize that that was an option actually.

Pam: Good, it’s a bright new world out there.

Steve: Yeah, and the disadvantages of LCL versus full container, I was not aware of those either, so I learnt a lot today.

Pam: Wonderful, wonderful well I would be happy to help you anytime.

Steve: Awesome, well thanks for your time Pam. Take care.

Pam: Thank you, bye bye.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Importing your goods from overseas for the first time can be quite intimidating, and hopefully today’s interview with Pam gave you some insights on what’s involved. If you have any questions you can always contact pam@hyclogistics.com and tell her I sent you.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode125. If you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.

If you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Got to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up there on the front page, and I will send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Autro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

124: How To Prevent Your Amazon Account From Getting Suspended With Cynthia Stine

How To Prevent Your Amazon Account From Getting Suspended With Cynthia Stine

Today I’m thrilled to have Cynthia Stine on the show. Cynthia is someone I met at the Import Summit last year and she runs a site called OnlineSalesStepByStep.com where she offers a variety of very unique services related to Amazon.

She’s has worked with hundreds of Amazon sellers over the years and she specializes in helping companies get out of the Amazon penalty box.

If you’re ever suspended, Cynthia will help you get unsuspended.

If a dirty seller is purposely trying to sabotage you, Cynthia can help.

If want to know all of the tips and tricks on how to keep your Amazon account clean, Cynthia is your woman.

Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • The most common reason why a seller gets banned
  • Some things to watch out to prevent getting banned
  • Evil things sellers are doing and what can you do about it
  • What you have to do to get reinstated
  • The primary thing that private label sellers selling FBA have to worry about

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. And if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six-day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiteherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Cynthia Stine on the show. Cynthia is someone I met at the Import Summer last year, and she runs a site called onlinesalesstepbystep.com, where she offers a variety of very unique services related to Amazon. She’s worked with hundreds of Amazon sellers over the years, and she specializes in helping companies get out of the Amazon penalty box.

If you are ever suspended, Cynthia will help you get unsuspended. If a dirty seller purposely try to sabotage you Cynthia can help, and if you want to know all the tips and tricks on how to keep your Amazon account clean, Cynthia is your woman as well. She also has a book out called Suspension Prevention: Get Reinstated and Protect your Amazon Seller Account, of which I own a coveted and personally signed copy. With that welcome to the show Cynthia, how are you doing today?

Cynthia: Hi, good morning?

Steve: Good morning. Helping people’s accounts get reinstated is very niche, and very random in my mind, so can you give us a quick background story on how you got started helping people get their accounts reinstated.

Cynthia: Sure, I’ve been an Amazon seller since 2010, and before that I was a business consultant. I’ve been doing crisis work, turnaround work, all kinds of communications work for over 25 years, and then I got to selling on Amazon and I wrote my first book about how to get started selling on Amazon, and as a offshoot to that I would do some consulting on the side. That was fun and few hours a months whatever, and in 2014 some of my clients started coming to me who had been suspended, and they said can you help us. I thought well I’ll do my best.

I started helping them get reinstated, and I saw a lot of different situations, and so in February of 2015 I put up my little e-shingle as it were, and I said hey I do this as well, I do reinstatements and I wrote a couple of blog post about it, and I mean wow, the doors just blew off. I had no idea that there was such a huge demand. I was by myself, in March of 2015, by this time last year I had brought out a business partner, and now at this time that I’m talking to you we have 7 people in the US, and 14 in the Philippines, and we are all working very hard to help our customers, our sellers keep their accounts clean.

I have sort of a maintenance and a preventative aspect of what I do. Then for those who are suspended, of course we get them reinstated, and so that’s and then somehow in, I don’t know I had no sleep last summer, somehow in the dead of night last summer I also wrote that book Suspension Prevention, and I did that because there were so many sellers who just had no clue what was going on, and why Amazon was doing this, because Amazon didn’t tell anyone. They didn’t put out a memo, they didn’t say here’s we are about to tweak the algorithm, and here’s what it means.

They didn’t do any of that, and they didn’t put anything on the dashboard for us to look at either. Most split sellers and most of my clients are very good sellers, they religiously check their dashboards everyday to make sure their metrics are in line with Amazon expectations. They would have these great metrics, green, green, 100, 100, and they were getting suspended, and they were bewildered and of course upset.

That’s what my book was about, was just trying to get people to see what was going on and help them be aware, so they didn’t have to be suspended to find out what was going on, and so that’s also why I’ve been speaking and out there is not to sell my book, because that’s not where I make my money. It is to help people get ahead of what could be a potential problem in their account. That’s the gospel according to Cynthia, and that’s what my team is all about, and we all feel the same way about it I guess, which is we’re all focused on helping sellers and 4 of us, consultants are sellers ourselves.

Steve: Okay, that was my next question; you are still selling physical products today?

Cynthia: Yes. Now, obviously I have automated my business 100%, and it’s much smaller than it was, because I just can’t give it – I mean Timothy Ferriss talks about the 4 hour work week. When it comes to selling on Amazon it’s more like a 1 hour work month, I just have not given it the time that I can, but it’s still very important to me to sell on Amazon, because as someone who has run several consulting companies over the years I know there’s a life cycle to them, and I want to be able to sell again one day when maybe this tuff dies out.

Steve: Have you ever been suspended yourself?

Cynthia: No. Luckily and honestly it would be a horror if I ever was, because everything that I teach my clients to do I make sure that my team is doing on my account as well. So we are very– We keep a really close eye on my tiny account.

Steve: Okay, I was just thinking it from the perspective of like in order to know it works you should get suspended yourself and then get reinstated, but…

Cynthia: No, no, no I don’t– all that we do is just give me even greater empathy for my clients, but I actually have seen hundreds of different ways to get suspended, which is I put them in my book and I talk about them, and I write about things in my blog. What happens is Amazon will, they had a huge tweak to the algorithm last spring, but since then they’ve had little tweaks every couple of weeks, and I know they have done something new, because we’ll get a rush of sellers who all look the same.

Like there was one week where we had like 5 sellers who sold pearl jewelry. [inaudible 00:07:41] we hadn’t had any jewelry in quite a while, and then all of a sudden we get 5, all for the same reason. I’m like oh tweaked the algorithm I see, and that’s how it goes, so like we had a whole bunch of people suspended for improper product review programs.

Steve: Okay, I want to touch in all this stuff eventually yeah.

Cynthia: Okay yeah. Again, it was like oh, oh Amazon has tweaked the algorithm, and so well we had had sellers all along who were getting suspended for product reviews, but when you get a bunch in a row you know that there’s something going on. So the tweaking of the algorithm as I call it is something that goes on constantly at Amazon.

Steve: One of my biggest fears is waking up one day to my Amazon account dead in the water, and so you mention a bunch of reasons so far about how you can get suspended. What are some of the things that have been happening recently on why people have been getting suspended, and I also want to touch on how you can prevent all that stuff from happening.

Cynthia: Okay, well so basically some of the things that we’ve seen just in the last few weeks is we’ve seen people getting suspended for their product review programs.

Steve: Okay, let’s talk about that.

Cynthia: Yeah, so let’s start with that. What happened a few weeks ago was that sellers were getting suspended for their product review programs, and they were actually naming names in the suspension, which I have never seen before. They named AMZ Trader Tracker, anyway they named them, and the reason for the suspension. I was just shocked because I have never seen that before. Then basically what they are coming down on sellers for in this case was excessive giveaways, there was too many giveaways, and then…

Steve: What does excessive mean?

Cynthia: Well wouldn’t it be nice if they would tell us that, because here’s what we’ve discovered by trial and error, it’s less than 20%. If you are selling 100 units a day for example, you can’t give away 20 or more products a day, so this is what we’ve just learnt by trial and error. So I have my clients experimenting with between 15% and 20% to see if we can find the magic number in the algorithm, but anyway so you have to give away less than 20% of your volume of sales, and that’s…

Steve: What does that mean if you are first starting out, then you have no sales, no sales history at all?

Cynthia: Right, and that’s a different case, so what we’ve seen– we haven’t seen anybody shut down for excessive sales who is just launching a product. These are guys who have been selling this product day in and day out, months, years and they just constantly do product review giveaways, right just the concept part of the marketing campaign. Amazon knows you are going to do a big [inaudible 00:10:40] to launch a product. I don’t know where the cut off is where it stops being a launch, and starts being a pattern, do you know what I mean?

Steve: Yeah sure.

Cynthia: But I would say from what I’ve seen anyway, I think most people can feel pretty comfortable having a big push in the first month of a new product, that Amazon is not going to– as long as they see that this starts converting to real sales, they will understand what you are doing. If most of the so called sales of your product are all giveaways and it doesn’t start to shift to real sales, then they are going to say that something is wrong, like maybe your product is crappy.

I do tell people if you are going to run a product review program, make sure that it’s a comprehensive plan, don’t just rely on getting reviews on the platform, you should be trying to promote and support your product on Facebook, on Pinterest if it’s a visual product, on everything you can think of Reddit, LinkedIn. Maybe not LinkedIn but you should really look at trying to get people to write blogs about it, and just do a sort of a traditional marketing campaign around that product, and build a fun base.

I think that’s just smart anyway, because anytime you can capture someone’s email off the Amazon platform, well they are yours for life, so you can the next time you launch a product why you can market to them. This just makes sense on every level, but it is hard work and people don’t want to do it, and so some of them they just focus on, okay I’m going to save all this money into a product review program. The other reason that they get…

Steve: Would you say that these large scale review programs are pretty much dead then?

Cynthia: No, what’s happening is they are changing, so AMZ Review Tracker, for example coincidentally after that week when so many sellers were suspended changed their policy. One of the policies that they– one of the things that they were doing that Amazon came down on was what we call super URLs.

Steve: Okay right.

Cynthia: Manipulation of the platform is another reason that people were getting suspended, and that’s again where you try to force the browser experience by putting in the keywords into the URL, so they are not naturally going out to the platform and looking for your product, they are they are using specific keywords. Basically a lot of review programs have cut that out, because I think Amazon has spoken pretty clearly on that being against policy. That’s what they call manipulation of the platform.

There are other ways that people manipulate the platform, and one of them is to try to hide that the products were given away for free or for a dollar. If they don’t put the disclaimer that says, “Hey I got this product for – I did this count in exchange for an honest review,” they are not only violating Amazon’s policy, but they are violating FCC policy, and Amazon has a zero tolerance policy for this. What happens with my clients who were suspended is they have to do what I call confess and repent, and so they have to admit what they did wrong, and then they have to provide Amazon the list of the reviews that violated policy.

Steve: My goodness, okay.

Cynthia: Another violation that I see is people who do like a lot of these reviews, Facebook groups, or review programs, and I’m talking about the reviewers now. A lot of times they’ll go out and put a review up before they even receive the product, like the review will appear the next day, and that’s because they are obligated to write a review.

They are getting this product for cheap, and they are obligated to write reviews, so some of them are just highly efficient, and they just get it out there because they don’t give a crap about what they are saying. Amazon of course doesn’t like that either. I had a client recently where we had the spreadsheet, and it was just hundreds and hundreds of lines long of reviews that violate policy. Either because they were written too close to the purchase, or they didn’t use the disclaimer. And literally all those reviews are — I mean I’m talking hundreds maybe a thousand are wiped out. Because when Amazon gets that spreadsheet, they are going to remove all of them from my client’s products.

And they will most likely shut down the reviewer as well, which means they will remove all the reviews by that reviewer throughout the platform. So that means that I may wake up one day and suddenly a bunch of reviews are gone from my site. No, I’m not in trouble, but it’s because these reviewers were violating policy on somebody else’s account. So…

Steve: So what’s your policy on using review groups? Because I imagine a lot of review groups have people like this person who got banned, right? Like the reviewer I mean.

Cynthia: Yes, well and that’s the thing, so what — here is the thing. People think oh I’ll just do a group and it will be efficient and cheap and easy and all this stuff. But what you really need to do is keep track of the reviews that are written. You need to keep track of when they bought the product, when they wrote the review, if they complied with Amazon’s rules. So you still need to keep a track of it.

And I would say this for people who are doing large scale campaigns this is going to be a daily event. Where you are literally going to have to review your reviews, and then for violators go after them nicely, but immediately. And say, “Oh maybe you are thinking of a different product, because you reviewed our product and you haven’t even received it yet.” Or you have to say, “Oh I noticed that you didn’t include the disclaimer, could you please include the disclaimer.” So it becomes the seller’s job to police their own reviews. So you can’t abdicate that.

Steve: At any event that they don’t do what you are asking at least you have the record that you tried right, is that the idea?

Cynthia: Yes, and this is where it gets a little effie, because I haven’t quite figured out like what the seller should do. So let’s say that the problem is — I mean here is my belief that the seller should turn in the reviewer if they don’t comply. So if you send them a friendly email or write them a note, and they don’t comply within a couple of days, you are obligated to turn them in to Amazon.

Steve: How do you do that?

Cynthia: Basically I would either — this is another thing I haven’t quite figured out. I would probably just send them email to seller performance.

Steve: Okay that’s interesting. So you are having your clients do all these things now, like review all the reviews and proactively…

Cynthia: Well we are starting to. Right now there is nothing that makes it really easy right now. I know Seller Labs has a product that’s coming out, but they are launching very soon, which I think will really help automate this process. It will work a lot like their Feedback Genius where you will be notified when you get a product review. And you can filter it if you just want to see the negative reviews, right? Most of my clients who are running review programs; they are going to want to see all of their reviews, because again they have to check them for compliance.

This is a service that we are starting to offer our clients where we do the TDS checking everyday part, and it’s I guess in beta if you want to put it that way. But yeah it changes because now Amazon has clearly said the seller is responsible. So if the reviewer doesn’t follow the rules the seller is the one who can lose their account.

Steve: Interesting, so let’s switch gears a little bit, like so we talked about review groups and reviews. But let’s say you are not participating in review groups and you are getting your reviews kind of organically. What are some — and let’s say you are not doing anything black hat, like you are just a typical Amazon seller following the rules. What are some of the reasons that you’ve seen those types of people get banned?

Cynthia: For their review programs?

Steve: Not for review, let’s say they are not participating in review programs, they are doing everything by the book, but then one day they get banned. What are some of the common reasons for that happening?

Cynthia: Oh sure okay, so a lot of reasons why sellers have been getting suspended since last spring relate to product quality. This is the hidden metric that I talk about because there is nothing on your dashboard that measures your product quality metrics. There is nothing that says here is the acceptable number you sold as new or not as described, or not as advertised that you are allowed to have before we shut you down. So it’s really tough and that’s why we created our get clean stay clean services was to help our clients stay ahead. And we are very, very conservative because honestly it doesn’t take very many some of these for them to shut you down.

Steve: How many does it take actually; can you give me an idea?

Cynthia: I wish I could do that, because it does seem to vary, again it’s an algorithm. So it is based somewhat on how things are going in your account, and what type of claim it is. Like inauthentic, they’ll pretty much check any counterfeit, they’ll shut down your listing every complaint pretty much.

Steve: Really, so one complaint will do it?

Cynthia: For a listing yes. So for the account, for as new as we can tell it looks like you are allowed to have maybe three or four before your account goes down. So yeah there is like a zero tolerance policy about this, which is why I tell people if you get a warning from Amazon or they shut down a listing, you need to respond immediately. Even if you have no intention of selling anymore of that product, you have to respond to it as if it were a suspension, because otherwise these are going to account against you.

So a lot of my clients who were suspended for these product quality reasons, part of their problem was they just sort of let them go, right? They would look at them and they would either just stop selling that product or whatever, but they didn’t realize that this wasn’t the only warning they were going to get. And they didn’t realize that how serious Amazon takes it right.

Then here is the thing, a lot of them don’t know what it means. So if I say to you, you sold as new and you buy wholesale, they are like what you are you talking about, all my stuff is new, right? The thing is Amazon knows that, they know your stuff is new, but what they are telling you is that when the buyer opened their happy Amazon box, and looked at the product they thought it looked worn, used, abused, dirty, to one maybe the corners were crushed in.

I mean it’s hard to say, but they looked at it and it looked like something that had been sitting in garage sale somewhere versus a brand new product, right? In Amazon you can’t do like eBay where you say your new inbox, right? You can’t do that, you either is perfectly sparkly, brand new and beautiful, or its not and that’s it. Like there is no, yeah it’s all green on the outside, but it’s still new, no. You would have to say that that was used good, right? So that’s where…

Steve: So is that usually a packaging problem then for these people?

Cynthia: Yeah, it’s usually a packaging problem, it might be a shipping problem, it might be something like that. It may be weared at getting in the inventory. So I have a lot of clients who buy from liquidators, right? So obviously these products that they are buying have been sitting on various shelves for a long time. Then they get thrown into a big truck, someone buys the track load. So by the time that box gets up to Amazon it does look like it’s been around.

And it maybe still [inaudible 00:23:30] and all of that, but it doesn’t look nice. So one of the things I tell my sellers is you have to make sure that what you are sending out is pristine. You can’t just throw anyhow thing up there on Amazon and think it’s going to sell. Now if you have some mumpy bumpy dirty dusty boxes, and it’s in a category where you can sell used, then sell it as used and you will be fine.

But the other thing that’s taking down a lot of sellers, so besides the physical quality of the box, yes things like inauthentic. And well that’s really more of a policy violation than a product quality issue; they tend to go hand in hand. And a lot of times people will again open their box, and they’ll think this is a piece of crap. And they’ll think maybe it’s brutally either fake or it’s not real. So they’ll make a claim to Amazon that they are returning it, because it’s not real right, or it’s fake or whatever. And that gets sellers in trouble.

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. Now I love running all of my online businesses, but do you know what I hate doing the most? Bookkeeping. Seriously keeping track of receipts and expenses is easily the worst aspect of entrepreneurship hands down. And here is where Bench Accounting comes in.

Bench is an online bookkeeping service that pairs you with a team of dedicated bookkeepers who use simple and elegant software to handle everything for you. They’ll collect all of your financials and turn them into nice concise financial reports. So no more data entry, no more number crunching and no more headaches, plus it’s reasonably priced. And the best part is that you can get 20% off of your first six months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off of your first six months. Now back to the show.

Steve: Does that apply to people selling other people’s products, or does that apply to private label as well?

Cynthia: Well yeah any product. So I often have private label clients who were shocked that they are getting inauthentic claims or even counterfeit. Because they are like wait a minute, I manufacture my own, I am the manufacturer, right? How can they think this, I am the only one selling this on Amazon. But that tells them that they have a product quality problem. Like for some reason why somebody gets the box or the bottle or whatever and they think this isn’t the real thing.

And sometimes there really is a product defect. I mean I think about people who private label shampoo for example. If the formulation isn’t just right, or sometimes if the bottle isn’t sealed properly, then people are thinking, hey this is like — this has been previously opened right, because it doesn’t have the seal on the top. And technically the rule says, Amazon rule says we have to have that seal on the top of the bottle, right? It can either be around the outside, a little plastic [inaudible 00:26:45] crappy thing. Or it can be the actual cap under the cap, but we are supposed to have that.

I can’t tell you how many clients of mine have gotten in trouble with inauthentic claims or counterfeit claims. Because or even used sold as new because they didn’t have that seal. Or they were trying to just sort of seal it themselves with a piece of tape. And I thought are you insane or whatever. So again if you are going to manufacture your own, make sure that it’s properly packaged.

Steve: Does that mean that you have your clients monitor their refund reason, like if there is a refund request?

Cynthia: Yes, so these are the hidden matrix. What I tell my clients to do and what we do for them if they hire us to do this work, is we go and the first thing we look at is the imperfect orders report, which is right under the perfect orders on the dashboard basically. So if you open that page under performance, the one that has all the greens and stuff, and you go to the right hand side and go most of the way down the page, as I’m saying this is the most hidden report I have ever seen. There you’ll see this imperfect orders report.

And the reason it’s important is because this is the roadmap. I always sort if by acing so that I can understand which acings are building up problems, right? And Amazon considers imperfect anything that the client or the buyer has to contact you for. So if they email you, if they got to return/refund, if they file A to Z claim.

If they do any of those stuff it’s an imperfect order right? Because in Amazon’s world perfect is, they buy the product, they love it, you never hear from them again, right? We are all happy, and as a bonus if they leave you positive feedback or write a product review that even better, right? You get bonus points for that. So that’s where I start because that chart where you put down into a spreadsheet, it tells you where the problems are.

Like they say well okay so for this acing where I have 10 issues, I see three people left me negative feedback. Two people sent me an email, I had all these returns, and I had an A to Z claim, I’m just making that up. But then I know where to go work, because I’ll say what’s happening with this acing, why am I getting all these returns? So you really need to try to read what’s happening, right? Oh wow it looks like it’s getting torn up on its way to the buyer, right? They are getting torn packages or this or that.

Once you know what’s happening you can fix it and that’s what Amazon wants you to do, which is why I have my clients look at these reports every week. Because that way you can catch things before they get big, and before they get to Amazon’s level of attention. Now the other reports are the returns report, FBA merchant fulfilled, and of course negative feedback.

And now for my clients who are doing product review programs, they should be reviewing their product reviews if not every day at least once a week. Because again if somebody is violating policy you can let it sit up there for very long, you need to take proactive action quickly. So that’s the thing, you can’t wait and do it once a month. And by that time you will be suspended for excessive reviews, or manipulating the platform or whatever. So that’s a lot of work like…

Steve: Yeah it sounds like a lot of work.

Cynthia: Yeah, and so we try it to make it easier for our clients, but that’s what we do for a lot of our clients, and we are monitoring this for them. We are taking care of the issues. If we see a lot of a particular kind of claim on the account, we’ll tell our clients. And then one of the things that we do is we also email all of our negative returns. So everybody who returns a product for a negative reason, not a typical changed my mind, didn’t like the color. But you sell this new, inauthentic, or one of those negative reasons, we send them an email and we do this for our clients every week.

We send them an email and say, oh we are really sorry this didn’t work out for you, can you tell us what we could have done to make this a better experience. So it’s like very open ended, but and what we’ve been trying to do of course is to get real feedback that we can maybe act on and figure out why are they returning this.

Like I had a client yesterday where when we were examining why they were getting so many returns on a particular product, it was a pair of tights. And everyone was saying it was not as described, and you’re like shit, it’s pair of tights. I mean but when we looked at the listing we could see where the confusion was coming from. And it was literally a color switch on the listing.

So I said to them, you need to fix those listing before you sell anymore of these tights. And they are like, well we sell thousands of these, and we’ve only got X percentage of returns, and I said I understand that. I said if these were normal sort of defective returns, change my mind returns, I wouldn’t care. I said but they are not, these are negative returns, you have to fix these. So we had them close down their listing, and now we are working with the [inaudible 00:32:10] department to fix the listings, and then they can turn it back on again.

So that’s why I’m saying it becomes an ongoing like sloping task to try and figure out what’s really going on. I told them if you — if we can’t figure it out, you are going to need to call these guys, some of these returns. Like even though we email them, only a few will respond, you know what I mean. So I’m like you have to be more aggressive, because this is a problem and you are going to lose your ability to sell this product that you are selling thousands of every month. So like you get to smile with them my friend.

Steve: What’s the usual progression, will that listing get suspended first, or will the account get suspended?

Cynthia: Again it depends on the status of the account to begin with. So if they don’t have much going on, and this is just kind of a one off, the listing will get suspended. But here is the thing, with this particular client they already had other listings suspended for similar reasons. So I’m like you can’t afford to get anymore of these, because that’s the thing. When Amazon sees that you have several listings suspended for similar reasons, they think you are not paying attention.

And the other thing that’s hard for my clients to grasp right away, especially my high volume sellers is, if they find a problem. Like in this case it was a listing problem, and I think we should be able to get it cleaned up pretty quickly. But if they find a problem and they fix it, they have to fix it for every product they sell. Like you can’t just keep building up not as described on your products, you can’t.

Amazon is like, hey you haven’t learned anything, right? You just can’t do it as it comes up, you need to have a plan in place that you are constantly looking at your listings and making sure your products match. And then when something shows up on your report, like oh my gosh we’ve had three returns in the last 60 days for not as described. Then you can of course drill down real hard on that one, because something is going on there. But you don’t want to have — you don’t want to keep having the same problem over and over again and having get to a level where Amazon pays attention.

Steve: Will the imperfect orders report disclose most of this stuff, like you should know like way ahead of time when something wrong is potentially going to happen, right?

Cynthia: Yes, what the imperfect orders report will show you is the acings that are building up problems. So again if you see 10 imperfect orders, it doesn’t mean that they are all negative returns, it just that they are imperfect. But then it’s like a roadmap like I said then you go look at why are these product being returned. And again if they are just saying oh it wasn’t quite the shade of blue I needed, or stuff like that.

Then you are like don’t worry about it. But if you start to see — so that’s why you have to go look at your returns as well. The two reports work together, and you have to look at your negative feedback of course, we should anyway. But again there is valuable clues in there. And what people don’t realize is that Amazon, when they are searching your store or whatever for trigger words; this is what the algorithm does. It searches all your buyer messages, it searches negative feedback, it searches returns, A to Z claims, everything.

So I had a client who had a listing shut down where the buyer literally said, I know this isn’t fake, but it seems really dirty, right? I know it isn’t fake; he got shut down for counterfeit. Because the word fake was in there, in that case it was just the listing, we got it back. And we pointed out the obvious. Because again the algorithm is that’s a robot, right? It’s trained to do certain things; it’s not trained to think thoughtfully about it, like oh he said not fake.

Steve: Great, so let’s talk about that a little bit. Because I know there is a lot of – it’s a very competitive world out there, and a lot of people are doing this maliciously. So what are the things that you can do when people are purposely trying to sabotage you?

Cynthia: Dirty seller tricks? Oh my God I hate dirty seller tricks. The latest story dirty seller trick, and they do seem to go kind of into charts or waves. I don’t know if people are just picking up on these on Facebook or what. But they try to do; you do see this in waves. So the latest wave of dirty seller tricks that we’ve seen has been claims of copyright infringement, okay? So we are all familiar with the occasion of getting the Cs into Cs letter through the platform. And you always have to sit and wonder are they serious, are they real, or is this just bullshit, right? But the dirty seller trick that I am talking about is where they will actually file the claim with Amazon, which by the way means that they are singing under oath and apparently a perjury that this is true.

So I can’t believe the balls on some of these guys, but they will file this claim saying these sellers are violating my whatever. My pattern, my copyright whatever, and then of course everybody gets shut down on that listing. Or they say this guy is the only one selling on that listing right, because he is the rights holder. So then what happens is the sellers are like trying to resolve the issue with the rights holder, and the rights holder just ignores them, right? Because they know that these guys are not going to get back on the listing unless the rights holder sends an email to Amazon saying this issue has been resolved.

So this is the latest one that I have seen, it’s caused a lot of heartache. And we have been able and I’ll just say this for anyone listening out there who thinks this might be a good idea. That what we do is we get that, we reverse the tables on them. So for my clients who are willing to fight, we reverse the tables and I have got a number of sellers suspended for pulling this particular dirty seller trick. It’s against the Amazon policy, if you lie on that forum, they take it very seriously. But anyway I have just seen it over and over again over the past couple of months. And then I can say it will tie up a very lucrative acing for a long period of time.

And sometimes you have to hire a lawyer to get it, and even with a lawyer it doesn’t necessarily get resolved. Because here is the thing, if you say to Amazon oh Amazon I have tried and tried and tried to reach this guy, and he is not returning my calls and my emails. They’ll be like, oh too bad, resolve it with them, they just stay out of it, right? They are not going to get involved. So we’ve sometimes had to — our clients have had to hire attorneys and things like that to get that listing back.

So it’s worth it to them, but even my clients who just perpetuate like they are like oh, well I didn’t mean violate trademark or whatever, or I don’t want to deal with it, like I’m not making enough sales off of this to– I’ll just walk away. But again, if that company does not send the notice to Amazon saying this issue is resolved, then this black mark stays on my client’s record. It shows that he’s not resolving this issue. I have to help them somehow get Amazon to undertake their account that they did everything in their power to resolve this, and that they are no long selling the product.

You would think that an email would be enough, but it’s not. That’s where I get really angry at this particular dirty seller trick, because it costs my clients money even when they are more than willing just to walk away.

Steve: I see. When you say suspended like what is the typical reinstatement time when you are successful?

Cynthia: Okay, from the– you have 17 days once you are suspended to turn in your plan of action. I usually very much, I mean depending on when our clients come to us, it’s much faster than that. But you have 17 days. The first time you turn in something, sometimes they reinstate you right away, and you are done. It’s great. I’ve had clients reinstated in 20 minutes.

Steve: Really? Okay.

Cynthia: They are very happy. By the way this does not include last summer which was a night mare. Amazon was taking 3 weeks to get back to people. I’m talking about today. Today, ever since I would say like December, we can generally get a response within a day or two. What they’ve been doing lately is what we call the plan or the store. What happens is these guys in India, that’s what seller performance is, they have metrics as well. They have to go through 17 of these an hour, if they fall back with one every 3 minutes.

If they fall behind, what happens is they’ll start to cheat, right? Because it so fast to simply send an email back saying, it’s a form letter. Thank you very much, but we still need more information about X even though you just send them a plan of action for X. And so we recognized what this was last December, and it’s still going on.

Our clients would get frustrated. They will wonder if we knew what we were doing. I’m like, “Yes, yes it’s just the plan. Nobody has read your plan yet?” I mean, literally they have not read it. They are just cheating. They are like thanks, send them back up, thanks, send them back up. We’ll usually play that game a few times, and we’ll send it back in. We might tweak it a little bit, but we just basically keep sending it back in, and if that doesn’t work then we’ll escalate it.

Steve: What does escalation mean?

Cynthia: Well, we have other email addresses inside Amazon that kind of go above seller performance.

Steve: Interesting, and these are Amazon employees or?

Cynthia: Yeah, yeah, these are the– there is an escalation team.

Steve: Okay.

Cynthia: That’s when you are not getting satisfaction from seller support, or seller central or seller performance, seller performance. Yeah, they have bosses too. Then there’s always the ultimate last resort which is writing a Jeff Bezos letter. I always caution people that that’s a last resort, because his people can take weeks to get back to you. You don’t want that. I mean that is a last resort.

What you want is to get a faster response by working within the system, and usually if we just escalate it that usually takes care of it. My clients are like, “How do you know they are not reading it?” I say, “You will know when they read it.” It’s true, because as soon as they read it, they reinstate them. That’s the thing. Or even if they do legitimately have an additional question or something, the email you get back is very different. It’s not the [inaudible 00:44:06]. The answer to your question, this process can take anywhere from 20 minutes to a couple of weeks.

Steve: Couple of weeks? Wow, okay.

Cynthia: Depending on Amazon. That’s the thing, we’ve seen some weeks where we’ll have 10 punts going on at a time. It’s driving us crazy, our clients are going crazy, we are just like sending it back and sending it back in with an escalating and blah, blah, blah. Our process, in terms of punt escalation, Jeff letter is about a business week four, five days, five, you know again getting the answers back from them that all that can add some additional time.

All I can say to my clients who are very frustrated by this is it’s still so much better than last summer where we wouldn’t even get the first answer for three weeks. Like I said, so usually I can get people reinstated quicker in a week or two, and sometimes the same day, sometimes the same day.

Steve: I’m curious what happens to the dirty sellers that file these false claims, because Amazon usually will just ban you first right, before getting your testimony. I still really hope that these malicious sellers are getting punished. Do you have any insight into that?

Cynthia: Yes, they are if they work with me, because first we get our clients reinstated. Then, we go after the dirty seller and we file a policy violation against them. That’s the thing, and I’m really good at writing policy violations.

Steve: What does that entail exactly?

Cynthia: If you go into seller central help, and you go to that page where it’s like why are you contacting us basically? There’s like another and under there you can file a policy violation against another seller. And so what I usually do is I keep it very factual. I ask Amazon to look into it, and to help us and…

Steve: Will you say that this seller purposely did this or like– I’m just kind of curious like how you word it in such a way even if you don’t have like all the evidence, right?

Cynthia: Right. A lot of times we won’t. That’s exactly what we say is that we don’t have the ability to investigate this, but you do, because Amazon knows everything that happens on their platform. So what we will just do is we’ll put the case before them, and will say it is our suspicion or our belief that this seller never intended to respond, or never intended to work with us to resolve this issue, and that it was in fact a tactic to kick competition off this listing.

Then you always have to put it in terms of the buyer experience, which diminishes the buyer experience by limiting choice and also raises the price and– I’ve said different things like that. But basically you’re always going to put it out there why this impacts the buyer.

Steve: Got it.

Cynthia: Not, “Those guys we hate them. They are mean.” You can’t do that. You have to really focus on why this is against Amazon policy, and why it affects the buyer. Another dirty seller trick that I see a lot is someone will buy a bunch of your product, and you are like, “Yeey, I’m in the money.” Then they will return all of them on the same day, and they will have a negative reason for returning them. And so because the part of what the algorithm looks at is velocity.

If they suddenly– if you’re one person who bought 10 units, but if they see 10 units coming back on the same day, they go into danger mode. Like, the algorithm freaks out, and you can get suspended just because there’s velocity on that acing. Like that acing might get immediately suspended. That’s a dirty seller trick that they do. So you can explain to them, no, it’s just one order.

Again, when– you know one order, 10 items. This is a trick. If you see it once, you know. If you see it a couple of times, two or three times, and it starts to look like a pattern, that’s a dirty seller trick, and that’s where you need to go and report it to Amazon, and you can say, “It is our belief that they never intended to keep this purchase, but it was bought specifically for the purpose of damaging our metrics. Because they straw our purchase,” and things like that. That works really well.

Steve: It does, interesting.

Cynthia: Oh yeah.

Steve: Even if they just wrote to– like if I was doing this intelligently I will just have different people do this, right?

Cynthia: Yes, and that’s why it gets harder to detect. But again, if you haven’t gone along selling, selling, selling, and then all of a sudden you get a bunch of attacks. I have a client this has happened to where his competitor thought they were very clever, because they were having people buy from all across the country and do this. Now you may think, how did he know that they were working together? Well because in this case they were really stupid. All of them used the exact same language, I mean exact.

It was honestly cut and paste including typos, and they used the exact same picture. That never happens. You know what I’m saying? Like they didn’t even take their own picture of the product. And then the picture that they took of the product wasn’t even of the product that they purchased. It was a related product. This was just a bungled job. In that case it was pretty easy to prove, but again, if you see a pattern, you can say to Amazon who loves patterns. “We’ve seen this pattern and we’re wondering if perhaps this might be going on. Could you please look into it?” What Amazon will do is if it’s a really strong case, they’ll take you down. But maybe it’s not very strong, maybe it’s a [inaudible 00:50:29], and then they’ll send you a warning.

You may wonder how do I know this? I have had clients who’ve had this warning in their performance notifications. I said, “What the hell! You want me to represent you and you do dirty seller tricks.” We had to have a little conversation first. That’s– anyway, I know that Amazon does this. They even punish buyers by the way. People don’t realize this, but we saw a rush of buyers losing their buying accounts. And when you lose your buyer account, if you are also a seller, you lose that as well.

Steve: Nice.

Cynthia: This is for all the people who abuse Amazon’s returns policy, and they have too many returns. In case you are wondering how many returns you are allowed, by the way these are free returns. If you are paying for the returns, you can have as many as you like. But if you are claiming a reason always just so you can get the free return, beware because it’s a very limited amount. Again when Amazon sees velocity, they see that it’s a habit.

I mean if you have one free return a year, you are going to be fine. But if you are having one every month, you are out of there. And they are not going to wait for you to use up all your free returns. Basically what I heard which is only hearsay, but I heard that you get like 26 in a lifetime, 26 free returns. After that, that’s it. You don’t get anymore.

Like I said though, if you were getting one a year, and you were buying lots of other products and not returning it or paying for the return, then they are not going to like kick you off once you have 26 years from now. But if they see there’s a pattern that is theft.

Steve: Is it a violation to leave a review without a disclaimer as a buyer? Or is that the seller’s responsibility?

Cynthia: The seller is held responsible. The buyer is also responsible. And so again what will usually happen is you will get the warning from Amazon saying, “Okay now look, you need to do this disclaimer as an FCC regulation blah, blah, blah. You get one chance, and that’s it.” That’s why with all these most review programs, they are very good about telling their people that they have to do the disclaimer. But what they are not good at is policing it. They may say, don’t forget the disclaimer, but they are not out there really checking these reviews to make sure that they are.

Steve: Well, that takes a lot of work.

Cynthia: Yeah. And I’m saying most of these programs, because some of them actually do. Some of them, so if you are looking at a product review program, that would be one thing to look for to see if they actually police the reviews, and make sure that they do leave the disclaimer.

Steve: Okay, hey Cynthia, we’ve been chatting for a while, and I have to be honest with you, after talking with you, I don’t feel as comfortable selling on Amazon.

Cynthia: Well, that’s because I showed you a bunch of stuff you didn’t know. And so it’s scary, because now you are asking yourself what else don’t I know.

Steve: That’s correct. Yes absolutely.

Cynthia: Yeah, actually you know a lot, and that’s why I want to tell you and anybody listening to this is you now know a lot that you can do to protect yourself. My hope is now that you’ve been forewarned, you are forewarned, and you will never have to hire me professionally.

Steve: Incidentally, a lot of what we have talked about today is actually in Cynthia’s book and she covers all this stuff in a lot more depth in her suspension prevention book. Cynthia, I learned a lot just from talking to you today. Where can people find you should they need these services that you offer?

Cynthia: I have 2 websites. One is very simply suspensionprevention.com. That’s focused on obviously my reinstatement services. Then I have a blog onlinesalesstepbystep.com. And by the way in my blog, a couple of times a month I’m writing on this topic constantly. It’s a good place to just sort of check out what’s new and what’s going on. Those are my two websites and both of those sites which I’m in the process of sort of merging. In both those sites is you can find our services there. You can sign up online to get started with us.

Steve: Okay, and then if you end up finding that your account is suspended at like 5:30 am, I will be posting Cynthia’s cell phone number in case you are desperate.

Cynthia: No. I was telling Steve earlier, I had to buy, not buy; I got an app for my phone that turns off all the sounds between certain hours just so I wouldn’t hear all the middle of the night texts and phone calls coming in from my clients and prospects, because I need my sleep.

Steve: Yeah, absolutely. I can imagine that the people calling you are probably quite desperate and in great need of help.

Cynthia: Yes definitely.

Steve: All right Cynthia. Thanks a lot for coming on the show. This was great. I’m sure everyone is going to love it, thank you.

Cynthia: Thanks for having me. Bye.

Steve: Take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. Amazon is getting more and more cut throat every year. With other people trying to sabotage your listings and Amazon constantly changing the rules, you really have to monitor your account in order to make sure you are obeying their terms of service. If you ever get suspended, make sure you call Cynthia Stine.

For more information about this episode, go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode124. If you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It’s by far the best way to support the show. Please tell your friends because the greatest complement that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

If you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to Mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course immediately via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

123: How To Raise 9.1 Million Dollars On KickStarter With Zach Smith Of Funded Today

123: How To Raise 9.1 Million Dollars On KickStarter With Zach Smith Of Funded Today

Today I’m thrilled to have a very special guest on the show, Zach Smith. Zach is the founder of a company called Funded Today and he’s helped hundreds of startups achieve success with their crowd funding campaigns.

For example, he helped raise over 9.1 million to launch the popular travel jacket from Baubax. And chances are if you are on Facebook, you probably saw an ad for it because it was a pretty cool product.

In fact, this jacket became the most funded clothing project in the history of crowdfunding and one of the top 5 most successful Kickstarters of all time.

Zach is a real down to earth and easy going guy and today he’s going to teach us the secret to launching a successful crowdfunding campaign.

What You’ll Learn

  • Zach’s motivations for starting his business.
  • How much impact an agency like Funded Today can have on a campaign versus doing it yourself.
  • How to launch a successful Kickstarter
  • How to generate buzz for a kickstarter.
  • Why Zach is able to scale a campaign so incredibly well.
  • How to develop a large audience and reach many people.

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, and if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes. And if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have a very special guest on the show, Zack Smith. Now, Zack is the founder of a company called Funded Today and he’s helped hundreds of startups achieve success with their crowdfunding campaigns. For example he’s helped raise over $9.1M to launch the popular travel jacket from Baubax. Chances are if you are on Facebook you probably saw an ad for this jacket because it was a pretty cool product. In fact this jacket became the most funded clothing project in the history of crowdfunding and one of the top 5 most successful Kickstarters of all time.

Anyway, I met Zack at the import summit last year as we were both speakers. He’s a real down to earth and easy going guy. Today he’s going to teach us the secrets to launching a successful crowdfunding campaign. And with that, welcome to the show Zack. How are you doing today man?

Zack: I’m doing very well Steve, thanks for having me.

Steve: Yeah, give us a quick background story about how you started Funded Today and how you came up with the idea in the first place.

Zack: Yeah, I came home from serving in an LDS church mission and a guy that I knew had been very successful during that time. He was working in the investment industry and I said, “Hey can I come and mess around with you and just see what you are doing.” He said, “Sure.” And he took me under his wings. This was about a decade ago.

I started seeing what he did. He got excited about some of the stuff that I was able to do, because I was like a go getter hustling type of entrepreneur. He said let’s start a side business together and we did. That business became very successful, and we ultimately sold it a few years later. I took what I learnt from that and applied it as a business consultant.

As a business consultant I basically was doing internet marketing related strategies for all kinds of different clients all over the world. Well, one particular client who happened to live where I am from in [inaudible 00:03:02] in Utah area, said, “We can’t afford your rates but there’s thing called crowdfunding, Kickstarter.” Then he goes, “Have you heard of it?” Now at the time I actually hadn’t. They said, “Well how about we do this, we’ll pay you a percentage of all the money you raise and we’ll launch our new project,” it was called the RooSport 2.0, if you want to look it up, “We’ll launch our new project on Kickstarter and we’ll give you a percentage on it.” I said, “All right.” I was in a pretty good financial position at the time. I said, “Let’s try it out.” I did.

In the next 30 days, we raised $115,000 for a project that wasn’t even raising $2,000 a month on their website before hand. It changed these people’s lives. Now they have a multimillion dollar business that’s done really well. That story spread because everybody saw this little RooSport running wallet take off and raise six figures in 30 days on a crowdfunding site and a lot of people wanted to know how they did it. From there, Funded Today was born. We suddenly had 10, 20, 30 people and we selectively picked those clients out and we continued to raise that money. Then as you mentioned in the introduction, we raised money for the Baubax travel jacket, contributing nearly $5M of his $9.1M raise. The rest is history.

Now everybody’s heard about Funded Today. If they are crowdfunding a project, chances are they probably have heard of Funded Today or are working with Funded Today. We had a joke last year that if you had a project that raised more than a million dollars on Kickstarter chances are Funded Today was the company behind it. It was almost true, like literally 90% of the campaigns that did really were on Kickstarter; Funded Today was the driving force behind that success.

Steve: Dude that’s awesome. That first project, did you front the money yourself for all of the promotion?

Zack: That’s right, and we continue to do that for the most part. If your campaign meets our marketing success criteria we front all of the costs. We act as a mini-bank or a mini-lender. In fact I was speaking at the Utah Crowdfunding Conference yesterday and a lot of people talked about how they don’t have money and that’s why they go to crowdfunding.

If you don’t have money in your campaign successful meaning it’s raising money as a good positive ROI, you need to spend money. You should raise as much money as possible on your Kickstarter or Indiegogo campaign is live but if you only have ten grand, or 20 grand in your name, you might spend that in a couple days and you might raise $40,000 $50,000 $60,000 $100,000 $200,000 on that spend but now you have no money to spend and you have a successful campaign. That’s where Funded Today comes in. We can front millions of dollars with our essentially unlimited lines of credit for clients to raise them as much money as possible during that crucial window of crowdfunding.

Steve: So can you comment on some of the impacts you’ve had on some of your campaigns of them doing it themselves versus when you stepped in.

Zack: Yeah, I would say, and it’s becoming less and less likely probably 60% of the campaigns Funded Today works with have already started to raise money. Baubax travel jacket is a great example. He’d raised $4.5M or so when he hired Funded Today. But he was stalling, he was slowing down and he wasn’t making any money on the money he was spending.

He was making money on PR, on media and things like that but when he was actually spending money to make money on channels like twitter and Pinterest and Instagram and Facebook, he was losing money. He told me actually in a text message a couple … Because I’ve always been telling people it was $60,000. He’s like, “No I actually spent $150,000 to raise $150,000.” Basically he’d spend a dollar and make a dollar and that’s not profitable at all because you’ve got your cost to get sold and Kickstarter fees and other fees.

He hired us and obviously the rest is history. We were able to turn it profitable for him and for our company. I’d say a lot of people raise money and then they reach a trough, they reach a value. It’s peak and troughs. It’s a huge spike at the first and then a plateau or deadness. We come on and we revive those campaigns or amplify efforts from existing successful campaigns. That being said, we’ve had a lot of success with prelaunch now meaning we work with people right from the beginning. We’ve had even success where we had a campaign called Freewaves out of Orlando Florida.

Another one of our very first campaigns we run, they hired us with only 100 hours left and we were able to save that campaign. With a $300,000 goal we raised them closed to $200,000 in the remaining hours of their campaign because Kickstarter’s all or nothing funding mean if you don’t raise all the money that you set your goal for you don’t get any of it and they had only raised a $100,000 or $200,000 and they had a $300,000 goal.

They had to raise 100,000 more in the just the last 4, 5 days of their campaign. We took a risk on that one and we were able to be successful because they had moderate success before us. I mean a $100,000 is nothing to be ashamed of. Crowdfunding, they just didn’t have the right marketing in place to match the great product that they had and that’s where Funded Today came in to save the day.

Steve: That implies that a Kickstarter, a successful Kickstarter, is a lot to do with your own personal marketing as opposed to just kind of relying on Kickstarter’s exposure. Is that accurate?

Zack: That’s so true. I’d say 5 years ago, and this is an anecdotal story. I had a friend named Ryan Crabtree, everybody’s probably heard of the crabby wallet if you are a Kickstarter or a crowdfunding guru. One of the first campaigns that did really, really well for wallets, raised $325,000. To this day, if you talk to Ryan and I’ve got this because he came over to my home and chatted for a couple of hours. Literally he said he did nothing to raise that $325,000 and he showed me his dashboard. I’ve seen all the traffic and referral resources. Literally, it’s all just Kickstarter.

That was 5 years ago, 4 years ago, I forget how long but several years ago. Nowadays if you put your campaign on Kickstarter even if it’s a Baubax travel jacket quality, you probably won’t raise very much money if any if you don’t have the right marketing to match the great product. It’s just not that way anymore.

Steve: Okay, that’s interesting then. If you go just based on that, and it’s all your own personal stuff, why even bother going with the Kickstarter, why not just set up your own landing page and get leads and pre-orders that way?

Zack: Another great question because the power of the crowd is actually still there. The key is, Kickstarter is a paradoxical vehicle in the sense that you might set a goal of $10,000 but until you hit that goal of $10,000, the crowd doesn’t necessarily consider it successful. By leveraging your friends and family, we call the triple F, friends, family and fools. People who back your project before you launch, you’ll get a little bit of a kick from Kickstarter organically. If your project resonates with that it will stay in the top. Kickstarter has an algorithm for popularity and based upon the total number of pledges you have, and the duration those pledges came in, and the intensity propensity those pledges have, your campaign will stay popular.

The number is getting higher but I’d say, 200 or 250 backers, if you can get those backers within the first 8 hours of your campaign, you might be one of the most popular projects on all of Kickstarter. One of the most popular projects in all of Kickstarter that’s suddenly put your project in front of millions of people. Those millions of people you are not going to be getting anywhere else. That’s the power the Kickstarter still has and that’s the power of crowdfunding.

Steve: Okay, you just had to reach that certain threshold until it goes viral essentially.

Zack: Correct. Now if your project is one of those projects that doesn’t last or maybe it lasts a little bit but keeps bouncing around and maybe it doesn’t stay top 50 on Kickstarter, that’s where you need to create a sort of consistency. Consistency is best achieved through paid media. Paid media means spending money to make money. That way you can generate the consistency necessary to stay in the top of Kickstarter and then harvest those people organically who are visiting Kickstarter every single day.

Steve: Okay, I read some articles about Funded Today and how you are able to reach billions of people to get the word out on campaigns, and I was just curious what percentage of that is paid ads versus like your own audience and versus your own list?

Zach: It’s becoming more and more our own internal list because at Funded Today we believe it’s best to own everything you possibly can. I’d say 2 years ago, it was more spending money to make money. Now we have a cash back program that’s really cool, that we have thousands of people a part of. We have audiences that are segmented and audiences, perhaps in our emailing list.

We have audiences that are segmented in terms of a wallet, in terms of a watch, in terms of travel, in terms of luggage, in terms of shoes, socks, clothes, boots, pretty much you name it. With the exception being video gaming, board games which are a huge part on Kickstarter and crowdfunding. We have access to more people interested in those sorts of products than any other company in the world. Probably than anybody in the whole world.

Steve: Okay, this is just something you developed over time, right?

Zach: Yap, that’s right.

Steve: Okay, and do you have remarketing pixels segmentation also?

Zach: Oh yeah.

Steve: Okay, so is it mainly Facebook or do you use AdWords and some of the other advertising platforms as well?

Zach: AdWords, the short answer is anywhere we spend money, we … Anywhere we spend money and it’s generating a positive ROI or at least break even for us but making money for the clients, then we spend money. That depends on every single campaign; we’ve had a lot of success on Pinterest believe it or not, for campaigns that are really visual.

We’ve had a lot of success on Instagram. In fact we just got done raising money for a guy named Joseph May for a Breton backpack, and his Breton briefcase backpack raised $250,000. A lot of that was actually from Instagram. It really resonated well with that crowd, but yeah we absolutely spent a lot of money on Facebook as well.

Steve: Was that on Instagram ads or do you just have a very strong Instagram account?

Zach: We have Instagram ads and then we have an influencer network. Meaning famous people, A B C D list celebrities, a lot of B and C meaning their borderline becoming mainstream famous but they are really internet famous. They’ll post for campaigns in exchange for either cash, the product, et cetera, and they’re part of Funded Today’s Cashback Network. They post for our campaigns, the campaigns that resonate with their brand, in exchange for some kickbacks.

Steve: Okay. Let’s say I’m just a regular Joe schmo. I want to do a Kickstarter; can you walk me through the process and best practices on how to raise the most money?

Zach: Yeah. The first thing you want to do is have a long-term vision in mind. I believe you can launch really quickly and that’s what I love about Kickstarter but I’d say you want to give yourself 90 to 120 days. You have the idea in your head, okay. Now what do I do? Hopefully we’re talking about you already have a product, is that what we bare assuming, you already have something you want to launch?

Steve: Yeah, is it necessary to have a prototype first of all?

Zach: Kickstarter, I feel like validates you more and wants to give you more love when they know you have something. That being said and again I don’t know if the rules have changed recently because I do feel like they’re gaining more and more strict in terms of prototypes and for good reason. Look at Coolest Cooler, they haven’t shipped still, but if you don’t have a prototype you can likely launch it, if not on Kickstarter, for sure on Indiegogo.

I personally like to see most of my clients with prototypes, and here’s why, you can ship those prototypes back and forth to all the different media and journalists and do PR tours before for prelaunch. Getting all these people excited about it and then they’ll post for you through embargo press the day you launch.

Steve: Okay, let’s assume we have a prototype then.

Zach: Okay, you have a prototype. Let’s say you are 120 days out. The first thing you want to do is you want to go on a media tour, and a media tour, you can do this by yourself or you can do this with an agency. We like to do a little bit internal and a little bit that we outsource, but the thing is about press it’s very political, it’s very much about who you know, and it’s very much about diversifying. A lot of people are like, “I love PRmediaNow or I love Proper Propaganda.”

Those are both pretty good firms, the issue is they may or may not work for you. Press has hit a mess and that’s why Funded Today doesn’t rely on press but if you’re going prelaunch, it make sense to get as many press people involved because they might know somebody at The Wall Street Journal and he might know somebody at the New York Times, and someone might know somebody at TechCrunch. If you have all these people helping on your campaign between then all, you actually might land a lot of press, but if you just …

Steve: If you know nobody then is there a particular strategy? Would you recommend hiring someone or what would you do?

Zach: If you know nobody and you have 120 days before your launch, why not spend the first month trying to figure out how to get press for yourself. Journalists love somebody that’s really passionate about their brand. It’s like the entrepreneur story; we even talked about with our paid media advertising. A lot of our advertisements we call them hero shots or founder shots or product shots and it’s basically if you invented a watch, it would be you wearing the watch, smiling looking at the camera or something. We find those do really well because people are like, “Oh look, this guy invented the watch and here’s a picture and here’s him.”

The same philosophy or behavioral psychology works with press as well. If they see that you are the one passionate about your product and you are then one literally emailing and trying to win a press, I think they resonate with that better sometimes than even having an agency. That being said, agencies sometimes have relationships, they don’t care about the, “Oh he’s the founder, he’s whatever.” They won’t necessarily give that more press events, they might just be like, “Oh yeah I know this guy, I’m going to post for this guy because we have such and such a relationship.”

Steve: Okay, in the very beginning, did you just go through and find names of editors who write about this stuff and just cold contact them?

Zach: That’s right yeah. I developed templates, I developed follow up. One of the best tricks and I teach this to every single person that works for our company is, “Hey just following up” I send them an email, a really good pitch on whatever the product might be, and then I wait 24 hours and if they haven’t said anything, “Hey John, hey Steve, hey Bill.” Whatever the name is, “Just following up.” That’s all I say.

You’d be surprised what the just following up email does, “Oh hey sorry I missed that, now I got to [inaudible 00:15:52]. It makes you look like a real person, it makes you look genuine, it makes you look like you are passionate about your product, and it makes it look like you weren’t just sending millions of people a pitch email. That you are actually passionate about following up and getting in touch with somebody who can help to write about your product.

Steve: Okay, sounds good, sounds good. Do you use any software to do this or is it just use a calendar?

Zach: We originally had Cision, we originally had Meltwater and these are big. I think they are the best types of PR media software you can have. It basically keeps an updated database of everything, but once you use those for a while, you have all the contacts and it doesn’t make sense to continue. At this point we have thousands and thousands of names, emails, phone numbers of pretty much anybody who’s ever written about crowdfunding. Our database is very extensive in the sense of who we know and our relationships are a lot better too with a lot of the journals and press that we work with.

Steve: Okay, let’s you’ve gone around; you’ve got a couple of press people on your side, what’s the next step?

Zach: The next step is to be very clear about your launch date. You want to make sure the press know to write about you on … Let’s say you are launching on today, today at 5 o’clock PM. I would like you to drop an article anytime within the first 24 hours after Friday April 29th at 5 o’clock PM Mountain Standard Time. Can I embargo you to do that for me Steve?

Steve: Okay.

Zach: Yes great, okay great. Here’s a couple of things, here’s a couple of images, here’s our media kit, here’s a few things I think you should see. Make sure your use this link, make sure you give them a link to your Kickstarter page because you’d be surprised how many times you get big press and they don’t include a link. It’s just devastating if they don’t link out to your project because now you get all these press and exposure from a huge site, even like The Wall Street journal and they don’t link to it. You get 500 clicks and you are like, “Oh my Gosh, I have only 500 clicks form The Wall Street journal. Well, it’s because they didn’t put a link into your article.

That’s the most important thing you can do with the press, is make sure you coach them, because for some reason it seems like either they know not to do that or they don’t like linking traffic. Whatever their strategy is, they don’t like to include a link and make sure you get that in writing that they’re going to put a link in it. Give them a link to write.

If your campaign hasn’t launched yet, one thing people don’t know and this is just a little bit of inside information, you can use the preview link on Kickstarter and that will transition into the real link. You’re like, “What’s my link, what link should I give them?” Just give them your preview link, and then that preview link will transition into the full link once your campaign goes live so you won’t have to be scrambling last minute to give all your press and journalists a link.

Steve: You mentioned media kit, what goes in that?

Zach: Media kit is your hero shots, your images of your product, a media PR, a press release, a contact information, you’re …

Steve: Okay, that includes videos of the product and stuff … ?

Zach: For sure.

Steve: Okay.

Zach: Whatever you want to say and I can give some example of some media kits as well if you want those after.

Steve: Yeah absolutely I will link to those. Cool, we got that set up, we’ve launched our campaign, we got some initial press, then what?

Zach: The other thing I would do if you haven’t and we’re still talking maybe, 90 days out now. You’ve got your press embargo, you got all that lined up. Start networking with other people that ran Kickstarter campaigns. Let’s say I’m running a boot campaign for some really nice high-end fashionable boots. Let’s say you are a person who launched a sock campaign that had 5000 backers a year ago.

“Hey Steve, I’m launching this boot campaign and I fell like your socks are their perfect compliment, would you mind if I linked out to your socks, like a week or 2 in? I’ve already got X and X and X lined up for press, I’m probably going to have thousands of backers here within a week or 2. So 2 or 3 weeks into my campaign, I promise I’m going to tell all my backers about your boots which will give you all kinds of traffic to your website since you probably are not making as much money anymore on your boots because you are not on Kickstarter anymore.

In exchange for that I’m launching on at 5 o’clock PM on April 29th, wondering if you might tell your 5000 backers about these awesome boots I’m making. Do you think that’ll be a good compliment?” “Yeah, I’d love that” “Okay great. I agree to post for you on May 17th at 8 AM to my list of X number of backers at that time.” Do that with 100 people …

Steve: Just good old standard legwork marketing.

Zach: Yap, You’ll be surprised what that does and to give you a hint what those does, I raised $126,000 in less than 48 hours for the Perch. Which is now called the UVO laptop stand. We did this also with The Greatest Pants, McMacular, that’s on right now, raised them quite a bit of money. We did this with the Edge Desk. The guy that was the main marketer behind Furby and Cabbage Patch dolls, and that campaign raised hundreds of thousands of dollars as well. Those are just three examples. We do this every single time we have a good product launch lined up. One of the ones that comes to mind…

Steve: Just as an example since I actually know the McMacular guys. For their pants, who did you reach out to complement their Kickstarter?

Zack: That’s the advantage of Funded Today again not tooting my own horn so much here. We have literally probably 1000 people now that have thousands and thousands of backers that are part of Funded Today’s Network. Basically they are contractually incentivized to post for projects because that’s how they got their initial kick. “Hey, to pay it forward. We helped you raise money 5 months ago. Now it’s your turn to help this person raise money.”

We have lots of people that do that. You can see the spike on McMacular if you look at the graph. Some of the better spikes are Edge Desk or UVO, the purchased laptop stands. It just depends on how much pre-launch is in place. Plug Phones is another good example that’s live on Kickstarter right now that Funded Today started with from the beginning.

Steve: If you don’t have your network, it’s just that your ability to cold call and convince these people, incentivize them to just help, right?

Zack: Exactly. It’s about good old fashion hustle.

Steve: Got it.

Zack: It works really well so you should always do that because otherwise, how are you going to build your email list? You don’t have money to build an email list. You don’t have any connections. It’s just about building those connections and helping people see the value of your product and leveraging as much as you possibly can to get people excited to help you out down the road because you might not have much to offer until then.

Steve: At this time, are you also reaching out to bloggers and influencers as well?

Zack: Yeah. That would be the same part of media tour. I was talking bigger names like Wall Street Journal, TechCrunch, Mashable, but absolutely reach out to smaller sized blogs. Even a blog like yours which is a great size blog might be a good person to reach out to for a particular type of crowdfunding campaign.

Steve: Do you have to give away the product typically do you find?

Zack: It just depends on what the person wants. I’m all about trying to find the right angle and right pitch to make people want to do it for the good of the person or the good of the entrepreneur just because they love the product. Sometimes the initial pitch will be more philanthropical, but then they’ll come back with, “Yeah. I’d love to do that, but can I get the wallet too?” “Yeah, sure I can give you.” You know what I mean? That kind of thing.

Steve: Sure.

Zack: Then you are getting a lot of value for somebody posting for you or write an article about you for very little cost to yourself.

Steve: I was just wondering if you could share some techniques to get a person’s attention in the first place, because I get pitches all the time and most of them are bad.

Zack: What pitch has resonated with you? Do you ever have somebody where you are like, “You know what, that’s actually good. That resonated with me.”

Steve: Usually it’s much more personal where they actually know a lot about me.

Zack: I love that.

Steve: To start with. Then they’ll quote something that they like and what not. It’s just very subtle.

Zack: You are so true. We definitely have a formula for exactly what you described. When I was on Andrew Warner’s Mixergy, I talked about that as well where basically, how to resonate with someone? It really is getting to know what they write about, what they’ve said. Show something that you’ve read from theirs a year ago and then quote something that they wrote a week or two ago.

Maybe in that first pitch you’ll say, “Hey. I just wanted to hi. Let me know if there is anything I can do to help.” Then maybe wait another week and say, “Hey. I just want to follow up. Loved the article you wrote this week. By the way, my name is Zach Smith. I’m launching this product called the Edge Desk and so and so about it. I think it might be a good fit, but I’m not quite sure. Wonder if we might chat about it for two or three minutes? You got a second.”

Steve: I just want to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. I love running my ecommerce store, but you know what I hate doing the most? Book keeping, seriously, keeping track of receipts, expenses and especially inventory costs are easily the worst aspects of entrepreneurship hands down. Here is where Bench Accounting comes in.

Bench is an online book keeping service that specializes in ecommerce businesses. They are experts at handling all ecommerce related reports whether it be from Amazon, Shopify, Big Commerce, Stripe, you name it. All you got to do is signup and they will pair you with a team of dedicated book keepers who will handle everything for you.

No more data entry, no more data crunching, no more headaches. Plus, it’s reasonably priced. The best part is you can get 20% off your first 6 months if you got to Bench.co/Mywifequiteherjob. Once again that’s Bench.co/Mywifequiteherjob to get 20% off your first 6 months. Now back to the show.

Steve : You know actually, come to think of it now the people that have resonated with me the most don’t go for the kill in the first email. It’s a gradual thing over several weeks so to speak.

Zack: Exactly. It really is about … Maybe they’ll even know that you’re trying to get something, but you got to just be patient. In life you can get everything you want, but you got to realize it doesn’t all come immediately even though we are kind of more entitlement, gratuitous generation. If you’re just a little more patient, you’ll find that you resonate with somebody way more than everybody else because like, “Yeah. This guy emails me every single week, but I can’t see what he is up to. Who is he? I kind of know what he’s doing here, but man, why doesn’t he ask me?”

Steve: “It’s this dude in Utah, he won’t stop emailing me.”

Zack: We joke about it at Funded Today. If you ever want to get hired at our company, persistence is key. We’ll literally ignore your first 4, 5 emails if you’re trying to get a job with us because we want to see how much you’ll hustle because we know how hard it is to get press. We know how hard it is to get outreach. We know how hard it is to lineup people to do things. If you can’t stay persistence with us, we don’t want you working with us.

Steve: That’s why you did not answer me at first.

Zack: I’m sorry. It just shows, Steve … This shows how persistence he is.

Steve: Who’s that annoying Chinese guy who keeps … We got press. We’re doing some legwork here to get some people to help promote. What else do you guys do?

Zack: Once you have all of that lined up, now it comes time for product validation. Product validation happens whether or not your meet our marketing success criteria. That’s essentially the first 1 to 7 days of your campaign where we are running paid media, testing, using statistical significance and P values to figure out what audience is going to resonate? What demographic is good for your product? How much we can project that we’ll make across the life of the campaign. Essentially we’ll stop all efforts and we’ll walk away from a campaign if we can’t achieve a statically significant long term projection for a campaign meaning it is not all the way positive for our company.

We’ll walk away from a campaign and say, “This is probably a product you should abandon. This is a product you should pivot upon and here are the reasons we think and here are the things that we are finding from everybody based upon the feedback and surveys and all the stuff that we are doing, or this is a product you need to walk away from. This isn’t a good idea and the market place has spoken.”

Steve: It’d be nice to figure out before the price campaign and all that stuff, right?

Zack: A lot of campaigns … Like I said, with 60% of our campaigns, we are not doing all the stuff I talked about. If we were to do the pre-launch for your campaign. This isn’t something we would do for everybody. You’re going through a 21 point checklist to see if you qualify based upon everything we’ve learned. We might still be wronger. If we are wronger, it sucks. We’ve only been wrong once where we picked something pre-launch and it wasn’t successful. Everything else we picked pre-launch has raised 6 figures or more, most of the time high multiple 6 figures.

If we are wrong on a pre-launch value, you’re absolutely right. That’s why we love the product validation so much, but we have to take plans on pre-launch now because some of them have really good ideas that are based upon the successes that we have had on past campaigns. We can leverage a lot of the data and information that we know that work for another campaign and reasonably project that it will do well as well.

Steve: Walk me through this validation process.

Zack: Again, are you a pre-launch campaign? Are you a campaign that’s already launched?

Steve: Let’s do a pre-launch. Let’s do it as if you were doing it from scratch yourself?

Zack: Let’s say you’ve got something like Baubax travel jackets since we used that an example. The differencing point with yours its features are different. It’s the same kind of thing, but it’s a Baubax travel jacket, but it’s got different features. We’d immediately probably say that’s successful for us. Here is why. We have all the information and everything we did to raise the $9.1M for the Baubax travel jacket. That’s a gimme. You have something like that, we’ll probably …

Steve: Let’s get something that’s not necessary gimme. I just want to know how you run your Facebook ads to get these metrics.

Zack: Because we have more information and more Intel on nearly every single segment that’s ever been ran on Kickstarter so whether it’s pants, shoes, luggage, wallets, watches. I’m just trying to think of some random things … 3D printers. What else have we raised money for on Kickstarter?

Steve: You know what I’m getting at. Let’s say its fully different thing that you’d never had of like some random gadget and you want to get an idea if whether it’s going to work or not. You mention you run Facebook campaigns and based on those metrics you can determine and project what you think it’s going to make. I just want you to walk me through that process.

Zack: This is a person with no assets of their own.

Steve: With no assets of their own. Let’s say they have enough money to run Facebook campaigns. I want you to do it as if you were you with unlimited resources.

Zack: Let’s see.

Steve: Would you put together like a Facebook ad campaign and just target a whole bunch of different interest groups?

Zach: If I don’t have any resources at first, I’m going to struggle. The first thing you want to do is you want to contact a campaign that is somehow similar. Let’s just use the boots and soccer analogy again. Even though it might be something completely different, but I’m sure if it’s completely different, there is something similar that has been crowdfunded before that you can reference. That’s what you want to do. In fact a great example right now is our client Bryce Fisher. He has a company called Raveon, and Raveon raised millions of dollars for their heated jacket.

Right now they are running a second campaign, they have already fulfilled on the first one, and he’s done really well. In fact he got it funded within the first 24 hours. This is all him too. We are not even working on the second campaign yet. We will be working on it in a few more weeks, but he did exactly what I’m going to describe. He looked at his existing list of Raveon backers, and that’s how he began to run, targeting on Reddit, Instagram, Pinterest and Facebook.

He actually, because he thought, and this is an outdoor product, this is a sleeping bag, a heated sleeping bag. It’s similar but is different enough. He found that his list of Raveon backers. All the, they called it a lookalike audience on Facebook, if you want to talk about Facebook specifically. He found that actually, his Raveon backers were more fashionistas, more fashionable people, more not outdoorsy type, and they didn’t convert well.

His strategy is exactly what you want to do. Let’s say you are not Bryce, let’s say you don’t have a past campaign. You reach out to someone like Bryce, and you say, “Hey Bryce, I got this heated sleeping bag thing, I don’t think it’d going to compete with you, but I think your list of people would be the ideal fit. Would you mind letting me create a pixel, or create an audience.

I mean you don’t have to give me the names; you don’t have to do anything like that. I promise I will never email, I will never sell, I will never do anything.” And make sure where you live up to your word there because you’re getting into some crazy stuff there. “If you do that for me, I will do whatever.” You know, whatever you want me to do for me, buy him lunch, give him money, whatever works.

Then you use that list of people to start your initial targeting, that’s how I do it. Otherwise if you are just trying to randomly figure out what’s going to work, I don’t really think you are going to be able to make Facebook or Instagram or Pinterest. I know you won’t because we have never been able to make it work very well. You have to have an existing list of people that have backed something similar in order to be successful on paid media.

Steve: Okay, did you have a chicken and egg problem for some of your first campaigns in that respect?

Zach: That’s a great question. I had an advantage because of my 10 years of business consulting. I had access for the real sport. I had access to email list, lookalikes and audiences that I could start with to build out additional audiences, in skill and find similar audiences, so that I could grow my reach and my potential to scale.

Steve: Okay, what it sounds like here then is that you guys actually don’t do that much audience research or random exploring on Facebook actually to get the audiences, is that accurate?

Zach: Well it’s accurate in the sense we are not just randomly going crazy on Facebook with no data. That being said, we are taking existing things that we have, based upon all the 100s of things that we’ve run, and we are finding more segments that match up and pair nicely with what we have.

Steve: It always starts with the basis of something.

Zach: Exactly, I just don’t … You might be able to, but I have never been able to be extremely successful going with nothing.

Steve: Okay and when you are creating your Facebook campaigns, you will start with a lookalike audience and it will branch out to known interest and audiences that you are fairly confident will work right off the back.

Zach: That’s right.

Steve: Okay, when you are running these campaigns, and you mentioned that you front all the money, right? You have to make this work, and during that first 7 days, what are your metrics determine whether something is going to work or not?

Zach: The most important thing we look at is something called earnings per visitor, or earnings per view, and every single Indiegogo Kickstarter campaign allows Google analytics to be hooked up to it now, and it’s a very simple metric. It’s for every single person coming to my site, how much money I’m I making. We like to see that number greater than $2.

Steve: Greater than $2, what is so special about that $2 number?

Zach: Not anything necessarily special, it’s just that’s what we’ve seen as we’ve grabbed the medium from the thousands of campaigns that we’ve worked with. That’s what we have seen the majority of campaigns have a greater than $2 number to be successful.

Steve: Okay and one thing I forgot to ask you in the beginning is you guys take a percentage of the money that’s generated right?

Zach: That’s right, from wherever we come on.

Steve: Is that typically on the order of; you said 35% I think before we started recording here. Okay and based on that number, $2 is something that you will determine that would be profitable?

Zach: Exactly, $2 are cases to either be break even or profitable. Obviously we want to make money, if we’re break even and raise money for the client, sometime we will take on a campaign we are not even making any money, but it’s raising a lot of money for the client, and it’s making Funded Today look really good. Another campaign, not another campaign, 10, 20, 30 more campaigns might approach us after hearing about Funded Today working with that campaign, and we might be profitable for those campaigns. It’s about customer life time value in that sense.

Steve: For your own business, do you make any of these clients sign anything that they’ll help you; you are allowed to share their results after the fact.

Zach: Yeah, every single client agrees to give us a testimonial for if we are successful. They agree to give us a video testimony, and every single client we work with that were successful for. Successful means passes the 1 to 7 days of due diligence and product validation. If they are successful they put a badge on their site. These campaigns like Baubax travel jacket, I looked at the Google analytics 2 days ago, because I was talking with [inaudible 00:36:00], and he still had a thousand five hundred people sitting on his site, and it’s like 5, 6, 7 months ago that that happened.

Just imagine the amount of visitors and eye balls that come, and see that Funded Today was the reason that Baubax travel jacket raised so much money. We get a lot of traffic and visitors, and then coupled out with 500 campaigns that all Funded Today badges, it gets to be a lot of traffic coming to your site hearing about what you did.

Steve: Your business has grown based on word of mouth essentially, is that accurate?

Zach: Yeah, that’s exactly right, word of mouth in the sense of the internet, the viral spread of information.

Steve: Okay and you are running these Facebook campaigns, and can I just get an idea of how much you would start with your bids, and how you scale it up?

Zach: It’s always to test for statistical significance. How much we spend, how much we scale, I literally base everything on statistical significance, and we always have. Statistical significance is just about looking at your end, your big population and then your little end, your sample population, and finding the right number of visitors you need, and the right number of conversions you need, and once you have that right, math doesn’t lie, it’s a pretty amazing thing because …

Steve: Walk me through an example if you can with some numbers.

Zach: Let’s say, to break it all down, let’s just use $1000 as an example maybe. Let’s say you spend $1000 and let’s say it raises $10,000 okay? $10000.35, and let’s say on that $1000, I don’t know. What are you getting clicks for?

Steve: Under a buck.

Zach: Under a buck okay, let’s say they are a buck each to make it easier. You spend $1000 that’s a thousand clicks, a thousand clicks raise you $10000, and let’s say the deal is 35% and so in that sense Funded Today would have made $2500. That’s a pretty good return; we look at the earnings per visitor. Earnings per visitor is really simple. You send 1000 clicks, you raise $10000, so what is your earnings per view, $10, that’s 5 times better than the two. In terms of statistically significant, you wouldn’t have to spend $1000 and get 1000 clicks, and raise $10000 to achieve statistical significance.

Statistical significance could be achieved spending much less in this example because it was … This example you gave it so profitable, you could probably have achieved hat on a $250 spend, and this particular example. From that point we would tell the client, “Okay, looks like you passed the test, everything is statistically significant.” They’d see the results because their campaign would have been raising a lot of money, and then it’s just scaling from there.

How do we scale it from there? We simply look at the audience size that we were targeting for that particular group, and we look at how many days left on the campaign to make sure that we are maximizing that reach and making sure every single person within that audience is going to be targeted within the 30-60 days, or however long what we have left on the campaign, and then we just scale according to time left on the campaign.

Steve: Do you create multiple creative’s; do you test headlines creative’s and all that sort of thing?

Zach: Yeah, every single thing like that is being tested, we start with, it just depends. I usually start with 10-20 different creative, images adcopy. Then we look at how all those perform across smaller segment sizes. We pick the best one and we scale that one exponentially.

Steve: Okay and in terms of frequency, are you aiming for everyone in that particular audience to try see that ad once?

Zach: At least yeah, generally we don’t like to go more than 2.

Steve: Okay, not more than 2. You make your calculations on what to bid so that you cover what you think you are going to cover within that certain time period.

Zach: That’s right.

Steve: Okay and one question I did have, and this is a little bit unrelated …

Zach: Oh sorry, and just to throw in that, that’s just one audience. Now we’ve got that working. The entire length of the campaign, we are testing out new things. We might only have 5 additional campaigns but we are testing out new audiences that we haven’t yet tested out just because we’ve been testing out hundreds of other audience along the way. The idea is to eventually have hundreds if not thousands of audiences turned on that are all converting profitably and that’s how the scaling works.

Again following that same principle though of testing … Just because you passed the product validation for that 1 to 7 days doesn’t mean we are not validating more and more audiences. We just want to make sure we validate our biggest, strongest audiences first and scale more audiences throughout the rest of the campaign.

Steve: The following question for that was, is Facebook like your primary advertising campaign or do you find equal success with Google and Pinterest, Instagram?

Zach: I would say…

Steve: Is it just all depends?

Zach: Yeah. It all depends. Again it’s a bad answer, but wherever we can spend money to make money, we’re going to pretty crazy. On [inaudible 00:40:48] Facebook did horribly, Instagram did extremely well. Weird, I don’t know why.

Steve: Interesting, the same company and very similar.

Zach: [inaudible 00:40:57] watches Pintrest did really, really well.

Steve: Pintrest ads. What is the different … I’ve always been curious about this. There is a whole bunch of different crowdfunding sites like Kickstarter, Indiegogo, GoFundMe. What are the differences?

Zach: The biggest difference … GoFundMe I would say is more for social or personal kind of causes. I get I’m not on GoFundMe a ton. We’ve never actually raised money on the site, but GoFundMe is more for, “Hey. I’ve got cancer or my dad just died or I need to pay for a funeral or I’ve got to go on this trip or whatever it is.” It’s just like the name sounds, GoFundMe. Give me money for this, give me money for that. I’d say it’s more social philanthropical kind of thing.

Indiegogo, Kickstarter are definitely competitors. The stuff you see on those 2 sites are pretty similar. Kickstarter has a better audience in the sense that if you are on Kickstarter and you are successful, you are going to see that Kickstarter helped you out quite a bit. For one reason or another, the way Kickstarter’s website is set up, the way it converts; the way people understand the site. If you’re successful on Kickstarter, you are going to see multiple success: success upon, success upon success. It’s that snow ball effect. On Indiegogo, it’s going to require much more of your own work.

That being said Indiegogo is like awesome. They’re nice. They’re kind. They take care of you. I love Kickstarter, don’t get me wrong, but Kickstarter’s model is more like, “Hey. Don’t touch this. We’re good. We’re great, but we don’t really want to be bugged or talked to.” It’s kind of their strategy. Again this will probably get me in trouble but I don’t even know if should I say it, but I’m going to. I didn’t come up with analogy so with that disclaimer.

We love Indiegogo too and we love Kickstarter. We love both the sites. Indiegogo, they have something where if you are really successful they’ll put you on their newsletter. We get a lot of newsletter features because we generate a lot of pledges. That increases the go-go factor which is a factor that Indiegogo uses to keep track of how well campaigns are doing. It’s a combination of pledges, traffic visitors, how quickly all those pledges came, et cetera and the length of time. Indiegogo is like the ugly girl who always watching, who’ll do anything for you, but you are always like, “I don’t know.” Kickstarter is like the beautiful, sexy, supermodel who you’re never going to have, but you keep trying because she never completely turns you down.

Steve: Let me know if you want to cut that out before this goes live.

Zach: I don’t know. Again, I didn’t make up that analogy. That analogy is from … I forget who it’s from, but I’ve always remembered it. To be honest, it’s true.

Steve: There is no reason not to launch on both. Is there?

Zach: You don’t want to launch on both the platforms at the same times. What I like doing it and we find like 60, 70% of our business comes Kickstarter just because that’s where we started I think. We are starting to get a lot more on Indiegogo because now we are their number one partner, and they have this cool little partner page that features all the partners. Because we are number one I think a lot of people see us and come and try to hire us. That being said, 60% of our clients are in Kickstarter.

If we are successful on Kickstarter, Indiegogo has this awesome thing that Kickstarter doesn’t have and I don’t know if they ever will or they are not wanting to do it. It’s called In Demand Funding. After you campaign ends, you can continue to raise money and just extend the shipping or manufacturing date on Indiegogo. Let’s say you plan on delivering in three months on Kickstarter, you might say, “Hey. You missed us on Kickstarter, but you still want to get the product. Well we’re going to be delivering in 6 months if you want to still get it here.

We allow pre-orders on Indiegogo in demand. We have a lot of success going in demand. We have clients we work called Meater which is a smart thermometer. We’ve raised them I think probably more than a million dollars more in demand. UsBidi, a really good campaign that’s raised way more than it raised on Kickstarter in demand. The BetterBack, Katherine Krug, she’s raised quite a bit of money in demand. She’s one of our clients.

Steve: That’s interesting. I wonder … Because there is a sense of urgency with the Kickstarter. Doesn’t that get lost with in demand?

Zach: You know what, that’s what interesting. I think there is still some kind of social element. You get to bring that big number that you raised on Kickstarter or Indiegogo. You get to have that big number in front. People are like, “This must be successful. It raised a million dollars. It raised 3 million dollars. It raised 5 million dollars.” Maybe all that numbers and all the metrics and the social elements, either you lose a bit of the scarcity perhaps. Maybe that creates the sense of people wanting to buy. We’ve found convergence to be okay in demand as well.

Steve: What is like a typical conversion rate for a good campaign?

Zach: Typical good conversion rate for a good campaign … I got Curtis here with me. Curtis, what do you think?

Curtis: From direct, online 3 to 5.

Zach: 3 to 5 percent he says from direct traffic.

Steve: That’s pretty good. Then we just say the average is somewhere around 2.

Zach: Average is like 1 to 2. What about from paid media? Paid media is about 1 to 2, but average for a good campaign is going to be 3 to 5. It does depend on price point as well.

Steve: You mentioned a whole bunch of successes that you’ve had in the past. Some of these were like a year or 2 years ago. How has the crowfunding landscape changed over time?

Zach: The biggest thing that’s changed is you can’t just put a project on Kickstarter or Indiegogo and expect to make money. You definitely have to do a lot of leg work, a lot of stuff upfront. That being said, by doing all that good stuff up front, you have a chance to raise way more money than you ever did in the past. That’s the biggest thing. I think it requires a lot of work upfront.

Steve: It sounds like a lot of your tactics are just social engineering in a way, just good old fashioned leg work.

Zach: That’s right. All we’ve done is taken that good old fashioned leg work and scaled it.

Steve: Then also kept these contacts in place so that you have a base for everything that you’ve launched now.

Zach: Absolutely.

Steve: Zach, I learned a lot today. Where can people find you and pitch their ideas? I understand you don’t get that many pitches on a regular basis. If someone wants to contact you or your company, where can they find you?

Zach: Best place to get us is on Funded.today. It’s not .com. it’s Funded.today because we get your project funded today, so Funded.today. Then on Funded.today, you can click on the Do I Qualify. Let me see what it’s called now. I think it’s Do I Qualify. Learn more … It’s Learn More now. If you click the big green Learn More About on top fold, click and then it will take you to a page. You can watch that short two or three minute video. Then click, Finally Do I Qualify?

We go through a list of questions that we want to know about you, how did you hear about us? Generally within 48 hours we put you in touch with a client specialist. Client specialist … You are probably smarter than me in terms of the daily grind. I just talked to Curtis about a few numbers because he is on the scene so much more than me. They are basically crowdfunding consultants who talk to you about your campaign, talk over what the process is going to look like, answer any of your questions, and determine if what we do is going to be a good fit for your campaign or not.

Steve: Are there any obvious signs that you might not be a good fit?

Zach: I think if you come to us and if you have raised … We have this a lot, believe or not. If you have like 1 to 5 pledges and you’ve been on the crowdfunding site for 2, 3 weeks, you might not have a good idea. We see that a lot. You’d be surprised how many people are like, “I just need good marketing.” I just don’t necessarily know if I’d buy that. That being said, even on cases like that before where we’ve actually turned a campaign that had hardly any backers into 100,000 plus campaign.

If you believe in your idea enough, we should absolutely chat.

Steve: See that’s the thing. I tend to think that a lot of it does have to do with marketing because a lot of people they are good at inventing but then they suck at doing the legwork.

Zach: You are so right. Sometimes when you see 1 to 5 people, you know they didn’t even talk to their friends and family. Its like, “You didn’t have like 5 friends who wanted to throw you money.” That being said, you are exactly right. We talked to inventors all the time that are scared of the internet or have no idea how to even do anything or how they got their Kickstarter page put together in the first place. There absolutely is that. That’s not bad.

We love those kinds of people because as crazy as it sounds, I’ve basically invented 2 things my entire life. I pitched everyday, 60, 70 times. You’d think I’d more inventive, but sadly the creative juices don’t necessarily flow from me at least in the sense of products. I think I’m more creative in the sense of marketing and how to figure out new ways to raise money for people.

Steve: And social engineering. Yeah totally.

Zach: I wish I was more creative because I love the things we’ve brought to life. It’s so fun like right now I’m wearing an original reign watch. I have silver socks on. I’m wearing Wolcox boots. I’ve got McMacular pants. I’m wearing a silver shirt. I’ve got premium underwear from Miguel. It’s like literally everything I have on is from something that Funded Today helped to bring life. It’s exciting. I love to tell those stories and I love to see that we’ve created all these jobs and helped all these entrepreneurs live the life of their dreams. That’s what makes Funded Today so amazing.

Steve: I just want to add a little tit bit since … Is that when I first met you it was just very easy to talk to you. I can kind of see how you are able to reach out and establish great relationships with people. It’s just a talent I guess.

Zach: Thank you. You are very kind. I could say the same thing about you, but you do it 10 times better than me.

Steve: There you go with the praise. It’s not going to work this time buddy.

Zach: I mean it.

Steve: All right man. Hey, thanks a lot for coming on the show man.

Zach: I appreciate it Steve. Thanks for having me.

Steve: All right. Take care

Zach: Bye-bye.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Now crowdfunding wasn’t around when I first started my online store, but today it’s definitely a viable way to validate your product or fund your first production run. If you do decide to crowdfund a campaign, there is no one else I would ask except for Zach.

For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode123. If you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review. It’s by far the best way to support the show. Please tell your friends because the greatest complement that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

If you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to Mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Sign up right there on the front page and I’ll send you the course immediately via email. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

122: How To Make 600K Selling T-Shirts On TeeSpring With Derek Pankaew

How To Make 600K Selling T-Shirts On TeeSpring With Derek Pankaew

Today I’m happy to have Derek Pankaew on the show. Derek is someone who I met at the Ecommerce Fuel Live conference and it was pretty random how we started talking.

I was sitting directly behind him during a session and I couldn’t help but peek at his screen. And I found that the screen saver on his computer was a running count of his age. I took notice and we started chatting.

And as luck would have it, Derek was selling t-shirts at the time and making a killing doing it. Now if you’ve followed my blog for a while, an example that I use of what not to sell is t-shirts because it’s way too saturated.

But Derek has made over 600K with a gross profit of 335K selling t-shirts online in a pretty short period of time and in this interview he shares how he did it. Enjoy the episode!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Derek came up with selling tshirts online
  • What was special about Derek’s tshirts that made them sell online.
  • His motivations for starting his business.
  • How and where Derek advertises his t-shirts.
  • Which sales channels worked for his business and which did not.
  • His primary source of customers
  • The challenges of selling t-shirts as a sustainable business

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

Bench.co – If you hate bookkeeping and accounting as much as I do, then why not use a service and contract everything out? Not only is Bench Accounting easy and affordable but you can click here and get 20% off your first 6 months of worry free bookkeeping.
bench.co

Transcript

Intro: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, and if you are new here, it’s a show where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now I don’t bring on these famous entrepreneurs to simply celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.Now if you enjoy this podcast, please leave me a review on iTunes, and if you want to learn how to start your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. So go to mywifequitherjob.com, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the mini course right away via email, now onto the show.
Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family, and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Derek Pankaew on the show. Now Derek is actually someone who I met at the eCommerceFuel Live Conference, and it was actually pretty random how we started talking. Behind one of the sessions I was sitting directly behind him, and I couldn’t help but peek at his screen because it was like right in my face.

I found out that the screen saver on his computer was like a running count of his age, and I took notice of that and we just started chatting. As luck would have it Derek was selling t-shirts at the time and making a killing doing it. Now if you’ve followed my blog for a while, an example that I use of what not to sell are t-shirts because it’s a really saturated industry.

Now Derek has actually made over 600K with a gross profit of 335K selling t-shirts online in a pretty short period of time which is pretty crazy to me. Anyway Derek is working on a lot of different projects right now, but I kind of want to dig deep on how he managed to make such large profit selling t-shirts online. With that welcome to the show Derek how are you doing today man?

Derek: I’m doing great, how are you doing Steve?

Steve: Still have that screen saver or has it changed?

Derek: Let me check how … It’s turned off at the moment, but I liked it. I’ve already turned it back on now that you reminded me.

Steve: I think it was in seconds or something like that, so I had to calculate like what your age was, I don’t know…

Derek: Yeah it’s a really good reminder for me of my … The short time I have on this planet and most of it.

Steve: I’m curious here, how did you come up with selling t-shirts and what was your secret sauce that allowed you to sell so many online?

Derek: How I came up with selling t-shirts, I was living in Vietnam at the time. I met someone else who was doing this business pretty successfully. He actually got out of the business, and we were just chatting and I was like, “Yeah, what do you do?” He told me what he does and he said he just finished selling t-shirts. I was like,” Selling t-shirts? How is that going?” He was like,” Yeah it was good. I made maybe like 20K, 25K a month.”

And I was like,” What? What were you doing?” So then he told me about the business model. I had done some Google AdWords in the past, and I figured Facebook ads couldn’t be that much different. After talking to him for a bit I went home. I started researching this business model, bought some courses around Facebook ads and taught myself Facebook ads and then took him out to dinner again.

I had more specific questions this time, and then after having a couple of conversations with this guy who has done it before and then spending sometimes studying on my own, I just started launching campaigns. What was the second question?

Steve: So let’s back up a little bit because a lot of people aren’t really familiar. I mean we’ve chatted for a while but … so first off how did you obtain these t-shirts, how did you get the designs, and that sort of thing?

Derek: Okay great, so I was selling mostly on a platform called Teespring, which allows you to upload designs to this platform, and they will print the shirts and send it to your customers for you. I don’t have to deal with customer service; I don’t have to deal with fulfillment. All I do, there is basically I have 2 jobs, one is to get the designs up, and the other is to market the designs.

So the marketing is almost 100% Facebook ads, basically it is 100% Facebook ads. I tested some other things like Pinterest ads, but for the most part the whole business was basically built off of Facebook ads. As for where the designs come from, they actually come from a ton of different places. So some of it is through competitive research, so I’ll use tools like TeeGrasp is probably the number one tool in the t-shirt …

Steve: What does that tool do?

Derek: It scrapes all of the different t-shirt websites. It scrapes Teespring, it scrapes Teechip, it scrapes Gearbubble for all the t-shirts that are launched on those different platforms. It lets you see what markets people are in, what kinds of designs are selling well. Using that tool I’m able to come off with offshoots. If a design that said beware of the crazy chicken lady is selling well for chickens, then I might think of beware of the crazy goat lady for women who have goats. Using offshoots of existing designs by using spy tools this one method, once…

Steve: Oh backup, on Teespring do you get all the revenue numbers for everyone who is selling t-shirts?

Derek: No, you see the sales numbers for everyone who is selling t-shirts and you can extrapolate to the revenue numbers from that.

Steve: Okay, because the t-shirts are like 20 bucks probably, is that…

Derek: Yeah, typically really simple designs are about 20 bucks, and then if there is multi colored front and back print and you are looking like 23, 24.

Steve: So you really know how much someone is making, right?

Derek: On Teespring yes you can have a pretty good guess. The numbers do change because if you are selling hoodies … You are usually able to sell a few different kinds of shirts at once. If they are selling hoodies the margins are a lot higher on hoodies, and you can’t really tell what the split is between the t-shirts and the things they are selling. In other platforms such as Teechip will actually let you hide the amount of sales you are getting. On Teespring you can figure out the revenue approximately, but on some of the other platforms you can’t.

Steve: Okay, and then some of these research tools that you are mentioning would you mind talking about what they are and what they do exactly?

Derek: Sure yeah, the 2 most common ones that I’m aware of are Teegrasp which this tool is like a Google spider. This tool will go to all these different websites and just see these t-shirts and it will take a screenshot of the front and a screenshot of the back. If the number of sales is publicly available, it will grab that data as well and then compile all of it in the spreadsheet.

If I wanted to go in the market for example we use chickens. I could go into Teegrasp and just type in chickens, and it will show me all the shirts that had been launched in that market before. What percentage of the campaigns have hit, meaning it had at least enough to print. How many shirts…

Steve: And what is that number?

Derek: I believe it’s 3.

Steve: Oh that’s it, okay.

Derek: I have actually been out of the Teespring business for a little while now, so I don’t actually know if they updated that. They were talking about making it one, but last time I was in the business it was 3.

Steve: Okay, and so these tools, are they free or do you have to pay for them?

Derek: So Teegrasp is not free, I think it’s 50 … somewhere between $50 and $100 a month. Another tool that I use was just Pinterest. Pineterst.com/source/Teespring.com, and they’ll give you a really, really good live feed of what’s being shared the most on Pinterest from Teespring. That has a really close correlation to what’s selling really well.

You can just replace Teespring.com with all the other sites that run it, so Teechip.com is another big website that sells t-shirts. Gearbubble.com, so you can just replace that and spy on a lot of different websites that are currently selling t-shirts, so Pinterest is free obviously.

Steve: You go through and you find out what the best selling shirts are, and then you make little offshoots of them. Are there any copyright issues with doing that?

Derek: That’s only one of the sources that we use. I’d be really careful about the copyrights so I wouldn’t copy the design, I’d only copy partial quotes. Often times the way I would use these tools is to identify markets. If we use chicken again as the example, if I see that chicken people who have chickens in their backyards and are really passionate about raising chickens are buying t-shirts, then I might … Once I figure that out using these kind of competitive intelligence tools, I would just go to Google images and type in like funny quotes about chicken. Chicken means, funny chicken weird or whatever just start looking for weird quotes.

Often times we’d actually … This wouldn’t work for the first or second t-shirt that we do in a market. By the time we are on our third, fourth, fifth t-shirt to the same market we start to build a Facebook page that has some following. We are able to just start posting these images, the memes that we see on Google images. Or we also look on Reddit and a couple of other places. We just post these to our existing audience and we see which ones get the most likes and the most comments and we turn those quotes into t-shirts. We use a live feedback mechanism as well.

Steve: Just curious, how many t-shirts sales would actually interest you to go into a certain market?

Derek: I probably want to see a campaign with at least probably at least a 100.

Steve: Oh okay, so not that many really?

Derek: Yeah.

Steve: Okay so if you see like a t-shirt that sold more than a 100 units, that would be something you would consider going into?

Derek: Yeah absolutely. One thing too, one really important thing to realize with Teespring is that it’s a really, really high volume game in terms of the number of designs you need to put out to do this well. On a weekly basis we are launching 40 to 50 different designs.

Steve: Holy crap okay, so we are talking like … oh my God that’s a lot of designs every day.

Derek: Yeah totally, and most of them will fail. Like 9 out of 10 will not just make any money, and 9 out of 10 will lose money. The 1 out of 10 that makes money will more than make up for the ones that lose money. When I say that if I see that a shirt has done 100 sales in that market that’s really … That’s good enough for me to spend 1 out of 50 of my experiments on a weekly basis on that market to see if it sells.

Steve: So is your team like all graphic designers?

Derek: The team was 3 graphic designers, 1 assistant who was helping with Facebook ads and 1 assistant who was helping with all the other menial stuff, answering comments, creating Facebook pages etcetera.

Steve: Okay, and so you were creating designs from scratch then. You’d come up with an idea and a quote, and you’d have your graphic designer pout together some sort of graphic and integrate that quote in?

Derek: Yeah, so a lot of these quotes were very were scalable or tempertized. The quote I mentioned earlier beware of the crazy chicken lady. You could replace that with literally 30 different animals, right. Often times off of the 40 or 50 designs we were doing a week there were actually maybe only like 3 or 4 unique designs, and we are just scaling them out to different markets at the same time, does that makes sense?

Steve: Yeah totally, okay and so this Facebook page that you were talking about. That Facebook page obviously only caters to a very specific niche, right?

Derek: Correct.

Steve: So did you start that Facebook page right from the start and start posting to it?

Derek: So in the beginning I ran everything out of one Facebook page, so I was running 50 different markets out of one Facebook page. Until someone told me that if you do that, any other Teespring marketer can just come to this page and see all the markets you are in. After that point, the practice really is, the best practice in Teespring is to have one page for every market you are in.

Once I started doing that, yes, we would create a Facebook page for every single market we are in from the very beginning, even if we didn’t know if we would sell anything. Then, but we wouldn’t post any content to it until we are starting to make sales. Once it’s clear that this market is going to be profitable for us that’s when I started putting content on the page.

Steve: How often would you post to this page? You just had this blank page until you knew that the t-shirt was going to sell and then you started posting to it.

Derek: Yeah, actually we only built … There were only 4 pages out of maybe; we probably tested like 300 different markets. We only built 4 pages where we were posting regularly, because it is a lot of effort to find a bunch of post. We can’t just post images. We have to actually write a couple of sentences with each post. It’s actually quite a bit of effort to run these Facebook pages.

We were posting about 5 times a day, so about 35 posts a week because most of the audience … The Facebook formula for reach is, you will reach 4% of your audience for a post or something like that. Even though we were posting 35 times a week, people were probably only going to see our posts twice a week anyway.

Steve: Did you buy likes in the beginning or was it all organic?

Derek: Yes, for the pages that we are actively building, we did buy likes and for the rest we didn’t. In retrospect I don’t think it’s really worth it.

Steve: Interesting. Okay.

Derek: Yeah, I don’t think it was really worth it.

Steve: How do you jump start the page then?

Derek: A lot of people actually like the page, just from … If we run a t-shirt campaign and we spend $5,000, $8,000, $10,000 on the Facebook ad campaign, and that ad is seen by 100,000 people or whatever. A pretty good portion of them will just like the page from the ad itself. If we are, after we spent a few thousand dollars on ads, we’ll probably have a thousand likes, couple of two thousand likes just from people who like t-shirts and want to have … If you are a big fun of chickens and you are really passionate about it, and you see this t-shirt that’s hilarious.

It’s an inside joke for you and your people, then you might just like the page and like see what other t-shirts they come up with in the future.

Steve: Okay, and then with this page then, did people kind of engage with the page later on? How did you use this page later on once you got a little bit of traction? Actually first of all how many fans did you for your highest page, how many fans did you get?

Derek: About 38,000.

Steve: Okay, that’s a pretty good number of chicken lovers there. How did you use this page once you had it established?

Derek: A lot of it was posting, so posting these images, these memes, these quotes and seeing what people respond to. The best campaign I ever did sold about $33,000 in gross revenue and about $22,000 in net profit. That came from just a quote that got insane engagement. We were just posting it and for me I would never have guessed this quote would do so well. This quote got like 10 times more engagement than anything else we posted.
Then I took that quote and went to 99 designs and paid a lot more than I normally pay for design. Usually I’m paying like $15, but I paid $250 for this design. That just … It was a really good design. It just took off. It was the highest seller I ever seen. Yeah, just posting quotes to the page …

Steve: Are you going to tell me what the quote is or what? Or is that a secret?

Derek: I’d rather not share that in particular.

Steve: Okay, that’s fine.

Derek: Let’s see, where were we? Oh yeah how to engage. Just posting quotes and getting responses from people, using that to gauge what kinds of quotes to put on t-shirts in the future. Actually I think, I don’t have any way to quantify this, but I think in the markets where we are actively posting because we are showing up in people’s newsfeeds more often, it actually increases our conversion rate. There’s like a branding effect to it. I can’t really quantify that in any casual way.

Steve: Sure, were these shirts branded even though they were sold on Teespring, or there’s no branding at all?

Derek: Not really. The brand is just our Facebook page, I think people just get used to seeing it.

Steve: Okay. Let’s shift gears a little bit and talk about the bread and butter of this business which is the marketing side. You bought, you obviously spent a lot of money on Facebook ads, and I was hoping you could just kind of walk me through the strategy that you used to market these t-shirts.

Derek: Sure yeah. The goal with this, there’s kind of a 2 problem goal. There is, first you want to cast your net wide while keeping it to the most passionate people possible, and I will explain what that means in a second. Second, you want to use a very data driven approach to eliminate all the places where you are wasting money.

Coming back to the chicken example, typically I would separate everything. I would start with anywhere between 3 to 5 ad sets. An ad set for anyone who doesn’t know it’s just a grouping in Facebook ads of different keywords, different interests that you can target. I would put similar interests into the same ad set. I might target at magazines. Magazines is one that tends to convert really well, and I would just list off a few different groupings that I frequently target. Magazines is one, websites is one, suppliers, manufactures and tools is another one, organizations is another one. Those are …

Steve: What about celebrities, do you target celebrities?

Derek: Celebrities? So if there are authors, or speakers, those could do really well. If they are like if I was in the golfing market, I definitely wouldn’t target like Tiger Woods. If I was to target a celebrity I would make sure it’s like a number 8, like b-list celebrity. Not the top 10 golfers, but like the 33rd golfer so that only people who are super passionate about golf would be liking this person. Even that said, in my experience celebrities don’t, those interests don’t convert that well. Typically I wouldn’t test that until I was like scaling a campaign that’s proving to convert.

Steve: Okay. One question I did want to ask, when you are writing these Facebook ads, you get conversion data from Teespring, right that directly correlated?

Derek: Yeah.

Steve: Okay. Can we just take your chicken example for example and then just tell the audience how you would put together an ad set for it.

Derek: Sure. First I go to Google and I type in chicken magazines. It will pull up I think backyard chicken is the name of a magazine. Chicken farmer I think, I don’t know if that one’s actually a real one. There’s usually maybe 3 or 4 magazines in a market. If it’s a really big market there might be like 5 to 10 magazines.

I would just put all those in one ad set. Next I would look up the most common tools you would need. With chickens it might be bird feed, chicken coops, cages like whatever those supplies are. I look up the names of those suppliers and I would click that into a Facebook ads. I look for the most high trafficked or the most engaged websites. I don’t remember actually what those websites are in the chicken market.

Steve: It’s okay.

Derek: Whatever they are, the websites that the people tend to frequent, and then organizations. Chickens might not have it, but for cattle for example, you have a Cattle Farmers Association, the American Beef Association. Whatever the associations that people who are in that market would tend to join, just put those all in one category. Typically I would have … Hold on, give me one moment. I’m just going to look up if there’s any other ones I missed. Typically I would start with 3 to 5 different ad sets. Each of those I would further cut those in half, and half the traffic would go to mobile and half the traffic would go to desktop.

Steve: Okay, and do you factor by age also or segment by age?

Derek: I don’t segment by age in the beginning. I will do that later on, but in the beginning I would just … I usually start at about 30 years old and go to 65 plus. I found that for t-shirts, people between 18 and 30 don’t really buy. They buy but I usually end losing money. I think my guess is that they just have less money so they are not as …

Steve: Do you ever use any of the ones who are you only want to target people who make over a certain amount?

Derek: No. I think that data in general isn’t very good because most of the data that Facebook gets is given to Facebook by the user. You type something in your status and Facebook knows you’re into chickens because you are posting photos of your chickens or talking about your chickens. The financial data they are buying it from third party sources and then trying to correlate it to your Facebook account. I think in general that data is not all that good.

Steve: Okay. Your first ad really is just interests … The categories that you are talking about for your ad sets and then just half mobile, half desktop, that’s your first campaign.

Derek: Yeah, interest 30-65 plus half mobile, half desktop. We are still targeting people who are really passionate about this topic but we are casting a wide net.

Steve: What about how many creatives do you make and how many headlines and that sort of thing also in your first iteration.

Derek: Just 1 and usually actually throughout the whole campaign, we typically just have 1 ad. Remember we are launching 50 campaigns a week. In each ad is an image that has to be made in Photoshop. If we are doing multiple ads it would just add a ton of time to our process. Just to keep things scalable and running smoothly. We just did 1ad basically.

Steve: What is your image? Is it just a picture of the t-shirt?

Derek: Yeah, it’s a picture of the t-shirt blown up as large as the image will allow which is like color on the background. Sometimes like a border around the shirt, like a stroke to make it stand out from the newsfeed a little bit more.

Steve: I just wanted to take a moment to thank Bench Accounting for being a sponsor of the show. I love running my ecommerce store but you know what I hate doing the most, book keeping. Seriously, keeping track of receipts expenses and especially inventory cost, are easily the worst aspects of entrepreneurship hands down.

Here’s where Bench Accounting comes in, Bench is an online book keeping service that specializes in ecommerce businesses. They are experts at handling all ecommerce related reports whether it be from Amazon, Shopify, BigCommerce, Stripe you name it. All you got to do is sign up and they’ll pair you with the team of dedicated book keepers who will handle everything for you.

So no more data entry, no more data crunching, no more headaches plus it’s reasonable priced. The best part is you can get 20% off your first six months if you go to bench.co/mywifequitherjob. Once again that’s bench.co/mywifequitherjob to get 20% off your first six months. Now back to the show.

Steve: Okay, any text on the image at all?

Derek: Nope.

Steve: What would your headline look like then?

Derek: There is no headline. The format of the post that we were doing was … It’s a little bit different than … The normal Facebook ad is 1200 pixels by 628 pixels. It’s kind of like a horizontal rectangle and if you click on it goes to a website. Most of the stuff that we were doing with TeeSpring we were actually doing 1200 by 1200 so it’s a much larger ad. We posted on our Facebook page and then we used that creative as the ad.

There’s actually no, there’s no headline on it. It’s like if you see a friend’s post with an image on it, there’s no headline on it. It looks exactly like that except it’s Facebook ad. It’s a slightly different format that we were using.

Steve: Okay. Cool. You found through experimentation I would gather.

Derek: Yeah, it was kind of industry standard too.

Steve: Oh it was, okay.

Derek: Because it’s a t-shirt just having more screen real estate from the bigger size of the image, tends to work better for … At least I found when I did it tended to work better than having the half the size.

Steve: Okay, that makes sense. It’s just literally like a picture with no headline underneath the image and then just some text above it.

Derek: Yeah, exactly and the text above it would say like limited run, campaign ends in ten days, new shirt for chicken, new shirt for chicken farmers available in 5 different colors. Just kind of hypie time’s running out kind of text.

Steve: Then how much money would you put on each of these ad sets in the beginning?

Derek: In each of these ad sets, Facebook has changed the policy around this a little bit. We used to be able to put any amount of money we want on it. Now there’s a $5 per ad set minimum generally unless you tweak things. When I was doing it, I was basically dividing $15 among all the ad sets. If we were doing 3 ad sets and then split those in half, so that there’ is 3 desktop and 3 mobile, then I would just divide $15 amongst the 6 ad sets.

It would be $250 a day for the initially test. Basically what I was willing to do, I would be willing to spend $15-20 dollars on a Facebook ad set to see if it would make a sale or not. Usually what I find is that by the time I campaign, I spend $15-20, if it hasn’t made one sale, it’s probably dead. If it’s made 1 or 2 sales, it’s in limbo. I have no idea if that’s going to make money or not. If it has made 3-5 sales then it’s probably a winner.

Steve: Okay so a couple of clarifications here, all these ads go straight to the TeeSpring page of that t-shirt where they can checkout directly. There is no landing page or anything it just goes straight to the checkout page.

Derek: Yeah, that’s right.

Steve: How much traffic can you possibly get of $15 worth divided amongst 6 ad sets?

Derek: Like how many clicks, or what do you mean?

Steve: Yeah, how many clicks and what is a good conversion rate?

Derek: The conversion rate is anywhere between 8-13%

Steve: Wow, that’s crazy high

Derek: Yeah, it is pretty high, but again we are only hitting 1 out of 10 designs. The ones that hit, yeah they really resonate with the market. I actually don’t know how many clicks I get; I don’t think that’s something I looked at on a regular basis. I just looked up the ad span versus revenue.

Steve: Okay, I was just curious, I mean it’s probably somewhere in the order of 20 cents to a dollar maybe per click, I don’t know. That’s sounds too high actually for, to get there.

Derek: I think I was generally paying a little bit over a dollar per click actually.

Steve: Really? Okay

Derek: On an account wide basis, but that, actually now that I think about it, on an account wide basis that would include the shirts that were losing money as well. I actually don’t know how much per click I was paying for the ones that were making money.

Steve: On your bidding, did you just let Facebook bid by purchase? Yeah got it. Okay, so you get some data, and certain ones are dud, certain ones are in limbo and certain ones are kicking butt hopefully right?

Derek: Yeah exactly. I’d spend, usually if I spend $15 or $20 in day 1 I would scale that up to say $50 in day 2 and $100 in day 3, and then $150 $200 on day 4. I know that’s a lot faster scaling than a lot of people in Facebook ads advocate. I think standard in Facebook ads is to raise your budgets by 50% every 3-5 days. TeeSpring is a little bit different, I think because you are literally in a race against other people.

If you have design that is selling well using the tools that we talked about earlier, people can see what is selling well, and you will literally have 4 knock offs within 2 days. It really is, like once an idea is in the sphere of t-shirt marketers, you are just in a race to spend the money and get it in front of every single person in that market, and capture all the sales before somebody else knocks you off.

Steve: That sounds really like cut throat to me. All right, what do you do with the limbo designs; do you scale those as well?

Derek: Yeah, I spend a little bit more money. I will just let it keep running at $20 a day. Yeah basically I will just …

Steve: You mentioned segmenting by mobile and desktop, can you share some of your experiences with that. Like are most of the sales on mobile or back when you were doing it?

Derek: It’s completely market dependent. Some designs will sell on both, some designs will not sell on desktop, and some designs will not sell on mobile. I haven’t found any coloration, I can’t guess. I can’t say older people tend to buy on desktop, artistic people on mobile. Literally I cannot guess what it is, but some markets bind it on different devices and I don’t know why.

Steve: Okay that’s very interesting. In a typical test like the chicken one that you described, do you have this 6 ad sets, you ever have cases where all of them are bad and you just go back to the drawing board, or is that the common case?

Derek: That’s really a common case. I won’t try and revive things that are making money, if it doesn’t make money after … if I spend $20, like one sale I’m usually making $8-$12 so if I spend $20 even if I made 1 sale I’m actually still losing money. If I spend $20 and I make no sales, I just dump it.

Steve: Let’s say you have a couple of mediocre ones; walk me through that process. Let’s say you’ve made one sale in your $15 experiment?

Derek: Probably I will just let spend another $15-30, and just check it daily. Sometimes what will happen is it will make 1 sale and after I spend another $20 it will suddenly jump to let’s say 6 sales, if that is the case, then great. I will keep running it; often times what happens it will just break even or lose money. By the time I spend $50 and it’s not making money then I will probably kill it off.

Steve: Sound like your threshold is 2 per day, is that 2 per $15 is that accurate?

Derek: I didn’t understand the question can you …

Steve: Meaning like you need to sell at least 2 to be profitable, from what you were saying?

Derek: Yes, that’s right.

Steve: At a $15 per day clip. As long you are making at least 2 per $15 spent you will just scale it right?

Derek: The important thing, the reason I do it this way is because it’s actually more costlier to miss a winner than it is to spend money on the losers. If I spend $15 on it and it makes 1 sale, I’m losing a bit of money. If I spend another $15, I might lose another additional $15, but if that was actually a winner. A winner can make anywhere between $500-$20000. If it was actually just a statistical fluke that it didn’t make a bunch of sales off the first $15 and I killed it too early I could literally have just lost $10000. That’s why I let myself bleed out a little bit more money just to make sure I’m not missing out on the winner, does that make sense?

Steve: Yeah, it totally does, just curios, how big are these audiences and do you ever burn them out quickly?

Derek: All the time. How big are the audiences? Anywhere between, the smallest market I ever did, I’m happy to share what this market is. The smallest market I ever did was female space ship engineers.

Steve: Wow that is a really, okay, that’s like nothing.

Derek: Yeah, that market I think only had about 2000 people I could target on Facebook. I spent $3000 and I made $4000 back. It was a super high return on ad spend, but I burnt out the audience within a week or 2. The largest audience I think I targeted was 650000 people. I’d say anywhere between low thousands to high hundreds of thousands. I don’t think I have ever gone larger than a million.

Steve: Okay, It sounds like these t-shirts don’t really have lime a long life span, is that accurate?

Derek: That is probably accurate. I have heard of people, and I’m probably leaving money on the table by not doing this, but a lot of people will, once they burn out a design, by burn out I mean that the ad had a frequency of 2 and usually that’s when it stops working. When everyone in your industry has seen that t-shirt twice and hasn’t bought, that’s usually when you start losing money.

By what I have heard a lot of people doing is they would run the shirt and then 3 or 4 months afterwards they would run it again, and it would be profitable for them. Yeah, typically one t-shirt campaign will last anywhere between 1 week to 2 and a half weeks. That’s probably pretty standard.
Steve: Sounds like there is a ton of maintenance. You have to pump up out new creatives all the time and it sounds like you’re constantly turning these out every single couple of weeks. It’s not like you have a winner and you can ride it for a year longer, is that accurate?

Derek: Yeah, that’s accurate. You definitely can’t ride a winner for a year. That would be amazing but yeah.

Steve: Are you allowed to re-target. Does TeeSpring let you put pixels on the landing pages and stuff or …

Derek: Yeah, you can retarget.

Steve: Okay, so do you do that?

Derek: Yes, we are targeting otherwise really high, definitely recommended.

Steve: Did they let you gather emails?

Derek: No, but you can send emails to their customers through their systems. I do know other people who they put a landing page in front of the TeeSpring page. It will just be the image of the design and then put your email here to receive a $5 discount or whatever. Yeah if you want emails you’ll have to collect them yourself. There are other platforms. Teechip for example if you sell through their platform they will let you export all the emails from customers.

Steve: Did you go that route as well?

Derek: I didn’t, I just never … My impression of Teechip is that, they have worse printing and worse customer service, and for me the interface as the marketer was worse as well. I just didn’t want to do it.

Steve: I was just thinking that, if you had that landing page like you said that people do and what you gathered a list of like crazy female space ship engineers, you can continually pump out designs, and just email them to them, right?

Derek: Yeah, an actually I think a lot of the TeeSpring people are moving that way, and actually moving off of TeeSpring and starting their own Shopify stores. Selling t-shirts still, but in specific markets, building their own audiences and building more of a brand.

Steve: Everything is Facebook then. Google doesn’t sound like it would work that well, because people aren’t really searching for female space ship engineer t-shirts right?

Derek: Yeah, I haven’t heard of anyone doing this, but I think that Google display network could actually work. I never tested it. I did test Pinterest ads which actually converted pretty well but the volume was really low compared to Facebook ads. I was just, you couldn’t spend any money, but the money you could spend would return pretty well.

Steve: In terms of lookalike audiences, were you doing that as well?

Derek: Yeah, I found out look alike audiences off of clicks didn’t really help that much. Once we have enough buyers, which is usually about … Technically you need 200 buyers that show up in the Facebook pixel which means probably about 300 actual buyers. Once you have enough buyers to make a customer audience, and to create a lookalike audience, I found that does converts pretty well.

What worked best for me was using that lookalike audience and then just putting a broad keyword on top of it. Let’s say I was targeting fencing for example, people who fence, I would probably not just target fencing if I didn’t have a look alike audience, but if I had a look alike audience, I would just lay a really broad key word on top of it and that would work pretty well. I have heard of people just using them naked lookalike audience. Just look alike audience with no interest. That never tested well for me personally, but I have heard that can work pretty well as well.

Steve: When you start incorporating this stuff into your ads, you stared out with your 5 or 6 ad sets, when did you incorporate lookalikes into the mix?

Derek: That’s pretty late actually. The next step, once I have tested the campaign and it’s converting well, I’m starting to scale up, I will start checking on a day to day basis the breakdowns which is are male or females buying, what devices, what countries are they from, what regions of the country are they from, what age range etcetera.

This I’ll start checking by the time I’ve spent, probably by the time I’ve spent $50 because often times you will see it really early. You will see that I spent 50 bucks, I have made 9 sales, and literally all 9 of them are from women. That stuff, sometimes you see it early, sometimes it takes a few hundred dollars. For me to start using look alike audiences, I’m probably looking at least $1000 in ad spend before that really comes in play.

Steve: Okay, that’s like half the life cycle of your entire campaign right?

Derek: No, there are some campaigns that can get pretty high in spending.

Steve: Okay, let’s back up a little bit, when did you start refining your interest, at what point do you start doing that? Or the demographics I
should say.

Derek: I’d say by $40-$50 in spending. I won’t always be able to make any decisions at that point, but I’ll at least start looking at that point.

Steve: Okay, of the campaigns that have been successful, do you create a new ad set or do you just change the existing one?

Derek: I turn off the ones that are not making any money, and the ones that are making money, I will do 2 things. Often times I will break them out. Let’s say I have 6 magazines all on 1 ad set, I might turn off the magazines ad set or I might leave it running, and just break all the 6 of them into their individual ad sets, so I can see which magazine specifically are converting.

I will go look for more stuff as well like magazines. I’ll usually find all the magazines but if their websites for example. I might only have found the top 3 or 4 websites in the industry, but if I’m finding that websites are converting well, I might just go look for all 20 of them, and maybe only 9 of them will show up in Facebook ads as targetable. I will just go look for more of the same stuff that’s converting, if that makes sense.

Steve: In the case where it’s only females that are buying will you lay that on top of these existing ad sets?

Derek: Yeah

Steve: Interesting, and then, let’s say there was like 3 males and 7 females, would you still run the males like a lower spend?

Derek: If it’s profitable, yeah, just like if otherwise positive I will let it run, why not.

Steve: It sounds like a lot maintenance here. Are you using any tools, or are you using any tools to help maintain your Facebook ads, or was it all just power editor?

Derek: It’s power editor and Google spreadsheets.

Steve: Google spreadsheets wow, okay. I had this question written down here, what are the challenges with this model, and it seems pretty clear to me that it’s just really cut throat and you constantly have to be churning out stuff, because there’s not anything that is going to last a long time.

Derek: Yeah, I think that’s true, and I think if I were to do it again, I would definitely be building a store, I’d be collecting an email list. I would break off of TeeSpring. TeeSpring actually does fulfillment now. You can have a Shopify store and they’ll print for you. I would still probably have started with TeeSpring because I wouldn’t have known what markets were converting well for me, but by the time I knew what markets were converting I would have definitely moved away from selling on someone else’s platform and built my own.

Steve: Earlier you weren’t willing to reveal like that coach, or that really popular shit, does that imply that it’s still selling?

Derek: I thought about, I haven’t turned it back on, but I imagine that if I just re-ran the same design it would actually make few thousand dollars.

Steve: Okay, and there is hope, right? Once your 2 week campaign or whatever is over, you can just run it again at some future time, like during Christmas time, actually how much does seasonality play in this business?

Derek: I think it actually plays quite a lot. I don’t think, I think year round there is decency as always, but around Christmas is just ridiculous. We did over 100K in sales in a 30 day period, and people are just buying during that month. I think TeeSpring’s still are really a good business not around Christmas, but yeah there is definitely a huge bump around Christmas.

Steve: Okay, and in terms of just copying, do people just copy you over verbatim sometimes?

Derek: Yes.

Steve: Is there anything you can do about it?

Derek: On TeeSpring, yes. TeeSpring, email them and say, “Hey this is copyright infringement.” but there is so many platforms. There is, like I mentioned Teechip, Gearbubble. There is literally a dozen out there. The biggest 3 or 4 care about copyright, but the little ones, they don’t care. If you get knocked off and it’s on some random website with, not a strong legal team, I don’t think there is much you can do about it.

Steve: Okay, Derek, you mentioned that you stopped doing this a little under a year ago, what caused you to get out of this business, and what are you working on now?

Derek: What caused me to get out of the business was I don’t think I built my team in a stable and scalable way where I could not be doing a lot of the Facebook ads work. Basically I hired people around where I was living in Thailand, and a lot of them were travelers, a lot of them were entrepreneurs working on their own stuff. After a few months they would naturally leave and it was just really unstable, the team I built, and I decided to try and rebuild the team using Filipino virtual assistance.

I flew to the Philippines, I hired a couple of BAs and I trained them on how to use the system I was building, and it turned out that as soon as anything changed in Facebook ads or on TeeSpring, they have to be retrained over again because weren’t actually … They didn’t have a deep understanding of Facebook ads. Basically I made some mistakes in hiring and building the team.

The reason I closed it down, as we were talking about, to do this well we have to launch a ton of designs, it’s a ton of work. I was probably working 50-60 hours a week. I think by the time it was clear to me that the second team wouldn’t work out; I just didn’t have the energy to do it over again.

At the same time I had Amazon via supplements business that was starting to do pretty well, and I was working on another physical product. Design it from scratch and just, I had a lot of other things, some of them were starting to take off, and taking my attention, and I just decided, “You know what, it’s been a good run, but I don’t think I want to continue with the TeeSpring thing, and so dispose it.”

Steve: Have you found that FBA has been a lot less work for a greater return?

Derek: It’s so much less work, yeah. It’s literally the most passive income I have ever seen in my life.

Steve: Well, there is an endorsement for anyone out there listening. Private label stuff white label stuff on Amazon using FBA. Although supplements is pretty competitive, right?

Derek: Yeah, it is pretty competitive.

Steve: We don’t have that much time left, but is your strategy similar? Do you run Facebook ads for your stuff or are you … Is it just giveaways, how do you market your supplements?

Derek: Yeah it’s giveaways and Amazon PPC. Typically I do a little bit of over 20K a month. I’m not the biggest seller in the world. I’m actually, hopefully a lot of my products are ranked somewhere on the bottom of page 1, top of page 2. I’m not in crazy bidding wars for the top spot. I just launched products and I’m happy to be in the middle, if that makes sense.

Steve: Yeah, you are like under the radar, so to speak. Making a pretty good income, especially since you like to travel to Asia all the time where the cost of living is really low.

Derek: For sure.

Steve: Cool man, hey Derek I learnt a lot about the t-shirt business today. I had no idea that so many people were making money selling t-shirts online. I thank you for that. If anyone has any questions for you, I don’t know if you have a blog or anything, but where can people find you?

Derek: I don’t have a blog, they could email me. I’m pretty open to email in general. My email is DerekPankaew@gmail.com.

Steve: Yeah, I’ll link that up, and hey Derek thanks a lot for your time, I really appreciate it.

Derek: Your welcome, it was my pleasure.

Steve: All right, take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. In general when anyone comes up to me wanting to sell t-shirts online, I’m almost always 100% skeptical, but Derek clearly made it work, and it’s really interesting how you can leverage and base an entire business off of Facebook advertising.
For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode122. If you enjoyed this episode please got to iTunes and leave me a review. It is by far the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends, because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to refer this podcast to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.
And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to mywifequitherjob.com for more information, sign up right there on the front page, and I’ll send you the course via email immediately. Thanks for listening.

Outro: Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.myifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!